MHICopy 3 0

ElfTMENTP THE ARMY FIELD MANUAL

t'T

I THE ARMORED.i[ANTRY COMPANY

are!'AN BATTALION

REFERENCE USE

ONLY

NOT TO BE TAKEN FROM/LIBRARY

DEP/RTMENT OF THE ARMY> * MARCH 1951

f a -- . _

FM 7-17C1

FIELD MANUAL

THE ARMORED INFANTRY COMPANYAND BATTALION

CIIANGES DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMYNo. 1 f WASHINmGTON 25, D. C., 12 September1952

FM 7-17, 23 March 1951, is changed as follows:285.1 FORWARD AIR CONTROLLER

(Added)a. A tactical air control party (TACP) consisting

of a forward air controller (FAC), who normally isa combat experienced fighter pilot, his enlisted assist-ants and equipment, may operate with an armoredinfantry battalion. The primary mission of theTACP is to direct close air support strikes in thevicinity. of forward ground elements by visualmethods. It is a highly mobile element having air-to-ground communication to vector aircraft to tar-gets, and point-to-point communications with thetactical air control center (TACC) or tactical airdirection centers (TADC) and with the division airliaison officer (ALO). At times the forward air con-.troller may be airborne to facilitate control and direc-tion of air strikes. Under these conditions the con-troller is referred to as a tactical air coordinator(TAC). At other times the forward air controllermay ride in a tank equipped with the necessaryground-to-air communication. A tank is providedin the T/O & E of Headquarters and HeadquartersCompany, Combat Command for this purpose.

b. Functions of TACP(s)-(1) To direct close offensive air support air-

craft to targets in the vicinity of friendly

AGO 848C-Sept. 2004 1

UICk SSItFtI

positions and to direct visual reconnaissanceof specified areas.

(2) To receive information from reconnaissanceor other aircraft for transmission to the bat-talion commander, the division ALO, andthe appropriate TADC.

(3) To report observed results of air strikes tothe battalion commander, the division ALO,and the appropriate TADC.

(4) To advise the battalion commander and hisstaff on matters pertaining to tactical airoperations.

(5) To assist in identifying the location offriendly front line units.

322. CLOSE AIR SUPPORT DURING THE ATTACK(Superseded)

a. Close air support may be available to thearmored infantry battalion commander for the exe-cution of either preplanned or immediate missions.Frequently air or ground alert aircraft are madeavailable to the division or combat command in orderthat immediate missions may be accomplished withthe minimum delay. Air strikes are controlled by

'the tactical air control party. The forward air con-troller remains with the command group until atarget is designated; he then moves to a vantagepoint where he can direct the air strike on the desig-nated target. Close liaison is maintained betweenthe forward air controller and artillery liaison officerto insure prompt exchange of information gainedfrom both ground and air observation and to assistin marking of targets. Fighter planes normallysupport the attack by bombs, rockets, incendiarymissiles, and by strafing.

2 AGO 848C

b. Typical Targets To Be Selected.(1) Gun positions.(2) Vehicles, including armor.(3) Command posts.(4) Concentration of troops.(5) Strongly defended positions.(6) Pill boxes.(7) Defended road blocks.(8) Other targets artillery may not be able to

engage effectively.

322.1 AIR REQUESTS(Added)

a. Requests for close air support will include thefollowing minimum information:

(1) Location of target indicated by grid refer-ence or other means.

(2) Description of target including sufficientdetail to permit selection of appropriatearmament.

(3) Results desired; for example, destruction orneutralization.

(4) Location of nearest friendly troops with re-spect to the target at the time of attack.

(5) Attack time limits, to include time of attack.and latest time attack can be made and stillaccomplish desired results.

(6) Tactical significance.(7) Special control information including

target and front-line marking and forwardair controller in position to control attack-ing aircraft.

(8) Other pertinent information to be suppliedby appropriate FSCC's, such as ordinatesof ground fires in the area and restrictivefire plans.

AGO 848C 3

6. Requests for reconnaissance air support will in-clude the following minimum information:

(1) Area, routes ortargets to be covered.(2) Time the coverage is to be effected.(3) Type reconnaissance desired (visual or

photo).(4) Significance of desired information. (Jus-

tification for the request.)(5) Specific information desired.(6) Forward air controller in position to con-

trol aircraft, if necessary.(7) In addition for photo reconnaissance-

(a) Type photograph desired (vertical,oblique, mosaic, etc.).

(b) Scale desired.(c) Distribution desired.(d) Number of prints desired.

c. Normally, requests for air support originating atthe battalion will be given a priority and transmittedto combat command. When the division has estab-lished, based on traffic load, a separate air request net,immediate requests may be transmitted from bat-talion direct to division.

322.2 TARGET IDENTIFICATION(Added)

a. Close air support targets located between thebomb line and friendly troops must be properly iden-tified to the striking aircraft prior to attack. Theforward air controller normally accomplishes the tar-get identification and control for these strikes. Hemust coordinate with, advise, and receive assistancefrom ground elements when required. He should

4 AGO 848C

work closely with the artillery liaison officer. A for-ward air controller may identify a target for aircraftthrough any one or a combination of the methodsindicated in (1) through (10) below-

(1) Reference to grids or coordinates on largescale maps or photographic mosaics.

(2) Reference to nearby landmarks or terrainfeatures readily discernible to the pilot.

(3) Use of colored panels to establish refer-ence points for navigational aid.

(4) Mark targets with smoke shells from artil-lery, mortars, grenades, recoilless rifles, etc.;colored smoke is preferable.

(5). Use of searchlights or illuminating shells;i. e., artillery, mortar, naval, etc., to illumi-nate specified target areas at night or asreference points.

(6) Verbal description of the target by the for-ward air controller to the aircraft.

(7) Adjustment of simulated air attacks forpilot orientation.

(8) Radio communication from friendly unit toArmy light aircraft, who can in turn leadattacking aircraft to the target.

(9) Use of electronic equipment (radio homingdevices, beacons, etc.).

(10) Use of any one or a combination of theabove methods to orient a tactical air co-ordinator who, in turn, leads attacking air-craft to the target.

b. It is normal for the battalion to establish astanding operating procedure on employment of closeair support based on the standing operating pro-cedure or policies of the next higher headquarters.

AGO 848C 0S

322.3 MARKING FORWARD TROOP LOCATIONS(Added)

a. Close air support strikes require a simple, yetexacting, system of marking of forward troop loca-tions at the time of the air attack. Forward trooplocations may be marked or identified for aircraftthrough any one or a combination of the methodsindicated in (1) through (6) below.

(1) Reference to grids or coordinates on largescale maps or photographic mosaics.

(2) Reference to nearby landmarks or terrainfeature readily descernible to the pilot.

(3) Displaying colored panels to portray loca-tions of forward troops with relation totarget.

(4) Establishment of reference points withcolored panels or smoke shells. Coloredsmoke is preferable.

(5) Verbal description of forward troop loca-tions or reference points by the forward aircontroller to the aircraft.

(6) Use of electronic equipment (radio homingdevices, beacons, etc.).

b. It is normal for the battalion to establish astanding operating procedure on marking of forward'troop locations based on the standing operating pro-cedure or policies of the next higher headquarters.

376.1 CLOSE AIR SUPPORT(Added)

Normally a tactical air control party (TACP)operates with each armored infantry battalion com-mander. The forward air controller (FAC) whocommands this party acts as an advisor to the bat-

a AGO 848C

talion commander on air support matters. On largescale defensive operations, the availability of closeair support aircraft is frequently greatly reducedsince the number of such aircraft required for airsuperiority and interdiction tasks is greatly in-creased.

[AG 322 (12 Aug 52)]

BY ORDER OF TlE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:

OFFlCIAL: J. LAWTON COLLINSWM . E. ERGIN Chief of Staff,Major General, USA United States ArlmyThe Adjutant General

DISTRInUTION:Active Armny:

Tech Svc (1); Tech Sve Bd (2); AFF (40) AAConmd (2); OS Maj Comd (5); Base Comad (5);MDW (5) ; Log Comd (5); A (20); CHQ (5);Div (5); Brig (2); Regt 7, 17 (5); Bn 7, 17(5); FT (2); USMA (10) ; Sch (5) ;PMS & T 7,17 (2); Mil Dist (3); Mil Mis (1); Arma (1);T/O & E's: 7-l7N (3); 7-15N (2); 7-26N (5);7-27N (5); 17-20N (3); 17-27N (3).

yG: Same as Active Army.ORC: Same as Active Army.For explanation of distribution formula, see SR 310-90-1.

AGO 848C 7U. 5. GOtERNMRNT PR[NT:NS OFrIce S,

WARNING NOTICES

Authority for release of this document to a foreigngovernment must be secured from the Assistant Chiefof Staff, G-2, Department of the Army.

When this document is released to a foreign govern-ment, it is released subject to the faollowing conditions:This information is furnished with the understandingthat it will not be released to another nation withoutspecific approval of the United States of America, De-partment of the Army; that it will not be used for otherthan military purposes; that individual or corporationrights originating in the information whether patentedor not will be respected; and that the information willbe afforded substantially the same degree of securityas afforded by the United States of America, Department

of the Army.

This document contains information affecting thenational defense of the United States within the meaningof the Espionage Laws, Title 18, U. S. C., sections 793and 794. The transmission or the revelation of itscontents in any manner to an unauthorized person isprohibited by law.

?rP4RTMENT OF THE ARMY FIELD MANU4ALFM 7-17

Th manual supersedes FM 17-40. I Niovtambt 1944, and FM 1712, 10 Niember 1944

THE ARMOREDINFANTRY COMPANY

AND BATTALION

DEPARTMENT OF THE RMAY MARCH 1951

United States Government Printing Office

Washington: 1951

400"Im

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMYWASIIINOTON 25, D. C., 23 March 1951

FM 7-17 is published for the information and guidance ofAll concerned.

[AG 322 (26 Jan 51)]

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:

OFFICIAL: J. LAWTON COLLINSEDWARD F. WITSELL Chief of Staff,Major General, USA United States ArmyThe Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:

Tech Sve (2) ; Armi & Sve Bd (2) ; AFF (40); AA Comdl(2): OS Maj Comd (5) ; Base Coind (5) ; MDW (5),A (20); CHQ (5); D (5); B (2); R 7, 17, 71 (5)4Bn 7, 17, 71 (5); FC (2); Sel (5) USMA (10); U;Mil Att (1); US Armly Missions (1) ; T/O&Es, 7-17.i(3); 7-18N (2); 7-26N (5); 7-27N (5); 17-26N (3);17-27N (3).

For explanation of distribution formula, see SR 310-90-1.

II -I~ r

CONTENTS

PART ONE. GENERALCHAPTER 1. CHARACTERISTICS, EM-

PLOYMENT AND OR-GANIZATION Paragraphs Page

Section I. Introduction . ......- 1-4 111. Characteristics - . ...... 5-8 3

III. Fundamentals of employ-ment .- ..... .... 09-14 7

IV. Factors affecting employ-ment of armored per-sonnel carriers - . ... 15-16 9

V. Organization for combat--- 17-19 11VI. Communication - . ..... 20-32 17

VII. Utilization of fire power_ _ 33-35 23V1I1. Liaison -.. . .36 29

IX. Estimate of the situationand troop lecading pro-cedure -...... ... 37-40 31

CHAPTER 2. MARCHES, BIVOUACS,AND ASSEMBLY AREAS

Section I. Marches -......... 41-64 38II. Bivouac - ........... 65-73 59

III. Assembly areas - . ... 74-78 68IV. Supply, maintenance, and

evacuation duringmarches, in bivouacs,and in assembly areas_- 79-87 71

CHAPTER'3. TANK-ARMORED INFAN-TRY COORDINATIONAND COOPERATION INTHE ATTACK

Section 1. General 88-93 7611. Mounted methods of attack~ 94-97 84

III

CHAPTER 3-Continued Parasiaphs PageSection 111. Dismounted methods of

attack ------------- 98-103 90IV. Combination methods of

attack ---------- - 104 96CHAPTER 4. SUPPLY, MAINTENANCE,

EVACUATION, ANDMEDICAL SERVICE

Section 1. Supply -------------- - 105-118 100II. Maintenance, battlefield re-

covery, and vehicularevacuation .---.------ 119-123 112

III. Medical service ..- ------ 124-128 116IV. Burials and graves registra-

tion .------- -------- 129 120CHAPTER 5. TRAINING

Section 1. Fundamentals .-- ----- - 130-133 121II. Individual training . ... 134-135 124

111. Unit training -..---.. 136-138 124PART TWO. THE ARMORED INFAN-

TRY RIFLE COMPANYCHAPTER 6. THE RIFLE PLATOON

Section 1. General .....--.----- 139-143 127II. Platoon combat formations~ 144 147 129

111. Preparation for the attack - 148-151 137IV, Conduct of the attack ------ 152-159 142

V. Sustained defense ----- - 160-169 155VI. Mobile defense -------. 170-178 165

CHAPTER 7. THE 60-MM MORTAR PLA-TOON

Section 1. General --------.-----. 179-183 16911, Preparations for the attack. 184-189 172

III. The attack ----------. 190-193 176IV. Defense -------------. 194-201 178

CHAPTER 8. ARMORED INFANTRYRIFLE COMPANY IN OF-FENSIVE COMBAT

Section I. General ------------. 202-206 186II. Preparations for the attack. 207-217 190

IV

CHAPTER 8-Continued Pararaphs PageSection 111. The attack - . ......._. 218-226 201

1V. Reserve rifle company inattack .-. . ...... 227-229 217

V. Exploitation and pursuit - 230-233 219CHAPTER 9. ARMORED INFANTRY

RIFLE COMPANY IN DE.FENSE

Section 1. General .- .......... 234-236 222II. Front-line rifle company in

sustained defense ----- 237 254 227III. Reserve company in sus-

tained defense -.-. 255-258 248IV. Mobile defense - ....... 259 251

V. Reinforced rifle company aspart of outpost system inmobile defense -. ...... 260-267 251

VI. Reinforced rifle company aspart of a reserve battalionin mobile defense .-. 268 259

PART THREE. THE ARMORED INFAN-TRY BATTALION

CHAPTER 10. BATTALION HEADQUAR-TERS, HEADQUARTERSAND SERVICE COM-PANY

Section I. Battalion commander -. .269-273 261II. Battalion staff -_ . .... 274-287 263

III. Headquarters and servicecompany - ._..... 288-296 284

IV. Medical detacilment -.-. 297 297CHAPTER 11. THE ARMORED INFAN-

TRY BATTALION IN OF-FENSIVE COMBAT

Section 1. General .- . ........... 298-312 298II. Preparation for the attack_ 313-330 310

1ll. Conduct of the attack -- _ 331-339 337IV. Reserve battalion in attack 340-342 347

V. Exploitation and pursuit 343-355 348

V

CHAPTER 12. THE ARMORED INFAN-TRY BATTALION IN DE.FENSE PoraSraphs Page

Section I. General --.............. 356-360 373II. Front-line battalion in sus-

tained defense .- . 361-408 375III. Reserve battalion in sus-

tained defense .- . .409-410 411IV. Mobile defense .- . ... 411-413 411

V. Battalion providing the out-post system for a largerforce -............ 414-420 415

VI. Reinforced armored infantrybattalion using mobile de-fense when operating in-dependently -...... 421-423 423

VII. Reinforced armored infantrybattalion as combat com-mand reserve in mobiledefense . .....--- 424 427 427

CHAPTER 13. RETROGRADE OPERA-TIONS

Section I. General -............. 428 429II. Daylight withdrawal - 429-433 430

III. Night withdrawal - . .. 434-44t 435IV. Delayilg action - . ..... 442-447 440

V. Retirement - ......... 448 449PART FOUR. OTHER OPERATIONS

CHAPTER 14. NIGHT OPERATIONS ---- 449-463 451CHAPTER 15. SPECIAL OPERATIONS

Section I. Attack in woods - . ..... 464-471 476II. Attack of a river line - 472-487 484

III. Raids -........ 488-506 501IV. Attack in towns - . .... 507-509 512

V. Attack of fortifications --- 510-512 517VI. Operations in extreme cold 513 518

VII. Desert operations - . .... 514-520 519VIII. Amphibious operations -.-- 521-532 522

IX. Defense of a river line - 533-539 527X. Defense in woods -------- 540 530

VI

CHAPTER 15-Continued Pararaphs POeSectionXI. Combat in jungles - ----- 541-546 531

XII. Defense in built-up areas 547 552 536XIII. Defense against airborne

attack - . ........__. 553-555 542XIV. Perimeter defense 556 545XV. Operations against guerillas

or irregular forces .- . .557-564 545XVI. Operations through mine

fields . .----.... 565-567 552APPENDIX I. REFERENCES ....---. 558

II. SQUAD, PLATOON, AND COM-PANY ORDERS .-. 562

III. COMBAT FORMATIONS -569IV. UNIT JOURNAL - .- 599V. UNIT REPORT 601VI. ORDERS ............ 604

VII. SUBJECT SCHEDULE - 619INDEX . ... . ............---. ........ 703

vii

RESTRICTED

This manual supersedes .1FM 17-40, 21 November 1944, andFM 17-42, 10 November 1944

PART ONE

GENERAL

CHAPTER 1

CHARACTERISTICS, EMPLOYMENT, ANDORGANIZATION

Section I. INTRODUCTION

1. PURPOSE

This manual is a guide for the tactical employmentof the armored infantry company and battalioneither when reinforced by tanks or when actingalone.

2. SCOPE

This manual is divided into four parts. Part onediscusses general information applicable to the pla-toon, company, and battalion: part two covers detailsof employment of the armored infantry rifle com-pany and its platoons; part three covers details ofemployment of the headquarters, headquarters and

RESTRICTED 1

service company, and the tactical employment of thearmored infantry battalion; part four takes up spe-cial operations applicable to the company andbattalion.

3. MISSION AND CAPABILITIES

a. MJission. Armored infantry has the mission ofclosing with and destroying the enemy by fire andmaneuver, repelling hostile assaults in close combat,and providing infantry support for tanks.

b. Capabilities. Armored infantry is capableof-

(1) Accompanying tanks in offensive action-either in armored personnel carriers, dis-mounted, or mounted on the tanks-to closewith and destroy the enemy in close combat.

(2) Absorbing reinforcing units to form a teamof combined arms, and furnishing armoredinfantry companies to other units for thesame purpose.

(3) Reducing and establishing obstacles, sup-ported by tanks and other arms.

(4) Organizing and defending grounud, sup-ported by other arms.

c. Assignment. The armored infantry battalionis organic to the armored division.

4. ORGANIZATION

a. The armored infantry battalion is a tacticallyand logistically self-sufficient unit. It has a head-quarters, headquarters and service company; four

2

rifle companies; and a medical detachment (fig. 1).b. The headquarters, headquarters and service

company has the battalion headquarters, companyheadquarters of headquarters and service company.battalion headquarters platoon, battalion recolnais-

sance platoon, battalion mortar platoon, counterfiresquad, supply platoon, maintenance platoon, andbattalion administrative and personnel section(fig. 2).

c. Each rifle company has a company headquar-ters, three rifle platoons, and a 60-mm mortar ula.-toon (fig. 3).

Section II. CHARACTERISTICS

5. MOBILITY

Armored infantry is completely mobile both onand off the battlefield. Organic armored personnelcarriers enable armored infantry units to accompanytank units on the battlefield, regardless of the speed

E de i .·6 s

sOo I· s fBs B nr �.r

9: j9,

B· �e 2

I .

'x �nE

�111·19f 1U�j �"

P ::B P 4

,z~~~~~~0

L1~~~~~~~~f

" ,o~~~~

"8~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.

~~~~~~:~~~~~

00~~~~~~

8, d~~~~

at which the tanks advance. Enough organic vehiclesare provided to move simultaneously all personneland equipment of the battalion.

6. ARMORED PROTECTION

Armored personnel carriers of the rifle squads aresquad size, full track, completely inclosed armoredvehicles. The carrier's armor gives protection fromsmall-arms fire, and shell fragments, but does notprotect against antitank weapons.

7. FIRE POWER

The automatic weapons mounted on armored per-sonnel carriers provide armored infantry units withgreat automatic weapon fire power. These weaponscan be fired effectively even though the carrier isunder enemy small arms or artillery fire. The car-riers provide rapid and protective transportation forthe crews, weapons, and ammunition.

8. FLEXIBILITY

a. Armored infantry units are flexible in theirtask organization and employment. Armored in-fantry rifle-companies are organized and equipped tooperate either as a part of their own battalion or at-tached to a tank battalion. This also applies to rifleplatoons; they can operate with their own companyor attached to a tank company. The armored in-fantry company and battalion can absorb attachmentsof tank and armored engineer units. When suchattachments are made, the battalion commanderforms his units into combined arms teams. The bat-

6

talion has enough wheeled cargo vehicles and main-tenance elements to supply and maintain its organicunits. Tank battalions may be reinforced witharmored infantry rifle companies.

b. Armored infantry usually fights dismounted.It may advance in carriers or dismounted, or by acombination of these methods. The speed at whicharmored infantry can advance allows flexibility ofemployment.

c. Flexibility of task organization, employment,and methods of advance allows varied uses of ar-mored infantry. Besides its ability to perform theground and amphibious missions of any other in-fantry units, it normally su pports tank units of thearmored division in all phases of combat.

Section III. FUNDAMENTALS OF EMPLOYMENT

9. GENERAL

Tank-armored infantry combat is characterizedby aggressiveness, speed, and violence. The tank-armored infatntry team suddenly confronts the enemywith a demoralizing volume of mobile fire power, con-centrated on his forces in a minimum of time.

10. SURPRISE

Surprise may be obtained by striking the enemyfrom an unexpected direction, or with unexpectedstrength, or at an unexpected time. Speed of con-centration and of movement, and the use of coveredapproaches assist in gaining surprise. Personnelassist in obtaining surprise by careful driving ofvehicles and by radio and fire discipline.

7

11. CONCENTRATION OF EFFORT

Concentrated fire power on the enemy obtains themaximum shock effect. Armoled infantry unitsavoid piecemeal attacks or dividing forces to attacksimultaneously at several separated points. Objec-tives are attacked and reduced one at a time. Dis-persion results in a weak effort at all points and isused only against a weak or demoralized enemy.Even when dispersed, the battalion must be able toconcentrate rapidly.

12. FIRE AND MANEUVER

Armored infantry units advance by fire and ma-neuver. Supporting fires are provided primarily byartillery, mortars, and carrier machine guns. Tanksand other armored infantry units may also supportby fire. The maneuvering force is composed pri-marily of tank and armored infantry units but mayinclude small armored engineer detachments. Theenemy's fire is neutralized by supporting fires whilethe maneuvering force closes with the enemy anddestroys him.

13. TEAMWORK

Teamwork is essential to successful combat. Eachman needs to understand that he is part of his unit,which is an essential part of a larger team; eachpart helps to accomplish the common mission. Thesuccess of a tank-armored infantry team dependson teamwork at all levels of command. The tankcrew, the armored infantry squad, and the driver of

8

the armored personnel carrier are all members ofthe team. Teamwork is obtained by combinedtraining, by maneuvers, and by working together.

14. SECURITY

Security includes all measures taken by a com-mand to protect itself against annoyance, surprise,and observation by the enemy. Security is not tobe confused with caution or timidity; armored in-fantry units act aggressively, but provide forsecurity at the same time. Continuous enforcementof security measures prevents surprise. Some ineas-ures that provide security are the use of natural andartificial obstacles, the use of security detaclllnents,and constant observation and alertness.

Section IV. FACTORS AFFECTING EMPLOYMENT OFARMORED PERSONNEL CARRIERS

15. INHERENT FACTORS

a. The armored personnel carrier's weight andsize make its movement over unfavorable terraindifficult. Often it is necessary to reinforce bridgesor to corduroy stretches of soft terrain to supportcarriers. For river crossings and amphibious land-ings, boats or rafts capable of carrying the carrierare needed.

b. The silhouette of the carrier makes it easy todetect, especially when moving in the open or onthe skyline.

c. The noise of the carrier engine, tracks, andpower train can often be heard for several miles-

931358-51--2 9

particularly at night. Drivers are trained to driveas quietly as possible when close to the enemy, andrapid acceleration is avoided. Carrier noise canbe partially covered by firing artillery, making itdifficult for the enemy to determine the number ofcarriers or their exact direction of movement.

d. The armor restricts the carrier crew's field ofview when all hatches and doors are closed.

16. OTHER FACTORS

Other factors to be considered in planning arelisted below. They should not be allowed to inter-fere with the accomplishment of the mission. Ag-gressive leadership will overcome limitations imposedby them.

a. Terrain. The terrain has a decisive influence onoperations. Some types of terrain favor the employ-ment of tanks and carriers while others restrict theiruse. Tanks and armored personnel carriers operatebest over rolling terrain where their maximum cross-country mobility can be used. Swamps, tundra,unfordable streams, dense woods, heavily eroded ter-rain, steep slopes, and vegetation that limits visi-bility, all restrict the movement of tanks and carriers.

b. Weather. Weather is another factor that af-fects the use of tanks and carriers. Weather affectsterrain by changing the trafficability of the soil andthe condition of streams. Rain often makes theearth so boggy that armored vehicles are limited toroads. Tanks and carriers can often cross deep snowwhere wheeled and half-track vehicles cannot. Icemakes roads and slopes slippery. Extreme heat and

10

humidity reduce the efficiency of personnel in ar-mored persomnel carriers and cause excessive engineheating. Even though adverse weather conditionsincrease the difficulties of employing tanks and ar-mored personnel carriers, they may be used undersuch conditions to gain surprise.

c. Mines. The enemy's use of mines is alwaysconsidered when planning an attack. Routes mustbe carefully reconnoitered. Because the best ave-nues of approach are the most likely to be mined,attacking over less desirable terrain should be con-sidered. Often a thorough reconnaissance and somepioneer work make a surprise attack over poor ter-rain both practicable and effective.

d. Armored Personnel Carriers Use Large Vol-uimes of Fuel and Lubricants. Continued operationof the carrier depends on efficient maintenance andadequate and well-timed resupply of fuel and lubri-cants. Lacking any one of these, the vehicle is soonimmobilized.

e. Carriers Require Adequate and ContinuousMaintenance. Commanders allow enough time fortheir personnel to perform necessary maintenance.

Section V. ORGANIZATION FOR COMBAT

17. GENERAL

a. The armored division is designed to performmissions that require great mobility and fire power.It should be given decisive missions. Even thoughcapable of successfully engaging in all forms ofcombat, the armored division is particularly effective

in exploitation against hostile rear areas. It canperform infantry-type missions on a scale consistentwith the infantry strength and equipment availablein the division.

b. The armored division is organized (fig. 4) toprovide maximum flexibility in the formation ofcombined arms teams. Flexibility is provided bythe combat command separate battalion organization.The combat commands and reserve command aretactical headquarters directly under the divisioncommander. They have no organic troops except aheadquarters company. During operations, tankand armored infantry battalions are attached eitherto a combat comnluand or to the reserve command.The ratio of tank battalions to armored infantrybattalions varies with the mission, enemy situation,terrain, and division plan of action. Armored in-fantry battalions not attached to combat commandsnormally are attached to the reserve command.Light artillery battalions are placed in direct supportof, or are attached to, the combat or reserve com-mand. For details of organization of the armoreddivision for combat see FM 17-100. See alsofigure 5.

18. REINFORCES BATTALIONS

a. Within the combat command, reinforced bat-talions are formed by attaching tank companies toarmored infantry battalions, or by attaching arm-ored infantry rifle companies to tank battalions.Attachments are made so that the resulting battalionteam-reinforced battalion-contains the desired

12

0

II

Z. o

I I

v~

COMBAT COMMAND A COMBAT COMMAND B

BRIG. GEN. BRIG. GEIV. BEROLARMISI'RONG COMIUMANDING

COOiMMINDIADG HQ & HQ CO CCB

HQ & HQ 00 CCA 4TH HV TKi N1ST 1MEDIUM TE BN 3D MEDIUM TK BN2D MEDI1UM TK EN 3D AIMD INF RN1ST ARID IN' BN CO B 1ST ARMI) ENGR BN2D ARMD INF BN PLAT BR CO 1ST ARMDCO A 1ST REICON BA ENGR BNCO A 1ST ARMD ENGR EN ETRY B 11ST AAA AW ENABR CO 1ST AIMPD ENGAR DET 1ST ARCMD ORD BI2DD ARMD MED INF NN

BN (- 1 PLAT) DET 1ST ARIMD C10 COBETIY A 1ST AAA AV BN DET 1ST ARMAA SIG CODET 1ST ARMD ORD BN DET 1ST Ml CODET 1ST AR11I:) MED EN TAaCP TIIH TAP])ET 1ST IMP CODET 1ST AR1MD SIG CO RESERVE COMMANDTHREE (3) TACP9THTAF COl. RAFFERTY

DIVISION ARTY COIIhANDINGCOl. H/ILT7ON HQ & HQ RES COMD

COMiMiU AANDING 4TH ARMPD INF BNIQ & HQ BTRY DIV ARTY DET 1ST ARMD SI0 CO1ST ARMD PA Gr (D S DIVISION TRAINS

CCA)1ST ARMD FA BN (105- COL. WALKER

MM)2D ARID A BsiN (105-MM) COIMMANDING

ATCHD Q & EQ DIVD ARMID FA BN (105-MM) DIV HQ (REAR)

(D S CCB) 1ST ARAID Q)1 IAN4TH ARMD IPA BN (155- 1ST ARMlD OID EN (-)

mM) (0 5) 1ST AR2ID MED BN (-)1ST AAA AW BN () 1ST ARMD 'RED'L CO

DIVISION TRPS BAND 1ST ARMD DIVBTRY C 1ST AAA AW BN

HQ & HQ CO 1ST ARMD DET 1ST ARMD SIG CODIV

1ST RECON BN (- CO A)iST ARMD ENGR BN (-)1STr MIP CO (-)1ST ARMD SIG CO (-)TACP 9TH TAP

Figuar 5. Typical armored division task organization.

14

proportion of tanks and armored infantry requiredto accomplish the assigned mission.

b. A situation requiring a reinforced battalionheavy in armored infantry might indicate that thearmored infantry battalion keep all four of its riflecompanies and have one or more tank companiesattached. Conversely, when the situation favorstank employment, a tank battalion may keep all ofits tank companies and have one or more armoredinfantry rifle companies attached.

c. Battalions usually are retained as individualcommands and are seldom attached to one another.They are commanded by the battalion commanderto whom the attachments are made. Regardless ofthe ratio of tanks to armored infantry in a rein-forced battalion, tanks and armored infantry areused in mutual support. Armored engineers are at-tached to or support both types of reinforced bat-talions as required. For details of organization forcombat of the combat command and reserve com-mand see FM 17-100. See also figure 6.

19. REINFORCED COMPANIES

a. It is normal for the armored infantry companyto be employed as a reinforced company. However,it may be employed as part of a reinforced armoredinfantry battalion or a reinforced tank battalion.Within the reinforced armored infantry or tankbattalion, reinforced companies are formed. Therein.forced armored infantry rifle company is formedby attaching tank platoons or a tank company to anarmored infantry rifle company. Conversely, the

15

00

Z ·I

16

c ~.F- ~

3~~Co£

0> 0>

16 O -1

reinforced tank company is formed by attachingarmored infantry rifle platoons or an armored in-fantry rifle company to a tank company.

b. The command of the team is vested in the seniorofficer present and is usually designated by attach-ment unless another is specifically designated to com-mand. The team commander is the commander,either infantry or tank, to which the other unit isattached. However, when another is specificallydesignated to command, consideration is given to-

(1) Commander of the element of the teamwith the main mission.

(2) Commander of the element of the teamhaving the preponderance of force.

(3) Relative experience and proven ability.(4) Relative seniority in rank within grade.

The ratio of tanks to armored infantry in thesereinforced companies is based on the mission, enemysituation, terrain, and battalion plan of action. Rein-forced companies usually have only armored infantryand tank elements. Battalion mortar and recon-naissance platoons and attached armored engineerunits are normally kept under battalion control andassist in accomplishing the battalion mission.

Section VI. COMMUNICATION

20. COMMUNICATION FACILTIES

Radio is the primary means of communication inthe armored infantry battalion but is supplementedby all other possible means. Wire, messenger, visual,and sound communication supplement radio. Wire

17

is used to the maximul in sustained defense. Enoughequipment is authorized to provide an efficient andadequate communication system within the battalion,and between the battalion and higher and adjacentunits. The communication plan makes sure thatfailure of alny one means will not result in the lossof communication. For details regarding the use ofthis equipment see FM 17-70.

21. COMMUNICATION PERSONNEL

Communication personnel in the armored infantrybattalion include the battalion communlication officer,the battalion communication chief, company commu-nication sergeants, the battalion radio repairman, thecompany radio repairman, radio operators, codeclerks, messengers, and the message center chief. Seecurrent tables of organization and equipment fordetailed accounting of personnel.

22. RADIO NETS

The exact radio nets used within the armored in-fantry battalion depend on the tactical situation andthe composition of the reinforced battalion. Thecomposition of any battalion radio net is flexible.For more detail on radio nets see FM 17-70.

23. BATTALION COMMAND NETS

The battalion command nets, one mounted andone dismounted, are used for the tactical commandand control of the battalion. They provide directvoice radio communication between the battalion

18

commander and his staff, the commanders of the re-inforced tank and rifle companies, and the leadersof the mortar and reconnaissance platoons. At-tached units operating directly under battalion con-trol enter the battalion command nets. Vehicularvoice radios are used in the mounted net. Portableradio sets and their vehicular adaptations are usedin the dismounted net.

24. BATTALION HEADQUARTERS NET

The headquarters net includes the administrative,supply, and maintenance elements of the headquar-ters and service company. Rifle company and at-tached unit commanders use this net instead of thecommand net for transmitting administrative mes-sages to battalion headquarters.

25. RECONNAISSANCE PLATOON NET

The reconnaissance platoon net provides a sep-arate channel for this platoon to use. The platoonleader's vehicle is equipped with a dual receiver voiceradio set. This set permits him to operate in thebattalion command net and the reconnaissance pla-toon net. Enough radios are included to providecommunication within the platoon and with adjacentunits.

26. MORTAR PLATOON NETS

The mortar platoon nets provide separate chan-nels for the command and fire control of the mortarplatoon. Both vehicular and portable voice radiosets are used. The portable radio sets are used dur-

19

ing dismounted platoon action. The platoon lead-er's sets operate in these nets and in the battalioncommand net.

27. RADIO COMMUNICATION TO HIGHER HEAD-QUARTERS

The armored infantry battalion operates second-ary stations in three combat command or reserve com-mand nets. Two of these are command nets, onebeing. a voice net and the other primarily a radio-telegraph net. The third net is the radiotelegraphadministrative net of the combat command or reservecommand.

28. WIRE COMMUNICATION

a. Enough wire and wire equipment are providedin the armored infantry battalion to permit theuse of wire communication whenever the situationmakes its installation practicable. The wire systemis designed to support the commander's tacticalplans. The scarcity of wire persomlel in the ar-mored infantry battalion requires additional person-nel, trained in wire technique and designated to assistin the installation, operation, and maintenance ofwire systems. See FMI 17-70 for wire diagrams.

b. Switchboards and telephones are issued to thecompany. Enough field wire is available to establishan efficient command and fire control system. Wireis laid by hand or by mechanical dispensers. It isrecovered whenever possible. The use of wire com-munication depends on the time available to install

20

it. In fast moving situations, the use of wire islimited. In sustained defensive situations, a com-plete wire system is installed for control of unitsand fire.

29. RIFLE COMPANY RADIO NETS

The rifle company command nets are used for thetactical and administrative command and control ofthe company. They provide communication be-tween the company conmmnder, platoon leaders, theartillery forward observer, and maintenance ele-ments, and between each platoon leader and his squadleaders. Both vehicular and portable voice radiosets are provided. The portable radio voice setsare used for dismounted action. The companycommander's radios operate in the company and thebattalion command nets.

30. OTHER COMMUNICATION MEANS IN RIFLE COM-PANY

a. Mounted and dismounted mnessengers operatebetween the company command post and the com-mand post of battalion and platoons. Messengercommunication is used among platoons. The com-pany sends two messengers to the battalion commandpost; one of them returns to the company. Thisfamiliarizes messengers with the location of androutes to the command posts. An exchange of mes-sengers is made when the battalion or company com-mand post is moved. Motor messengers' may bemounted in company vehicles.

21

b. The use of visual and sotud sigials is limitedby the nature of the signals themselves and by re-strictions placed on their use for security reasons.They are a rapid means of communication but areeasily misunderstood. Messages are necessarilysimple. For the effective use of this means of com-munication, selected men are alerted to receive them.The meanings of visual and sound signals are pre-scribed in the signal operation instructions (SOT).Visual and sound signals are auxiliary means ofcommunication.

(1) Panels, smoke, and pyrotechnics are usedfor identifying Units and vehicles, and forsending short prearranged messages. Speci-fied signals from the SOI are used or theymay be improvised by the company com-mander after coordination. Messages pre-arranged in the SOT usually include callsfor fire, calls for lifting fire, and notificationof reaching objectives. Improvised lightsand flags may be used for special purposes.

(2) Sound signals are used chiefly to spread analarm, to attract attention, and to transmitshort prearranged messages. The soundsignals used to warn of air and chemicalattacks are usually given in the SOI.

31. DUTIES OF COMPANY COMMUNICATION SER-GEANT

The communication sergeant keeps the companycommander informed and makes recommendations

22

on matters pertaining to signal communication. Hesupervises the installation, operation, and mainte-nance of the company communication system. Heassists in the procurement of signal supplies for thecompany. He trains company communication per-sonnel and other men designated by the companycommander, and recommends some for training bybattalion headquarters. The communication ser-geant also supervises the maintenance of communica-tion security in the company and dissemination ofinformation contained in current signal orders, suchas signal operation instructions (SOI) and standingsignal instructions (SSI). He is trained as a com-nunication chief.

32. THE BUGLER

The bugler is the principal assistant to the com-munication sergeant. His duties are assigned bythe company commander and the communicationsergeant. He drives the company commander's1/4-ton truck and is used as a messenger. In garrison,his primary duty is bugling.

Section VII. UTILIZATION OF FIRE POWER

33. VEHICULAR WEAPONS

a. The weapons mounted on armored personnelcarriers provide great automatic fire power. Theseweapons may be fired from the carriers, from groundmounts, or a combination of both. Emphasis isplaced on firing these guns from the carriers. Lightmachine gun squad members may be used to operate

23

as many of the vehicular weapons of the rifle pla-toons as the situation permits. When vehicles arehalted, the drivers may be used to man one vehicularweapon on each carrier. Riflemen operate whatevervehicular armamente is placed on ground mounts.

b. The use of the vehicular machine gulls dependson the need for additional fire power to facilitate theaccomplishment of the 'assigned mission. In em-ploying the vehicular weapons consideration must begiven to the number of personnel required for thegun crews, the need of rifle protection for each dis-mounted gun crew, the need of weapons for local de-fense of the vehicles, and the need for large almountsof ammunition consumed by these weapons. Thecarrier weapons can help develop a saturating vol-ume of fire on the enemy's position and on dis-mounted attacking enemy.

34. FIRING POSITIONS FOR ARMORED PERSONNELCARRIERS

a. Carriers used for fire support are placed in hulldefiladed firing positions. A carrier is in hull def-ilade when the lowest portion of the carrier visiblefrom the front is the machine gun mounted on thetop of the carrier. The use of hull defilade providesmaximum protection while engaging enemy targetswith direct fire.

b. Firing positions in the defense are selected andclassified as primary, alternate, and supplementary.

(1) A prinary firing position offers the bestconditions for carrying out the assignedmission.

24

(2) An alternate firing position is used for fir-ing on primary targets when the primaryposition cannot be defended or becomes un-suitable for carrying out the assignedmission.

(3) A supplementary firing position is used forfiring on secondary targets that cannot bereached from the primary or alternate po-sitions.

c. Whenever possible, leaders select positions pro-viding defilade and concealment for vehicles, weap-ons, and personnel not actively engaged with theenemy.

35. SUPPORTING WEAPONS AND ARTILLERY

a. Mission. The mission of all supporting weap-ons is to deliver fire to assist or protect a unit incombat.

b. Combat Control. The combat control of sup-porting weapons is classified as general support, di-rect support, and attachment.

(1) Supporting weapons are assigned tacticalmissions known as direct support, generalsupport, reinforcing or general support/re-inforcing. Attachment is not a tactical mis-sion but is used to refer to a state ofrelationship between supporting unit to thesupported unit. They usually continue ingeneral support as long as this control canprovide maximum support. The 81-llmmortar platoon is in general support whenits fires are controlled by the battalion com-

9al35s-51-a3 25

mander. Division artillery battalions arein general support when their fire is con-trolled by the division artillery commander.

(2) Supporting units are considered to be in di-rect support when their unit commandersare given the responsibility for control oftheir fires in support of a specific combatunit. A supporting unit may be placed indirect support when its fires cannot be con-trolled effectively by the next higher com-mander, or when it becomes desirable toallot its fires exclusively to a specific combatunit. However, a unit in direct supportwould remain under the command of itsown higher headquarters. While an artil-lery battalion in direct support executesfires for the combat command it supports,its fires may be massed elsewhere in anemergency.

(3) When a supporting unit is attached to acombat unit, command and control both passto the commander of the supported unit.He becomes responsible for its tactieal em-ployment, control of fires, and combat sup-ply. Attachment may be made when itbecomes ilnlpracticable or undesirable to usethe supporting unit in general support or indirect support.

c. 81-MM Mortar Platoonl (par. 292). The proce-dure for requesting mortar fire is the same as thatfor requesting artillery fire (see i below).

26

d.. Artillery Missions.(1) To give close support to combat units.(2) To fire long-range interdiction, harassing,

and counterbattery fires.e. Range of Artillery Pieces.

(1) 105-amm howitzer: 12,200 yards (effectivebursting area, 15 yards by 50 yards).

(2) 155-mm howitzer: 16,400 yards (effectivebursting area, 18 yards by 60 yards).

i. Artillery Capabilities. Artillery can delivermasses of long-range fire on enemy installations in-cluding defiladed areas and reverse slopes. Normaltargets include personnel, light fortifications, tanks,vehicles, and crew-served weapons.

g. Forward observers for artillery. An artilleryforward observer party normally goes forward witheach rifle company to adjust artillery fire. The for-ward observer party is not attached to the rifle com-pany.

h. Communications for Artillery Units. Thecommunication facilities of the forward observersand liaison officer are radio and wire. Radio is theprimary means of communication. The artillery in-stalls, maintains, and operates its radio and wirecommunication.

i. Fire Requests.(1) Requests for fire by the reinforced company

normally are transmitted through the for-ward observer; requests may be transmittedthrough command channels if the forwardobserver cannot be contacted readily. Ini-tial fire requests by other than a trained for-

27

ward observer include, as a minimullm, thefollowing elements in this sequence-

(a) The observer identifies himself usually bythe use of a code word or words-UNIONBAKER ONE.

(b) The observer alerts the fire control pointby saying-FIRE MISSION.

(c) The azimuth is given to the target by theobserver from his position; for example:AZIMUTH 2760.

(d) The target location is designated by givingfirst the azimuth from the observer tothe target and then by giving a shift inyards from a known point to the target.Shift is given in the sequence: knownpoint, deflection, and range such as FROMCR 695, LEFT 200, ADD 400; or bygiving map coordinates of the target; orby requesting a marking round fromwhich the observer can shift to the target(observer may say-MARK CENTEROF SECTOR or M ARK BASEPOINT).

(2) The nature of the target consists of adescription of the enemy installation, per-sonel, equipment, or activity that is ob-served; for example: MACHINE GUN.

(3) The observer's designation of control isexpressed as WILL ADJUST or as FIREFOR EFFECT if the observer believes thetarget is located accurately enough to behit without adjustment.

28

(4) Example of an initial fire request is:UNION BAKER ONE.FIRE MISSION.AZIMUTH 2760.FROM CR 695, LEFT 200, ADD 400.MACHINE GUN.WILL ADJUST.

Section VIII. LIAISON36. GENERAL

a. The purpose of liaison is to provide, by personalcontact, the desired cooperation, exchange of infor-mntion, and coordination of effort between andwithin units. The armored infantry battalion nor-mally maintains liaison with the combat commandto which it is attached and with adjacent units.Liaison officers are included in the armored infantrybattalion headquarters.

6. Liaison may be accomplished either by personalconference between commanders (command liaison)or by a liaison officer or agent who represents hisunit commander. Usually both methods are usedconcurrently. The liaison officer or agent operatesfrom the headquarters to which he is sent and main-tains contact with it and his own unit; unit com-manders meet whenever the tactical situationrequires

e. The effectiveness of liaison depends greatly onthe efficiency of the liaison officer and the cooperationof the headquarters to which he is sent. A liaisonofficer must be tireless, alert, tactful, energetic, andpossessed of a thorough and practical knowledge ofthe employment of the armored infantry battalion.

29

He must understand the staff procedure of higherunits, and the tactics and technique of other arms.He is provided with a radio-equipped vehicle andone or more enlisted assistants who can serve as mes-sengers. Within the armored infantry battalion themessenger in company headquarters is used as aliaison agent at the battalion command post.

d. Only by frequent trips between his unit andthe headquarters to which he is sent can the liaisonofficer (agent) do his job. The liaison officer hasthree missions:

(1) To keep his own unit commander closelyinformed of the existing tactical situation,the plans of the unit to which he is sent, andany changes in either. He must be par-ticularly careful to keep his commander in-formed of plans of higher headquarters thatwill affect the employment of his own unit.

(2) To advise the commander of the unit towhich he is sent about the plans and tacti-cal situation of his own unit.

(3) To serve, in the absence of the battalioncommander, as an adviser to the commanderof the unit to which he is sent, concerningthe employment of the armored infantrybattalion.

e. Liaison officers make sure that the following in-formation is exchanged:

(1) Strength of unit.(2) Information on the operations of patrols

and reconnaissance detachments.(3) When the unit is in contact with the enemy,

a summary of the situation.

30

(4) Disposition of the unit.(5) Supply status of the unit, including short-

ages in supplies and equipment.(6) Maintenance status of the unit.

f. The armored infantry battalion commandermakes maximum use of the liaison officers of otherunits, and arranges for them to receive the maximumcooperation from his staff.

Section IX. ESTIMATE OF THE SITUATION AND TROOPLEADING PROCEDURE

37. ESTIMATE OF THE SITUATION

a. When a mission is assigned to an armored in-fantry unit commander, it requires a positive courseof action. Adoption of the proper course of actionis the result of a sound decision; and a sound decisionis the result of an accurate estimate of the situation.

b. The estimate of the situation is an examinationof all factors that will affect the accomplishment ofthe mission. The form prescribed for the estimateis arranged to facilitate logical reasoning and to in-sure that all pertinent factors are considered.

c. Commanders at all levels make estimates so thatthe correct decisions will be made. The estimatemay be hasty or deliberate depending on the timeavailable. Using a uniform thought sequence pro-vides a mental check list to make sure, in the caseof a hasty estimate, that the commander considersall elements of a situation in arriving at his decision.

d. For all commanders the estimate is a continuingprocess. With every change in the situation, each

31

must revise his estimate and decide either to continuehis present course of action or adopt a new one.Their estimates are mental, but are as thorough astime permits.

38. STEPS IN THE ESTIMATE OF THE SITUATION

a. First, thoroughly understand the mission andintent of the hiagher commanders. These must bekept in mind at all times. If the commander needsadditional information to thoroughly understand themission, he should immediately get this informationfrom the commander assigning the task. A personalconference is the best means of obtaining this infor-mation.

b. Next, consider all the factors affecting the em-ployment of the unit, acting alone or reinforced.Concurrently, the commander decides what coursesof action are open to him, and considers enemy capa-bilities that could interfere with the accomplislunentof the mission.

c. After considering the enemy capabilities andthe courses of action open to him, the commandernext weighs each of his own plans against all of theenemy's possible reactions, and determines the prob-able effect of each enemy capability on the successof each of his plans of action.

d. The fourth step is a comparison and evaluationof the battalion commander's own plans. Eachcourse of action open to the commander is analyzedfor advantages and disadvantages. He then selectsthe plan that appears most likely to succeed. If twoor more plans offer equal prospect of success, heselects the one that most favors future action.

32

e. The final step is the decision. It translates thecourse of action selected into a concise statement ofwhat the battalion will do, including answers to thequestions-who, what, when, where, how, and why.

39. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE IN ATTACK

When the platoon leader, company commander, orbattalion commander receives the plan of attack orattack order, he follows a definite troop leadingprocedure.

a. He makes a map reconnaissance and, if possible,a personll reconnaissance of the routes to the attackposition and line of departure.

(1) He studies the ground over which le is toattack, from both an observation point anda liaison plane if possible.

(2) He causes as many lower unit commandersas practicable to make a personal recon-naissance.

(3) He contacts tank, infantry and reconnais-sance units in the zone and obtains allinformation they have about the terrain andthe enemy.

b. He initiates liaison and arranges for passagethrough friendly forces.

c. From information gained through reconnais-sance and liaison, the commander makes his estimate.of the situation and arrives at his decision.

d. After making his decision lie plans his attack.Since the unit may be committed in any one of sev-eral places, the plan must be developed to include-

(1) Measures to be taken against all probableenemy maneuvers.

33

(2) Alternate routes in case weather conditionsor enemy maneuvers prohibit the use ofselected routes.

(3) Methods and means for breaching obstacles,either natural or man-made. This includesthe study of aerial photos and maps to de-termine obstacles, then insuring that ade-quate engineers and equipment are presentand located where they can most efficientlyeliminate the obstacles.

e. Finally, lie issues the attack order and super-vises its execution.

40. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE IN DEFENSE

Following the receipt of the defense order, thecommander's actions follow a general sequence.This sequence helps platoon leaders, and companyand battalion commanders remember essentialactions, makes maximum use of the time available,and helps him coordinate the actions of leaders. Ofthe time available the commander allows enough forhis lower unit commanders to perform their dutiesand for the men to organize the areas. Plans aremade and orders issued so that there is minimum de-lay in starting the organization of the ground.After making his estimate of the situation, the com-.mander follows this troop leading procedure:

a. lie Makes a Tentative Plan of Defense. Thisgives him a basis for later action and allows him toorient the leaders of company and supporting unitsearly so they can get started before the order isissued. This tentative plan includes the general

34

disposition and mission of troops and weapons withinthe defense area.

b. He Plans the Movement of Troops and the issv-ance of His Order. Early planning and orders bythe commander make possible an orderly and timelymove by the troops to the defensive position. Thismovement normally is controlled by his executiveofficer in a company or battalion and by the platoonsergeant in a platoon. He plans where, when, andto whom his order is to be given.

(1) He selects an observation point from whichall, or at least the most critical portion, ofthe defense area can be observed. Hedesignates this point as the place where ihewill issue the order.

(2) He designates the time he will give theorder. In selecting the time he considersthe total time available, the time necessaryfor adequate recomnnaissance by unit leaders,and the tine required for the actual prepara-tion of the position. Time in which toprepare positions is allotted. This maypreclude the making of a detailed recon-naissance by the commander.

(3) He designates the persons to receive the de-fense order. This includes his lower unitcommanders and may include others, likethe artillery and mortar forward observers,communication officer (or sergeant), and themortar platoon leader.

e. He Plans His Reconnaissance. Before startinghis terrain reconnaissance, the commander makes abrief map reconnaissance, determines the localities

35

to be visited, and selects the route. His reconnais-sance is as detailed as time permits, and major at-tention is given to the most critical localities. Heannounces his route so that he can be located quickly.

d. Lie Arranges Coordination with Other Com-manders. Adjacent and supportillg unit command-ers usually are present at the time the commanderreceives fthile defense order. Arrangements for thenecessary coordination are made with these com-manders at this time.

e. He JMakes His Reconnaissance. The com-mander leaves the area where he received the highercommander's order and goes on his personal recon-naissance of the ground. The battalion and com-pany commanders are often accompanied by themortar platoon leader and such other personnel asdesired. The commander first positively identifieshis area.

(1) He studies the immediate foreground of theposition to determine-

(a) Areas which afford the enemy coveredapproaches to the position.

(b) Natural obstacles and exposed terrainover which the enemy must pass.

(c) Commanding features of the terrainwhich may be occupied as hostile observa-tion posts and areas within the defensiveposition which are exposed to hostileobservation.

(2) He studies the ground in detail within thedefense area to determine-

(a) CQordination with adjacent units andwith supporting weapons to be placedwithin the area.

36

(b) Locations for subordinate defense areas.(c) Position areas (firing positions) for at-

tached tanks.(d) Locations for the 60-mm (81-mm) mor-

tars.(e) Position areas (positions) for vehicular

weapons to be coordinated in the defense.(/) Routes of communication and supply.(g) Location of the observation post.(h) Location of the command post.(i) Position areas (positions) for carriers not

used for CP or in fire support roles.(3) Because of time limjtations, the commander

may have to issue his order without makinga detailed ground reconnaissance. In suchcases' his order may be issued from the bestvantage point available, or be based entirelyon a map study. Adjustments to improvethe coordination and tactical organizationare made as soon as possible.

f. He Completes His Plan and Issues His Order.Upon completing the reconnaissance, he goes to thepoint previously designated to issue his order. Hemakes such changes in his tentative plan as requiredby his ground recennaissance and recommended byhis subordinates. He then issues the defense order.

g. He Inforvms the Higher Comma'ander of His Planof Defense.

h. He Supervises the Work. After the order hasbeen issued, the commander supervises the detailedorganization of the defense area.

37

CHAPTER 2

MARCHES, BIVOUACS, AND ASSEMBLYAREAS

Section I. MARCHES

41. GENERAL

a. Training in marches is one of the most impor-tant phases of company and battalion training. Thesuccessful operation of an armored infantry battal-ion depends on the efficient execution of marches.Armored infantry units spend much time in the exe-cution of tactical and administrative marches.\archll training may be concurrent with other train-

ing and should be conducted throughout all phasesof training.

b. The battalion commander's objective in march-ing is to move from one location to another, arriv-ing at the appointed time and place with all person-nel and equipment in the best possible condition andprepared to accomplish the battalion's mission.This requires thorough planning and constant super-vision during the execution of the movement. Theprocedure used in a movement of troops in columnis known as march technique.

42. EXPLANATION OF TERMS

a. Arrival Timte. The time the head of a column,or head of an element thereof, reaches a given point.

38

b. Clearance Time. The time the tail of a col-umn, or unit in the column, passes a given point.

c. Close Column. A formation in which vehiclesare separated by the minimum safe drivingdistances.

d. Control Vehicle. The vehicle that travels atthe head of a column, or elements of a column, andsets the rate of march.

e. Density. The average number of vehicles perunit length of roadway.

f. Distance. The space from the rear of one vehicle (including towed load if any) to the front ofthe next vehicle in the column; or the space fromthe rear element of a march unit or serial to the lead-ing element of the following march unit or serial.

g. Guide. A person who leads or directs a unit orvehicle into or out of a. selected area, or over a pre-determined route.

h. Infiltrating Column. A column in which ve-hicles are dispatched individually or in small groupsat irregular intervals over a marked route with afixed density.

i. Initial Point (IP). A point where a footmarch or motor movement is formed, without halt-ing, by the successive arrival of the units that con-stitute the column.

;. March Discipline. Observance and enforce-ment of the rules that govern a unit on the march,especially those involving formations, distances,speeds, and use of cover.

k. llarch Graph. Time-space diagram used inplanning and controlling marches, both vehicle andfoot, and in preparing or checking the march table.

39

7. March Order. An order issued by a commanderto give instructions for a march.

m. March Table. A list showing the general or-ganization and the time and space schedule for amarch movement, usually published as an annex tothe march order.

n. March unit. A tactical unit, or group of units,that moves or halts at the order of a single com-mander. A company, battery, or similar organiza-tion normally forms the march unit.

o. Markcer. A person, flag, stake, or some otherobject posted at a point to show the location of a unit,a direction or procedure to be followed, a dangerpoint, an obstacle, or a boundary.

p. Open Colu.?mn. A formation in which distancesbetween vehicles are increased to provide greater dis-persion. Usually a fixed density is specified; forexample. 10, 15, or 20 vehicles per mile.

g. Rate of March. The average marching speedper hour, including short periodic halts.

r. Regulating Point (RP). A point where an in-coming serial is released from column control andleaves the march column to go into a specific area.

s. Road Space. The distance from head to tail ofa column when in a prescribed formation on a road;the length of road occupied by a column or part of acolumn.

t. Seri'a7. One or more march units, preferablywith the same march characteristics, placed underone commander for march control.

u. Strip Map. A sketch or map, either schematicor drawn to scale, showing the route to be followed

40

and other pertinent information like towns, cross-roads, bridges, and rail crossings.

v. Time Length. The time required for a columnor march unit to pass a given point.

w. Time In.terval (timne gap). The interval oftime between successive vehicles, march units, orcolumns as they move past a given point. The timeis measured from the instant the tail of one unitclears the point to the instant the head of the nextunit reaches it.

43. TYPES OF MARCHES

All marches of armored infantry units may beclassified as administrative marches or as tacticalmarches.

a. An administrative march is a march in whichthe primary consideration in the arrangement oftroops and vehicles is the comfort and convenienceof personnel, and their rapid transit. This type ofmarch is made when no enemy activity or interferenceis expected; emphasis can be placed on speed of move-ment and on conserving tie energy of troops. When-ever practicable, columns are composed of units hav-ing the same rate of march, and the integrity of unitsis maintained. Separate roads are assigned to col-umns having different rates of march, or their move-ments by the same route are echeloned with respectto time.

b. Units and vehicles on a tactical mnarch arearranged in the column to aid in their employmentagainst the enemy. The greatest influence on dis-positions for the tactical march is the compositionand closeness of hostile ground forces and aviation.

03135S--51-----4 41

When hostile forces include armored elements, suchelements may make contact from any direction notprotected by friendly forces or terrain barriers.

44. TYPES OF MARCH COLUMNS

The reinforced armored infantry battalion nor-mally uses one of three types of march columns-open column, close column, or infiltrating column.

a. The open columnn formation is particularly ap-plicable to tactical moves made during daylight with-out air cover; such moves are made when time isso important that lack of secrecy and the possibilityof some losses from air attack are justified. Enoughdispersion is made to prevent one shell or bomb fromdamaging more than one vehicle. Open column mayalso be used to advantage when moving with drivinglights at night, or with blackout lights on moonlightnights on good roads. A fixed density, or a givendistance between vehicles, is prescribed when thisformation is used. The open column formation pro-vides the best compromise between the requirementsof a short timelength of the column and wide disper-sion of vehicles within the column.

b. The close column formation is used when alarge volume of traffic must be moved in the shortesttime. This formation is also ueful for night movesunder blackout conditions, particularly over poorlymarked routes, when distances between vehiclesmust be short enough for drivels to maintain visualcontact with the preceding vehicles. Normally, theclose column formation during daylight is not justi-fied except when the column has air cover or is other-

42

wise secure from hostile air attack. This method ofmarching permits utilization of the maximumn trafficcapacity of the roads. However, it does not providedispersion against enemy observation and attack,and traffic bottlenecks are likely to occur at criticalpoints along the route.

c. An infiltrating columnL may be used whenenough time and road space are available and se-crecy, deception, and dispersion are desired. Thisformation provides the best passive protection fromair observation and attack. Because of extendeddistance between vehicles, column control is difficultand routes must be carefully marked in advance toprevent drivers from becoming lost.

45. PLANNING THE MARCH

Adequate planning insures the successful conductof a march. Items included in this planning are-

a. Routes.b. Route reconnaissance.c. Advance parties.d. Guides and markers.e. Formation for the march./. Designation of initial point (or points) and

regulating point (or points) for battalion units.g. Rate of march.h. Distance.i. Phase lines and other control points.j. Halts.k. Security measures to be adopted.1. Methods of resupply.m. Trains.

43

46. ROUTES OF MARCH

Higher headquarters usually designate a route ofmarch for the reinforced armored infantry battal-ion. The battalion may be given a zone of advance;in this case the battalion commander selects his routeand alternate routes. Higher headquarters maygive the battalion a road priority for its march, andthe battalion commander follows this schedule.When the battalion is operating alone, the battalioncommnauder selects the route.

47. WARNING ORDERS FOR MARCHES

A warning order, which is issued before the de-tailed march order, is used to alert troops and allowthem time to prepare for the march. When possible,a warning order includes the nature of the movement,the general purpose of the operation, the time of de-parture, and the destination. Warning orders makesure that the battalion will be ready to start on time,and that commanders will know how much time theyhave to complete maintenance and to rest personnel.Where pertinent, instructions to the advance partyshould be included.

48. ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE

a. After receiving the warning order for a move-ment, the battalion commander obtains all availableinformation about the route of march. His sourcesof information include reports from higher head-quarters, and map, air, and ground reconnaissance.A combination of air and ground reconnaissance is

44

the most thorough and reliable. The route recon-naissance provides information concerning-

(1) Bridges, including the capacity, location,and by-passes.

(2) Fords, including the location, depth ofwater, condition of bottom, banks, and ap-proaches.

(3) Any other informlation of the terrain thatmay be useful to the commander.

(4) Roads, including the type, condition, andwidth.

b. The battalion commander may be called on toperform the route reconnaissance for a larger com-mand. For this purpose he may use the battalion re-connaissance platoon. However, it is normal forhim to receive most of the information from recon-naissance conducted by other agencies.

49. FORMATION FOR THE MARCH

a. In a tactical march, the formation is governedby the tactical situation. Troops are arranged in

the expected order of use, or in the order that theyare to enter a new assembly area or attack position.

b. In an administrative march the formlation isnormally governed by the position of the units inthe old bivouac area. Companies are rotated withinthe column daily. A reinforced battalion ordinarilymarches as a serial, each of its companies being amarch unit. The unit farthest from the IP nor-mally moves out first, followed by the next farthestunit, which ties in at the tail of the columno as theleading unit moves by. The units may also leave

45

the old bivouac area in an order most convenient forthem to enter the new bivouac. Normally the bat-talion headquarters are near the center of the column,and service elements are at the rear. See figure 7.

000RECON -

DIRECTIONoF

~~~~HO E MARCH

HO a SVC I-)

I. RECONNAISSANCE PLATOON. LESS ELEMENTS INADVANCE PARTY. PRECEDES THE BATTALION TO

000_ POST GUIDES AND MARK THE ROUTE

SUP, 2. BATTALION COMMANDER AND STAFF PATROL

ADIO COMUNICATION THROUGHOUT THE

lET ~ ·- · COLUMN.

DET w4= . SUPPLy P LATOON HAS ONE OR MORE GASOLINETRUCKS WITH EACH COMPANY FOR REFUELING

god10~1 ~ AT THE REFUELING HALT

.MEDICAL DETACHMENT TREATS OR EVACUATESMAINT CASUALTIES.

O. MAINTENANCE PLATOON REPAIRS OR EVACU'ATES VEHICLES THAT HAVE FALLEN OUT

Figure 7. Order of march for an administrative march.

46

50. INITIAL POINT

When the battalion is marching as part of a largerunit, the initial point for the larger unit is desig-nated by the commander of that unit. The battalioncommander also designates another initial point,short of the largerj.nit IP, and sets a time for thebattalion to reach and clear it. The -battalion IPis the point where battalion units form a column orserial. It must be far enough from the assembly orbivouac area for the column to gain the specifiedrate of march by the time it reaches the larger unit'sinitial point, and with the prescribed time intervaland distances. To do this the battalion commanderhas a reconnaissance made of the route from thebattalion IP to the larger unit IP. This route ismeasured, and the time it takes the leading vehicleto travel this distance is determined. This time issubtracted from the time the leading vehicle mustpass the larger unit IP to determine the starting timefrom the battalion IP. If other units are to precedethe battalion to the larger unit IP, the battalioncommander establishes liaison with those units andis careful not to block their movement. While plan-ning estimates may have to be changed before execu-tion, final corrections can easily be made throughliaison.

51. RATE OF MARCH

a. The rate of march for tank and armored carriercolumns, or for mixed columns of tanks, carriers,and wheeled vehicles is 12 to 20 miles per hour during

47

daylight, and 8 to 10 miles per hour during darknesson good roads.

b. The factors that determine the exact rate ofmarch are-

(1) Grades, sharp turns, cities, towns, and otherbottlenecks along the route.

(2) Surface conditions such as dust, ice, mud,and snow.

(3) Condition of vehicles.(4) Condition of drivers and crews.(5) State of march training and degree of ex-

perience of individuals and units.(6) Weather conditions that affect visibility.(7) Light conditions that affect visibility.

e. Rates of 15 miles per hour or better for sus-tained periods can be attained only under the bestconditions. To attain this speed, routes of marchmust be comparatively level and should avoid cities,towns, sharp turns, and other bottlenecks; the roadshould be hard-surfaced and free from ice and snow;tanks, carriers, and other vehicles must be in goodcondition and should not have been subjected to longperiods of operation; and crews, particularly drivers,should be rested and at their peak of alertness.

52. MARCH DISTANCES

During daylight the normal distance between vehi-cles in the column in 50 yards. At night the normaldistance between vehicles is that at which each drivercan maintain visual contact with the preceding vehi-cle. The distance between march units in the column;expressed as time interval, may be one minute or asdirected.

48

53. PHASE LINES

Phase lines are clearly distinguishable terrain fea-tures along the route of march; for example, streams,crossroads, and well-defined ridges. They are usedto control the movement of two or more columns,including the flank guard units. When the headsof columns, usually the control vehicles, reach phaselines, they report their crossing and continue themarch; they halt at these lines only when orderedto do so by higher headquarters.

54. HALTS ON THE MARCH

a. Units on the march normally make scheduled10 minute halts each hour or 15 minute halts everytwo hours. It is advisable to schedule a 10-minutehalt at the end of the first 50 minutes of the march.At all scheduled halts, all march units and serialshalt simultaneously at the specified time; they makeno attempt to close up gaps in the column. Vehic-ular crews perform their scheduled at-the-halt main-ternance operations.

b. At halts, the march unit and serial commandersmake sure that-

(1) Traffic control personnel are posted at thefront and rear of each march unit.

(2) Distance between vehicles is correct. (Unitsdo not normally close up at the halt.)

(3) All vehicles and personnel remain on therigliht side of the road and keep the traveledportion of the road clear at all times.

(4) Ground and air security are maintained.(5) Crew maintenance is performed by the crew

of each vehicle.49

(6) Vehicle personnel are alert to receive andrelay signals for the resumption of themarch. This is particularly important atnight.

(7) Maintenance personnel are checking themechanical condition of all vehicles in theunit.

(8) All vehicles move out at the same time fromthe halt.

c. Halts for refueling are scheduled in advance toallow march unit commanders to make definite plansfor refueling. Armored infantry battalions nor-mally require refueling about every 75 miles (par.79).

d. During tactical marches when contact with theenemy is imminent, or during prolonged halts, it isoften desirable to shorten the column. When theterrain permits, units of the battalion do this by mov-ing into assembly areas on each side of the road.This is called coiling up (fig. 8). In an administra-tive march, the units are placed so that they caneasily move back onto the road. faced in the correctdirection to resume the march. If tactical consider-ations govern, companies or reinforced companies re-main prepared to move in the direction of theexpected action.

55. SECURITY

a. Armored units on a tactical march may be pre-ceded by a covering force. The mission of such aforce is the early development of the situation, in-cluding crushing resistance when possible or theseizure of a key terrain feature. Such a force pre-

so50

-'7II

-- a I

r-_4, --

~~~ -~~~~~~~ -- C'-

-r. ~r

C,

'CQ- eut

Figure 8. Coiling vp.

51

cedes the column advance guard and provides itsown security. It normally advances by bounds.

b. Armored units on a tactical march are pre-ceded by an advance guard whose mission is to pre-vent delay of the main body and to protect the mainbody against surprise attack. The size, composi-tion, and disposition of the advance guard varieswith the mission, terrain, and tactical situation.

c. Armored units on a tactical march protect theirflanks by flank guards, especially when no protectionis provided by adjacent friendly troops. Flankguards cover routes of approach that might be usedby hostile forces to attack the flanks of the column.A flank guard may travel on a route parallel to thatof the main body, and be distributed in depth toward off or give warning of enemy attacks; orechelons of the flank guard may move by boundsfromn one position to another, occupying key terrainfeatures from which good observation is possible.

d. Armored units on a tactical march employ arear guard, which follows and protects the mainbody on the march. A rear guard is used to defeator delay hostile forces attacking the rear, to protectthe trains, and to collect stragglers.

e. An observer in a liaison plane is one of the bestsources of information for the armored unit com-mander on the march.

i. During the march and at the halt, the armoredunit provides its own security against air attack. Itdoes this by placing an air sentry on each vehicle,and by continuous manning of antiaircraft guns.Passive security measures against air attack includethe dispersion of vehicles and the maintenance of

52

proper distances, both during the movement and atthe halt. In maintaining distances, vehicles are notallowed to close up at halts, obstacles, and trafficbottlenecks. Commanders and staff officers, whilemloving along the column, constantly check thesesecurity measures.

g. Strict observance of commnunication security isnecessary to insure adequate protection againstenemy communication intelligence activities such asradio interception, position finding, traffic analysis,and crypto-analysis.

56. MARCH ORDERS

If the armored infantry battalion is marching aspart of a larger unit, the battalion march order isbased on the march order of the higher headquarters.The order includes these items that are not coveredin unit standing operating procedure-

a. Destination.b. Route.c. Rate of march (may be SOP).d. Order of march.e. Location of the initial point.f. Time of passing the initial point.g. Security (may be SOP).It. Scheduled halts (may be SOP).i. Distances between vehicles and time interval

between march units (may be SOP).j. Communication.k. Location of the command post during the march

(may be SOP).1. Traffic control measures (may be SOP).mi. Location of the regulating point.

53

n. Time each march unit is to clear the regulatingpoint and any other critical points along the routeof march.

57. CONTROL AND SUPERVISION OF THE MARCH

a. Training and discipline are the greatest factorsin the control of an armored infantry battalion onthe march. Detailed supervision by the battalionstaff is necessary to make sure that the column isformed according to plan. Means of controlling thebattalion (operating separately or reinforced) onthe march are-

(1) Detailed supervision.(2) A staff officer at the battalion IP, critical

points, and the RP (to check arrival oflower units, order of march, rates of march.time length of the column, clearance times,and march discipline).

(3) A control vehicle at the head of each marchunit.

(4) Well-marked routes (guides and markers).(5) Phase lines and check points.(6) Radio (if permitted by security).(7) Hand signals.

b. The battalion commander and designated mem-bers of his staff supervise the movement of the re-inforced battalion on the march. Items to check arethe presence of all vehicles in the column, their con-dition, distances between march units, speed, and thegeneral conduct of the march units. Necessary cor-rections are made on the spot. All officers and non-commissioned officers of the battalion are respon-sible for supervising the march column.

54

58. COMMUNICATION ON THE MARCH

WThen communication security permits, radio is theprincipal means of communication during a march.Visual signals-particularly arm-and-hand signalsand flashlight signals--are used extensively forcolumn and vehicle control. Messengers are usedbetween units in the column. However, because ofthe difficulties of passing tanks, carriers, and otherheavy vehicles, messengers are generally used onlyfor carrying maps, overlays, and similar items.When marching as part of a larger unit, the bat-talion maintains liaison with the preceding serial.A liaison officer or agent travels with the precedingserial and keeps his commander informed as to thepreceding serial's time of departure, time of clear-ing the IP, and time of reaching the RP and inter-mediate control points. At prescribed intervals heinforms the battalion commander of the location ofthe tail of the preceding serial, and gives him earlywarning of any unscheduled halt and the reason forit as soon as it is determined. Light aircraft may beprovided to supplement organic means of communi-cation during the march.

59. NIGHT MARCHES

a. In the combat zone, most marches near the for-ward areas are conducted during the hours of dark-ness. Blackout lights may be prohibited. Prac-tice night marches over unfamiliar terrain are thebest training for night marching.

b. Night marching requires detailed planning.Route reconnaissance and road guides and markers

55

assume greater importance. Darkness increases thedifficulty of control, and requires decreased speed,decreased distance, and increased reconnaissance andsecurity. During halts in a night march, either thecommander or the assistant driver of each vehicledismounts and contacts the preceding vehicle in thecolumn to keep contact. Officers and noncommis-sioned officers make sure that no driver or crew mem-ber has fallen asleep during the halt.

c. The distance between vehicles on night marchesvaries with the terrain, weather, and visibility. Asa guide, this distance is the maximum at which thedriver can see the blackout tail light of the precedingvehicle. Distances may be increased during brightmoonlight and on smooth, straight, open roads,whereas hilly and rough terrain, bad roads, rain,fog, dust, or complete darkness force the column toclose up to maintain contact.

60. COMPANY MARCHING AS PART OF A BAT-TALION

a. When marching as part of a larger unit, thecompany commander checks the column at irregularintervals and corrects any violation of march disci-pline. The company's leading vehicle acts as a con-trol vehicle and an officer rides in it to make surethat the prescribed speed is maintained as closely astraffic and road conditions permit. This vehicle maybe preceded by another officer or noncommissionedofficer in a A -ton truck who serves as the companypathfinder or navigator. The mortar platoon's /4-

ton truck may be used for this purpose. The officer

56

in the control vehicle reports to higher headquartersas required when phase lines and other designatedpoints are reached and cleared.

b. When unscheduled halts occur, the companycommander immediately goes forward as far as thehead of the next company to determine the cause andprobable duration of the halt. Within the company,each platoon leader goes to the head of the precedingplatoon, and each vehicle commander checks thevehicle directly ahead of him. At night these pre-cautions prevent one disabled vehicle or sleepingdriver from holding up the whole colllmn.

61. COMPANY MARCHING ALONE

When a company is assigned a mission to marchseparately, the company commander's responsibili-ties are similar to those described for the battalioncommander. The companly commander makes amap study of his route and supplements it with aroute reconnaissance. He issues a warning order tohis leaders to prepare for the march. He selects theIP, formation for the march, halts, distance betweenvehicles, and arranges for route marking and roadguides.

62. DISPOSITION OF COMPANY, ADMINISTRATIVE,AND SUPPLY VEHICLES

The maintenance section marches at the rear ofthe company. Any vehicle falling out of the columnis promptly moved to the side of the road for im-mediate repair. Vehicles not repairable by the com-pany are left to be picked up and repaired by the

931358--51- 5 57

battalion maintenance platoon. Kitchen trucksusually march with the battalion field train, but mayremain with the company when combat is not im-minent.

63. COMPANY MARCH ORDER

The company commander bases his plans and prep-arations for the march on the battalion march order.Company march orders include-

a. Destination.b. Route.c. Route reconnaissance.d. Advance parties.e. Guides and markers.f. Rate of march.g. Formation for the march.i.. Initial point.i. Regulating point.j. Time.k. Details of ground and air alert guards.1. Scheduled halts.7n. Distances.1. Commlnication.

o. lethods of resupply.p. Trains.q. Strip map or sketch.

64. DISMOUNTED MARCHES

Armored infantry units march mounted unlessforced by terrain or enemy action to dismount.

58

Fundamentals contained in FMI's 7-10, 7-20, and21-18 pertaining to dismounted marches are appli-cable to dismounted armored infantry units. Un-less otherwise stated, all marches for armored infan-try units are mounted marches.

Section II. BIVOUACS

65. GENERAL

A bivouac area is an area in the field where troopsrest and prepare for further movement. In abivouac area the possibility of contact with theenemy, except by air, is remote. Troops are not usu-ally expected to be committed to battle from thisposition.

66. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BIVOUAC AREA

a. Characteristics considered essential in a biv-ouac area include-concealment from air andground observation; enough space to permit normaldispersion of vehicles (fig. 9); and firm, all-weatherstanding for all types of vehicles. It should haveground smooth enough to permit easy vehicularmaintenance and movement of supply and other ve-hicles through the area. There should be enoughentrances and exits from a good road net to permitrapid movement in any direction. Entrancesshould be good enough to allow vehicles to leave theroad and occupy the bivouac area without greatlyreducing speed. The area should have natural ter-rain protection.

59

FIgrlea 9. Size of icoueac aa o. llor cd ifantra coopa4,aln battalion.

60

b. Characteristics that are not essential but aredesirable includele

(1) An adequate water supply within or nearthe area.

(2) Suitable shelter for personnel.(3) Proximity to the services required for

maintenance and rehabilitation.

67. ADVANCE PARTY

a. An armored infantry battalion sends an advanceparty to a new bivouac area as soon as possible.Wlhen the battalion is a part of a larger command,this party accompanies the advance party of thelarger command. Operations of the advance partyare normally covered in the unit standing operatingprocedure. The party is composed of representativesof all battalion units with its size dictated by itsability to reconnoiter the area,. to provide any neededsecurity, and to maike necessary ilprovemnents onentrances to, and routes within, the bivouac area.The advance party commander should be informedof the route, the order of march, and the estimatedarrival time of the main body.

b. Instructions to the advance party include infor-mation concerning the approximate length of timethe party will be out and the individual or specialequipment to be taken. The standing operating pro-cedure ordinarily specifies the special pioneer equip-ment to be carried.

68. ORGANIZATION OF BIVOUAC AREA

a, If a battalion advance party commander deter-mines that the area is unsatisfactory, he immediately

61

notifies the advance party commander of the higherheadquarters and requests a different area. If achange cannot be made in the time available, thebattalion is put under cover as soon as it arrives, andadjustments are made later.

b. If a battalion is part of a larger command, theadvance party commander of the larger force desig-nates the area the battalion will occupy. If thebattalion is operating alone, the battalion advanceparty comlnander selects the area from a general areaassigned by the battalion commander. After thebattalion advance party commander reconnoiters thearea, he divides it into company areas, and postsguides to direct units into their areas. Companypersonnel in the advance party further organizetheir assigned areas. The battalion advance partycommander also selects a tentative location for thebattalion command post, prepares recommendationsfor the security of the area, and develops a circula-tion plan that disturbs the existing terrain patternas little as possible. It is desirable to have the serviceand maintenance elements centrally located in thearea and near the main axis. Suitable working con-ditions for the maintenance platoon are necessary.

69. REGULATING POINT

a. On passing the regulating point, the serialseparates from the column and, led by guides fromthe advance party, promptly moves into its assignedarea. The regulating point should be at or near theentrance to the area to be occupied and should beeasily recognizable on the ground. If the battalionis marching as part of a larger command, it may be

62

released from colunii control, as a serial, at the highercommand's regulating point, and be required tomarch for some distance as a serial. This may re-quire the battalion to have a battalion regulatingpoint where guides pick up the companies and guidethem into the assigned areas.

b. These regulating points may be designated inadvance if the necessary information is available.In all cases, guides stay on the alert to recognize theleading elements of their respective units, so that theycan lead them from the column without interruptingthe march of the remainder of the serial.

70. OCCUPATION OF BIVOUAC AREA

When the battalion arrives at the bivouac, it isessential that the units move off the road withouthalting. The posting of guides, the selection ofroutes, and the allocation of areas by the advanceparty are all done to enable the unit to clear the routeof march withouat halting and cwithout obstructing themovement of other units (fig. 10). This requiresaggressive action by all guides and commanders andsupervision by the battalion commander and mem-bers of his staff. To assist in the occupation of thearea, the advance party improves entrances and routesinto the area if necessary. The area is organizedso that the leading unit's area is farthest along theroute or axis into the area, and areas of succeedingunits are alternately on each side of the route oraixis. The advance party should arrange for anarea into which a march unit can coil up if necessary,and should take measures to insure that a stalledvehicle can be quickly by-passed. After the march

63

Figure 10 Occupation of bivouac or assembly area. Theplatoons of the reinforced companies enter their assignedarea8s witl/oat halting anld with enough speed to permitsucceedilng vehicles to maintain the prescribed speed.

64

serial has cleared the route, any desired adjustmentsof vehicles can easily be made without holding up theflow of traffic.

71. SECURITY OF BIVOUAC AREA

a. Security in a bivouac area is obtained by con-cealment, by using natural or artificial obstacles, bylocal security measures, by reconnaissance, and byestablishing an outpost system (fig. 11). Althougha bivouac area is normally located so that there islittle chance for contact with enemy troops, counter-intelligence measures against unfriendly inhabitantsof the area mavy be necessary. Preparations may alsobe necessary for countering guerilla action and un-expected enemy penetrations. Passive plotectivemeasures against air attack include camouflage anddispersion. Because of this dispersion, the area tobe secured may be quite large. Adequate measuresshould be taken for protection against radiological,chemical, and biological attack (par. 284).

b. An outpost system has the mission of protect-ing a resting command or defensive position againstannoyance, surprise, or observation by groundforces. This system normally consists of roadblocks at critical terrain features and of a series ofobservation posts-small groups who are chargedwith observing and reporting any hostile action.These observation posts form a line of observationaround the bivouac. They occupy observationpoints well out from the main body, covering likelyavenues of approach. If possible these positionsprovide aln unobstructed view of the surroundingterrain. At night, observation posts are formed

65

\ MORT ASMO

CO A (REINF) /

I EADQUARTERS

/ -IEADORAErCRS a SERVICE

COC CO E

WITH TANK RN

Figure 11. Reinforced a rinored inf antry battalion int assemblyarea.

into two-manl listening posts. Road blocks are also

established to control traffic and to prevent unau-

thorized persons fromn entering the area. An ar-

nmored infantry unit establishes local security within

the battalion area.

66

c. Normally, when the battalion is operating aspart of a larger command, the higher commanderdivides the perimeter among all units. He assignscoordinating points between adjacent units, wherecontact and liaison are to be established. Any in-structions issued by the higher commander are im-mediately disseminated, so that all elements of thedefensive system call function in the same manner.

72. COMMUNICATION AND LIAISON IN BIVOUACAREA

a. The signal communication system of an ar-mored infantry battalion in a bivouac area consistsof messenger, wire, radio, and visual means. Localwire lines may be laid to companies and to variousservice activities, such as supply and maintenanceplatoons and the administrative and personnel sec-tion (if present with the battalion).

b. For security, use of radio within the battalionis minimized by using messengers. Each companysends a liaison agent or messenger to the battalioncommand post. Battalion sends a liaison officer tothe next higher unit.

73. DEPARTURE FROM BIVOUAC AREA

a. Before departure from a bivouac area, the bat-talion commander issues a warning order to permitthe completion of all necessary preparation for themarch. When preparation is completed, each bat-talion unit reports its readiness to move.

b. When a battalion is marching as part of alarger command, a liaison officer, with radio-

67

equipped vehicle or messecigers, is sent to the unitthat precedes the battalion in column. This officerkeeps his battalion commalnlder informed as to theprogress of the forward unit, so that the battalion isable to reach and clear the IP at the prescribed rateof march and distance without unscheduled halts.Similar arralnements are made between battalionulits. This is especially necessary in nightmovements.

Section III. ASSEMBLY AREAS

74. GENERAL

a. An assembly area is an area where units as-semble to organize for attack or to regroup afteran attack, landing, river crossing, or movement. Inthis area the battalion normally services, inspects,and repairs vehicles; resupplies; and feeds troops.

b. When the area is used for preparation for anattack, it is located as near to the enemy position asterralin and enemy activity permits. Key personnelusually go forward to the attack position or a van-tage point to receive orders, while the bulk of thebattalion remains in the assembly area to completetheir preparations.

75. CHARACTERISTICS OF ASSEMBLY AREA

a. Desirable characteristics of an assembly area foran armored infantry battalion include-

(1) Concealment from air and ground observa-tion.

(2) Cover from direct fire.(3) Hard standing.

68

(4) Good exits and entrances.(5) Ample space for dispersion of vehicles, per-

sonnel, and equipment.b. Overhead concealment is important. If the

battalion is to remain in the assembly area for anylength of time, camouflage of vehicles is stressed toprevent the enemy from detecting the location.

76. DISPOSITIONS WITHIN ASSEMBLY AREA

Battalion elements are disposed within the as-semblv area so that-

a. The battalion headquarters, headquarters andservice company is encircled and protected by theother companies.

b. All units are able to move into and out of thearea without passing through other companies' areasexcept on roads.

c. Service elements, such as the maintenanceplatoon and the medical detachment, are easily acces-sible to all companies.

d. Circulation within the area is reduced to aminimum.

e. Companies can readily move out in the antici-pated order of march.

77. COMMUNICATION IN ASSEMBLY AREA

a. Normally there is radio or listening silence dur-ing the time the battalion is in an assembly area.Each unit sends liaison agents to the battalioncommand post; they are the primary means of com-millication during this period. The next higherheadquarters is immediately notified of the time the

69

battalion closed in the assembly area, and a liaisonofficer is sent to the higher headquarters if one is notalready there. This procedure may be provided forin the battalion standing operating procedure.

b. In the assembly area the battalion completesfinal communication plans for the coming operation.When the formation of teams is announced, the bat-talion assigns available frequencies to provide com-munication between the battalion and attached,supporting, and adjacent units. Current signalorders, together with instructions for any special,prearranged signals, are disseminated to all unitsof the battalion and to attached units. Communi-cation with higher headquarters is closely coordi-nated.

78. SECURITY IN ASSEMBLY AREA

a. Security in an assembly area is obtained byconcealment, utilization of natural obstacles, localsecurity measures, reconnaissance, and establishmentof an outpost system that covers all critical terrainfeatures and likely avenues of approach.

b. The outpost system is organized to protect theunit from surprise attack by the enemy. Outpostsmust be strong enough to accomplish their mission.Outpost duty is fatiguing, however, and greatlyreduces the subsequent combat efficiency of troopsinvolved; therefore the striking power of themain body is not dissipated throngh unnecessarilylarge security detachments. Outposts comprise bothtanks and armored infantry. Tanks are used inthe reserve or support, or mlay be used to help defendroad blocks, bridges, fords, and defiles along the

70

routes of approach. The outpost system is composedof a series of strong points on critical terrain featuresand avenues of approach. Each outpost sets up anobservation post. At night these observation postsbecome listening posts. The outpost system for thearea may be garrisoned entirely by one company ormay be divided between two or more companies. Ifthe outpost line is divided, the battalion commlanderprovides means of coordination, such as coordinatingpoints, prescribed patrols, and contact parties.

Section IV. SUPPLY, MAINTENANCE, AND EVACUA-TION DURING MARCHES, IN BIVOUACS, AND INASSEMBLY AREAS

79. SUPPLY ON THE MARCH

On a march, resupply of fuel and lubricants takesplace during halts. Besides other scheduled haltsrefueling halts may be prescribed. Fuel and lubri-cant trucks from the battalion supply platoon maybe attached to each company for refueling at halts.'I'hese trucks move down the column. droppillng offfull gasoline drums and lubricants at each vehicle.Resupply of water is accomplished at the same timeif required, the supply trucks exchanging full cansfor empties. On completion of refueling, the truckspick up the empty gasoline drums. Columns mayassemble off the road where supply trucks can movefrom one vehicle to the other. On extended marchesin rear areas, higher headquarters may establish re-fueling points along the route of march, where enlptvfuel and lubricant trucks can replenish their loads.

71

Empty fuel trucks may precede the main body to therefueling points to prevent delay in resupply.

80. FEEDING DURING THE MARCH

Halts for feeding should coincide with refuelinghalts. In an administrative march, kitchens may gowith the battalion advance party and have a mealprepared when the units arrive. The kitchens maymarch with their respective units, preparing hotmeals en route for serving at prescribed halts or atthe conclusion of the march. Normally the middaymeal is a prepared lunch or combat type ration.

81. POSITION OF BATTALION TRAINS ON A MARCH

In an administrative march, the battalion trains,less those vehicles marching with individual com-panies, usually mnarch as a unit at the rear of thebattalion, without being separated into combat trainsand field trains. In a tactical march, the battalioncombat trains usually march with the battalion andthe battalion field trains with the combat commandtrains.

82. MAINTENANCE ON THE MARCH

a. Vehicles that cannot be repaired before themovement time are evacuated to the supportingordnance unit of the next higher headquarters. Iftime does not permit evacuation, or if the vehiclescannot be moved, their location and condition arereported to the next higher maintenance element.

b. The company maintenance sections march atthe rear of their respective company columns.

72

c. A vehicle disabled en route is moved to the sideof the road so that it will not interfere with the pas-sage of the balance of the column. Vehicle crewsmake repairs within their capabilities on disabledvehicles. Compalny mainitenance sections, if possible,repair inoperative vehicles or tow them to the unitdestination. If the company cannot, the battalionmaintenance platoon either repairs or tows the vehi-cle to the unit destination. If this is not practicable,the vehicle is left: usually its driver or selected mem-bers of its crew stay with it, and the supporting ord-nance is notified of the location of the vehicle andthe type of repairs required.

83. MEDICAL SERVICE AND EVACUATION ON THEMARCH

The battalion aid station marches either with thebattalion headquarters or at the rear of the battalioncolumn. Medical personnel are usually placed insupport of each company by the battalion surgeon;they are equipped with litters and they ride in a de-tachment vehicle. This vehicle moves in the rear ofthe company column and is available to evacuatecasualties to the battalion aid station. An ambu-lance evacuates casualties from the battalion aid sta-tion to the nearest medical installation.

84. RESUPPLY IN BIVOUAC AREA

In the bivouac area, the battalion is resuppliedwith ammunition, fuel and lubricants, rations, water,and spare parts. Other supply functions taken careof in bivouac are-

931358--5I-6 73

a. R1equisitions for supplies, particularly class IIand IV (clothing and equipment), are prepared andsubmitted to higher headquarters. Items to fillshortages are drawn and issued. Unserviceable itemsare salvaged and repaired.

b. Supply records are checked and brought up todate.

c. Bathing and laundry facilities should be madeavailable. (These facilities are normally providedby higher headquarters without special request.The battalion commander sees that adequate trans-portation is made available to the companies to per-mlit maximum use of these facilities.)

85. RESUPPLY IN ASSEMBLY AREA

In the assembly area, the final resupply of am-munition, fuel and lubricants, rations, and water ismade. All vehicles are checked for the prescribedloads of supplies before combat operations. Whenlall assembly area is occupied for an extended periodof time, supply functions that are normally accom-plished in bivouac, are accomplished to the extentpermitted by the tactical situation.

86. MAINTENANCE AND EVACUATION IN BIVOUACOR ASSEMBLY AREAS

a. Among the most imlportalt functions per-formed in a bivouac or an assembly area are vehicu-lar inspections and maintenance. All vehicle en-gines and suspension systems are checked, and allweapolns and signal equipment are inspected,cleaned, and repaired. Materiel that the battalion

74

cannot repair is evacuated to the supporting serviceagency concerned.

b. Personnel casualties receive only emergencytreatment in the bivouac or assembly area. Casesrequiring further treatment normally are evacuatedby the battalion to division medical installations.

87. BATTALION TRAINS IN BIVOUAC OR ASSEMBLYAREA

The service and supply elements of headquarters,headquarters and service company remain with t.hebattalion in bivouac and assembly areas until thebattalion organizes for combat. Compalny kitchensremain with their companies until some time beforethe movement of companies to the attack position.Organization for combat into reinforced companiesalso includes organization of the service, supply, andadministrative elements of the battalion into combatand field trains.

75

CHAPTER 3

TANK-ARMORED INFANTRY COORDINATIONAND COOPERATION IN THE ATTACK

Section I. GENERAL

88. GENERAL

a. In the armored division the medium tanks arethe primary striking force. In missions normallyassigned to this division, armored infantry and ele-ments of other branches have the basic function ofassisting the medium tank units. This is in directcontrast to the infantry division, where tanks and allother branches have the basic function of supportingthe infantry.

b. The medium tanks are used to take maximumadvantage of their great battlefield mobility. Me-dium tank units are normally employed in teams-of combined arms.

c. The heavy tank of the armored division is nor-mally the best weapon against hostile armor. Whenmedium tanks alone cannot easily defeat hostilearmor, heavy tanks are used in a team with mediumtanks. armored infantry, and artillery. The largecaliber fire power of the heavy tank is also effectiveagainst fortifications and emplacements, and is usefulwhen additional fire power and armor are needed.When no such specialized target is present, the heavytank is employed like the medium tank.

d. In order to insure the proper and efficient em-ployment of these combined arms teams, tank-

76

armored infantry coordination and cooperation mustbe accomplished at reinforced battalion, reinforcedcompany, and reinforced platoon level.

(1) The reinforced armored infantry battalioncommander achieves this coordination byorganizing the reinforced battalion for com-bat and by considering tank and armoredinfantry capabilities when developing theplan of maneuver.

(2) Within reinforced companies, tank-armoredinfantry coordination is accomplished byorganizing the reinforced company for com-bat, by efficient tank-armored infantrycomlllnlllication, by selecting the proper for-mation (including the proper element tolead). and by selecting the correct methodof attack once the formation and elementto lead the advance is selected.

(3) Within reinforced platoons, coordinationand cooperation is achieved by teamworkand efficient communication. In those situ-ations where the reinforced platoon is ona semi-independent mission, the platoonleader determines the fornmation, includingthe elemlent of the team to lead the attack.and selects the method of attack.

89. ORGANIZATION OF THE REINFORCED COM-PANY FOR COMBAT (TASK ORGANIZATION)

The commander of the reinforced company eitherforms reinforced platoons or personally coordinatesthe efforts of the tank and armored infantry rifleplatoons. Reinforced platoons are formed by the

77

attachment of an armored infantry rifle platoon to atank platoon, or a tank platoon to an armoredinfantry rifle platoon. Reinforced platoons are com-manded by the platoon leader to wllhom the attach-ments are made. Tank platoons and armored in-fantry rifle platoons may be coordinated personallyby the company commander when tank action in theattack is limited to supporting dismounted armoredinfantry by overhead or flanking fire; also-

a. When the tank unit can support the entire as-sault from positions near the line of departure.

b. When only one tank platoon is attached andmust support the entire rifle company.

90. TANK-ARMORED INFANTRY COMMUNICATIONIN THE ATTACK

Each tank is equipped with a medium-power voiceset that nets with vehicular radio sets in the armoredinfantry units. The portable voice radio sets in thearmored infantry also net with radios mounted ineach tank. Basic radio nets are modified to fit therequirements of each reinforced company. Eachtank is also equipped with an external connection tothe tank interphone system. For other means oftank-armored infantry communication see figure 12.

91. SELECTION OF ELEMENT TO LEAD THE ATTACKFORMATION

a. Tanks lead the assault against light resistance,automatic weapons, antipersonnel mines and wireentanglements, entrenched infantry, and enemyarmored units.

78

~ ·Ff ii, ~Zua" 7

C ~~~~~~~~~~'1'

C 'Ii

`e A|,iiiI~ ii, 2

' v s \ 81

.""'~~' )'.'o-''S

~~~~~~~e 'Li

a~~~~~~ggiale~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~a~~I/ S

te.Fa/ \ells \ SE W~~~*~

S F\ a >~~~~~~~~7

b. Tanks and annornd infantry move together inthe assault against jungle positions, heavily forti-fied areas, towns and villages, and antitank defenses(except against emplaced antitank guns), as well asduring periods of low visibility.

c. Armored infantry and engineers, when avail-able, lead the assault against emplaced antitank guns,across defended river lines. through heavy woods andwithin cities, and in very rough or broken terrain.

92. METHODS OF ATTACK

Armored infantry may advance mounted in con-junction with tanks, dismounted with or withouttanks, or by a combination of both methods. Ar-inored infantrymen are transported as far forwardas possible in each situation. This conserves theirenergy, speeds the advance, reduces casualties incrossing areas swept by small-arms fire and shellfragments, and uses the fire power of the carriers.The mission, the type of weapons available to theenemy, and the terrain govern the place where thearmored infantrymen dismount to fight. However,the final assault to ol)op up the objective and com-plete the destruction of the enemy is usually dis-mounted. Even after the men dismount, carrierweapons are manned and fired to give close supportto the attack.

93. TANK-ARMORED INFANTRY TEAMWORK

a. Cooperation within the tank-armored infantryteam is continuous. All leaders study, plan, and

80

prepare ways of coodinating the elements of theteam to meet the changing battlefield conditions.

b. The role of armored infantry in tank-armoredinfantry teams is to-

(1) Breach or remove antitank obstacles.(2) Assist in the neutralization or destruction

of antitank weapons.(3) Designate targets for the tanks.(4) Protect the tanks against individual anti-

tank measures (fig. 13).(5) Lead the attack under circumstances listed

in paragraph Ole.(6) Provide security for tanks at night.(7) Mop up and consolidate the objective.(8) Protect the tanks in assembly areas and at-

tack positions.c. The dluties of the tank elements in tank-

armored infantry teams are to-(1) Neutralize or destroy hostile weapons by

fire and maneuver (fig. 14).(2) Make paths for dismounted armored infan-

try through wire and antipersonnel minefields.

(3) Neutralize fortified installations with di-rect fire.

(4) Support by direct fire the advance of thearmored infantry, when dismounted ar-mored infantry leads the attack.

(5) Provide antitankl protection.(6) Lead the attack under circumstances listed

in paragraph 91 a.

SI

�*ip�F�cil!' �ks�LY�s�

�i�BT�i�f�i�(· ·J·· `�u E

I=.

'I ill �1 T�iSBR� a

�

'' r$';i";s 6P ;i ii .. ·;a�i·p��ii d ii- i·

· i ·) ·

"; aI �ii' � g

82

S] / C \ t

< -~~ C

iii: 8

'\Kj~~~ir

"'~~&A' I te', " b~~~~~3

Section II. MOUNTED METHODS OF ATTACK

94. GENERAL

a. Tile ability of armored infantry to accompanytanks in the attack is facilitated by use of armoredpersonnel carriers. The armored infantry dis-mounts to support the tanks when necessary, to mopup and organize the objective, or when forced to dis-mount by the terrain or enemy action. Tanks andmounted armored infantry may be coordinated inthe attack by-

(1) Using an integrated formation.(2) Having the imounted armored infantry fol-

lo\- the tanks by bounds.(3) Having the tanks and armored infantry

approach the objective from differentdirections.

b. Time or VT fire may be placed over the objec-tive of the mounted armored infantry team to neu-tralize enemy personnel equipped with individualantitank means. This time-fire may be used withany mounted methods of attack.

95. COORDINATING TANKS AND MOUNTED AR-MORED INFANTRY BY USE OF AN INTEGRATEDFORMATION

The attack of tank and mounted armored infantryunits can be coordinated by combining the combatformations of each into one mutually supportingformation. The tank-armored infantry team thenadvances in an integrated formation. The selection

84

of attack formations for the tank and armored infan-try platoons is based on the following considerations:

a. To Develop Tank Fire Power. In each situa-tion the tank unit selects the formation that developsits maximulm fire power. If maximum fire is neededto the front. it assumes a line formation; if it mustfire to a flank the tank unit echelons in that direction;and if it must fire to the front and both flanks, ituses a wedge formation. See figure 15 for examplesof integrated formations.

b. To Provide Security. The tank unit combatformation that provides the greatest security for theteam is used. If there is a threat on one flank, thetalnk unit echelons to that flank. If both flanks arevulnerable. it uses a wedge formationl.

c. 7To Provide Maximant Control Consisfte)t Withthe Tactical Situation. The tank and armored infan-try elements assume the formation easiest to controlthat develops the required fire power and providesthe necessary security.

d. To Co~nfornm to the Ternrain. The formationsadopted take advantage of any terrain features thatprovide protection from fire and observation.

e. To Enable the Tankl:s To Protect the CarriersFrom. Hostile Armneor. The tank-armored infantryteam commander constantly considers the fact thatthe armored persomnnel carrier cannot engage enemytanks. The formation adopted must always provideadequate antitank protection for the mountedarmored infantry. Without adequate antitank pro-tection, moulted armiored infantry cannot advancein areas where enemy tanks operate. Friendlytanks within the formation provide indirect as well

85

Jo, id i

i '

I ,:

86

as direct protection for the armored personnel car-riers. An enemy tank or antitank gunner, observingan integrated formation of tanks and armored per-sonnel carriers advancing toward his position, nor-mnally fires first on the targets most dangerous tohiim-tanks. Even if this fire is strong enough todisrupt the tank advance, the mounted armoredinfantry have a short time in which to seek defiladebefore continuing the advance dismounted. Themore tanks in the attack, the fewer losses are sus-tained by the mounted armored infantry in the for-mation. The tank unit formation normally isselected to interpose the tank unit betw-een the enemyposition and the mounted armored infantry.

96. MOUNTED ARMORED INFANTRY FOLLOWINGTANKS BY BOUNDS

a. Within the tank-armored infantry team, ar-mored infantry elements may follow the tank ele-ments by bounds. Movement by bounds behind a tankunit increases security but reduces the speed of theadvance. However when this method is used, move-mnent of tanks and mounted armored infantry is asrapid as the terrain permits. The distance betweenthe tanks and mounted armored infantry must notbecome great enough to let enemy tanks move into thegap, thereby separating the tank and mounted ar-inored infantry units; also it must not be so great as todeny the tanks rapid infantry support when needed.

b. The tanks that the armored infantry followsmay advance as a unit in a combat formation (inmass). If the tanks advance as a unit from one ter-

87

rain feature to the next, the armored infantry movesinto defilade behind the firing position as soon as itis occupied. The tanks then advance to the nextterrain feature and the process is continued. Seefigure 16.

c. In some situations the tank unit that the armoredinfantry unit follows may itself advance by alter-nate or successive bounds. Normnallv the tank com-pany is the smallest tank unit to employ movementby bounds. However, a tank platoon may move bybounds when operating out of supporting distancefrom the remainder of the company. If the tankunit employs alternate or successive bounds, themounted armored infantry unit advances with oneof the rear tank elements and halts in defilade be-hind the terrain feature occupied by the tank ele-ment already in position.

97. TANKS AND MOUNTED ARMORED INFANTRYAPPROACHING THE OBJECTIVE FROM DIF-FERENT DIRECTIONS

a. In some situations surprise may be attained byhaving the tank element attack first. After the en-emy has been distracted by the tank attack, themounted armored infantry advances rapidly towardthe objective, using a different route. The armoredinfantry uses speed of movement to place it as nearas possible to the objective before the enemy canshift his fires from the tank attack to meet this newthreat.

b. The disadvantage of this method is that thetanks and armored infantry are separated during the

88

/ Ir 1 *> o~~®'0" 11

(-r~, .~ . ."

II~~~~~~I

iil~~~~~~il

?./, '. . , 4 md"il'!/t/[~

/ r /41/-~"

4'. $74 '"H

advance. However, it is not used unless both tanksand armored infantry can fire into each other's zoneof advance. This method requires maximum co-ordination to prevent the tanks and armored infantryfrom firing into each other as they approach theirobjective. It may seldom be used but is effectivewhen two good avenues of tank approach lead intodifferent flanks of the enemy position.

Section III. DISMOUNTED METHODS OF ATTACK

98. GENERAL

When dismounted armored infantry attacks to-gether with tanks. the tanks and armored infantrymay be coordinated by any one or a combination ofthe following methods:

a. Tanks and armored infantry approaching theobjective from different directions.

b. Tanks following armored infantry and passingthrough to lead as the two closely approach theobjective.

c. Armored infantry riding tanks.d. Armored infantry and tanks move together at

the same rate, or one slightly ahead of the other.e. Tanks overwatching armored infantry.

99. TANKS SUPPORT BY FIRE, THEN JOIN DIS-MOUNTED ARMORED INFANTRY IN ASSAULT

Wheoi tanks are assigned the mission of suppolt-inug an attack by fire and then moving forward tojoin in the assault, they first fire from hull-defiladepositions while the dismounted armored infantry

90

moves forward from the line of departure. Whenthe armored infantry masks the tank fires, tile tanksmove forward to new positions to give continuousfire support. Just before the armored infantry be-gins its assault, the tanks move forward rapidly tojoin in the final assault. Since tanks are not re-stricted to the speed of dismounted armored infantryduring their movement forward to join in the assault,they are exposed to enemy fire for a shorter period oftime. This method can be used when the objectiveis clearly defined and when the terrain is openenough to permit tanks to fire overhead or to theflanks of the advancing infantrymen. Tank sup-port of dismounted armored infantry is often usedwhen obstacles exist that must be removed by infan-try before the tanks can join them for the assault.See figure 17.

100. TANKS AND DISMOUNTED ARMORED INFAN-TRY APPROACH THE OBJECTIVE FROM DIF-FERENT DIRECTIONS

In this type of attack, tanks and dismounted in-fantry use different routes of approach to the ob-jective. This is sometimes necessary when the onlyroute available for the tanks would unduly expose thedismounted armored infantry. While this methodprovides surprise, fire effect, and shock action, co-ordination of the assault is more difficult. Positiveidentification measures are taken to prevent tanksfrom firing into friendly infantry. Some armoredinfantrymen may be desigramted to accompany thetanks to provide close-in protection. The terrain

91

;I

I I/Gil4 U~r /

92~~~~~~~~~~~~~~··

over which the tanks will move must be free of tankobstacles and should be open enough to prevent theenemy from effectively employing individual anti-tank weapons. See figure 18.

101. TANKS SUPPORT DISMOUNTED ARMORED IN-FANTRY BY OVERHEAD OR FLANKING FIRE

From hull defilade firing positions on or near theline of departure, tanks support the dismountedarmored infantry by overhead or flanking firethroughout its advance from the line of departure tothe objective. This method is used only when natu-ral or artificial antitank obstacles prevent tank move-ment to the objective, or when additional tanks areprovided to increase the tank support in the othermethods. See figure 19.

102. TANKS AND DISMOUNTED ARMORED INFAN-TRY ADVANCING TOGETHER

a. Dismounted armored infantry and tanks movetogether at the same rate of speed throughout theadvance from the line of departure to the objective.The infantry may move slightly in advance of thetanks, between them, or immediately in rear. Asthe advance progresses the relative positions of tanksand infantry are adjusted according to the enemyresistance and the terrain. This method is usedwhen visibility is limited, in built-up areas, in woods,and when adverse terrain forces the tanks to moveslowly. It permits close coordination and maximummutual support, but it sacrifices speed and surprise.The low speed increases tank vulnerability to hostile

93

:' .Ot/~isr',it~~

,, 4,1

*

"'p t'

I;Cs

,, ~ ~ ~ ~ , .

I ,i4, '1

4 i~~~~~CI

1, ,1!

I ':·rr-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~/ I..lii '

//

WI I "' ·

.9

antitank fires and gives the enemy time to intensifyhis defensive fires. See figure 20.

b. In a variation of this method, the armored in-fantrymen ride on the tanks until enemy fire forcesthem to dismount and fight on foot. This providesspeed but results in increased exposure of the ar-mored infantry to enemy fire, particularly to airbursts. It also interferes with the operation of thetank. It is rarely used except as a supplementalmeans of transportation during exploitation. Seeparagraph 223 and figure 21.

103. TANKS INITIALLY SUPPORT BY FIRE, THEN PASSTHROUGH THE DISMOUNTED ARMORED IN-FANTRY AND PRECEDE IT TO THE OBJECTIVE

This method uses the armor-protected fire powerand shock effect of the tanks throughout the greaterpart of the attack. Vihen the tanks advance fromtheir initial firing positions, they move rapidlythroulgh the advancing infantry to precede it to theobjective. Upon lifting supporting fires, the dis-mounted armored infantry closes on the objective,using assault fire behind the tanks. This method isused when obstacles initially require armored in-fantry to lead, but can be breached quickly to permitthe tanks to take the lead.

Section IV. COMBINATION METHODS OF ATTACK

104. GENERAL

TIank-armored infantry inetllods of attack are flex-ible and conmmanders use any combination or nmodifi-

96

~~i:.·a ~ B S s

iS`

91

;i:6 ~Vt

r.,~~~~~~~~~~~~9

Fil,,lc 21. Aimorcd il,faltry ril¢e squald ,lotdl Ol fi tluk.

98

cation of methods that produces success. For ex-ample, dismounted armored infantry may often beemployed to break through mine fields while thetanks of the team give direct support by overhead orflanking fire. Once the obstacle is breached, thetanks and carriers rejoin the dismounted armoredinfantry, and any of the other methods of attack,mounted or dismounted, nay be used to continue tothe objective. When a converging attack is'used,other methods are often cormbined with it. -One rein-forced tank elemefit may-advance on the objectivefrom one direction,- using -any of the mountedmethods, while a reinforced armored infantry ele-ment advances from a different direction, using anyof the dismounted methods of attack.

99

CHAPTER 4

SUPPLY, MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION, ANDMEDICAL SERVICE

Section I. SUPPLY

105. RESPONSIBILITY

The battalion commander is responsible for theproper logistical support of his battalion and anyattached units. The conmpally commanders are re-sponsible for the initial supply, and, except as indi-cated below, for the replenishmenlt of all classes ofsupply to their companies and attached units.Requisitions or infornal requests are forwardedsoon enough for the battalion S-4 to meet the needsof the companies.

106. BATTALION SUPPLY PERSONNEL

a. Battalion Supply OfFer (par. 280).b. Company Commander, leadquarters and Serv-

ice Corn pany (par. 286).c. Battalion Supply Platoon Leader. The bat-

talion Suplply platoon leader commanlds the battalionsulpply platoon and may also be designated as thebattalion ammunition officer.

d. Warrant Officer, Supply. The warrant officer,supply, is in charge of the battalion supply section.

100

His duties are largely administrative, but he mayalso be used by the battalion S4 for liaison pur-poses, or as commander of the battalion field trainsin the absence of other officers. He and his enlistedassistants may be used to command elements of thesupply platoon traveling in convoys.

e. Cornpany Supply Personnel. The companycommander is assisted by the company executiveofficer who is also the motor officer. The companycommander normally uses the unit administrativewarrant officer for supervision over the mess, supply,and commuuication. The supply sergeant, motorsergeant, mess steward, and communication chief,as well as other designated personnel, also give ac-tive assistance to the company officers.

107. COMPANY TRAINS

All vehicles in the company carry a prescribed loadof ammunition, reserve rations, emergency ordnanceand signal spare parts, and a 5-gallon water can.Administrative wheeled vheicles normally carry5-gallon fuel and lubricant containers. Companytrains normally consist of kitchen and baggage trucksand nwaintenance vehicles. The company kitchenand baggage trucks do not accompany the companyforward of the battalion trains area. The kitchentruck is normally located with the battalion fieldtrains during combat and is ordered forward to thecombat trains or to the company location by thebattalion S-4, according to the tactical situation.The company maintenance vehicles either follow thecompany as closely as possible or revert to the controlof the battalion combat trains.

101o

108. BATTALION TRAINS

a. The battalion trains have administrative, sup-ply, maintenlance, and medical vehicles that areorganic or attached to the battalion. Their organi-zation, composition, and employment depends on theestimate of the supply situation, the mission of theunit, time and space factors, and the tactical situa-tion. Battalion trains are classified as combat trainsand field trains.

(1) Battalion combat trains consist of those bat-talion vehicles required for the imnmediatesupport of combat operations.

(2) Battalion feld trains consist of those bat-talion vehicles not required for the imme-diate support of combat operations and notincluded in the battalion combat trains.

b. When the battalion is required to detach oneor more companies to reinforce other units of thedivision, enough cargo trucks frbm the battalionsupply platoon should be attached to the companyfor resupply of fuel, lubricants, and ammunition.A 1/4-ton truck with litter racks fromn the battalion'smedical detachment also is normallyv attached toeach detached company. Conversely, when tankcompanies or other elements are attached to the bat-talion they bring with them the necessary supply'and medical vehicles for their support. Thesevehicles are incorporated into the battalion trainsand operate ulnder battalion control. Splitting of thebattalion maintenance platoon is not recommended.Detached companies do not normally have main-tenance vehicles of their parent battalion's mainte-nance platoon attached to them.

102

109. COMPOSITION OF BATTALION COMBAT TRAINS

The composition of the battalion combat trains isvariable, depending on the tactical situation and suchrestricting factors as the terrain, climate, roads, time,and space. A high degree of flexibility is essentialin the composition of the battalion combat trains.As a rule the battalion comlbat trains have majorelements of the battalion maintenance platoon andthe battalion medical detachment, and those ammu-nition, fuel, and lubricant vehicles of the battalionsupply platoon required for immediate resupplyduring the day.

110. EMPLOYMENT OF THE BATTALION COMBATTRAINS

a. In the Assembly Area. When the battalion oc-cupies an assembly area, all components of the bat-talion trains are with it. Before the movement ofcombat elements to the attack position, however, thetrains' elements are organized into battalion combatand battalion field trains.

b. In Exploitation. In a fast moving situation thebattalion combat trains normally follow at the tailof the battalion column.- Small combat detachmentsmay be placed with the battalion combat trains forprotection and to act as rear guard for the battalion.When the combat elements of the battalion becomeengaged, the combat trains move forward into anassembly area, selecting a position that offers se-curity by its proximity to combat elements. At nightthe combat trains occupy the center of the battalionperimeter defense. Supply lines extend over longdistances in an exploitation and trains and supply

103

convoys need protection by combat elements. Insome instances, the bulk or all battalion trains areconsidered combat trains. Expenditure of ammu-nition is less than in the attack or defense, but theconsumption of fuel and lubricants is very heavy.To meet this requirement for fuel and lubricants,kitchen equipment for the battalion may be consoli-dated, and the resulting empty trucks used to trans-port fuel and lubricants. The three-dayv ninimumreserve of individual combat or small-detachmenttype rations carried in all vehicles, may often be inrcreased to a minimun of five days before anexploitation.

c. In the Attack. In a slow-moving situation thebattalion combat trains stay in the rear and moveforward by bounds as necessary, to support the bat-talion. Every effort is made to avoid enemy obser-vation of the positions selected, movement to thesepositions, and activities that take place.while in theposition. In the penetration phase of the attack,ammunition expenditures are high and the conslumlp-tion of fuel and lubricants relatively low. Vehic-ular and personnel casualties are usually high. Ifthe area has a poor road net, special attention mustbe paid to the location of the combat trains to insuresupport.

d. In the Defense.(1) In a sustained defense ammunition expend-

itures are high and the consumption offuel and lubricants low. The battalioncombat trains are compsed of the battalionmedical detachment and elements of thebattalion maintenance platoon necessary

104

for recovery and evacuation. The battal-ion field trains are located in the train areaof the next higher command. Resupplyvehicles move directly from the field trainsto the combat elements. Kitchen trucksmove forward from the field trains, servehot meals, and return to the field train. Itmay be possible to feed hot meals only dur-ing darkness; then front-line elements willnot get a hot lunch. The reserve companyand battalion command and service ele-ments may be fed three hot meals daily ifthe terrain permits unobserved movementof vehicles forward.

(2) In a mobile defense, trains operate gener-ally as in the exploitation. Protection isnecessary, both for the trains located withinthe battalion area and for the supply con-voys that move long distances over routesnot completely protected by friendlytroops.

e. In a letrograde Mlovevment. The control ofservice elements is the primary consideration in aretrograde movement. The battalion combat trainsconsist of the battalion medical platoon, elements ofthe battalion maintenance platoon necessary for re-covery and evacuation, and the minimum number ofsupply vehicles required for immediate support.All other vehicles are placed in the field trains.The battalion S-4 keeps fully informed on the loca-tion of combat elements, and as the battalion with-draws he supervises the movement of service ele-ments to the rear.

931358°-51--8 105

/. Control. The battalion combat train is underthe control of the battalion S-4 for operation, move-ment, and security.

111. COMPOSITION AND EMPLOYMENT OF BAT-TALION FIELD TRAINS

a. The battalion field trains generally includekitchen, ration, water, equipment, and administra-tive trucks. On many occasions they will includefuel, lubricant, and ammunition trucks that are notrequired in the battalion combat trains. A smallpart of the battalion maintenance platoon and asmall part of the battalion medical detachment maybe left with the battalion field trains.

b. The battalion personnel section with its vehiclesis normally attached to the division administrativecenter, which is generally located with the divisionheadquarters rear echelon in the division trainsarea.

c. The battalion field trains are under the com-mand of the battalion supply platoon leader. Theybecome part of the combat command trains, underthe supervision of the combat command S4. Themovement and security of the battalion field trainsare the responsibility of the combat command SL4;the technical and logistical operation of the battalionfield trains is the responsibility of the battalion S-4.

112. RESUPPLY PROCEDURES, GENERAL

The companies submit requests for supplies to thebattalion S4, who moves the required supplies for-ward to the companies from the battalion combat

106

trains. Normally, the battalion SA is so familiarwith the supply situation at the end of the day'soperation that he can start moving supply vehiclesforward before the companies submit their requests.The companies submit requests for services directlyto the battalion surgeon, communication officer, andmaintenance officer.

113. CLASS I SUPPLY

a. For definitions and methods of class I supplysee FMI 17-50.

b. In combat the ration section normally is locatedwith the battalion field train. The ration sectiondraws rations in bulk fromn the divisions or army class1 supply point, breaks the rations down into companylots and issues them to the company kitchens. Troopsshould receive three hot meals daily. The meals areprepared at the kitchen location which may be in thefield train. combat train, or with the company. Thefood is served to troops from the company mess loca-tion, or is placed in hot food containers and deliveredto the troops.

e. When the situation prohibits the use of com-pany kitchens, individual combat or small-detach-ment type rations are sent forward to combat elementsin trucks during the daily after-dark resupplyperiod.

114. WATER

The battalion supply platoon provides trucks forwater supply as required. These trucks are locatedwith the battalion field trains. All elemlets of the

107

battalion are resupplied daily by exchanging full5-gallon cans for empty cans. Empty containers arerefilled at the water supply point supporting the com-bat command. Full containers are sent forward tocombat elements on the kitchen trucks, or on ammu-nition resupply trucks when the kitchen vehicles arenot sent forward.

115. CLASS II AND IV SUPPLY

For definitions and methods of class II and IV sup-ply, see FM 17-50.

a. Clothing and Equip?,ent. Clothingand equip-ment are usually replaced when the battalion is inreserve positions or in bivouac. Companies send in-formal requests to the battalion S4. The battalionS-4 consolidates requisitions and procures the re-placement items.

b. Weapons, vehicles, and similar items. Duringcombat, companies make informal requests to thebattalion S-4 for replacement weapons and similaritems. These informal requests are accompanied,when practicable, with the damaged items and an in-formal certificate of loss, damlage, or destruction.Although the requisitions go through the battalionS-4, replacement vehicles are procured by the bat-talion motor officer through division ordnance. Re-placement for critically needed ordnance items likevehicular spare parts is made by direct exchange atthe ordnance maintenance company that supportsthe combat command. The battalion surgeon ob-tains medical items from the armored medical com-pany supporting the combat command, and thebattalion communication officer obtains signal equip-

108

mnent and parts from the armored signal detachmentsupporting the combat command. Requests forquartermaster, engineer, and chemical items are sub-mitted to the division technical services by the bat-talion S4.

116. CLASS III SUPPLY

For definitions and methods of class III supply,see FM 17-50.

a. Procuremernt. After refueling combat vehicles,fuel and ilu)ricant trucks return to the battalion fieldtrains with their load of empty 5-gallon drums. Inthe combat commiand trains area they are groupedwith fuel and lubricant vehicles of other units. Thesetrucks are dispatched iin convoy by the combat coin-mnand S-4 to division class III supply point wheretheir empty drums are exchangedl for full drums; thetrucks then return to the battalion field trains. Thetrucks with full drums are sent forward to the com-bat trains as needed.

b. Di.stribdution. Combat vehicles normally areresupplied wit lli fuel and lubricants during the after-dark resupply period. However, they may be resup-plied from the battalion combat trains during theday or during a lull in combat. As directed by thebattalion S-4, the supply vehicles move out uinderbattalion control to a specified battalion release point.Guides from each company report to this releasepoint, pick up the trucks. and lead them to the respec-tive company areas. The supply vehicles then go toeach individual combat vehicle in turn. Hand carryto combat vehicles is slow and tedious and shouldbe kept to a minimumn. Combat vehicles are not

109

moved to the rear for resupply, to avoid excessivemovement and confusion. After the trucks havecompleted the resupply they are guided back to thebattalion release point, where the battalion S-4 orhis representative meets them and conducts themback to the battalion combat trains area.

1-17. CLASS V SUPPLY

For definitions and methods of class V supply,see FM 17-50.

a. Initial Supply. The battalion begins combatwith a basic load of ammunition. This is a fixedamount of ammunition carried by individuals andby the organic combat and cargo vehicles of a unit.The basic load is determined and established by theDepartment of the Army. When specific combatsituations make it necessary, temporary adjustmentsof the basic load are prescribed by the commanderdirecting the operation.

b. Procurement. Combat is begun with basicloads intact. After replenishing the ammunition offront-line companies, empty and partially emptytrucks are grouped in convoy in the battalion combattrains area and returned to the battalion field trains.Upon arrival in the field trains area the commanderof the field trains, normally the battalion supply pla-toon leader, consolidates the loads and prepares atransportation order for the necessary ammunitionto replenish the basic load. Arrangements are madewith the combat command S-4 to dispatch the emptyvehicles in convoy, with protection if required, tothe division or army supply point for refill. Loaded

110

trucks then return to the battalion field trains wheretheir loads are balanced according to anticipatedrequirements of combat elements. They are sentforward as requested by the battalion S-4, so thatenough ammunition is available in the battalion com-bat trains for the immediate resupply of combatelements.

c. Distribution. Distribution of ammunition tocompanies is made similar to that of class IIIsupplies.

118. COMPOSITION OF VEHICULAR LOADS

Supply vehicles are normally loaded as follows:a. After obtaining loads at division or army supply

points, each resupply vehicle carries one item of aparticular class of supply. For example, one am-munition truck is loaded with tank amnmunition andanother with mortar ammullnition. Loading canbe done in less time this way because different itemsof supply are widely dispersed throughout thesupply point.

b. Upon return at the field train area, type loadsare formed to meet anticipated needs of the combatelements. For example, all ammunition trfurcks areloaded with several types of ammunition, and allfuel and lubricant trucks are loaded with gasoline,oil, gear lubricants, and grease. This insures thatthe minimum number of trucks will actually be in-volved in the resupply of combat elements, and thatthe destruction of one supply truck will not result inthe destrtuction of all of one particular item of supply.

e. From the battalion field train area, mixed or

111

balanced loads are used to resupply the combat ele-ments, either directly or from the battalion combattrain area.

Section II. MAINTENANCE, BATTLEFIELD RECOVERY,AND VEHICULAR EVACUATION

119. MAINTENANCE

The battalion commander is responsible for themaintenance of all vehicles, weapons, and equip-ment of the battalion. Each individual is chargedwith care and preventive maintenance for his in-dividual weapon and equipment. The armored in-fantry battalion is equipped and trained to per-form organizational maintenance and to accomplishbattlefield recovery of its own disabled vehicles. Allmat6riel and equipment must be kept in serviceablecondition at all times and efficient recovery andevacuation are needed to maintain a favorable bal-ance of combat equipment. Organizational main-tenance is the primary mission of all maintenanceunits of the battalion. Field and depot maintenanceare done by higher echelons.

120. CATEGORIES OF MAINTENANCE

a. Orga'nipatioval nlainteonance is maintenancedone by organizations on their own equipment.Drivers and crew members of vehicles, and operatorsof items of equipment, perform crew maintenance.They inspect, lubricate, clean, and make minor ad-justments on their equipment to maintain it in thecorrect working order. The crews or drivers makerepairs that can be made within their capabilities

112

and equipment. Deficiencies that cannotbe correctedby drivers or crews are reported to the companymaintenance section for repair. Organizationalmaintenance is done by personnel of the companymaintenance sections and the battalion maintenanceplatoon (including radio repairmen, tank and auto-motive mechanics, and armorers) who perform themore detailed checks, adjustments, and repairs, in-cluding the replacements of parts and assemblies.The extent of these repairs depends on the tacticalsituation, skill of the individuals, and the time, tools,and mlaterials available to do the job.

b. Field maintenaince is done by mobile and semi-mobile organizations. The items they repair arereturned to organizations, station stocks, or replace-ment pools. Field maintenance for divisional bat-talions is provided by the division ordnancemaintenance battalion, which is responsible for allmaintenance beyond the capabilities of combat unitsand for the evacuation of disabled vehicles that can-not be repaired by the battalion.

c. Depot maintenance is done in fixed installationsand consists of repairing and rebuilding equipmentfor return to depot stocks.

121. WEAPON MAINTENANCE

Small arms and other weapons are repaired by in-dividual users or crews when possible. If the repairscannot be made by individuals, crews, or companyand battalion maintenance persolnnel, the weapon isrepaired by a contact party or repair team from thedivision ordnance maintenance battalion, or it isevacuated to the company or detachment taken from

113

the ordnance maintelance battalion to support thecombat command.

122. RADIO MAINTENANCE

Radio maintenance is facilitated by the thoroughtraining of all company personnel (FM 17-70). Asinl the case of vehicles, preventive maintenance isstressed. All personnel are alert to prevent damageto radio sets from weather or from operation whenthe vehicle battery voltage is too low. The sets areperiodically checked, aired, cleaned, and adjusted.The communication sergeant and radio repairmanmake necessary repairs during halts, and in assemblyareas and bivouacs. The battalion communicationofficer supervises this activity. His duties are dis-cussed in paragraph 283.

123. RECOVERY AND EVACUATION OF VEHICLES

a. The vehicles and equipment of the companymaintenance section give maximum service supportto the company. This may require the use of itsarmored personnel carrier for the recovery of a liketype vehicle or a wheeled vehicle. The location andextent of damage to vehicles that cannot be recoveredor repaired are reported to the battalion mainte-nance platoon for recovery, evacuation, and repair.The battalion maintenance platoon is equipped withtank recovery vehicles.

b. The battalion maintenance platoon makes allrepairs within its capabilities. Vehicles that can-not be repaired are left on the battalion axis ofadvance and their locations are reported to the sup-

114

porting ordnance unit, or they are evacuated bybattalion recovery vehicle to the vehicle collectingpoint of the supporting ordnance unit.

c. The battalion motor officer coordinates his main-tenance and evacuation activities with the support-ing ordnance unit to insure maximum efficiency andthe quick return of repaired vehicles. To do this,the motor officer should maintain personal contactwith the supporting ordnance unit. The battalionmotor officer decides whether drivers should be leftwith their vehicles or returned to their unit. Withinthe division, the vehicle driver ordinarily accom-panies the disabled vehicle through the variouscategories of maintenance and assists in the repairof the vehicle. If the vehicle must be repaired byarmy ordnance units, the driver returns to the bat-talion. The battalion motor officer keeps the bat-talion commander, the executive officer, and the S4informed of the status of vehicular maintenance inthe battalion. This may be done through a dailystatus report that shows the number of combatvehicles within the battalion, by company, that areserviceable for combat; the number in the company,battalion, or supporting maintenance units; and thenumber lost through combat or administrativereasons.

d. In exploitation, battalion maintenance ele-ments spend a minimum amount of time on disabledvehicles, both for their own protection and to insurethat the other vehicles in the battalion get the neces-sary maintenance attention. If the vehicles can berepaired while the battalion is in an assembly area,they may be towed forward to the assembly area.

115

If they cannot be repaired, they are towed to the axisof evacuation and reported to the supporting ord-nance maintenance unit.

e. In a retrograde action, company maintenancesections make minor repairs. If displacement israpid, even minor repairs may not be possible andthe evacuation of vehicles then becomes the primaryconsideration. The battalion maintenance platoonassists company maintenance sections in every waypossible. Tanks and armored personnel carriersmay be used to evacuate disabled vehicles on roads,letting the recovery vehicles recover and evacuatevehicles to the axis of evacuation. In some situa-tions, the speed of withdrawal or the excessive num-ber of disabled vehicles may not permit completeevacuation. The battalion commander then decides,based on instructions from higher headquarters,whether remaining vehicles will be destroyed to pre-vent their capture by the enemy. All salvageableitems are removed from each vehicle beforedestruction.

Section III. MEDICAL SERVICE

124. BATTALION MEDICAL DETACHMENT

a. The battalion surgeon is responsible to the bat-talion commander for all matters pertaining to thehealth of the command, for efficient operation of thebattalion aid station, for emergency medical treat-ment on the battlefield, and for the evacuation of cas-ualties from the battlefield to the battalion aid sta-tion. For duties of the battalion surgeon see para-graph 281.

116

b. The battalion surgeon attaches three comparnyaid men to each rifle company. Normally an aidman lives, eats, sleeps, moves, and functions with acombat platoon. He gives emlergeucy first aid on thebattlefield, directs walking wounded to the aid sta-tion, and places other casualties in marked, protectedplaces to await the arrival of litter bearers.

c. The battalion surgeon uses the remainder ofmedical detachment to establish and operate thebattalion aid station. The station can be split toadvance or withdraw by echelon.

125. REMOVAL OF CASUALTIES FROM DISABLEDARMORED VEHICLES

All medical personnel and vehicle crew membersare instructed on removal of casualties from disabledarmored vehicles. The large amounts of fuel andammunition in an armored vehicle make it especiallyapt to catch fire and explode when disabled by enemyaction. Medical personnel are not always immedi-ately available. Therefore, all crew members mustbe trained to evacuate themselves and disabled fellowcrew members through the various hatches and enler-gency escapes.

126. LOCATION OF BATTALION AID STATION

When an armored infantry battalion is fightingdismounted, casualties are evacuated to the aid sta-tion by hand-carry or by 1/4 -ton vehicles. Duringthis phase the following factors are considered inlocating the aid station:

a. Tactical operation of the battalion.b. Expected areas of casualty density.

117

c. Protection offered by defilade.d. Lines of drift for walking wounded.e. Length of litter haul (usually between 300 and

800 yards from the front line)./. The absence of military targets.g. Concealment and security.h. Protection from the elements.i. Ease of future movements of the aid station.j. Accessibility to supporting medical troops.

127. EVACUATION OF CASUALTIES

a. Litter Bearers. When the necessity for evac-uation by hand-carry arises, the litter bearer platoonfrom the supporting medical company is usually re-quired to assist the organic litter bearers in theinfantry battalion.

b. The 1/4-Ton Truck With Litters. There is noprovision for litter bearers to ride in or on the com-bat vehicles. In addition to three company aid men,mounted evacuation team consisting of a driver, whois also a surgical technician, and a 1/4-ton truckwith litter securing brackets is provided for eacharmored infantry company. It usually follows thepersonnel carriers of the company. Whenever acompany from the battalion is attached to someother unit, a team goes with the company. Thisteam evacuates casualties from combat vehicles orfrom the battlefield to the battalion aid station.

128. TREATMENT, PROCESSING, AND EVACUATIONOF CASUALTIES AT BATTALION AID STATION

a. A wounded man arriving at the battalion aidstation is normally tagged with an emergency medi-118

cal tag, which indicates the treatment given him bythe company aid men. Additional treatment givenat the battalion aid station is also entered on thistag. The disposition of the case is entered in a logbook maintained in the aid station.

b. A function of the aid station is property ex-change and the handling of the individual equip-ment of casualties. A casualty evacuated from thebattalion aid station may be accompanied by suchitems as a blanket, a litter, and a traction splint. Theagency receiving the casualty replaces these itemsso that the aid station maintains its supply. Manycasualties enter the aid station with organizationalequipment, such as field glasses and individual weap-ons. These items are normally taken from the cas-ualties for return to the combat troops. The S-4,when notified by the surgeon, gets these items fromthe aid station and redistributes them.

c. The surgeon of the next higher headquarters isresponsible for evacuation from the battalion aidstation. Evacuation mnay be accomplished by attach-ing or placing in support ambulances from the sec-ond echelon medical services. The battalion ambu-lance is necessary for evacuation in many situations.It is the responsibility of the battalion suigeon toestablish personal contact with the surgeon of thenext higher headquarters. The battalion surgeonImst know the location, strength, and compositionof the medical unit that supports and supplies thebattalion medical detachment. He should keep thesupporting medical unit posted on the axis of ad-vance and probable location of the aid station.

I19

Section IV. BURIALS AND GRAVES REGISTRATION

.129. GENERAL

Burials, graves registration, and processing per-sonal effects are functions of the battalioi S-1. Thebattalion S4 is responsible for providing trans-portation to evacuate the dead from the battalionarea. Companies evacuate their dead to battaliongraves registration collecting points by hand or byvehicle as rapidly as possible. If the rate of ad-vance is too fast, or if enemy fire prevents evacuatingthe dead from company areas, their location isplainly marked and reported to battalion head-quarters. Battalion graves registration collectingpoints should be convenient to supply routes. Bat-talion either evacuates the dead to the divisiongraves registration collecting point or reports theirlocation to division.

120

CHAPTER 5

TRAINING

Section I. FUNDAMENTALS

130. REFERENCES

For references on training management and con[duct of training, see appendix I.

131. TRAINING OBJECTIVE

a. The objective in training the elements of thearmored infantry battalion is to develop proficiencyin basic infantry and armored infantry techniques.These techniques must then be adapted to the op-crating procedure and techniques of the reinforcedbattallions and combat commallnllds of the armoreddivision.

b. The training pro gram is based on the trainlngobjective and an estimate of the training situation.In making the training estimate, several variableswhich must be considered are the-

(1) Mlission (objective).(2) Present training status of the unit (cadre).(3) Number and type of replacements.(4) Time available for training.(5) Weather and climatic conditions.(6) Training area and facilities.(7) Status of equipment.(8) Obstacles to training.

9313580-51-9 121

(9) Subjects to be emphausized, including specialtechniques.

132. TRAINING PLANS

a. Objective. A specific training objective nor-mally is prescribed by the commanding general ofthe armored division. The higher authority issuesa training memorandum upon which the trainingprogram of the armored infantry battalion is based.

b. Information. Training information is fur-nished rapidly to elements of the battalion so thatsubordinate commanders may formulate their plansfor progressive training. Training is taken up inthe following sequence: individual technical andtactical training; unit training beginning with thesmallest tactical unit of the battalion and progressingupward through platoon, company, and battalion;and combined training of the different elementswithin the battalion. Later training progresses tocombined training with other arms, as conducted bythe combat command and arlmoled division, culmi-nating in combined field exercises and maneuvers.

c. Planning. Plannling is continuous. Battalionplans are revised to keep abreast of changing situ-ations and to secure maximum proficiency in eachsubject.

d. Instructor Training. Before formal trainingof the unit begins, officers and other key training per-sonnel are indoctrinated in the subjects and train-ing methods to be used in special classes. Thesespecial classes may be conducted as centralized train-ing by division headquarters, particularly for staffactivities.

122

e. Training Aids. Training aids of simple designand construction are made by the using unit if noneare available from other sources. Maximum use ofsuch aids as training films, film strips, charts, slides,models, mock-ups, and sand tables is made to en-liven and improve instruction.

133. CONDUCT OF TRAINING

a. Individulal Traininlg. Basic military and indi-vidual tactical training is normally accomplishedwithin the unit. Certain key technical personnelmay receive training under a centralized system ofinstruction conducted by higher headquarters, or atArmy Service Schools. The latter applies particularly to maintenance, communication, staff, and otherspecialist personnel.

b. Unit Tactical Training. Unit tactical trainingbegins upon completion of the individual phase oftraining. Tactical training includes-

(1) Explanation of the principles to be taught.(2) Demonstration of these principles.(3) Supervised practical work by the elements

of the unit.(4) A critique for the unit as a whole, with

special critique as necessary for key per-sonnel.

c. Points to be Emphasized. Points to be empha-sized in unit training are-

(1) Development of leaders.(2) Application of previous technical and in-

dividual training.(3) Unit teamwork.

123

(4) Preparation for combined training, maneu-vers, and combat operations.

Section II. INDIVIDUAL TRAINING

134. PURPOSE

The purpose of individual training is to convertthe individual into a soldier and prepare him tofunction effectively as part of the battalion fightingteam. First the individual is trained in essentialbasic military subjects, after which he receives in-strulction in individual tactical find technical skills.Throughout his instruction he receives a minimumof 5 hours of physical training weekly.

135. SPECIAL TRAINING

In addition to the basic infantry techniques, spe-cial training is conducted in-

a. The role of the armored division and reinforcedbattalion.

b. Mounted movement by organic vehicles.c. Crew drill, storage, and formations.d. Driving, mounted tactical formations, and crew

inaintenance.e. Scouting and patrolling, mounted./. Communication in the armored infantry bat-

talion.

Section III. UNIT TRAINING

136. PURPOSE

The purpose of unit training is to continue thetraining of personnel who have completed their in-

124

dividual training either in the unit or at a replace-ment training center. Unit training molds individ-uals into units and develops units into a well-trained,hard-hitting fighting team.

137. PHASES

a. The unit training program is divided into thefollowing phases:

(1) Squad, platoon, and reinforced platoon.(2) Covmpany and reinforced companies.(3) Battalion.(4) Combat cormmanid.

6. During the platoon anl com.pany phases eachelement is developed into a fighting team capableof operating vigorously and applying correct tech-niques in all tactical and unit exercises. Emphasisis placed on the development of initiative and lead-ership. During this phase all rifle platoons, themortar platoon of the rifle company. the battalionreconnaissance platoon, and the 81-mm mortar pla-toon are tested in combat firing proficiency.

c. The objective of the battalion phase is to developand perfect the battalion technique in the funda-mentals of tactical operations. This phase includestraining in marches and mauneuver, and exercisesteaching the proper handling of troops in a cam-paign, including administration, supply, mnainte-niance, and evacuation. During the company andbattalion phases, the battalion staff, intelligence,communication, maintenance, and supply agenciesare instructed in their duties and trained in battalionand combat command operating procedure.

125

d. The combat command phase applies the funda-mentals already mastered to the tactics, technique,supply and logistics, and operating procedure of thecombined arms teams within the combat command.

e. Basic and individual training is reviewed wher-ever necessary. Throughout all phases, unit train-ing is conducted in the coordination of the combinedarms organic to the armored division, particularlywith tank, artillery, and engineer units. Units arealso trained to operate in varied smoke densities withthe minimum loss in combat efficiency.

138. MINIMUM TRAINING SCHEDULES

See appendix VII for schedules and scopes to beused as a guide in planning unit training.

126

PART TWO

THE ARMORED INFANTRY RIFLECOMPANY

CHAPTER 6

THE RIFLE PLATOON

Section I. GENERAL

139. ORGANIZATION AND EQUIPMENT

The armored infantry rifle platoon has a platoonheadquarters, three rifle squads, and a light machinegun squad. Each squad is mounted in an armoredpersonnel carrier. The platoon headquarters rideswith a rifle squad. For details of organization andequipment see Tables of Organizatiol and Equip-ment 7-27N.

140. DUTIES OF PLATOON HEADQUARTERS PER-SONNEL

a. The platoon headquarters has two men, theplatoon leader and the platoon sergeant.

b. The platoon leader is responsible to the com-pany commander for the discipline and training ofhis platoon, for the maintenance and efficient op-eration of its vehicles, and for its success'in battle.

127

c. The platoon sergeant is second in command ofthe platoon and is the principal assistant of theplatoon leader. He keeps abreast of the situation atall times and is prepared at any time to assumecommand.

141. SQUAD LEADER

a. The squad leader commands his squad. He isresponsible for the discipline, appearance, training,control, and conduct of his squad. His squad istrained to use and care for its weapons and carrier,to move and fight efficiently as individuals, and tofunction effectively as a team with or without tanks.When the squad is mounted in carriers, the squadleader is the vehicle commander. He is responsiblefor maintenance of intervehicular distances inmounted formations, preventive maintenaunce of the'carrier, employmenlt of vehicular weapons, stowageof equipment and supplies in the carrier, and rota-tion of drivers on long marches.

b. The assistant squad leader performs duties as-signed by the squad leader. He takes command ofthe squad in the squad leader's absence. In combat,the assistant squad leader usually controls the fireof the automatic rifle team and any vehicular weap-ons which are used.

142. DRIVER

The driver is responsible for the efficient opera-tion of the personnel carrier. He works with thecompany maintenance section on all maintenance

128

and repair operations on his vehicle. He accom-panies his vehicle to the battalion maintenance pla-toon for major checks and repairs.

143. CONTROL AND COMMUNICATION

The platoon leader controls his platoon by oralorders, by radio, and by visual signals. He commu-nicates with company headquarters by radio, tele-phone, messenger, or visual signals. He has both amounted and dismounted radio net.

Section II. PLATOON COMBAT FORMATIONS

144. MOUNTED FORMATIONSMounted platoon combat formations are used dur-

ing the movement from the attack position to theline of departure and beyond. The formations areflexible. The type of terrain and available coverand concealment govern the position of each vehiclein the formation. The platoon leader'moves wherehe can best control his plaltoon. In selecting the for-mation to accomplish his mission, the platoon leaderconsiders the need for control, security, fire power,terrain, and enemy information. As the platoon ad-vances, he may change formations to fit the situation.When moving in formation, platoon security isachieved by giving each vehicle commlander a definitezone or sector of observation. WVhen an attack isexpected from a known direction, formations arechosen that permit rapid concentration of fire in thedirection of known enemy locations (figs. 22, 28, and24).

129

Eg : E ' ° ZZ _Z _ f j. -o

· ;1 .P 8Z; z

O - a

o 2 Z Ii

g~

z Z < z3 °z oI I O ._ _> J 0Z. 0j.L 0

oo,

0 ° -o:ozO

[0- "L. --

C) -- -

0 ~ "0

0,,: CYOse9 lC

0· " 6 'tb,- 0 L

130 ~ ~ ~ ~ - g ,, ~ o

O z _ 4I O

td0 z

O-I

I-11

' o o 1 J 0

O _ O110 0 L> C

-N | -_ 0

z

I < 0 O

on o

·S 0

_os

13 2

132

145. DISMOUNTED FORMATIONS

The company commander ordinarily decides onthe first formation and allows the platoon leaderto change it as necessary. The usual formationsare the platoon colunmn, vee, line, wedge, and eche-lon (app. III).

a. Platoon column is used to approach an enemyposition that is believed to be directly to the frontbut is not yet located. It is normally the best for-mation for movement in woods, smoke, fog, at night,and through defiles and along trails. It is easy tocontrol and is flexible because it provides all-aroundprotection and facilities immediate action toward theflanks.

b. Platoon nee is used when the enemy is believedto be directly to the front and his approximatestrength and location are known. The bulk of thefire power of the platoon can be directed to thefront. It provides security to both front and flanksand favors maneuver and control.

c. Platoon line is used when the location andstrength of the enemy are known. In this forma-tion, the platoon can deliver the greatest fire powerto the front in the shortest time. Suitable occa-sions for the line formation are a frontal attack, anattack against an enenmyv flank when maxilnmum firepower is desired, and in the assault phase of a nightattack. This formation permits rapid crossing ofareas exposed to mortar, artillery, and long rangemachine gun fire.

d. Platoon icedge is used when enemy strengthand dispositions are not known or when the platoon

133

is acting alone. Its all-around protection and easeof control give flexibility.

e. Platoon echelon right, or left is used to protectan open or exposed flank. It permits heavy fire tothe front and in the direction of the echelon.

146. TANK-ARMORED INFANTRY TEAM FORMA-TIONS

a. M[ounted. The formations adopted by the ele-ments of the team depend primarily on the methodof attack being used. Tanks and armored infantrymay attack in an integrated formation; that is, thetanks and carriers are combined into a single for-mation (fig. 25). When the mounted armored in-fantry follows the tank element by bounds, eachtank and armored infantry unit uses the formationbest suited to the accomplishment of its missions.

b. Dismounted. The formations adopted by theelements of the team are determined by the methodof attack used. The tanks may lead, the dismountedarmored infantry may lead, or the two may advancetogether. When the tanks initially support by fire,the dismounted armored infantry leads. If the tanksmove forward to join the armored infantry for theassault, either the tanks lead, followed closely bythe dismounted armored infantry, o0 the two ad-vance together in the assault. When tanks and dis-mounted armored infantry converge on the objectivefrom different directions, each uses the formationbest suited for its advance. Normally an integratedformation is selected for the assault. Either thetanks lead the assault or the tanks and dismountedarmoled infantry advance together in the assault.

134

As

JEi1

-A

S 1e I&EI

lc~a AIL I& la

@~~~ i

-ii~~~~~~i

1 35

147. SQUAD COMBAT FORMATIONS

a. The squad formations used during the variousstages of the attack are squad column, squad dia-mond, and as skirmishers. The initial formationis usually prescribed by the platoon leader; thele-after the squad leader changes his formation to meetchanges in the situation and terrain.

b. Squad colum,;n is usually the best formation formovement in woods, fog, smoke, and darkness, whencontrol is the governing factor. It is also used formoving along narrow trails a*nd through defiles. Thesquad column is easily controlled, gives observationin all directions, and permits immediate actiontoward the flanks.

c. Squad diamond is especially adapted to situ-ations that require readiness for action in ally direc-tion ; for example, when the squad is acting aloneor where a squad is the leading element of a platoon.This formation offers good control, all around secu-rity, flexibility, and dispersion.

d. As sk:irmishers is a preliminary fighting for-mation normally used after contact with the enenmyhas been gained but before the squad leader com-pletes his reconnaissance to determine the most fa-vorable location for the automatic rifle and vehic-ular weapons. This formation provides flexibilityby allowing the squad leader to place the automaticrifle team and vebicular machine guns carefully. Assoon as the squad leader determines the best locationfor the automatic rifle, he causes the squad to formas skirmishers with the automatic rifle right or left.After the automatic rifle team has been committed,

136

all the squad weapons may file to tile front. Unlessinstructions from the platoon leader prohibit, thesquad leader may use vehicular weapons on groundmounts or may place the carrier in hull defilade anddesignate riflemlen to man vehicular machine guns.IA skirmwi.s-leis is used in a frontal attack and duringthe assault. This formation is adapted to rapiddashes across open areas. particularly in areas ex-posed to enemy fire.

Section III. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK

148. GENERAL

Before all attack the platoon may halt in a cov-ered or defiladed area designated by the tank-armored infantry team commander or companycommander. This area is usually part of the com-pany or battalion assembly area. While the platoonis preparing for the attack, the platoon leader, ac-companied by the platoon sergeant and a messenger,goes to receive the company attack order. For theplatoon leader's estimate and troop leading proce-dures see paragraphs 37-39.

149. COMPANY ATTACK ORDER

a. The company attack order assigns the platoona mission either in the assault or the support. Ifthe platoon is in the assault echelon, it is given adefinite zone of action by the assignment of a par-ticular section of the line of departure. or an areafrom which to start its attack, a direction of attack,a time of attack, and a definite terrain objective or

031355'-51--10 137

a series of objectives to be captured. The platoon isseldom assigned boundaries; by coordination withthe adjacent unit, it can take advantage of coveredroutes in adjacent zones of action.

b. The armored infantry rifle company com-mander also coordinates tank-armored infantryteamwork when tanks are attached. This coordi-nation is accomplished by the tank company coin-minander when the rifle platoon is attached to a tankcompany.

150. METHOD OF ATTACK

a. The platoon may fight as a reinforced platoonof tanks and armored infantry; or it may fight with-out tank support. MAethods of attack used by rein-forced armored infantry rifle platoons and reil-forced tank platoons are covered in paragraphs 94-104. Maximum advantage is taken of the greatautomatic weapons fire power available to theplatoon.

b. Advancing dismounted without tanks as anassault element of a larger unit.

(1) The platoon advances fromn the line of de-parture to the assault position by fire andmaneuver. The platoon is supported bythe heavy indirect fires provided by theartillery and mortars.

(2) In some cases, prearranged supportingfires are adequate to keep the enemy downand neutralize his resistance throughout theadvance from the line of departure to theobjective. In this event, the platoon ad-vances rapidly as a unit across the line of

138

departure to the objective under the pro-tection of these heavy fires. These condi-tions make it unnecessary to add the firepower of riflemen to the supporting firesuntil the assault starts. If there is a suit-able firing position near the line of depart-ure, the light machine gun squad may addits fire to those of the other supportingweapons. Vehicular weapons also supple-ment the supporting fires.

(3) The platoon uses a covered approach if oneis available. If not, the platoon makes arapid frontal advance, taking maximum ad-vantage of available supporting fires andsmoke. When occasional enemy weaponsare encountered, they are taken under fireimmediately by the advancing riflemen.Ihis situation occurs often when the pla-toon attacks as a part of the company andbattalion in a coordinated attack.

(4) Prearranged supporting fires may not neu-tralize all enemy direct-fire weapons. Therifle platoon then reinforces the supportingfires with a portion of its own fires to letthe rest of the platoon advance. If thiscondition is determined before crossing theline of departure, a part of the rifle platoon(for example, a rifle squad and the lightmachine gun squad) may execuite a frontalattack to make the enemy's fires ineffectiveand hold him in position. At the same time,the rest of the platoon advances under theprotective fires of the first element, using

139

maximum cover. However, in most cases,where the supporting fires cannot neutrallizeenemy weapons or keep them neutrallized,the effect of those w-eaponls becomes appar-ent after the platoon crosses the line ofdeparture. 1When the platoon receives thefires of such weapl)os, the areas where theweapons are not neutralized are inmmedi-ately taken under fire by the advancingriflemen. If this enemy direct fire con-tinues, it may be necessary for the platoonleader to use fire and maneuver within theplatoon itself. He uses the fire of his or-ganic light machine-gun squad, any at-tached supporting weapons, and a portionof the rifle elements to neutralize the enemyweapons; the rest of the platoon maneuvers.The platoon leader also adjusts supportingfires of higher commanders on the enemyweapons not neutralized.

o. The platoon also attacks alone. To gain firesuperiority when attacking alone, the platoon usesa portion of its fire power to replace or add to thesupporting fires normally provided by higher com-mander. This usually is done in the followingsituations:

(1) When the platoon acts as a combat patroland only artillery and mortar concentra-tions are available on call by radio.

(2) WXhen the leading platoon in a dismountedapproach march makes contact and heavysupporting fires are not immediately avail-

140

able. The platoon then attacks aggres-sively. using fire and maneuver within itselfto rapidly overcome minor resistance.

(3) When in the exploitation or pursuit or inthe continuation of a fast moving attack,and supporting weapons have not displacedrapidly.

(4) When attacking over terrain such as heavywoods, jungles, or mountains, and support-ing weapons cannot be brought forward orhave no field of fire.

d. Coordination of the assault with the lifting ofsupport fires isa most important element in infantrycombat. The end of supporting fires is indicated tothe riflemen of the assault echelon by a visual signalfired by a selected supporting unit. Squads not al-ready deployed then move into formation as skir-mishers. The platoon takes up the assault fire andadvances rapidly to the objective as the artillery, mor-tars, and other supporting weapons lift their firesfrom the objective so as not to endanger friendlytroops.

151. ORDERS

a. The platoon leader usually issues his order at apreviously selected observation post. He orients hissquad leaders and tank unit leader by pointing outimportant terrain features. He may issue the orderin a covered position after orienting leaders at theobservation post. The platoon order includes-

(1) All pertinent enemy information; informa-tion about our own troops, including the

141

company objective, the missions of adjacentunits, and the support expected from allsupport weapons according to the plan ofsupporting fires.

(2) The platoon objective, line of departure,time of attack, formation, and direction ofattack.

(3) The line or area of departure for eachsquad, the mission or targets of each squad,security measures, and instruction for reor-ganization on the objective. Method of at-tack (if attacking with tanks), use of car-riers, and carrier weapons.

(4) The location of the battalion aid station andother necessary administrative details.

(5) Communication instructions, including pre-arranged signals, the platoon leader's loca-tion, and the location of the company com-mand post.

b. The platoon leader makes certain that all squadand attached unit leaders understand the order.Upon receipt of the order, the other leaders preparefor the attack.

Section IV. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK

152. EMPLOYMENT OF LIGHT MACHINE GUN SQUAD

a. Missions. The light machine gun squad is usedby the platoon leader to support the platoon. Itselects positions from which it can give maximumsupport to the attack. Its fires are usually underthe direct control of the weapons squad leader. The

142

squad displaces as the need arises to continue closesupport. Its missions may include-

(1) Supporting by fire the units of the platoonor units of adjacent platoons. The squadmay be directed to follow a specified rifleelement, or it may follow a general routealong a flank of the platoon, occupying suc-cessive firing positions.

(2) Protecting the platoon flanks.(3) Covering the platoon reorganization.(4) Breaking iup hostile counterattacks.(5) Operating vehicular machine guns and

rocket launchers as directed by the platoonleader.

b. Selection of Firing Positions. The platoonleader assigns a general position area and the squadleader selects exact primary and alternate firingpositions. Firing positions with desirable charac-teristics provide:

(1) Observation of the assigled targets or sec-tor of fire.

(2) Observation of friendly troops.(3) Direct fire without interference from

friendly troops, trees, or other obstacles.(4) Maximum protection against hostile ob-

servation and fire.(5) Covered routes for occupation and supply.

c. Tazryets. Appropriate targets for the lightmachine gun are crew-served weapons, small groupsof enemy, pillbox embrasures, lightly armored ve-hicles, and tank vision slits. Enemy whose generallocation is known lnay be effectively engaged withshort bursts of light machine-gun fire. In built-up

143

areas, light machine guns are used against definitelylocated targets in buildings.

d. Support by Light ulachine-gun Squads. Thelight machine-gun squad supports the advance ofthe platoon rifle elements. The squad leader ob-serves advancing riflemen, as well as the objective, sothat his squad's fire does not endanger friendlytroops. He looks for positions from which the teammay deliver oblique, flanking, or enfilade fire onenemy groups holding up the advance of his platoonor adjacent units. His squad may employ additionalvehicular weapons as directed by the platoon leader.

153. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK BY A REINFORCEDPLATOON

a. Formiations. A reinforced platoon crosses theline of departure in the formation ordered by thecompany commander. As the team advances, theplatoon leadei changes the formation to conform tothe method of attack, the terrain, enemy action, theneed for security, and to develop the maximum firepower of the team in the proper direction. Thearmored infantry element may advance mounted,dismounted, or both. See paragraphs 88 through104 for details of tank and armored infantry co-ordination in the attack. If a reinforced platoon isattacking alone, the initial formation is selected bythe platoon leader and changed as necessary.

b,. Ad Vancing Mounted. When tanks andmounted armored infantry are advancing to the ob-jective, mlaximunl use is made of tank and carriermtichine guns. The team advances as rapidly as ter-rain conditions permit, firing all machine guns as

144

soon as it comes witIhin effective range of the enemy.The tank gun is employed on pin point targets suchas antitank gun positions, embrasures of pillboxes,and enemy tanks. Mlachine gun fire of tanks andcarriers is not withheld until definite targets arelocated; it is placed on every known and suspectedenemy position. This massed fire pins down theenemy, denies him observation and movement, neu-tralizes his weapons, and breaks his will to resist.The armored infantry element of the reinforcedplatoon advances as far as possible in personnel car-riers. It may use either the integrated formation oftanks and mounted armored infantry, follow thetank element by bounds, or approach the objectivefrom a direction different from the tank element.The armored infantry remains mounted until forcedby enemy fire or terrain to dismount; it normallydismounts to launch the final assault (fig. 26).

c. Advancing Dismounted. Condition of the ter-rain, the enemy situation, or the mission, may requirea dismounted advance. An attack that startsmounted may change to dismounted if terrain con-ditions or enemy weapons force the armored in-fantry to dismount. The attack is then continueddismounted without any further orders or instruc-tions. The tanks support the dismounted armoredinfantry by fire and take part in the assault unlessnatural or artificial obstacles prevent it.

154. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK DISMOUNTED WITH-OUT TANK SUPPORT

a. The platoon moves across the line of departureusing available cover and concealment. Enemy fire

145

016

Ag

I;, a~~

I~~~~a

and observation are neutralized by supporting firesand smoke. Mortar and artillery fires cover themovement of the assault rifle platoon to within as-saulting distance (usually 50 to 100 yards) of theobjective. The advance is as rapid as possible.Whllen the advance rifle units are within assaultingdistance of the objective, the supporting fires arelifted on call by the company or battalion com-mander, and the assault is started immediatelyunder cover of their own direct-fire weapons.

b. During the platoon's advance to the objective,it avoids long-range macline-gun, mortar, and artil-lery fires by using defilade to by-pass impact areas,or by moving as fast as possible through the dangerarea. When the terrain or the size of the enemyconcentration permits by-passing, this method is thebest. Fires that cannot be by-passed must often becrossed. This is done rapidly since defensive firesusually increase in intensity and accuracy nearer thedefensive position. Halts usually result in unnec-essary casualties because of the increased time ofexposure to enemy fire. When the platoon is haltedby enemy action, the platoon leader immediately re-ports his position, the enemy Iaction that caused hishalt, and any other pertinent information to hiscompany commander. The platoon resumes theadvance as soon as possible.

c. When the platoon receives short-range firesfrom enemy weapons within effective range of theplatoon weapons, the platoon immediately opens fireon the enemy weapons. Advance in this phase ofthe attack is made by fire and maneuver. Specifictargets holding up the advance are pointed out to

147

the leaders of supporting weapon units, to accom-panying forward observers, and to the companycommander. At the same time the platoon leaderadvances his platoon by pinning the enemy downwith the fire of one platoon element while the re-mainder of the platoon moves forward under coverof this fire. Then the moving element of the plhttoonoccupies firing positions and covers the advance ofthe other element. Maneuver in the zone of an ad-jacent platoon may be necessary, and is done aftercoordinating with the adjacent platoon (fig. 27).

d. The platoon protects its flanks by having con-necting groups maintain contact with adjacentunits. When a considerable gap develops betweenhis platoon and an adjacent platoon, the platoonleader reinforces the connecting group and promptlyreports the situation.

e. The carriers follow the platoon by bounds fromdefilade to defilade. They provide overhead ma-chine-gun fire support. The platoon leader may as-sign the assistant squad leader of the light machine-glln squad to remain with the carriers to control theirfire and direct their movement by bounds behind theplatoon. To maintain communication between pla-toon headquarters and the carriers and to controlmovement of the carriers, a dismounted radio is leftwith the carriers. Vehicular weapons used onground moulnts are manned by riiemen from thelight machine-gun squad. The drivers may mancarrier machine guns if the carriers are in hull defi-lade and it is not planned to occupy another firingposition before seizing the objective. If carriers fol-low by bounds to give supporting fire, each rifle

148

SERGEANT MOVE YOURSQUAD UP TO THE LEFT FLANK

.' ' ~ TO THOSE WOODS AND GET

ENEMY TO OUR FRONT

'igure 27. The platoon adFancing disrounted without tankEsupport.

149

squad leaves one rifleman in the carrier as a gunner.Carriers are sometimes retained under company con-trol when personnel dismount, as in a river crossingor a stealth night attack. In each of these situa-tions, carriers would be left in the attack position orin the assembly area. The assembly area would bechosen if a high degree of secrecy is desired. Theattack position would be chosen if protection by thecarriers is more desirable than secrecy.

155. ASSAULT FIRE

Assault fire is the heavy fire of assault elements asthey close on the enemy. Dismounted men fire fromthe hip or shoulder, walking forward as fast andsteadily as the terrain permits. Each man fires atleast one shot every two or three paces at any rise inthe ground, bush, tree, or point that might possiblyconceal an enemy. Assault fire is characterized byvolume rather than by accuracy. Its purpose is notonly to kill and wound the enemy but also to terrifyand demoralize him. The shock effect of the sup-porting fires makes the enemy hug the ground withhis weapon idle. Assault fire keeps him there orforces him into a hurried and disorderly retreat.The enemy is given no time to recover from the shockof the assault. All weapons, including hand gre-nades, are used to confuse and destroy him. Whentanks take part, fire of the tank weapons is employedthroughout the assault.

156. REINFORCED PLATOON IN ASSAULT

The assault may be made with tanks and armoredinfantry on line together, or with tanks followed

150

immediately by dismounted armored infantry.Whichever method is used, the tanks destroy enemygroups, defensive works; weapons, and emplacementsby direct fire. The riflemen close with and destroythe enemy in close combat and protect the tanksfrom individual antitank weapons. Each rifle squadis located in a formation according to the positionof one of the tanks. One member of the rifle squadis selected by the squad leader to walk behind thetanks and watch for signals both from the tank com-mander and the squad leader. As soon as the assaultstarts, the tanks advance slowly onto the objectivefiring their machine guns. Carrier machine gunsare used to support the assault until masked by ad-vancing riflemen. The riflemen and automatic rifle-men use assault fire to close with the enemy. The re-inforced platoon advances rapidly to the far side ofthe objective, where it prepares to continue the at-tack or to reorganize.

157. ASSAULT WITHOUT TANK PARTICIPATION

a. Rifle Squad in Assault. The final phase of anyattack is the assault. In preparation for the assault,the squad works its way up to the objective by keep-ing as close as possible to the supporting fires andtaking maximum advantage of the shock effect ofthese fires on the enemy. When the supporting firesare lifted, the squad starts the assault and closesrapidly, delivering assault fire on the objective untilit is captured. The assistant automatic rifleman doesnot fire but assists the automatic rifleman. If car-riers are available, the carrier's machine guns arefired by designated riflemen to support the assault

151

until their fire is masked. The squad leader andassistant squad leader seldom fire but take positionsseveral paces in rear of the squad to enforce thecontinuity of fires and to control the alinement ofthe men.

b. Rifle Platoon in Assault. When the platoonattacks as part of the company, the assault is madeat a specified time or on a signal from the companycommander. If a platoon is assaulting alone, theplatoon leader signals for the lifting of supportingfires. As the supporting fires lift, the.objective iscovered with fire from all available platoon weapons.The enemy is beaten down, thrown into disorder,or destroyed by fires from rifles, automatic rifles,rifle grenades, hand grenades, and rocket launchers.The platoon does not hesitate or stop at the nearedge of the objective but drives forward to the faredge before the enemy has time to recover from theinitial shock of the assault. Immediately upon ar-rival at the far edge of the objective, the platoonprepares for counterattack and for continuation ofthe attack to the next objective.

158. REORGANIZATION

a. Preparation to D)eend Against Couznterattack.The platoon leader's first consideration after captureof the objective is to dispose the platoon quickly torepel a counterattack. So that each squad leadermay know the position of his squad on the objective,the attack order divides the objective into tentativesquad sectors. This may be done by the clock sys-tern, superimposing an imaginary clock on the objec-tive with the center of the clock on the center of the

152

objective (fig. 28). The'direction of the enemy tothe front is 12 o'clock; squad sectors are then assignedby hour numbers.

Erawmple. 1st squad defend and reorgnnize from 12 o'clockto 4 o'clock; 2d squad, from 8 o'clock to 12 o'clock; 3d squad,friom 4 o,'clock to 8 o'clock.

Immediately upon capture of the objective the squadsmove, without further orders, to their assigned loca-tions. The tanks cover enemy avenues of approachand provide antitank protection for the team. Tlheplatoon leader inspects the platoon area as soon aspossible and makes adjustments to take advantageof the terrain and to meet enemy resistance. Car-riers are brought forward and placed in full de-filaded firing positions or under cover in the platoonarea.

b. Preparation to Continue the Attack. As soonas positions are secured to repel possible counter-attack, the platoon leader prepares to continue theattack. A report is sent to the company commanderstating the effective strength of the platoon, the con-dition of vehicles and weapons, and the status ofammunition. Orders for a continuation of theattack are usually issued by the company comn-mander. The platoon leader makes a brief recon-naissance to the front and flanks. He looks for4Ivailable routes forward, makes an estimate of thesituation. formulates a plan for the continuation ofthe attack, and issues an attack order.

159. SUPPORT PLATOON

a. In the early phases of an attack, the rifle com-pany commander often keeps a platoon or a rein-

931358s--5--11 153

1ST SQUAD

0 -2

REORGANIZE FROM .

igure 28. Reorganization on the objective.

154

forced platoon in support. Support platoon mis-sions may be to-

(1) Provide flank security by means of combatpatrols.

(2) Maintain contact with adjacent units.(3) Envelope or attack the flanks of enemy

holding up the assault elements.(4) Take over the mission of an assault platoon

if it becomes disorganized, lost, or suffersexcessive casualties.

(5) Mop up objectives overrun by the assaultechelon.

(6) Give supporting fire to the attackingplatoons.

(7) Protect the reorganization of the assaultechelon.

b. The support platoon advances by bounds asdirected by the company commander. It moves incarriers as far forward as possible. The platoonleader prevents it from merging with the assaultelements. During the advance the support platoonleader constantly observes the action of the assaultelements and the situation on the flanks. As thesituation progresses, he makes tentative plans for theuse of his platoon.

Section V. SUSTAINED DEFENSE

160. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT

a. General. An armored infantry rifle companyorganizes its defense area by assigning areas to itsrifle platoons. Each rifle platoon is assisted by thefires of supporting weapons. A platoon defense area

155

may be classified-according to location-as a front-line area, a support area, or a reserve area. Eachof these areas is organized similarly. Each platoonnormally occupies one defense area; however, theterrain may require that elements of one platoon oc-cupy separate defense areas. In this case, each areais separately commanded and operates directlyunder the company commander.

b. Ml/i.isions.(1) The mission of the front-line platoon is,

with the support of other units, to stop theenemy in front of the main line of resistanceand to repel him by close combat if hereaches it.

(2) The primary mission of the szzpport platoonis to support the front-line platoons by fire.Other missions include extending in depththe defense of the company area; protectingthe flanks and rear of the company area;limiting penetrations; and, under excep-tional conditions, ejecting the enemy bycounterattack.

(3) For employment of a platoon in the re-serve company area, see paragraphs 255-258.

161. PLATOON DEFENSE ORDER

When practicable, the platoon defense order is is-sued from an observation point overlooking the pla-toon defense area. For troop leading procedure seeparagraph 40. The defense order follows the samefive paragraph form as the platoon attack order

156

(par. 151) with the following additional instruc-tions:

a. Location and sector of fire for each rifle squad.b. Location, mission, and sector of fire for each

automatic rifle, rocket launcher, light machine gun,and attached weapons.

c. Organization of the ground, including type ofemplacements, auxiliary defenses to be constructed,and priority of work.

162. FRONTAGE AND DEPTH IN SUSTAINED DEFENSE

a. Frontages. The company commander assignsfrontages to his rifle platoons according to the nat-ural defensive strength and relative importance oftheir defense areas. If a platoon occupies an areahaving poor observation and poor fields of fire, orheavily wooded or broken terrain, the frontageusually does not exceed 300 yards. If the area isopen and provides longer fields of fire, a frontageof (i00 yards may be assigned. If the terrain is openand fiat, or if an obstacle across its front makes anenemy attack in strength very difficult, the frontageassigned to the platoon may exceed 600 yards. Thefrontage physically occupied by the platoon is deter-mined by the intervals that can be left between fox-holes without jeopardizing the effectivness of thedefense, and by the number of supporting weaponswithin the area. These intervals are determined byobservation, fields of fire, and obstacles. In gen-eral, they vary from 5 to 20 yards. Under normalconditions a 25-yard interval is allowed for eachcrew-served weapon in the platoon area. The pla-

157

toon covers by fire any portion of its front that isnot physically occupied.

b. Depth. If the platoon has good fields of fireto the flanks and rear from its front-line foxholes,it may use a depth of only 50 yards. If elementsof the platoon must move from the forward positionsto get adequate fields of fire to the rear, a depth upto 200 yards may be used.

163. DISTRIBUTION OF RIFLE SQUADS IN SUSTAINEDDEFENSE

a. The three rifle squads of a front-line platoonare placed to deliver their heaviest volume of fireforward of the main line of resistance, both imme-diately in front of the platoon defense area andacross part of the front of adjacent platoons. When-ever possible the rifle squads will dismount the vehic-ular machine gun from their squad carriers andemplace it within their squad position to strengthentheir defensive fires. When gaps exist between pla-toons, the flank squads are disposed to cover them.Rifle squad positions are adjusted to place support-ing weapons in the platoon area at points where theycan get their best fields of fire.

b. The rifle squads of the support platoon and ofthe platoons of the reserve company, are disposedto deliver their heaviest volume of fire forward oftheir platoon defense areas. They cover gaps be-tween the forward platoons and are mutually sup-porting. They are disposed as in a front-line pla-toon. Exceptionally, a platoon may occupy twodefense areas, with the platoon sergeant in commandof one. integrity of rifle squads is maintained.

158

c. Unless the men of the platoon can fire to theflanks and rear from their primary individual em-placements, supplementary positions are preparedfor all-ground defense. Plans are made for shiftingpart of the platoon to these positions. Natural cover,drainage lines, ditches, trenches, and other defiladeare used for movement to supplenientary positions(fig. 29).

1 -· 150-300 YARDos

1]-~----- 300-600 YARDSFigure 29. Rifle platoon in defense (.schematic).

159

164. FIRE PLAN

a. The rifle platoon leader familiarizes himselfwith the parts of the battalion and company fireplans that affect the defense of his area. He thenplans the fires of his weapons, organic and attached,to provide the maximum defense of the platoon areain coordination with the company and battalion fireplans. The rifle platoon fire plan includes the as-signment and coordination of sectors of fire for eachrifle squad and for weapons under the direct controlof the platoon.

b. The rifle platoon leader tells his men how thefires will be controlled. Measures to control platoonfires normally include-designation of terrain fea-tures over which the enemy must pass before theplatoon opens fire; signals for shifting fires or mov-ing to supplementary positions; and signals for finalprotective fires,

165. COMMAND AND OBSERVATION POST

The platoon leader does not have separate com-mand and observation posts. He selects a positionfrom which he can best observe the front and flanksof his area and control his troops. His position pref-erably has cover for messengers and concealed routesto the company command post. The platoon ser-geant is placed where he can best assist the platoonleader in the control of the platoon. He watchesthe platoon leader for commands, and controls thatpart of the platoon most difficult for the platoonleader to control directly. Forward observers andcommanders of supporting weapons located in the

160

area usually station themselves within easy commu-nicating distance of the platoon leader.

166. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND

a. When the platoon reaches its defense area, crew-served weapons are immediately mounted in tem-porary firing positions, fields of fire are cleared, andwork is begun on the position. Weapons emplace-ments and foxholes are dug, and positions are con-cealed from air and ground observation. Coveredand concealed routes for supply, communication, andevacuation are prepared as are overhead cover, alter-nate and supplementary positions, wire entangle-ments, and other obstacles if time permits. Thecompany order normally states the sequence in whichthe tasks will be done. This sequence may be-

(1) Preparing foxholes and weapons ermplace-nments.

(2) Clearing fields of fire.(3) Constructing wire entanglements and other

obstacles.(4) Preparing routes for supply, communica-

tion, and evacuation.(5) Laying antitank mines, trip flares, and

antipersonnel mines (with engineer super-vision).

b. The front-line rifle platoon distributes its fireto cover its front and flanks and part of the frontsof adjacent platoons. Each rifle squad is given asector of fire. These sectors overlap to get completecoverage of the target area. Each automatic rifle isemrplaced where it can cover the most of the squad

161

sector of fire and can fire across the fronts of adja-cent squads. It is assigned a principal direction offire that covers a specific terrain feature or a gap inthe final protective fires of the supporting weapons.

c. The light machine glnhs are assigned sectors offire and a final protective line. They are placedwhere they give maximum protection to the platoondefense area, exchange mutually supporting fireswith adjacent units, and deliver final protective fires.

d. See chapter 1 for factors affecting employmentof vehicular 7machine gu/ns.

e. Tanks attached to front-line armnored infantryrifle companies ordinarily occupy firing positions inor near platoon defense areas during daylight. Atnight they occupy positions inside the nearest pla-toon defense area. In some situations, the tanksattached to front-line armored infantry rifle com-panies may occupy positions in the rear of platoondefense areas on alert to move into previously se-lected positions up front. These tanks provide themain antitank protection for the front-line armoredinfantry units. The rifle platoon leader coordinatesclosely with tank unit leaders in or near his area.

f. The rocket launchers are assigned sectors of fireand principal directions of fire. They are placedwhere they can give maximum antitank protection tothe platoon defense area. Their principal directionof fire is coordinated with nearby tanks.

g. The support platoons and platoons of the re-serve company assign squad sectors of fire that com-plete the all around, integrated defense of the area.They cover unit flanks and gaps between units, andare prepared to fire on an enemy penetration or en-

162

velopment. Their machine guns are assigned prin-cipal directions of fire to cover gaps between forwarddefense positions, and to cover likely routes of hos-tile approach within the battle position. The rocketlaunchers are used as in front-line platoons.

167. DISPOSITION OF VEHICLES IN SUSTAINED DE-FENSE

Normally, vehicles of front-line platoons and sup-port platoons of front-line rifle companies are sentto the rear. The vehicles of all front-line elementsmay be grouped in covered and concealed vehicleassembly areas under company control, or they maybe placed in similar assembly areas under battalioncontrol. Platoons of companies in battalion reserveretain control of their vehicles to facilitate counter-attack.

168. CONDUCT OF THE SUSTAINED DEFENSE

a. The platoon assigned a defensive mission holdsits position at all costs. It withdraws only uponthe verified order of the company commander. Suc-cessful defense depends on each unit holding itsarea. During the hostile preparatory fires, theplatoon takes cover in its prepared positions, but assoon as the fires cease, all weapons are readied tomeet any hostile ground attack. Fire is withhelduntil the enemy comes within effective rifle range(maximum 500 yards).

b. The platoon leader's duties during the conductof the defense include-

163

(1) Fire control, including the opening of firesand the shifting of fires to the most danger-ous targets.

(2) Requests for additional supporting fires asrequired.

(3) Shifting of men witlin the platoon positionto defend it.

(4) Keeping the company commander informedof the situation.

c. Unit leaders control the fires of their units anddirect thein against the most threatening targets.The platoon leader maintains fire control by contin-uous observation and well-timed orders. If an ad-jacent defense area is penetrated, fire is directedagainst the enemy to keep him from widening thebreak and enveloping nearby platoons. If theplatoon is threatened with envelopment, the platoonleader changes the dispositions of his men to get all-around defense of his area. Except in emergencies,nonorganic weapons in the platoon area are shiftedonly with approval of the commanders concerned.

169. SECURITY

The platoon provides its own local security by con-stant observation to the front, flanks, and rear.Enough men are kept alert at all times to maintainan effective warning system. A sentry is posted ineach squad area to give warning of hostile groundor air approach. Sentries should be relieved atleast once every 2 hours. Additional security meas-ures may be prescribed in the company defense order.

164

Section VI. MOBILE DEFENSE

170. GENERAL

For a discussion of mobile defense see paragraphs411 and 412. The armored infantry rifle platoonmay be employed either as part of a reinforced corn-pany on the outpost system or as a part of a rein-forced company in the reserve.

171. PLATOON AS PART OF A REINFORCED COM-PANY ON THE OUTPOST SYSTEM

The reinforced rifle platoon occupies that part ofthe company sector on the outpost system ordered bythe company commander. It may occupy a key ter-rain feature, block a critical avenue of approach, or,where there are no dominating terrain features inthe platoon sector, act as a security force on a widefront.

172. REINFORCED PLATOON ON OUTPOST

The armored infantry rifle platoon (reinforced)on outpost is responsible for its own security. Byconstant alertness and the use of security detach-ments the platoon leader protects his platoon frombeing surprised. Security detachments may includecombinations of the following:

a. Observation posts are located to give observa-tion over the entire platoon sector. Ground and ve-hicular radios are used to provide communicationbetween the platoon command post and each obser-vation post. Observers are provided with binocu-lars. All observed activity is reported to the platoon

165

leader who in turn reports it at once to the companycommander. Forward observers from the battalionand company mortar platoons and direct support ar-tillery may have observation posts in the platoon sec-tor; if so, their activities are coordinated with therifle platoon leader.

b. Listening posts normally consist of two men.They give early warning of a hostile attack whenvisibility is restricted. Listening posts are locatedto cover favorable enemy approaches. Positionsshould be selected to provide cover, concealment, andgood routes of withdrawal. Frequent reliefs keepfresh men on duty and insure an alert warning sys-tem. Listening posts replace observation posts dur-ing darkness and under conditions of reduced visi-bility.

a. Visiting patrols, consisting of two or three men,cover the intervals in the outpost system and main-tain contact between stationary security elements.Visiting patrols contact elements of the outpost sys-tem from right to left, and at irregular intervals, toprevent the enemy from discovering the patrolsystem.

173. ROAD BLOCKS AND DEFENSE OF OBSTACLES

Often the reinforced rifle platoon is given the mis-sion of establishing road blocks or defending ob-stacles. The force necessary for such a missionvaries from a rifle squad to a reinforced platoon.Depending on the situation, the company commandermay direct that the defense be maintained at allcosts until a specified time or until enemy pressurethreatens to overrun or outflank the position.

166

Troops and weapons are placed so that they caneffectively cover by fire the road, the area on eitherside of the obstacle, and the approaches to it. Inperiods of good visibility positions are placed farenough from the road or obstacles to avoid the zoneof dispersion of enemy fire directed at the road orobstacle. During periods of poor visibility, posi-tions are occupied closer to the obstacle but beyondhand grenade range. An observation or listeningpost is established to give adequate warning of theapproach of an enemy force. The leader placesguards to warn friendly personnel of the obstacleor to prevent unauthorized personnel from goingbeyond it. He maintains contact with his com-mander and promptly notifies him of enemy actionand developments in the situation.

174. FIRE PLAN

The platoon leader familiarizes himself with thecompany fire plan, and fits the platoon plan into it.His fire plan includes the use of the organic platoonweapons, tanks, attached weapons, and the vehicularweapons. Rocket launchers are used to-

a. Cover likely avenues of al)proach for enemyarmor not covered by friendly tanks.

b. Provide close-in defense of crew-served weap-ons and vehicles not protected by friendly tanks.

c. Defend command posts, aid stations, or supply)oints.d. Engage enemy crew-served weapons and massed

personnel. (Ammunition supply may restrict thissecondary mission.)

167

175. DISPOSITION OF CARRIERS

In mobile defense, carriers remain with their pla-toons. Their disposition or use is the responsibilityof the platoon leader. Vehicles are not exposedneedlessly. However, they are kept where they willbe readily available to the squads at all times.

176. CONTROL

The platoon leader controls his platoon by radio,messengers, and prearranged visual signals.

177. CONDUCT OF MOBILE DEFENSE

As soon as the enemly comes within range he isbrought under fire. The platoon leader riequests thepreplanned fires of the mortars and artillery on areaswhere the enemy may be entering. He also uses pre-p)lanned fires as reference points to request additionalfires. The platoon does not withdraw, even tlnderpressure, without orders or approval from the com-pany commander. When the higher Ulnit reservecounterattacks, the platoon supports the counter-attackilng elements by fire.

178. PLATOON AS PART OF REINFORCED COMPANYIN BATTALION RESERVE

The platoon that is part of a reinforced companyin battalion reserve is at first located in the battalionreserve area. It may be used to assist in blockinghostile penetrations; it may be used to reinforce ex-isting outposts; or it may be used to participate inthe counterattack if the battalion is in combat com-miand (division) reserve.

168

CHAPTER 7

THE 60-MM MORTAR PLATOON

Section I. GENERAL

179. ORGANIZATION AND DUTIES

The 60-nmm mortar platoon consists of a platoonheadquarters and three 60-mm mortar squads. Theplatoon headquarters is mounted in a l/4 -ton truckwith trailer. Each squad is mounted in an armoredpersonnel carrier.

a. The platoon leader is responsible to the com-pany commander for the discipline, training, andcontrol of his platoon; for the maintenance and effi-cient operation of its vehicles; and for its success inbattle. He advises the company conmmander on theuse of his platoon and controls its actions throughappropriate orders. He goes where lie can best in-fluence the action of his platoon; however, since hissquad will normally be attached to or in direct sup-port of the assault platoons, lie acts principally asanll advisor to the company commander and platoonleaders on the tactical employment of the mortars.When the mortar squads are in direct support of theassault platoons, lie supervises their employment;when in general support, lie personally controls theirfire.

b. The -platoon. serg/eant is second in command ofthe platoon. He keeps abreast of the platoon's tac-

031358'5 1-12 169

tical situation, supervises ammunition supply, andassists the platoon leader in observation and firecontrol. He assumes command during the absenceof the platoon leader.

e. The /4-ton truck driver is used by the platoonleader to operate the vehicular voice radio in theabsence of the platoon leader and to transport am-munition with the truck and trailer in emergency.

180. DUTIES OF SQUAD LEADER

The squad leader is responsible for the training,discipline, and conduct of the members of his squad.He moves his squad to its position area, selects andsupervises the preparation and occupation of theexact firing position, and uses his carrier and ammil-nition bearers to supply ammlluition. When hissquad is in general support of the company, thesquad leader supervises the operation of his squad.AWdhen his squad is in direct support of, or attachedto, an assault platoon, the squad leader supervisesthe employment of the squad and controls, observes,and adjusts its fire.

181. CONTROL

a. The amount of control the platoon leader exer-cises over the platoon depends on the time availableto reconnoiter and to issue orders, on the liumber ofelements of his platoon detached to assault elements,on his ability to observe the zone of action, and tocontact his units, and on the speed and intensity ofthe action.

170

b. In the attack the platoon may be used in generalsupport of the company to increase the flexibility offires and to insure continuity of supporting firesduring displacement. However, because of limita-tions of terrain and difficulty in maintaining control,the squads of the 60-mm mortar platoon may beplaced in direct support of or attached to the assaultplatoons. When the mortar squads are attachedto rifle platoons, control passes to the leader of theunit to which they are attached. The mortar pla-toon leader helps the rifle platoon leaders by usinghis platoon lheadquarters personnel to locate firingpositions and targets, by getting firing data, and byhandling ammunition supply.

c. In the defense, when sectors of fire and observa-tion are not limited, the most effective fire and con-trol are obtained by using the 60-mm mortar platoonin a platoon position in general support of the com-pany. Normally firing positions are then in thevicinity of the support platoon. When sectors offire and observ'ation are limited so as to prevent cov-erage of the company front, the platoon may bedivided and mortars placed in the front-line platoonareas.

182. CONDUCT OF FIRE

The 60-mm mortar platoon may be given definitetargets or target areas. Since the platoon normallyis used by squads, definite targets are assigned toeach squad. The fire of each squad is conducted byits squad leader, in coordination with the supportedrifle platoon leader. Each 60-mm mortar usually

171

is located within voice distance of the squad leader(observer). When the platoon is used in generalsupport, the squads are assigned and engage targetareas as directed by the mortar platoon leader. Fireis conducted as explained in FM 23-85.

183. OBSERVATION

Observation for the 60-mm mortar squads in directsupport of or attached to the rifle platoons is ob-tained and maintained by the squad leaders whoconduct the fire of their respective mortars. Eachobservation post must provide observation offriendly troops and observation of the target area orsector of fire. It must be within voice or arm-and-hand signaling distance (100 yards) of the mortarposition. Communication between the mortar squadleader and the supported rifle platoon leader is byradio. When in general support of the company, thefires of the platoon are controlled, observed, and ad-justed by the platoon leader from a platoon observa-tion post that provides observation of the companyzone of action. Communication between the platoonobservation post and the mortar positions is by voice,signal, radio, or available sound-powered telephones.

Section II. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK

184. GENERAL

a. Before the attack, the platoon may be directedto halt in a covered or defiladed area designated bythe company commander. This area is part of thecompany or battalion assembly area. While the

172

platoon is preparing for the attack under the super-vision of the platoon sergeant, the platoon leader,accompanied by a messenger, goes forward withthe company commander to plan the attack.

b. The company commander may order the mortarplatoon to occupy firing positions to protect theassembly area, or the weapons may remain on car-riers within the platoon area. This decision dependson the tactical situation, the length of time the unitwill remain in the assembly area, and the availabilityof battalion and other supporting weapons for pro-tection of the assembly area. The 60-mm mortarplatoon rarely occupies firing positions when thecompany is in a battalion assembly area. The mor-tars then remain on the carriers in the platoon area.

185. COMPANY COMMANDER'S ORDERS

Based upon recommendations from the mortarplatoon leader, the company commander uses themortar platoon to further the company plan ofattack. This decision is issued as a part of the com-pany attack order. The order gives specific missions,platoon position areas, targets or sectors of fire, at-tachments to assault platoons, time of opening fire,and plan of reorganization. It may give the condi-tions governing displacement, and provisions forammunition resupply.

186. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT

The fires of the mortar platoon are coordinated atfirst by the company attack order. The 60-rmm mor-tars are usually placed in squad positions where

173

they can engage targets that are holding up the ad-vance of the assault platoons. The mortars usuallyare displaced by squad when their fires can no longergive close support. After capture of the objective,the 60-mm mortars protect the reorganization of thecompany and assist in breaking up hostile counter-attacks.

187. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS

Desirable characteristics of firing positions for the60-mm mortars include-

a. Locations within effective range of targets ortarget areas.

b. Mask clearance of hills, trees, buildings, andsimilar obstacles to high-angle fire.

c. Cover and concealment from enemy observationand fire. Fully defiladed positions furnish protectionfrom enemy flat trajectory fire. Holes and ditchesoffer some protection from high-angle fire.

d. When in a platoon position, dispersion betweenguns to prevent two from being hit by one enemyshell. Dispersion is limited by the available controlmethods.

e. Covered routes to the position for occupationand ammunition resupply.

/. A covered and concealed observation post forthe mortar observer within communication range ofthe firing position.

188 TARGETS

Primary targets for 60-mm mortars are point tar-gets, such as crew-served weapons and small groups

174

of enemy personnel-particularly those in defilade.The 60-mm mortars are effective against small areatargets but are not used to search large areas. TheWP shell may be used to screen specific points (em-brasures of pillboxes or street barricades). Inbuilt-up areas, the mortar may be used against roof-top targets. It is also used against defiladed targetsthat are too close to friendly troops for 81-mm mor-tars or artillery, but still at least 100 yards fromfriendly troops. The distance should be increasedto 200 yards when the mortar is more than 300 yardsbehind our own front line.

189. ORDERS

a. The platoon leader's orders include as much ofthe following as is necessary:

(1) Information of the enemy and friendlytroops, including the expected action of themaneuvering force and the position andmissions of the battalion mortar platoon.

(2) Mission of the platoon.(3) Orders to the squads, to include-

(a) Initial position areas.(b) Assault elements to which squads are at-

tached or to which support is to be given.(c) Route or unit to be followed.(d) Positions for carriers to be used for fire

support or flank protection.(e) Initial targets or sectors of fire.(f) Time of opening fire.(g) Displacement and reorganization.

175

(4) Instructions about ammunition supply,location of the battalion aid station, andany other necessary administrative matters.

(5) Instructions abput signal communication,including prearranged signals. Locationof the platoon leader and the companycommander.

b. Each squadl leader includes in his attack orderthe items of the platoon order that pertain to hissquad. After the initial firing position has been oc-cupied, he issues the fire command for engaging thefirst target.

Section III. THE ATTACK

190. MOVEMENT INTO FIRING POSITIONS

The 60-mm mortar platoon usually can move bycarrier from the assembly area to the first positionarea. The weapons, accessories, and starting supplyof ammunition are unloaded and hand carried toexact firing positions selected by the squad leaders.The squad leaders supervise the preparation and oc-cupation of the firing position. Ammulitiol bearersare dispersed near the firing position when not en-gaged in the resupply of ammunition.

191. SUPPORTING FIRES DURING THE ATTACK

Before the attack, the 60-nrm mortars may fireprearranged concentrations. During the attack theyengage targets as directed by the company com-mander, the platoon leader, or the squad leaders.During the assault the 60-mm mortars fire on targetson the flanks or beyond the objective.

176

192. DISPLACEMENT

The platoon and squad leaders continuously makeplans for displacement. When the mission assignedcan no longer be accomplished from initial positions,displacement is made with a minimum interruptionin fire support. The 60-mln mortars ordinarily dis-place by squads. Whenever possible, displacementof weapons and ammunition is made by carrier.When the platoon is operating under platoon control,and displacement is anticipated, the platoon leadermakes a personal reconnaissance and designates anew general position area to the squad leader. Thesquad leaders move their sqluds forward, nsing cov-ered routes, and select the exact firing positions fortheir squads. When not operating under platooncontrol, a squad leader advances his squad to newpositions when the progress of the attack mnakes itimpossible to continue firing on the assigned missionor sector from the old position. Forward displace-ment is made aggressively, the squad frequentlymoving close behind the platoon from one point ofobservation to another.

193. REORGANIZATION

a. Preparation to Defend Against Counterattack.As soon as the hostile position is captured, or theattack is halted for any reason, mortars and carriersare placed in positions to protect the front and flanksof the assault elements against counterattack.

b. Preparation to Continue the Attack. Afterthe mortars have been emplaced to fire on enemycounterattacks, the platoon leader prepares to con-tinue the attack. He has his squad leaders replace

177

key personnel who have become casualties withintheir squads, check the condition of weapons, andredistribute ammunition. Concurrently, the platoonleader replaces leaders within the platoon who havebecome casualties. The squad leaders report thestrength of the squads and their weapon and ammu-nition requirements. The platoon leader, in turn,reports the platoon requirements. When orderedto continue the attack, action is similar to the actionbefore the first attack.

Section IV. DEFENSE

194. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT

a. The 60-min; mortars are used to assist the rifleplatoons in the defense of their areas. Normally,the 60-mm mortars are used by squad. When theentire company front can be covered with the mortarsin one firing position and when observation can beobtained over the front and flanks of the companysector from a single observation post, the mortarsmay be emplaced so that fires can be conducted ulln-der platoon control. Squads may be attached torifle platoons. The company commander's order fordefense designates the squads to be attached to rifleplatoons and those to be held under company con-trol. When a mortar squad is attached to a platoon,that platoon leader directs its action. However,barrages are assigned the squads by the companycommander; these barrages take precedence overother fires.

b. The mnissions of the 60-mm mortars of a front-line rifle company in sustained defense are to-

178

(1) Cover the assigned sector. The mortarsgive close support to the forward defenseareas by firing (concentrations) on targetsof opportunity-particularly those in def-ilade-to break up a hostile attack beforeit reaches the battle position.

(2) Take part in the battalion coordinated fireplan. Mortar barrages fill gaps in the finalprotective fires of the battalion fire plan.If no gaps exist within the company area,barrages strengthen the final protective firesin the most dangerous areas of approach

-within the company sector.(3) Assist in limiting penetrations. Concen-

trations are planned within the companydefense area to limit an enemy penetrationof the main line of resistance.

(4) Support counterattacks. Concentrationsare used to block off the penetrated area orto give close support to a counterattackforce.

195. SELECTION OF POSITIONS

a. If practicable the platoon leader accompaniesthe company commander on his reconnaissance andmakes recommendations for the use of the mortarplatoon. Based on his own reconnaissance and therecommendations of the platoon leader, the companycommander's defense order assigns missions and thegeneral locations of the mortar platoon.

b. Firing positions selected for the mortars must-(1) Be defiladed from hostile view.

179

(2) Permit the accomplishment of the assignedmission.

(3) Provide observation close to the mortarposition.

c. The mortar is emaplaced approximately within100 yards of the observer. The firing positions arewell forward and are included in or directly pro-tected by the rifle platoon defense areas. Ammuni-tion bearers armed with rifles afford close protection.Communication (voice or telephone) is establishedbetween the mortar observers and the company com-mander or platoon leader, depending upon which iscontrolling the fire. If attached to a rifle platoon,the observer's position is near the platoon leader'sobservation post.

d. When the entire company front can be coveredfrom one firing position and observed from one ob-servation post, the mortars may be fired under pla-toon control.

e. After receiving the company commander'sorder, the platoon leader issues his order and directsthe squads to move to their firing positions. Theplatoon leader precedes the rest of the platoon to thedefense areas to coordinate the use of the mortarsand the selection of firing positions. Firing posi-tions selected for the 60-mm mortars in defense havethe same general characteristics as those selected inthe attack.

196. SECTORS OF FIRE AND TARGET AREAS

Each 60-nun mortar squad is tassigned a sector offire, one barrage, and any number of concentrations.

180

The three squad sectors overlap to cover the entirecompany front. The sector of fire assigned to a60-mm mortar should not exceed 1,200 mils. Thecompany commander normally uses the barrages toclose small gaps in the machine-gun final protectivelines. The barrages are 50 yards square and nor-mally are located at least 100 yards forward of thefront-line elements. The platoon leader assigns con-centrations and sectors of fire according to the com-pany plan of defense. These concentrations areplanned both forward of and within the battle posi-tion. Concentrations are considered to be 50 yardsin diameter.

197. ORDERS

a. The platoon defense order is based on the com-pany order and the reconnaissance of the platoonleader. It is issued to the squad leaders and otherkey members of the platoon. When practicable, theplatoon leader issues his order from a position wherehe can point out to each squad leader the selectedfiring positions, sectors of fire, and locations of ad-jacent troops. The platoon leader supervises thecoordination and execution of his orders. The de-fense order follows the general form for the platoonattack order and contains the following additionalinstructions:

(1) Barrage and concentration areas, and sec-tors of fire for the 60-mm mortars.

(2) Instructions for final protective fires to in-clude the method of calling for these fires,a location from which visual signals for

131

fires are given, and the rates and durationof fire.

(3) Organization of the ground, includingtypes of emplacements to be constructed.

b. The squad leaders base their orders on the pla-toon order and on their own reconnaissance. Thesquad leaders select exact positions for the mortars,check for mask and overhead clearance, and issueorders for preparing and camouflaging primary,alternate, and supplementary positions.

198. LOCATION OF LEADERS

a. The platoon leader places himself where he canbest observe and control the units of his platoonunder his control. His position should permit easycomlmunication with the company commander.Normally, the platoon leader is at or near the firingpositions of the 60-mm mortals. When observationis restricted near the mortar positions, he may estab-lish an observation post for better observation of thecompany sector.

b. Mortar squad leaders act as forward observers,with their observation posts within the rifle platoonareas where they can best observe their assigned sec-tors. A squad leader who is not acting as an ob-server assists in the control of fires at the mortars.

199. OCCUPATION AND ORGANIZATION OF FIRINGPOSITIONS

a. Arrival at the Position. When squads arriveat their assigned locations, the firing positions and

182

sectors of fire of the weapons are shown to the squadleader. Each squad leader at once mounts hisweapon in a temporary firing position, prepared toopen fire to cover his assigned sector. As soon as theweapons are mounted in their temporary position,the primary firing positions are constructed, camou-flaged, and stocked with ammunition. The weaponsare then mounted in their primary firing position.

b. Priority of Work. The primary mortar posi-tions and the observation posts are constructed first.Foxholes for the ammunition bearers are then pre-pared. Alternate and supplementary positions arethen constructed. If the situation permits, eachmortar is registered on its barrage and on as manyconcentrations as necessary. Before registering,coordination with security elements, reconnaissanceparties, and work details forward of the battle posi-tion is necessary. Firing data is recorded by thesquad leader. One copy of each firing data sheet iskept by the squad leader and one copy is given to theplatoon leader. The platoon leader then gives thecompany commander a firing data sheet showing theprepared mortar fires. After the company com-mander has approved these planned fires, or hasmade necessary changes, he has copies of the firingdata sheet distributed to designated personnel of thecompany and to the battalion commander. The pla-toon leader prepares and provides the company com-mander with a sketch showing the prepared mortarfires.

e. Camouflage. Camouflage is constructed concur-rently with the other defensive works. Spoil notused in construction is disposed of immediately.

183

Parapets are tramped down and sodded. Men avoidmaking new paths to installations.

d. AmltwnitionStorage. Dry. concealed ammuni-tion shelters are constructed within or near the mor-tar emplacements.

200. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE

The 60-mm mortars are first laid to fire where suit-able targets are most likely to appear. If the enemysucceeds in driving back our security elements, themortars are then laid on their barrages when notfiring other missions. As the enemy advances, ob-servers call for fires on suitable targets within theirsectors. Mortars located behind front-line platoonareas open fire as soon as targets are within range.Mortars located within front-line platoon areas maywithhold fire until the front-line platoons open fire.If final protective fires are called for, the mortarsfire their barrages. If the barrage of any mortaris not within the area where the final protective firesare needed, that mortar fires the concentration thatmost effectively reinforces the final protective fires.If the enemy penetrates any portion of the battleposition, the mortars fire in the area of penetration,to disrupt and destroy the enemy and prevent awidening of the penetration.

201. RESUPPLY

a. Resupply during a sustained defense normallyis done at night. Ammunition and other neededsupplies are carried as far forward in cargo trucksas the tactical situation permits. They then may

184

be carried by 1/4-ton truck and trailer to the mortarpositions. If the tactical situation prohibits the useof the ¼/-ton truck, hand carry is used. Ill excep-tional situations, resupply may be needed duringdaylight. The same procedure is used but supplyvehicles may not be able to come as close to the mor-tar positions as during darkness, thereby requiringlonger hand carrying.

b. In a mobile defense, ammunition is not storedin large quantities at the positions. However, inmobile defense the carriers are readily accessible totheir squads. The bulk of the ammunition is kepton the carriers and unloaded as needed. Resupplyis made by refilling the ammunition compartmentsof the carrier. Cargo trucks from the combat trainscarry ammunition and other supplies. during day-light or darkness, as close to the mortar positionsas possible. The 1A-ton truck and hand carrying areused to move supplies from this point to the mortarpositions.

931358'--1--13 l85

CHAPTER 8

ARMORED INFANTRY RIFLE COMPANY INOFFENSIVE COMBAT

Section I. GENERAL

202. ORGANIZATION, MISSION, CHARACTERISTICS,AND CAPABILITIES

See paragraphs 1-40.

203. COMPANY COMMANDER

a. The company commander commands his com-pany. By his character and skill, he gives positiveleadership to his company and maintains its disci-pline, welfare, and contentedness. He actively su-pervises the training of all elements of his companyand insures its proper administration and the pro-curement and maintenance of equipment. To assisthim in carrying out these responsibilities he makesfull use of the company's chain of command. Inassigning duties to his leaders, he considers theirindividual capabilities and personalities, developingin them a high degree of initiative and personal re-sponsibility. He builds his company into a wellcoordinated team.

b. He continually estimates the situation, havingin mind all practicable courses of action. By direc-tive, or by recommendation to his commander, he

186

initiates action on any matter concerning his com-pany, and vigorously follows it through to a con-clusion.

c. To accomplish his mission, he uses all means athis commllanlld and requests additional mearis when-ever thev can be well used in his area of responsi-bilitv. Without avwaiting orders hlie coordinates withany other unit or agency.

d. In the battle area he uses observation, patrols,liaisol, and personal reconnaissance to maintainsecurity and prepare for future operations. Heassigns definite missions to his lower unit leadersand keeps himself informed about their actions inorder to give assistance when needed and to insurethe success of his plan. He goes where lie can bestcontrol the action of his company as a whole, yetis personally present at critical times and placeswhere he can best influence the action. He alone isresponsible to the battalion commander for all thathis company does or fails to do.

204. EXECUTIVE OFFICER

The executive officer also is company motor officer.As second in commland of the company! he keepsabreast of the situation and replaces the companycommander if necessary. He is responsible to thecompany commander for the operation of the com-niand post and for all maintenance functions withinthe comlpany. By close supervision of maintenance,frequent spot checks, and inspections, he assures him-self that proper mainltenance procedures are carriedout. He maintains liaison with the battalion motor

187

officer from whomli he receives technical advice, assist-ance in the recovery and repair of company vehicles,and aid in the procurement of spare parts.

205. UNIT ADMINISTRATOR

The unit administrator is a warrant officer as-signed to the company to supervise administrationfor the company commander and company executiveofficer. His functions include supervision of-

a. Mess management.b. Supply functions.c. Communication.d. Company administration.e. Such other duties as assigned by the company

commander.

206. DUTIES OF NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS OFCOMPANY HEADQUARTERS

a. Compan1y Headanrtfer8 Section.(1) The communication sergeant is the com-

pany commander's main assistant in com-munication matters. For specific duties. seeparagraph 31.

(2) The bugler. The duties of the bugler arediscussed in pnaagragraph 32.

b. Maintenance section.(1) The motor sergeant, working under the exec-

utive officer (motor officer), is in charge ofall vehicular maintenance done by the coIn-pany. He is also responsible for drawingmotor parts.

188

(2) The tank mechanics are trained andequipped to work on the tracked vehicles ofthe company,

(3) The automotive mechanics are trained andequipped to work on the wheeled vehicles ofthe complany and to assist the tank inechaln-ics when necessary.

(4) The armorer repairs equipment, machineginms, and individual arms. He maintainsadequate tools, spare parts, and accessoriesfor the timely repair of these weapons.

(5) The radio repairmnan. For detailed duties,see paragraph 122.

c. Admirnistrative, AMess, and Slupply Section.(1) The first sergeavnt assists the company comn-

pany commander and the unit administra-tor in their administrative duties. He is incharge of the commland post when no officersare present.

(2) The mess steward supervises the cooks inthe preparation and serving of meals. Heis responsible for drawing or receivingrations.

(3) The supply .sergeant draws, checks, issues,and accounts for supplies other than rationsand motor parts.

(4) The company clerk, the first sergeant's ad-ministrative assistant, maintains the com-pany records.

(5) The cooks prepare and serve the meals un-der the supervision of the mess steward.

189

Section II. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK

207. GENERAL

Before the attack of an organized position the com-pany usually halts in a covered assembly area desig-nated by the battalion commander. Teams areformed and communication is established whilethere. When the reinforced company attacks frommarch column to exploit a situation, it normallymoves directly to its attack position without occupy-ing an assembly area. Normally, while the companyis preparing for the attack, the company commanderjoins the battalion commander to receive the attackorder. He usually takes with him the individualsnecessary to plan the attack, including the mortarplatoon leader, the communication sergeant, and amessenger. One officer, usually the executive officer,remains with the company. For the commander'sestimate of the situation and troop leading proce-dure, see paragraphs 38 and 39.

208. BATTALION ATTACK ORDER

The company usually attacks as a reinforced com-panLy of a reinforced tank or reinforced armored in-fantry battalion. The battalion order tells whetherthe company is in the assault or in reserve, and itgives the supporting and attached units. If .thecompany is in the assault, it is given a definite ob-jective or series of objectives, a line of departure, adefinite zone of attack, a direction of attack, and thetime of attack. If the company is in reserve, it isassigned a mission and initial location.

190

209. RECONNAISSANCE AND EVALUATION OF THETERRAIN

Reconnaissance within the reinforced company iscondulcted jointly by the tank and armored infantry

nllit commanlders. The company commander makesa personal reconllnaissanlce and allows enough timefor reconnaissance by team leaders. Through hisreconnaissance and terrain analysis he seeks-

a. Positions for supporting weapons and carriers.b. Routes of attack in the assigned zone suitable

for use of armored vehicles.c. Position areas for tanks sulpporting overhead

or flanking fire.d. Location of obstacles likely to hinder the ad-

vance of vehicles and dismounted troops.e. Location of an assembly area, preferably in or

near the attack position, for carriers not used for firesullport in a dismounted action.

f. Location of the attack position.g. Location of vehicular and foot routes of ap

proach.

210, PLAN OF ATTACK

a. The jplan of attack incluhides the plan of manleu-ver and the plan of fire.

b. The plan of ranerver includes-(1) Initial and subsequent objectives for assault

elements.(2) Position for launching the assault.(:3) Position where assault elements dismount

from carriers.(4) Attack positions.

191

(5) Line of departure.(6) Routes to objective.(7) Formation for the assault elements.(8) Organization of tank-armored infantry

teams (reinformed platoons).(9) Designation of support elements, their in-

itial mission and location (fig. 30).c. The plan of supportin(g fires is designed to sup-

port the plan of maneuver. These fires are deliveredto neutralize the enemy and permit the rapid ad-vances of the maneuvering force. A forward ob-server from the supporting armored artillery bat-talion works closely with the company commanderto develop an artillery fire plan. The company planof supporting fire includes the fires available fromthe battalion mortar platoon. A small tank unitmay be used to provide direct fire support for themaneuvering tank-armored infantry teams. Thevehicular machine guns of the carriers provide ad-ditional fire support either from the carriers or fromground mounts (fig. 31).

211. OBJECTIVES

The battalion attack order usually directs theseizure of a terrain objective or a series of terrainobjectives. The commander of the reinforced com-pany coordinates the effort of the company by assign-ing successive objectives to the assault platoons.Each assault element is assigned, as its initial objec-tive, the nearest terrain feature or hostile position,within its zone of actioli, which must be captured toaccomplish the company mission. Platoons may be

192

~\ ~~BASE OF FIREI SUPPORTS BY FIRE

2. PROTECTS FLANKS B REAR3. MOVES FORWARD AS

PLANNED OR ON ORDER

Figurc 30. IFlcumeits of thle Iltttl,-I-iCiforlCCd CftIPolqlu!.

directed to contilnue their attack against other defi-nite objectives after their initial objectives are cap-tured. If the company ¢ommanlder wants to control

193

fi A

194

the action more closely, the platoons may be directedto be prepared to continue the attack on companyorder. Depending on the terrain, there may be sev-eral successive platoon objectives to be captured be-fore reaching the initial company objective.

212. LINE OF DEPARTURE

The battalion order designates a line of departurefrom which the company is to launch its attack.Considerations in selecting a line of departure arc-it must be easily recognized on the ground; it shouldbe behind a line held by friendly elements: and itshould be perpendicular to the direction of attack.However, the prime requisite is that it be so locatedthat the attacking force can get its assault fullylaunched before enemy interference is encountered.Scparate lines of depalture may be prescribed fordifferent elements, to take advantage of terralin fea-tures and to achieve proper timing or convergence ofeffort.

213. ZONES OF ACTION

a. The battalion commander ordinarily does notdesignate boundaries between companies, but theconmpanv remainls within the battalion boundaries.Entry into an adjacent battalion zone mnst be co-ordinated with the commander of the adjacent unit,by the battalion commlander, or in his absence, bythe company commander. To make a flank attack,a company comnmander may move elements of hiscompany behind an adjacent company within thebattalion sector. This is ordinarily done by coor-

195

dination between the two company cormmanldersconcerned.

6. Each platoon or reinforced platoon in the as-sault echelon is given a general zone of action byassigning it a section of the line of departure or anarea from which to start its attack, a direction ofattack, and a definite terrain objective or series ofobjectives to be captured (fig. 32). Boundaries areseldom prescribed between platoons. However, insome cases the tactical situation and the terrain maynecessitate assigning a zone of responsibility inyards.

214. FORMATIONS FOR TANK-ARMORED INFANTRYTEAM ATTACKS

a. General. When a reinforced company attacksIas a tank-armored infantry team, the formation de-pends on the task organization of the company, themethod of attack being used, the mission, the widthof the company zone of action, the terrain, the enemysituation, adlll the need for security.

b. Two Reinforced Platoons in the Assault. Thecompany may attack with two reinforced platoonsin the assault and one in support. , This formationenables the team to deliver a strong attack whilekeeping a support to influence future action. Thesupport platoon may be used initially to supportthe attack by fire.

c. Two Rifle Platoons in the Assault SupportedBy the Attached Tank Unit. This formation isused to attack a position that has a protective beltof antitank obstacles or mine fields. The companycommander uses the attached tanks to support the

196

-'-

'197

assault platoons by fire. When lanes through theobstacles have been prepared, the tanks move for-ward to join the assault platoons. A rifle platoonis also available as a support. It may be used ini-tially to support the attack by fire.

d. One Rein forced Platoon inq the Assault, Two inSupport. This formation is used when the front isnarrow, the situation is obscure, or one or both flanksare exposed. The reinforced comnpany may be in acolumn of platoons, as in exploitation, or echelonedin the direction of the exposed flank or flanks.

e. Three Reinforced Platoons Abreast. This for-mation can be used initially when the reinforcedcompany is assigned a broad front against relativelyweak opposition or is part of a larger maneuveringforce attacking a strong position.

215. FORMATIONS FOR DISMOUNTED ATTACKSWITHOUT TANKS

The armored infantry rifle company may attackwithout tank support. Such attacks may be requiredby terrain and obstacles that prohibit tank employ-ment, or where stealth is desired in which case neithercarriers nor tanks are used. The formation usedfor the attack depends on the mission of the com-pany, the width of the zone of action; the reinforce-ments and supporting fires, the terrain,'tlhe knowl-edge of enemy dispositions, and the need for security.

a. By using a formation with two rifle platoons inassault and one in support, the company can delivera strong attack while keeping a support to influencefuture action.

198

b. One rifle platoon in assault and two in supportis often used when the company has a very narrowzone of action, when it is operating on an exposedflank, or when the enemy situation is obscure. Inthis formation, the support platoons may be in col-untn behind the leading platoon; they may be eche-loned behind the leading platoon toward an exposedflank; or, if both flanks are exposed, one may beecheloned to each flank of the leading platoon.

c. Conditions may require the use of all three pla-toons in the assault, but not necessarily abreast. Aformation for the initial attack with all three rifleplatoons abreast is exceptional, but may be used whenthe company is assigned an extremely broad zone ofaction and the enemy situation is known. It alsomay be used to attack a limited objective.

216. ATTACK POSITIONS

The company attack position is the last position oc-cupied by the company before crossing the line of de-parture. Cover and concealment are desirable. Thegeneral location of the attack position is usuallygiven by the higher commander, but the companycommander must make the final selection and disposi-tion of units within the position. The desiredcharacteristics of an attack position are similar tothose for an assembly area, except that it is closer tothe line of departure. In the attack positions, finaldetails for coordination in the attack are completed.The minimum length of time is spent in the attackposition. Occupation of and movement from theattack position is done with maximum secrecy.

199

217. ATTACK ORDER

a. Oral attack orders are issued after making thereconnaissance and preparing the plan. The pla-toon leaders, attached unit commanders, liaison per-sonnel, artillery forward observers, and the companycommunication sergeant usually receive the order.When practicable, the first sergeant, platoon ser-geants, supply sergeant, and other key noncommis-sioned officers are present. WVarning and frag-mentary orders are used often to further the prompt,continuous action needed in the employment of tank-armored infantry teams (app. II).

b. The attack order, issued in the 5-paragraphoperation-order sequence -includes--

(1) Information about the enemy and friendlytroops.

(2) Company mission. Details of coordinationinclude-

(a) Formation.(b) Time of attack.(c) Attack position, line of departure, direc-

tion of attack.(3) Tasks for all lower units either organic or

attached. Instructions given include-(a) Support.(b) Missions of supporting and vehicular

weapons.(c) Use of vehicles or their disposition.(d) Security measures.(e) Liaison with adjacent units.

(4) Location of battalion aid station, orders forcompany maintenalce section, and other ad-ministrative details.

200

(5) Initial location of company command postand special signal instructions.

Section III. THE ATTACK

218. BATTLE RECONNAISSANCE IN THE ATTACK(fig. 33)

Battle reconnaissance is continuous. It beginswhen contact is made vith the enemy and continuesuntil the end of the engagement. It is carried on byleaders, commanders, observers, and all men withinthe team. Because of the restricted view throughperiscopes and vision slits, vehicle commanders ob-serve with heads out of their vehicles. Where pos-sible, members of the vehicular crews are assignedsectors of observation to provide all-around observa-tion. They report enemy positions. Dismountedarmored infantry relays enemy information to thetank crews by external tank interphone, radio, arm-and-hand signals, or other prearranged methods.The tank commander and the armored infantrysquad leader keeps close personal contact. Sus-picious locations are taken under fire to destroy theenemy or make him disclose his position, either byreturning the fire or by moving. The tank machinegllns and carrier machine guns are used on targetsat short ranges. The tank gun is used on more dis-tant targets.

219. ATTACKING ENEMY ARMOR

a. General. Success in attacking enemy armor isoften obtained by gaining surprise with the first

911358-51--l-14 201

-1

Ia,·

Z~~~IZ~

73> ' ~b i/ \· NIn

:~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I jl\I i

00t t S

""~~~~~~ iv00

2O' ·r t:·j

aimed shot in the encounter. Tanks reslupplying forthe attack, in march column, or reorganizing afteran attack, are vulnerable to surprise attack. Sur-prise may also be obtained by speed, concentrationof fire, and shock action in the attack, and by recon-naissance to find weakness in the enemy securitysystem.

b. Amburslh. In some situations it is possible forthe tank elements of the tank-armored infantry teamto ambush enemy tanks with flanking fire from cov-ered or concealed positions. On such an occasion,each tank is given a definite target. Tanks fire thefirst round on order of the team commander to gaincomplete surprise. From this moment on, the teamuses fire and maneuver to destroy any enemry tanksleft.

c. Coordinated Attack. The assault usually isdirected at one or both of the hostile flanks. Artil-lery, assault gun, and mortar fires are used to neu-tralize enemy weapons and personnel. Smoke isused to blind enemy observation and screen maneu-vering forces. When artillery support is not avail-able, the team commander uses part of his tanks asa base of fire while he attacks with the rest. Ar-mored infantry ordinarily should not become in-volved in tank-versus-tank actions, because it isrelatively helpless if caught in the open. However,small detachments of determined armored infantry,armed with rocket launchers and antitank riflegrenades, may fire from strong buildings or tank-proof ground to secure the flanks of friendly tanks.Snipers and machine guns may be used against ex-posed enemy tank commanders to destroy crews of

203

disabled tanks and to force tanks to button up. Thearmored infantry also operates against the enemyinfantry.

d. Decoys. When enemy tanks occupy a positionthat would be difficult and costly to attack, it maybe possible to decoy them out. Small lightly arimedelements advance on the enemy position and with-draw in pretended confusion when fired on. Theenemy armored units that pursue them are counter-attacked or anllbished. The enemy may also be luredinto attacking some apparently unprotected armoredinfauntry or supply vehicle.

220. ATTACK OF ENEMY ANTITANK WEAPONS

D)irect fire is employed against enemy antitankgun positions whenever possible. Although it is de-sirable to attack antitank weapons by maneuver totheir flanks or rear, care is taken to keep the maneu-vering element from becoming engaged with othermutually supporting hostile antitank wea p ons.Smoke is used to blind hostile gun crews and high-explosive and machine-gun fire is used to destroy orneutralize them. Since enemy antitank guns areoften protected by mines, tanks do not overrun thegunls but destroy them with short-range, high-ex-plosive fire. When covered appiroiches permit thedismounted armored infantrymen to get close to thehostile gun, rocket laulnchers and other infantryweapons are used. The armored infantry also as-sists by locating the enemy tanks antd self-propelledguns and designating them as targets to the tanksof the team. When the location of unalmored anti-tankll guls is such that tanks cannot destroy them, the

204

dismounted armored infantry move in, supportedby tank fire, and destroy the crews with infantryweapons.

221. ATTACKING THROUGH OBSTACLES AND ANTI-TANK MINE FIELDS

When a reinforced tank or armored infantry bat-talion has the mission of attacking through minefields or obstacles, the battalion commander uses re-inforced armored infantry companies to gain abridgehead on the far side of the obstacle. As soonas the bridgehead is gained, armored engiieers, of-ten assisted by armored infantry, reduce the obstacleand mark the gal). Artillery and mortars providefire support during the operation. As soon as theobstacle is breached, the tanks and other vehiclespass through it and rejoin their units.

222. ATTACK FROM MARCH COLUMN

a. The attack from march column differs from thecoordinated attack in that there is no time for de-tailed reconnaissance and plalnning. Instead thetank-armored infantry team must attack swiftly andill mass, getting full effect of shock action with aIilnilnlum of delay. An attack from nlurch columndemands speed and aggressiveness. The initiativemust be seized and kept. Lacking specific orders,tihe company commander or the platoon leader takeswhatever action is required to carry out his assignedmission.

b. For speed and aggressiveness, and to keep theinitiative, elements are placed in the column in the

205

order of their expected employment. Before the ad-vance, the company commander organizes his rein-forced company into reinforced platoons of tanks.armored infantry, and, in some instances, armoredengineers. The reinforced platoons of tanks andarmored infantry are distributed throughout thecolumn in positions to lead the attack, maneuver tothe flanks, and secure the colllnn against hostilecounterattacks. A reinforced tank platoon nor-mally leads a reinforced company which is an ad-vance or flank giuard for a larger unit.

(1) The company commander places hinlselfwell forward in the column. He is acconlpanied by the artillery forward observer,the 60-mm mortar platoon leader, and thecommanders of any attached units that arenot a part of the reinforced platoons. Byfollowing the leading reinforced platoon,the company commander is in a position tokeep abreast of the situation, to makeprompt decisions, and to issue orders thatquickly implement them.

(2) The 60-mm mortar platoon normally staysunder company control, but may be at-tached to a reinforced platoon on a separatemission out of supporting distance. It isplaced in the column so that it can give im-mediate fire support to the leading rein-forced platoon. Usually it follows thecompany commander and his group.

(3) Armored engineer units supporting thecomlpany normally are placed immediatelybehind the company corrmander and his

206

gl oup, or behind the 60-mm mortar platoon,depending on the enemy's use of obstaclesand the ruggedness of the terrain. If theterrain is especially difficult, or if obstaclesand mine fields are numerous, a squad ofarmored engineers .and an armored engineervehicle may be attached to the leading rein-forced platoon.

(4) The company maintenance section marchesbehind the reinforced company. If morethan one company headquarters is includedin the reinforced company, the maintenancesection of each company marches behindthe last unit containing elements of itscompany (fig. 34).

c. Against a surprised enemy or an enemy unpre-pared to resist, tanks lead in the engagement, usingtheir speed, fire power, and shock action to confuse,overrun, and destroy the enemy. The armored in-fantry elements of the team support the tanks in theattack. The team moves in fast and strikes hardsince the first few mlinutes are usually decisive inthis type of action.

d. When an advancing enemy column is observedthat apparently is not aware of the presence of thereinforced company, the company commander maydeploy an ambush. A successful ambush usually in-flicts severe losses on the victim with relatively fewlosses to the attacker. Ambush tactics require ex-tensive training in rapid movement to ambush posi-tions, fire control, and tactical control for the assaulton the disrupted enemy formation.

207

---- ~--

Ii

Xyf-t-~.~.· ~ ~~~I1A ..... A I-~~· ~.,~ ~~~

d w i~~~COMflOX -

.* =- - -G .. fl .. S;:- -

Figul'(l ,L~f. Rei;)joal'¢d 'oll qy (18ll)l q'as ~~e¢ll gllqrdl /al reCi1-

rottedl (irmorcd Di~lflt~ty bqtta~lio~l o)1 acploitutiomt.

208

· 1~ ~ ~ •% r,-" - %r1 -

Figui~' r ·iI· oj,,/orcedl ~ouipiiyn l as ·riita~i a gaol dl lo'~ aoel-

Jo, ted o,,rilorcd ialfa,,t-yU tattalioi n cxploCZtututofli

203

e. If the enemy attacks suddenly with greatlysuperior forces, each tank and rifle platoon movesimmediately to positions from which it can counterthe attack. Platoon leaders engage the enemy onsight, and report their respective situations to thecompany commander by radio. The company com-mander in turn coordinates the action of his platoons,and reports the situation to the higher commander,indicating any need for support. Depending uponthe mission, the terrain, and the enemy's disposition,the company commander may counterattack, set upaln ambush, establish a defensive position, or fighta delaying action.

f. When the team commander discovers that theenemy occupies a strong position and is prepared toresist, the tank-armored infantry team's attack isdeliberately planned and executed. This attack isplalmed and launched before the enemy reacts to thefirst contact by reinforcing his position at the threat-ened point. When he finds that the enemy is pre-pared to resist, the team commander starts a recon-naissance to discover the flanks and general natureof the hostile defensive position. Based upon theresults of this reconnaissance, the team may eithermake a coordinated attack or take part in a coordi-nated attack by the entire reinforced battalion ofwhich the team is a part. This decision is made bythe battalion commander (fig. 35).

223. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK

a. Movement to the Lin.e of JDeparture. Themovement from the attack position to the line of de-parture is in a deployed formation that permits

209

DIRECTIONOF ADVANCE

ELEMENTS 0BATTALION

ATTACKING BY

Figuic 35. Tank-armiolcd infanltry tcam. in the attack frontnllttch columin.

210

maximunn use of cover and concealment. This for-mation places the maneuvering (assault) elements onthe line of departure in the relative position fromwhich they will start the attack.

b. Conduct of the Maneuver Force. The maneu-vering force crosses the line of departure at the timeset for the attack. It uses the cover and conceal-ment provided by the terrain and the protectiongiven it by the supporting fires. The attack ispressed with the greatest possible speed and shockaction. For conduct of the maneuvering force,mounted and dismounted, see paragraphs 307 and335.

c. Location of the Conpany Commanler. 'Thecomlpanly commander posts himself where he can bestcontrol the action of his company. When the ar-mored infantry company attacks dismounted, thecompany commander establishes an observation postwith the best view of the area where the action is totake place. He controls the attack from his obser-vation post by using the company commlunicationsystem, primarily radio. When the armored infan-try accompanies tank units on the battlefield in per-sonnel carriers, the company commander places hisvehicle in the formation where he can best control histeam. During exploitation, his location is near thehead of the column or immediately behind the as-sault platoons when the team deploys for the assault.When an armored infantry rifle company is attachedto a tank company, he places himself near the tankcompany commander.

d. Supporting Fires. Throughout the attack thecompany commander coordinates the movements of

211

his assault elemcnts and the fires of supportingweapons. He arranges for heavy, well coordinated,fire support to obtain the maximum shock effect onthe enemly. Under its protection, le pushes theattack rapidly to save time and casualties.

e. Emplolmenet of the Mortar Platoon. Themortar platoon pushes forward aggressively to main-tain effective fire support. The carriers of themortar platoon may be used to cover an exposed flankwith vehicular weapons or to support the assaultplatoons by fire. The platoon normally displaces inits carriers.

f. UEse of the Support. (For missions of the sup-port, see paragraph 159.)

(1) If a supporting element is used in the attackit may be directed to follow the assaultechelon by bounds from one covered posi-tion to another, ahvays within supportingdistance but not merged into the assaultechelon. The support may be left in adesignated location to await the companycommander's orders for its forward move-ment. The support displaces in carriersunless ground or battle conditions prevent.Except for security elements and those sup-porting the assault by fire, personnel re-main mounted in the support position. Thesupport is committed to the attack. as acomplete unit. Except to repel an enemycounterattack. the company support isordinarily not used until all elements of theassault platoons have been committed.However, when use of the company support

212

is necessary to renew the impetus of astalled attack, it is committed without hesi-tation. In any case, it is used against weak-ness rather than against enemy strength,preferably for an envelopment. If pos-sible, the support avoids attacking throughan assault platoon that has become disor-ganized or that has suffered heavy casual-ties, and attacks from a new direction.

(2) When the reinforced company is attackingmounted, the support normally consists ofthe rearmost platoon or reinforced platoonin the formation or the element whose posi-tion makes it likely to become engaged last.When attacking dismounted, with or with-out tank support, a support normally is des-ignated because the situation ordinarily wvilldevelop more slowly than in mounted at-tacks. When the compaly colmanllder usesa supp)ort at the start of an attack, it is keptclose enough to the assault echelon forprompt use to exploit a success or to repela colltera ttack.

g. Security. The company commander adjustshis flank security measures throughout the attack tomeet changes in the situation. He modifies the com-bat formation to fit changing conditions, uses flanksecurity detachments when necessary, and shifts thesupport in the direction of danger.

h. Assistance to Adjacent Units. The companyassists adjacent units when directed by the battalioncommallnder, or when the company collllnander esti-mates that such assistance will further the battalion

213

mission. Assisting a stalled flank unit to advanceis generally a good way to protect the company'sflank. An attack using fire and maneuver is usnallymole effective than assistance by fire alone. Suchmaneuver is strongly supported by the fire of allavailable weapons, including those of the unit beingassisted. Maneuver is not used if it will deprive thecompany, for an extended period, of elements neededfor its own progress.

224. ASSAULT

If the armored infantry cannot move onto theobjective without dismounting from their carriers,dismounted assault is made with the tanks anldarmored infantry on line or with the tanks followedimmediately by the armored infantry. Whichevermethod is used, the tanks eliminate enemy groupsand destroy defensive works, weapons. and equip-ment by direct fire. The fires of the tank guns, thecarrier weapons and weapons of the assault infantryelements replace the supporting fires. The armoredinfantry closes with and destroys the enemy in closecombat and protects the tanks from individual anti-tank weapons (fig. 3(;).

225. REORGANIZATION

a. Immediately upon taking an objective, the com-pany disposes itself to repel a counterattack accord-ing to the plans announced in the company attackorder. The company commander makes proimpt ad-j ustnlents to fit the circumlstances. He orders a rapidmove of the mortar platoon and any attached

214

'it ~ii S, 1ii:,~ Ni

4'~~~ I

71r , r~: ',t)

El

i i~~~~~~I

Ilk

215

weapons, and places them to cover possible enemyavenues of approach to the front and flanks of thecaptured objective. He uses supporting fires to re-inforce his position further against hostile counter-attacks.

b. How the carriers are disposed depends upon thelength of time the objective is to be occupied. If thecompaly is to defend for some time, the carriers ofthe assault platoons are placed in covered and de-filaded positions immediately behind the objective.If the attack is to continue, carriers remain undersquad control. Tank and carriers are resuppliedwithout delay. The company commander requeststhe battalion S-4 for the necessary supplies from thecombat trains.

c. After the elements of a company have beenplaced to repel a counterattack, reconnaissance is be-gnll for a continuation of the attack. At the sametime, the company commander has each platoollleader reorganize his platoon. Casualties among keymen are replaced, anid the unit situation, strength,and vehicle and ammunition status are reportedthrough channels. Casualties are evacuated. Iden-tification of enemy units is reported and prisonersare sent to collecting points. After reorganizationthe company is again all effective team with controlreestablished, enough amnmnuition and fuel on hand,and plans completed to continue the attack.

226. ACTION WHEN ADVANCE IS HALTED

Duning templorary halts the company comlmanderprovides security for the company, reorganizes theteams, if necessary resupplies, and makes prepara-

216

tions for continuing the attack. When a company ishalted by enemy resistance, it may be ordered to con-tinue the attack by fire, while additional supportingfires are secured or while an adjacent or reserve unitflanks the enemy position. The company may beordered to organize the ground already taken.

Section IV. RESERVE RIFLE COMPANY IN ATTACK

227. INITIAL POSITION

a. A battalion attack order may designate a rein-forced company or a rifle company or companies asreserve. The order prescribes the initial location ofthe reserve, instructions for subsequent movement,flank protection, preparation of plans to meet vari-ous contingencies, and contact with adjacent trlits.

b. Upon receiving a battalion order, the reservecompany commander considers possible coveredroutes from the assembly area to the initial reserveposition. Selection of the route is made after a re-connaissance, preferably by the company commander.He avoids disclosing the location or movement of thereserve. The company commander, if not presenthimself, has his representative stay with the battalioncommander. Liaison is established with the assaultrifle companies, battalion mortar platoon, and othersnpporting arms whose help may be required.

c. Having made his reconnaissance of the routeand having located the initial reserve position, thecompany commander issues his order. It includesinformation about the enemy and about supportingtroops, the battalion plan of attack, and instructions

9313s8s-51---14 217

for the movement to the initial reserve position iandits occupation and security.

228. MOVEMENT TO SUCCESSIVE RESERVE POSI-TIONS

At first the reserve company is usually behind thecompany making the main attack in the battalionzone. Later, it advances behind the company mak-ing the fastest progress to protect that companyagainst counterattack and infiltration from its rear,to support the main effort, and to exploit success.The company commander reconnoiters and recom-mends successive positions and routes thereto. Ex-cept in emergencies the company moves by boundson the battalion commander's order.

229. PLANNING POSSIBLE MISSIONS

a. The reserve comlpany may be ordered to-(1) Exploit any local success.(2) Envelop points of resistance located by the

assault echelon (often by movement throughthe zone of adjacent battalions).

(3) Protect the flanks.(4) Repel counterattacks (especially against

the flanks).(5) Mop-up a position overrun or by-passed by

the assault echelon.(6) Take over the mission of all, or a part, of

the assault echelon.(7) Keep contact with adjacent units.

b. As the attack develops, the battalion commanderindicates the reserve's probable use and orders the

218

company commander to reconnoiter and make plans.The company commander plans the probable employ-ment of his company, reports his plans to the bat-talion commander for approval, and informs hisunit leaders of the details. He estimates the timenecessary to put each plan into effect.

Section V. EXPLOITATION AND PURSUIT

230. GENERAL

a. After breaking the enemy's resistance and rup-turing his defense, the subsequent phases of actionare exploitation and pursuit. The ideal force toexploit this success is armor-tanks reinforced witharmored infantry. The tank-armored infantryteams move rapidly to overcome scattered resistancewith bold and aggressive action. Enemy resistancein this phase generally consists of delaying action byenemy groups with small numbers of tanks, obstacles,individual antitank weapons, mine fields, combina-tions of these means, and counterattacks by mobileforces. These mobile forces usually have a high per-centage of armored troops and may attack from anydirection.

b. Supporting weapons and service elements moveclosely behind the combat elements for protectionand to help the tank-armored infantry team continueits advance. The attack may be continued at night.The team follows the assigned axis of advance, withshortened intervals and distances to aid in control.An all around defense is established when the teamhalts. For discussion of pursuit see paragraph 343.

219

231. ROLE OF ARMORED INFANTRY

In exploitation, tanks destroy much of the enemyresistance. The armored infantry elements are usedto-

a. Clear towns, wooded areas, and difficult ter-rain.

b. Gap mine fields together with armored en-gineers.

o. Establish bridgeheads.d. Provide security for tanks at night.e. Protect tanks from individual antitank meas-

ures.. Handle prisoners of war.

232. COMPANY AS PART OF EXPLOITING FORCE

The reinforced armored infantry company nor-mally is used as part of a larger exploiting force.However, it is capable of limited independent action,such as reducing isolated strong points, seizing andholding critical defiles or key bridges, or acting asa flank guard. The reinforced armored infantrycompany may be used as the advance guard for areinforced battalion on exploitation. Attacks by theadvance guard normally are launched from marchcolumn.

233. TRANSPORATION OF ARMORED INFANTRY

a. The armored infantry rifle company in exploi-tation normally rides in its carriers. When thereis a shortage of fuel or a need to shorten the roadspace, an armored infantry rifle company may ride

220

on the tanks of the tank-armored infantry teams.An armored infantry rifle company, less the mortarplatoon, the administrative, mess, and supply sec-tions, and the men who ride in wheeled vehicles, canbe mounted on the tanks of a medium tank company.The entire company, less the administrative, mess,supply, and maintenance sections, can be carried bya heavy tank company. The tactical unity of thearmored infantry platoons is kept by having an in-fa ntry platoon ride the tanks of a tank platoon. .Therifle platoon leaders ride the tanks of the tank pla-toon leaders l.ntil close contact is made. The tankradio net is used for control while mounted.

b. Oompared with movement in carriers, there aremajor disadvantages to riding tanks. These dis-advantages include-

(1) Lack of flexibility in forming the colllmn.Transportation requiremenlts rather thantactical considerations govern the placingof the armored infantrly.

(2) Lack of flexibility in organizing reinforcedcompanies, since transportation and nottactical requirements govern.

(3) The infantry's vulnerability to small armsfire and fragments means that fewer iso-lated enemy groups can be by-passed.

221

CHAPTER 9

ARMORED INFANTRY RIFLE COMPANY INDEFENSE

Section I. GENERAL

234. TYPES OF DEFENSE

Defensive actions normally fought by armored in-fantry units are either mobile or sustained.

a. Mobile defense is the defense of an area or posi-tion combining maneuver with organization of fireand utilization of terrain to seize the initiative fromthe enemy. The mobile defense is characterized bylightly held outpost system and strong mobile re-serves. Mobile defense is particularly suitable forthe armored division when it is assigned too wide afrontage for its organic armored infantry to or-ganize the ground properly for a sustained defense.

b. Swtained defense is the defense of an area orposition aiming to stop the enemy at the defense lineor main line of resistance. It is normally employedby infantry divisions. It is employed by thearmored division and its elements when the width ofthe assigned sector is not too great for the armoredinfantry strength of the division. In the sustaineddefense, a reserve is withheld for use against anyhostile penetration of the battle position.

222

235. PRINCIPLES OF DEFENSE

In organizing and conducting defensive opera-tions, an armored infantry company commanderapplies tactical principles for the best use of trooplocations, terrain, and fire power. In a sustaineddefense, the principles of defense are followed regardless of the situation and terrain. During mo-bile defense, however, all the principles may notapply. These principles of defense include-

a. Organization of Key Terrain. Anl area canbest be defended by organizing key points and cov-ering by fire the intervals between and approaches tothese key points. Based on the commander's evalu-ation, key terrain features that provide the bestdefensive strength for the position are selected andorganized.

b. Organization in Depth. Any defensive posi-tion can be penetrated if the attacker is willing topay the price in men e and mat6riel. Therefore, or-ganization in depth is essential. A commander dis-poses his troops anld weapons in depth so that if theattacker is successful in penetrating the main line ofresistance, a unit to the rear can engage him and limitthe penetration.

c. Mutual Support. All units, or organized lo-calities of a defensive position, are mutually sup-porting across the front and from front to reaIr.Each forward unit is so disposed that it can supportby fire adjncent units on either flalk. Units disposedin depth support the units to their front so that ifthe attacker succeeds in penetrating the forward de-fense, he immlediately comes under the fire of the

223

next rearward unit and is prevented from reorgan-izilg.

d. 1ll-Around Defene. A unitorganizes its posi-tion to meet attacks from any direction. An inde-penxdent unit operating in close terrain has greaterneed for all-around defense than a unit that is partof a larger force and operating in open terrain. Aunit may defend in all directions froln its primarypositions, or it may plepare supplementary positionsand shift troops to meet threats from the flanks orrear.

e. Coordinated Fire Plan. Each unit plans andcoordinates the fires of its weapons to get maximumeffectiveness, complete coverage of the battle positionand its approaches, and continuous fire on the at-tacker. The unit's plan includes the opening of fires,signals for final protective fire, rates of fire, mutualsupport of adjacent units, and firing to be done whenvisibility is poor. Fire plans of smaller units aresupervised and coordinated by the larger units.

/. Coordinated Antitank Plan. Plans for the useof antitank weapons, mine fields, and other obstaclesare coordinated to protect the battle positions froma tank attack or a combined tank-infantry attack.The coordinated antitank plan is designed to disorganize and delay hostile tanks well forward of theposition, to stop and repel tanks forward of the posi-tion, and to destroy or eject the tanks if a.penetra-tion is made. Unit plans provide for the use of allantitank means under the commander's direct con-trol. The extent to which mine fields or other arti-ficial obstacles may be used depends on the type ofdefense being used.

224

g. Flexibility. Flexibility in the defense is gainedby preparing supplementary positions, holdingtroops in support or reserve, and being able to masssupporting fires in any area. It is normal for a riflecompany and larger unit to use one-third or moreof its force as a support or reserve. This adds flex-ibility to the defense, since reserves can be used tolimit penetrations, to protect the flanks and rear, andto counterattack. Flexibility is also gained by usingsupporting weapons under centralized control. Cen-tralized control aids in the massing of supportingfires on a given target.

236. TERRAIN FACTORS

In making his terrain study the commander evalu-ates the tactical possibilities of the area. He deter-mines how, in organizing his defensive position, hecan best use, and deny to the enemy, these terrainfactors:

a. Critical Terrain Features. Terrain featuresare considered that appear to be critical for eitherthe attacker or the defender, such as a dominant hillor ridge, shoulders of a valley, a road or trail, abuilt-up area, or a communication center.

b. Obserovation and Fields of Fire. Observationprovides information of enemy and friendly troops.Both long-range and close-in observation are neces-sary to bring fire on the enemy and to determine hiscapabilities. Close-in observation is gained by or-ganizing on the military crest; this also protectslong-range observation posts located near the topo-graphical crest. Hostile observation into the battleposition is denied the enemy by the use of security

225

forces and fire. Fields of fire for direct fire weaponscan be improved by cutting weeds, grass, and crops;clearing brush and trees; demolishing buildings;and cutting hanes through woods. The clearingshould not warn the enemy of the location of the bat-tle position or destroy its concealment. The organ-izing of terrain which gives good fields of fire, suchas open, flat terrain, requires fewer men and weaponsthan close terrain with poor fields of fire.

c. Obstacles. In organizing a defensive position,natural obstacles that will hinder the advance of theenemy are evaluated and used. The correct evalua-tion of natural obstacles increases the effectivenessof artificial obstacles. Because obstacles covered byfire are of little value, the position is organized sothat they can be covered by observed fire.

d. Concealment and Cover. Concealment is pro-tection from enemy observation and cover is protec-tion from enemy fire. Irregular wooded terrain fur-nishes ideal protection from enemy air and groundobservation, but limits friendly observation andfields of fire. If the terrain is flat and open with lim-ited cover and concealment, more time is necessaryfor troops to dig in and camouflage their positions.

e. Avenues of Approach. Avenues of approachwithin the battle position are used for supply, evacu-ation, movement of troops into forward positions,and counterattack. They must be valuated as totheir condition, and the amount of cover and conceal-ment provided. Avenues of approach available tothe enemy are considered in terms of roads, ridges,terrain corridors, cross compartments, and areaswhere the ground favors cross-country movement

226

into the defensive position from the front or flanks.After evaluating the terrain, the commander plansthe organization of his position (fig. 37).

_F IECTIOIC o

A TOPCGRAPHICAL CREST

C-REVERSE SLOPE- lNE OS OBSERVATIloN ANTD rtlERA "OR .7 IRE

Figytre 37. Exptllaation of terra'in terms.

Section II. FRONT-LINE RIFLE COMPANY INSUSTAINED DEFENSE

237. GENERAL

a. Mission. The mission of a front-line rifle com-pany in defense is, with the support of other arms,to stop the enemy by fire in front of the main line ofresistance, to repel his assault by close combat if hereaches it, and to eject him by counterattack.

b. Dispositions. A rifle company assigned to thedefense of an area on the main line of resistanceorganizes its area according to the basic principlesof defense. It covers its front with fire; coordi-nates its fires with, and mutually supports, the unitson its flanks; gives close rifle protection for thesupporting weapons emplaced within its area; andresists in all directions. To place accurate fire infront of the battle position requires good observa-tion. To obtain observation, a forward slope isoften occupied. A reverse slope position may be

227

preferable if observation can be obtained from theflanks or rear, and if the terrain on the reverse slopepermits the placing of a heavy volume of accuratefire on the crest and on approaches around the flanks.The terrain may make it desirable to occupy a com-bination of forward and reverse slopes.

238. COMPANY DEFENSE ORDER

The company commander bases his defense order'on the battalion order, his own reconnaissance andestimate of the situation, and recommendations fromhis platoon leaders (par. 40). For the form of thecompany defense order, see appendix II. The or-der is issued orally in 5-paragraph sequence andincludes-

a. Information of the enemy, including directionfrom which, and time when, enemy attack is ex-pected; information of friendly supporting and ad-jacent units.

b. Company mission.c. AMissions and areas of each rifle platoon. De-

tails of coordination include-(1) Locations and missions of the 60-mm mor-

tars and any additional weapons assignedto the company.

(2) Fire control to include details relative tocalling for final protective fires.

(3) Security.(4) Priority of construction.(5) Location of mine fields and other obstacles.

d. Mines, barbed wire, fortification supplies, am-munition supply, and other administrative details,including-

228

(1) Location of the battalion aid station.(2) Disposition of company vehicles.(3) Alterations or additions to standing operat-

ing procedure such as antiaircraft secu-rity, type of emplacements, and sanitationmeasures.

e. Location of command and observation posts;comlmunication instructions.

239. FRONTAGE AND DEPTH

a. The battalion commander assigns frontages tohis front-line companies according to their naturaldefensive strength and the relative importance oftheir defense areas. An armored infantry companyoccupying a defense area on the main line of resist-ance may be given a frontage of 600 to 1500 yards.A company occupying a vital area having poor ob-servation and poor fields of fire, as in heavily woodedor broken terrain, is given a frontage near the mini-mum figure. Where the terrain is more open andprovides longer fields of fire and better observation,the frontage approaches the maximum figure. Inunusually open and flat terrain, or where naturalobstacles across the front greatly strengthen the de-fense, the company may be assigned a frontagegreater than 1500 yards. The strength and combateffectiveness of a company are considered in assign-ing its frontage.

b. The depth of a company area from the main lineof resistance to the rear generally does not exceed700 yards. The area of responsibility forward of themain line of resistance includes local security andseldom exceeds 500 yards.

229

c. The battalion commander designates the areaof responsibility of each front-line company by theuse of boundaries. Boundaries indicate the forward,rear, and lateral limits of responsibility. All com-pany defensive elements and installations are in-cluded within this area, except administrative in-stallations like the ammunition supply point. Ad-ministrative installations may be located outside theassigned defense area if the battalion commanderapproves. Carriers of the front-line companies arenormally placed behind the battalion reserve.

d. Points along a lifie of resistance where the re-sponsibility of one unit stops and that of another be-gins are called limiting points. Tlhese points, whichare designated by the higher commander, serve twomain purposes for the front-line company. Theyindicate the general trace of the main line of re-sistance and designate a place on the ground whereadjacent commanders coordinate their defense plansso that their defense areas are mutually supporting.

240. DISTRIBUTION OF PLATOONS, GENERAL

a. Platoons are placed within the company defensearea to achieve maximum effectiveness of defense.This is generally done by using two rifle platoonsabreast on the main line of resistance and one rifleplatoon in support. Platoons are disposed to coverthe company defense area by mutually supportingfires and by observation (fig. 38).

6. Elements of the mortar platoon are locatedwithin the company defense area where they are pro-tected by rifle elements and where they can best

230

PRODABLE ROUTESOF HOSTILE APPROACH

Figlre 38. D1)istribltiolo of COIImlptu in defense (daylight).

accomplish their fire missions. Usually, they arelocated within the platoon defense areas.

v. The possibility of the enemy attacking throughopen areas is greater when visibility is reduced.Poor visibility may require adjustments within pla-toon defense areas, including minor shifts of weap-ons; change in the location of the support platoon;use of security detachments to cover intervals be-

231

PROBABLE ROUTEOF HOSTILE APPROACH

Co O

Figalre 39. Distribation of company ihn defense (ntight).

tween defense areas; and strengthening the localsecurity elements (fig. 39).

241. FRONT-LINE PLATOON

The width of a defense area assigned to a front-line platoon depends on such factors Ias fields of fire,obstacles, and supporting fires. A rifle platoon oc-

232

cupying a defensive area may be assigned a frontageof 300 to 750 yards. Because it can cover an areaby fire, a platoon seldom occupies positions alongall of its assigned frontage. When vehicular weap-ons are placed within the platool area, the occupiedfrontage may be increased. The gaps between pla-toons vary with the terrain and the available fires,but seldom exceed 150 yards. A gap of this widthis justified only if it can be covered by fires of thesupport platoon as well as by flanking fires fromplatoons adjacent to the gap. The company com-mander avoids dividing the responsibility for de-fending an avenue of enemy approach. When pos-sible, he assigns both the approach and the terrainthat blocks it to one platoon.

242. SUPPORT PLATOON

a. lfi.ssions. The primary mission of the supportplatoohi is to support the front-line platoons by fire.The terrain seldom permits the support platoon tofire in front of the front-line rifle platoons; there-fore, it fires in the gaps between front-line platoons,within forward areas in case they are overrun, andto the flanks and rear of the company defense area.The support platoon may also be used to add depthto the defense of the company area, protect theflanks and rear of the company area?, and, excep-tionally, eject the enemy from the battle position.

b. Location. The support platoon is located be-hind the front-line platoons, and within the companydefense area. on the terrain which gives the best ob-servation and fields of fire for accomplishing its

931358' 51 16 233

missions. The positions are organized within effec-tive rifle range (500 yards) of the forward platoons,but are at least 150 yards behind them to avoidenemy fire directed at the forward platoons.

c. Employment.(1) If the terrain permits, the support platoon

organizes a single position to accomplishits mission (fig. 40). If the terrain doesnot allow the support platoon to accom-plish its mission from a single position and

500 YDS-(MAX) --W-A17-

SUPPORTPLATOON

Figure 40. Support platoonl occupling one position-arroirsindirate direction of fire (sehelilnatic).

concealed routes for movement within thearea are available, more than one positionmay be organized (fig. 41). The platoonthen occupies the position that covers themost dangerous area. It is prepared tomove to other positions on order.

(2) When the terrain makes it necessary to or-ganize more than one position and con-cealed routes between these positions do not

234

exist, it may not be possible to move the sup-port platoon after the fire fight has begun(fig. 42). In such situations, it may benecessary to split the support platoon andhave it occupy more than one position.Rifle squads are not dhiided.

I, -

;?CONCEALED ROUTE

Figure 41. Support platoon occupying one of liwo preparedpositions (slchlematic).

(3) Besides being used in one of the above threeways, the support platoon may be directedby the company commander to make a localcounterattack. However, because of itssmallness and because it usually is engagedin the same fire fight as the front-line pla-toons, the support platoon is rarely giventhis mission. Such a counterattack is aquick assault and mopping-up action to de-

235

\LESS ONE SUAO)

Figure 42. Support platoonl occupying more than, onle pre-pared position (schematic).

stray a small enemy group that has made aminor penetration.

243. 60-MM MORTAR PLATOON

For the use of the 60-mm mortar platoon in sus-tained defense, see paragraphs 179-199.

244. OBSERVATION

a. The company commander coordinates the com-pany's observation posts to fit them into the bat-talion observation plan and to avoid duplication ofeffort. The location of several observation posts inthe same area is avoided. When terrain featuresthat offer good observation are limited, observersare spread across the front so that overlapping ob-servation is obtained over the defense area andapproaches to it. Communication facilities are co-

236

ordinated and used to the maximum, so that anyobserver can call for and control the fires of anysupporting weapon.

b. The comlpauy observation post is located to givea view of as mulch of the company defense area andits approaches as possible. If observation is lim-ited, a post is selected that provides observation ofthe most critical approach. Observation to theflanks is also imllportant. Although the observationpost is the battle station of the company commander,he goes vwhere his presence is needed. The com-imand post is kept informed of his location.

245. COMMAND POST

The company command post is located in the rearof the comlpany defense area. So that it may haveadequate local protection, it norinally.is in or nearthe support platoon area, and it is concealed fromair observation. Covered and concealed routes tothe front and to the rear make communication easierwith the platoons and the battalion command post.

246. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND

a. The organization of the company defense areais limited by the time and facilities available. TIhebattalion order normally gives the sequence in whichtasks are executed. Tasks may include-

(1) Clearing fields of fire.(2) Preparing emplacements for weapons and

individual shelter.(3) Laying antitank mines, trip flares, and anti-

personnel mines when authorized.

237

(4) Constructing wire entanglements and otherobstacles.

(5) Preparing routes for supply. conimmnlica-tion, and evacuation.

b. In the absence of special instructions, all menfirst dig standing type foxholes or weapons em-placements. While these emplacements are beingbuilt, all crew-served weapons are mounted nearbyin temporary firing positions. Maximum use ismade of natural and artificial concealment and coveragainst both ground and air observation and fire.Protective wire is placed around each small unitdefense area and tactical wire is strung forward ofthe company position. Specially trained elementsfrom other units may lay mine fields and constructobstacles or supervise the work on them. Many ofthese tasks are done concurrently.

c. Organization of areas exposed to enemy fire orair bombardment may have to be done piecemealduring daylight with men well dispersed. If thisis impracticable, the work on these exposed posi-tions is postponed until darkness.

247. ANTITANK DEFENSE

a. The preparation of a coordinated antitank de-fense plan is mainly the responsibility of the battalioncommander. This plan provides for placing aliti-tank weapons within, and mine fields and obstaclesforward of, front-line rifle company areas. Thecompany commander familiarizes himself with thisplan and uses the antitank weapons of his companyfor close protection of his company area. He placesthese weapons where they can cover avenues of enemy

238

tank approach, mine fields, and obstacles that arenot covered by the weapons of other units, or heuses them to reinforce his more vulnerable areas.

b. Mine fields and obstacles are covered by fireto prevent the enemy from removing them beforeor during a tank attack. They also are covered byweapons that can destroy immobilized tanks. Minefields are marked and a record of their locations ismade and submitted to the next higher commander.Guards are placed over them, to prevent casualtiesto friendly troops and vehicles, until all security ele-ments forward of the main line of resistance havewithdrawn.

248. HASTY OCCUPATION OF POSITION

a. When speed is necessary, the first considerationsare to get the troops on the position, provide forlocal security, and start the organization of theground. The elements of the company and any at-tached weapons are located to obtain all-around co-ordination. Positions and fires are readjusted laterif necessary.

b. A front line rifle company often is forced toorganize its position while in close contact with astrong enemy. Such a defense may be characterizedby all or a part of the following: limited movementof men, troops subjected to observed enemy fire, lim-ited attacks to seize terrain necessary to the organi-zation of the position, limited withdrawals (afterapproval of the battalion commander) to strengthenthe position, and hostile attack during any or allstages of the organization. When organizing a posi-tion under these conditions, the principles of defense

239

still apply though the extent varies in each situation.Troop-leading procedure is followed as far as thesituation permits. The company commander reliesheavily on the initiative of his platoon leaders, sinceimmediate decisions by them are necessary beforethe company commander can make his detailed co-ordination. To cover the organization of the posi-tion, maximum use is made of available supportingfires.

249. NIGHT DISPOSITIONS

a. It is usually necessary to make adjustments atnight because of reduced visibility. These adjust-ments include-

(1) Laying light machine guns on final protec-tive lines and 60-mm mortars on barrages.

(2) Shifting troops and weapons to block areas,usually open and exposed, that favor nightattack but that are covered solely by fireduring periods of good visibility.

(3) Changing local security to night disposi-tions.

(4) Preparing flares to light the foreground.b. Any company adjustments in fires or troop dis-

position are coordinated with the battalion com-mander. Infrared equipment may be used to in-crease visibility.

250. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE

a. 1As the enemy approaches the battle position,he is engaged first by fire from outposts establishedwell forward of the battle position and by long-

240

range weapons located behind the front-line com-pLany areas. Long-range filles are controlled by airobservers, patrols, and by ground observers on theoutpost positions.

b. When the enemy comes within effective small-arms range of the main line of resistance (500 yards),individuals and crewv served weaponls in front-linellatoon Iareas open fire. As the enemy advance con-tinues, these fires are increased in intensity. The00-mm mortars and ]ong-range weapons fire on tar-gets within range. Tanks located to fire in front ofthe main line of resistance open fire at enemy tanksat long-range, unless specifically directed to with-hold fire until the enemy is closer. Observers ineach forward defense area keel) the front undercontinulolls observation to adjust fires of long-rangeweaplons. As the enemy draws closer to the battleposition and delivers heavy fires in preparation forhis assault, men in front-line defense areas takecover in their foxholes or emplacements.

c. When the massed fires of the enemy are lifted,all weapons in the forward platoon defense areasopen fire to inflict maximum casualties and to stopthe hostile attack before it reaches front-line posi-tions. Supporting fires are requested directly fromthe nearest artillery or mortar forward observer.The company commander also requests supportingfires from the battalion comlmmander.

d. If enemy attackers reach the area to be cov-ered by final protective fires, machine guns shifttheir fires to final protective lines, mortars and artil-lery fire their barrages, and other weapons increasetheir rates of fire against the most threatening tar-

241

gets. Authority to call for final protective fires isgiven in the battalion fire plan. This authority isnormally delegated to front-line platoon leaders sothat fires are delivered when needed. When fires arecalled for, they are delivered without delay. Higherunit commanders immediately verify the need forthese fires and call for reinforcing fire if necessary.If the enemy assaults, he is met by fire, grenades,and close combat. MIen in the threatened area donot withdraw except upon the verified order of theircommander.

e. When the attacking force includes tanks as wellas infantry elements, the primary targets for allcompany weapons. except antitank weapons, are thehostile foot troops or other exposed personnel. Firesare directed to separate foot elements from the tanks.Exceptionally, when hostile infantry or exposed per-sonnel do not provide a target. small-arms fire isdirected against the open hatches and vision devicesof enemy tanks. Antitank rifle grenades and rocketsare used against hostile tanks. Fire is continueduntil the defenders are forced to take cover to pro-tect themselves and their weapons from the crush-ing action of the tanks. They return to their firingpositions as soon as the tanks have passed an(:l fireon the rear of the tanks, on approaching foot troops,and on men riding, or closely following, other at-tacking tanks.

f. If the enemy succeeds in overrunning defenseareas, the advance is resisted by fires from adjacentand support platoon defense areas and from sup-porting weapons. If a minor penetration has beenmade by a small enemy group and the main line of

242

resistance has not been jeopardized, the companycommander may order the support platoon to coun-terattack. Such a counterattack is a quick assaultand mopping-up action. A new support is recon-stituted at the earliest opportunity.

g. If the company is surrounded, the companycommander shifts troops and weapons ill his areaas necessary for a continned all-around defense.

h. A night defense resembles a day defense exceptthat it is characterized by more close-in fighting.It can be expected that some of the enemy will in-filtrate the position. At the same time, light ma-chine guns, 60-mm mortars, and other supportingweapons break up elements of the enemy which arestill outside the position. Although machine gunsare laid in readiness on final protective lines andthe mortars on their barrage areas, crews of theseweapons should shift to more remunerative or morethreatening targets when visibility permits (andwhen not ordered to fire final protective fires).Flares are used forward of the position to help lo-cate these targets.

251. RELIEF

a. If the defense is prolonged or if units on thebattle position have suffered heavy casualties, peri-odic relief is made whenever possible. The front-line armored infantry company may be relieved bythe battalion reserve company, by a company fromanother battalion, or by a unit of different strengthand organization. For secrecy and security, front-line units normally are relieved at night.

243

b. Relief plans are made in detail and are car-ried out as fast as possible. Incoming leaders mustlearn the organization of the position and the planof defense. They normally do this by sending rep-resentatives to inspect the position during daylight.Some of these representatives remain on the posi-tion to learn of anv changes that occur afterward.Unit leaders of the company being relieved are in-formed of the time, order of relief, and the routesand check points by which they will leave theposition.

c. As it is relieved, each unit illcltding squads andweapons crews goes to the rear. There the platoonsnormally are assembled and led by guides over pre-viously reconnoitered routes to the company assem-bly area. During this movement, weapons andtroops from other units normally are attached tothe platoon in whose area they have been employed.Commanders arrange for the mutual exchange ofweapons which cannot be moved easily or replacedduring darkness. Communication lines and extrasupplies and equipment not essential to the unitbeing relieved are left on the position.

d. Periodic reports are made to the next highercommander. The incoming unit commander as-sulnes responsibility for the defense of the area whenthe major portion of his command is in positionand he has established communication and control,or when ordered to do so by the over-all commander.

252. REVERSE SLOPE, GENERAL

The occupation of a reverse slope position may bedictated if control of the forward slope has been

244

lost or has not been gained, or if the forward slopeis extremely vulnerable to enemy fire. The advan-tage of a reverse slope defense is that the forwardelements of the battle position are protected fromenemy ground observation and direct-fire weapons.This permits greater freedom of movement, moredetailed improvement of the position, ease of sup-ply, and rest for the troops (fig. 43).

253. ORGANIZATION OF REVERSE SLOPE POSITION

The reverse slope position is organized generallyaccording to the principles of defense. Modifica-tions of these principles and additional considera-tions are-

a. Observation posts are prepared on or just for-ward of the topographical crest and are occupiedby unit commanders and forward observers. Smallgroups of riflemen and weapons crews provide pro-tection for these observers. Normally, these groupscome from the support platoon. At night they arestrengthened to prevent hostile infiltration andsurprise.

b. When possible the forward slope and flanks arecovered by direct flanking fire of weapons defiladedfrom the front.

c. A carefully laid field of antitank mines, tripflares, and antipersonnel mines may be used on theforward and reverse slope to slow the enemy attackand thereby allow the defender more time to meetan assault.

d. Troops and weapons on the reverse slope arelocated to permit maxilmum fire on the crest, in the

245

I I/1 ~~MLR

Fig're ,3S. The reinloreecd rifle comnpany in a reverse-slope

defense (schoclatic).

246

applroaches around the crest, and on the forwardslopes of adjacent terrain features.

e. If within effective range, the military crest ofthe next high ground behind is a desirable locationfor the support platoon and attached tanks.

f. Final protective fires are planned to destroythe enemy as he attempts to cross the crest. Themain line of resistance is usually located at least 200yards from the crest of the hill. This insures ade-quate fields of fire and perlnits delivery of finalprotective fires without endangering friendly troops.

254. CONDUCT OF REVERSE SLOPE DEFENSE

a. The conduct of a reverse slope defense is gen-erally according to the principles described in para-graph 168. The security detachments on the for-ward slope give warning and delay and disorganizethe enemy by long-range fires. During periods ofpoor visibility, greater use is made of warning andilluminating devices like flares, searchlights, andantipersonnel mines, to provide a better coverage ofthe front.

b. If the enemy drives in the security detachmentsand continues his advance, planned concentrationsale delivered on the forward slope by the defendinghigh-angle weapons to disrupt any attempts to massfor an assault. Direct fire weapons within the battleposition withhold their fires until suitable targetsappear. If the enemy crosses the crest in mass, finalprotective fires are delivered.

c. If a limited penetration of the main line of re-sistance is made and a counterattack is ordered, it is'carried out the salne as in a normal defense. Since

247

the enemy must be denied observation from the highground overlooking the battle position, however, thecounterattacking force seeks to reestablish the secur-ity detachments on the forward slope.

Section III. RESERVE COMPANY IN SUSTAINEDDEFENSE

255. GENERAL

a. An armored infantry company may be part ofthe battalion reserve. The battalion reserve in-cludes tank and armored infantry elements thatfunction as a tank-armored infantry team. Theratio of tanks in the battalion reserve is generallylarge; however, the reserve is committed as a tank-armored infantry team. It performs one or both ofthe following missions:

(1) As a mobile striking force, it counterat-tacks to destroy an enemy penetration ofthe battle position.

(2) It occupies prepared positions to containor block an enemy penetration while otherforces execute a counterattack. The de-cision to counterattack, occupy positions,or to do both, rests with the battalion coIn-mander.

b. The reserve company commander keeps himselfabreast of the situation and continuously makesplans for possible company missions. He keeps hisplatoon leaders inlformed of the situation and changesin plans. He keeps himself advised of the situationby-

248

(1) Personal reconmaislauce and reconnaissanceby lower unit leaders.

(2) Liaison with battalion headquarters.(3) Frequent visits to the battalion command

post and observation post.(4) Establishment of a company observation

post, usually near the battalion observationpost.

256. COUNTERATTACK

The counterattack is a decisive phase of defensivecombat. The basic counterattacking force of thebattalion is the reserve tank-armored infantry team.To give maximum strength to the counterattack, thebattalion commander attaches to or places in sup-port of the reserve company all available troops andweapons. These attachments and supporting mis-sions become effective upon the battalion command-er's decision to counterattack. The battalion ordergives the likely penetrations against which counter-attack plans are to be prepared. The reserve com-pany commanders prepare counterattack plans whileorganizing the defensive position. He submits theseplans to the battalion commander for approval.

257_ OTHER MISSIONS

Besides counterattacking, the reserve may be usedto-

a. Increase the depth of the defense. The reserveprepares primary positions on key terrain, normallywith three platoon areas on line across the battalionarea behind the front-line companies. These posi-

931 358°-51--17 249

tions should be organized not more than 500 yardsand not less than 150 yards from the support pla-toons of the front-line companies. Then they willbe within rifle supporting distance and outside thezone of dispersion of enemy fire directed at the front-line companies. The platoon positions are organ-ized similar to front-line platoons. Their fires andpositions are closely coordinated with those of sup-porting weapons located in the rear of the battalionarea.

b. Protect flanks and rear. Besides adding depthto the defense, the reserve protects the flanks andthe rear of the battalion. Since this protection sel-dom can be provided from primary positions alone,it usually is necessary for the reserve to preparesupplementary platoon positions. If the battalionis threatened from any direction other than the front,the battalion commander may direct the reserve tooccupy whatever combination of platoon positionsbest protects the threatened area. When the bat-talion has an unprotected flank, the reserve may bedisposed to protect it.

258. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND

Normally, the reserve company first prepares itsprilnaly positions. It, then prepares its supplemen-tary positions according to the priority given by thebattalion commander and, when necessary, improvesroutes to its lines of departure for counterattack.The organization of each position includes clearingfields of fire and making and concealing individualshelters, weapon emplacements, and obstacles.

250

Section IV. MOBILE DEFENSE

259. GENERAL

The mobile defense usually is composed only ofan outpost system and reserves. The outpost systemis lightly held while the reserve serves as a counter-attacking force to detroy the enemy at the most fav-orable tactical locality. Normally, the armored in-fantry rifle company, reinforced by tanks, is em-ployed within the reinforced battalion in the mobiledefense as follows:

a. To outpost part of the battalion sector. Inthis case, the reinforced battalion commander assignsa definite part of the battalion sector to the rein-forced company. The company commander organ-izes an outpost system in this area by organizing,occupying, and defending strong points (key points)designated by the battalion commander (par. 416).

b. To constitute part of the mobile reserve. Inthis case, the reinforced company normally operatesintact as part of a reinforced battalion in combatcommand reserve as the counterattack force. How-ever, if the reinforced battalion, operating independ-ently, assumes the mobile defense, a reinforcedarmored infantry rifle company may be assigned asall or part of the mobile reserve for the reinforcedbattalion.

Section V. REINFORCED RIFLE COMPANY AS PARTOF OUTPOST SYSTEM IN MOBILE DEFENSE

260. SELECTION OF STRONG-POINT LOCATIONS

The commander of the reinforced battalion nor-mally selects critical terrain features that dominate

251

the most likely avenues of enemy approach into thedefended area. If strong-point locations are not se-lected by the battalion commander, the companycommander immediately makes as detailed a recon-naissance as time and the situation permit to deter-mine key terrain features and enemy avenues ofapproach in the company sector. The companycommander and platoon leaders must be thoroughlyfamiliar with the terrain in the company sector.Terrain is evaluated as explained in paragraph 236.

261. TASK ORGANIZATION

After completing his reconnaissance (par. 414)and formulating his plan of defense, the companycommander organizes his company to accomplish itsassigned mission. The reinforced company may oc-cupy one key terrain feature. On the other hand itmay be organized into reinforced rifle or tank pla-toons, reinforced tank sections, or reinforced riflesquads. If the company does not occupy a companystrong point, platoons, sections, or squads are desig-nated to defend key terrain features, avenues ofapproach for enemy foot troops and armor, roadblocks, and the observation (listening) posts. Inplanning the composition of each small team, thecompany commander considers-

a. Mission assigned the small team. Each strongpoint is manned with the tanks and armored in-fantry needed for the task. Key terrain is mannedby enough men and tanks to hold the feature. WVhen-ever possible, it is desirable that at least a rein-forced platoon be assigned to organize, each keyterrain feature. The more importance attached to

252

the terrain feature, the stronger the defendingdetachment.

b. Composition of the reinforced company. Theratio of tanks to armored infantry in a reinforcedcompany determines the size of the tank unit that isincluded in each team or detachment. The tanksmust not be split below a platoon if possible.

e. Nature of the terrain. Smaller detachments areneeded for strong points in rough inaccessible ter-rain than in open, gently rolling terrain. Some ter-rain may be so rugged that patrols alone can se-cure it.

d. Presence of key installations and areas. Keyinstallations. road centers, key towns, and areasneeded for the maneuver of the battalion reserve arestrongly held.

e. Width of the company sector. The companycommander mlay have to use many small detachmentsif the sector is exceedingly wide. The narrower thesector. the fewer small isolated detachments are re-quired. Due to the varying composition of a rein-forced company and the variable frontages assignedto reinforced battalions, guide figures for widths ofsectors are impractical in mobile defense.

262. ORGANIZATION OF OUTPOST SYSTEM

a. The outpost system is composed of observationposts (listening posts at night) and strong pointsof varying strength (par. 172). The observationposts and listening posts are set up forward of thestrong points to observe and report enemy activityto the proper headquarters, and to direct artilleryfire. The strong points are located on key terrain

253

features, covering likely avenues of enemy ap-proach, and are mutually supporting, as far as pos-sible. Their mission is to deceive, slow, stop, andrepel the enemy. Strong points are organized forall-around defense.

b. The company seldom holds out a support sincethe extended frontage characteristic of mobile de-fense normally deniands the use of all platoons inthe forward areas. If the frontage is narrow enoughto permit a support, it is used to reinforce a strongpoint that is threatened by the enemy. If the entirecompany is occupying one key terrain feature and itsplatoon defense areas are mutually supporting, thesupport is used as in sustained defense with emphla-sis on protection of the flanks and rear (fig. 44).

263. ORGANIZATION OF THE GROUND

Whenever possible, at least a reinforced platoonshould be assigned to organize each key terrain fea-ture. When not possible, the reinforced platoon maybe assigned to organize two localities. Alternateand supplementary positions, and routes to them, arereconnoitered f6r the tanks. Road blocks and minefields, when established, are covered by both anti-tank and antipersonnel fires. However, these ob-stacles are located so that they do not hinder thecounterattack by the reserve. Advantage is takenof all natural obstacles to delay, slow, and harass theenemy. At night, or when visibility is poor, tanksare sited to fire down roads or similar avenues ofapproach for enemy armor. The armored infantrydigs in along forward slopes of key terrain featuresas in sustained defense (par. 166).

254

TANK AND A RORED INFANisTy aSTAONC POINTS ON KEY TERRAIN

ERING AVENUES OP DISMOUNTED

Figyie J44. Organization of a company sector on outpostsysteC, in onobile defenlsc.

264. FIRE PLAN

a. General. Fire plans are made to take full ad-vantage of available fire power. The fire plan con-sists mainly of preplanned artillery and mortar con-centrations. Adjacent organized positions on theoutpost system establish mutually supporting andinterlocking bands of automatic weapons fire whentheir location permits. Fire plans include support-ing fires for all planned counterattacks by the bat-talion reserve and are flexible enough to allow sup-port for any counterattack that is not planned. The

255

company commander coordinates the fires of hisweapons with those of supporting weapons and artil-lery. This coordination includes-

(1) Fires of attached tanks.(2) 60-amm mortar fires.(3) Light machine-gun fires of light machine

gun squads.(4) Fires of vehicular weapons (machine gulls

and rocket launchers).(5) Fires of battalion mortar platoon.(6) Artillery fires.(7) Air.

b. T'anl fires. In mobile defense, the tanks pro-vide antitank protection and support the outpostswith HE and machine gun fire.

e. Light machine-gun fires. In mobile defensethese fires are used to cover approaches and roadblocks, defend obstacles, and, when possible, to firefinal protective liens in front of organized positions.

d. Fires of vehicular weapons. Rocket launchersare used to supplement the antitank defense pro-vided by the attached tanks. Since frontages areextremely wide in mobile defense, maximum use ismade of carrier machine guns. The mobile firepower of these weapons gives added strength to theoutpost.

e. Fires of battalion mortar platoon. The com-pany commander ascertains what barrages and con-centrations are planned for his sector by thebattalion mortar platoon. He coordinates these fireswith the fires of his organic and attached weapons.

f. Artillery fires. The fire of the organic andattached weapons is coordinated closely with the

256

barrages and concentrations of the direct supportand general support artillery.

g. Air. A higher command decides whether toemploy tactical air, but his decision is based largelyon requests and reports sent in by the outposts.Cooperating air power cannot be coordinated intothe fire plan because of the difficulty of timing airstrikes on very short notice. However, friendlyaviation is very effective against hostile armor con-centrations and is used when available to break upand harass enemy armored formations. Often awell-timed request for an air strike on an enemyassembling for an attack may completely disrupt thatattack; at the least, an air strike will inflict casual-ties and delay and harass the attacker.

265. DISPOSITION OF VEHICLES

Carriers are kept available to their squads, bothat observation posts and strong points, because thesquads may have to move quickly. Vehicular wea-pons normally are integrated into the fire plan(par. 264).

266. CONTROL

The primary means of control is radio. Becauseof extended frontages and distance between positions,wire is seldom used for control purposes. Close co-ordination between the outpost system and its ob-servation posts is necessary for word of enemy activ-ity to get back quickly to higher headquarters. Itmay be necessary to operate patrols between strongpoints during darkness and to safeguard areas not

257

covered by strong points or, by observation, by em-ploying patrols during daylight.

267. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE

a. High-performanlce aircraft and liaison planesnormally give the first warning of the enemy's ap-proach. The observation posts warn of the enemy'sclose approach. It is essential that informationabout the enemy flow up the command channel fromthe company commander on outpost to higher head-quarters. When the enemy approaches withinrange of the supporting artillery, the observationposts may direct and adjust fire. The outposts pre-pare to meet any attack.

b. When the enemy attacks, the observation or lis-tening posts give warning and maintain contactwhile falling back to the strong poiInts. The platoonleader relays the information to the company com-mander, calls for supporting fires as needed, andholds his position. The strong point attempts toambush the enemy :and makes every effort to delaythe enemy force, to cause it to deploy, to stop it, andto destroy it. The strong point normally does thisby combining its tank anld small-arms fire with thesupporting fires available and the natural or arti-ficial obstacles already established. The position isdefended even if bypassed. The unit defending astrong point is prepared to withdraw to a supple-mentary position if threatened with extinction.However, it withdraws only on approval of the bat-talion commander. If the mobile reserve of thecombat command is used to counterattack, the strongpoints fix the enemy by continuing to fire.

258

c. If ordered by the battalion commandler to yieldground inl the face of a strong enemy attack, the coem-pany comlmander withdraws his outpost system topreviously recomnoitered defensive positions in therear. Here the defensive system is reorganized sim-ilar to the initial positions. Ground is never yieldedhaphallzardly by individual outposts or by the com-pany, but only on order of the battalion commander.

Section VI. REINFORCED RIFLE COMPANY AS PARTOF A RESERVE BATTALION IN MOBILE DEFENSE

268. GENERAL

a. When the company is part of a reinforced bat-talion in the mobile reserve of the combat command,it normally prepares for and conducts its operationsas part of the reinforced battalion (pars. 424-427).

b. If the reinforced company is used as mobilereserve for a reinforced battalion acting independ-ently, the company also prepares for and conductsits operations as outlined in paragraplhs 421423.

259

PART THREE

THE ARMORED INFANTRY BATTALION

CHAPTER 10

BATTALION HEADQUARTERS, HEADQUARTERSAND SERVICE COMPANY

Section 1. BATTALION COMMANDER

269. GENERAL

Command of an armored infantry battalion inbattle is a supreme test of leadership. Fear, fatigue,hardships, casualties, and combat hysteria are con-stantly taxing the mental stability and physicalstamina of the commander. In such an atmosphere,the battalion commander must measure his decisionsin terms of human lives. Because of his great re-s p onsibility, the battalion commander must be anoutstanding leader. As he usually commands a re-inforced battalion composed mainly of tanks andinfantry, he must understand the principles govern-ing the tactical operation of his own unit, attachedunits, and supporting units.

270. RELATION WITH BATTALION STAFF

The battalion commander maintains a close, per-sonal relationship with his staff. He encourages ini-

261

tiative and welcomes constructive suggestions. Inturn he keeps all staff members fully informed ofhis policies so that during his absence they may actin his name. He insures that a feeling of mutualrespect and confidence exists between the staff andthe unit commanders. He avoids over-delegatingauthority to his staff or using it to conceal his ownshortcomings.

271. RELATIONS WITH COMPANY COMMANDERS

The battalion commander is direct and personalwith his company commanders. He encouragesthem to deal directly with him whenever they feelit is desirable. He often visits his companies andplatoons to get first-hand knowledge of the situationand of the capabilities of his units. The battalioncommander's relations with attached units is thesame as with his organic units, except that the com-mander of an attached unit gives technical adviceabout the employment of his unit.

272. RELATIONS WITH COMMANDERS OF SUPPORT-ING UNITS

The battalion commander can only request assist-ance from supporting units since they are not apart of his command. Ordinarily, his request isgranted unless it is tactically unsound or contraryto orders of higher commanders. Communicationand liaison are established with units operating withor supporting the battalion. Commanders of sup-porting units advise and assist the battalioncommander.

262

273. CONDUCT IN COMBAT

a. By plans, orders, and supervision, the battalioncommander causes every individual and piece ofequipment to make an effective contribution to ac-complish his mission. He coordinates the effortsof his command with those of flanking and support-ing units. Before requesting additional assistance,he utilizes all the means at his disposal.

b. To maintain security and prepare for futureoperations, he uses observation, patrols, liaison, andpersonal reconnaissance in the battle area. He as-signs definite missions to his company commanders,

' and he keeps informed of their progress. He givesassistance when needed to insure the success of hisplan.

c. The battalion commander goes where he can bestdirect and control his battalion. Before leaving thecommand post he orients his staff on plans to bemade or action to be taken in his absence, and re-ports his destinations and probable hour of return.Upon his return he informs his staff of any newdevelopment.

Section II. BATTALION STAFF

274. GENERAL

a. Unit staff. The members of the unit staff of thearmored infantry battalion coordinate those func-tions of command that relate to their offices. Theunit staff is composed of the-

(1) Executive officer (second in command).(2) Adjutant (S-1).

263

(3) Intelligence officer (S-2).(4) Operations and training officer (S-3).(5) Supply officer (S-4).

b. Special staff. The following officers have tech-nical and administrative duties or comumand unitsthat qualify them to be grouped as members of thebattalion commander's special staff. Included arethe-

(1) Communication officer.(2) Motor officer.(3) Mortar officer (commander of mortar pla-

toon).(4) Surgeon (commander of medical detach-

ment).(5) Personnel officer.(6) Artillery liaison officer (from supporting

artillery).(7) Headquarters commandant (commander,

headquarters, headquarters and servicecompany).

275. STAFF FUNCTIONING

a. A staff officer is an assistant to the commander.He transmits his commander's orders to unit com-manders or conveys his commander's instructions ordesires. In an emergency, staff officers are preparedto issue orders based upon the policies of the com-mander. Whenever a staff officer issues an emer-gency order, he informs the commander. The staffassists the commander by relieving him of time-consuming and distracting details. He is kept in-

264

formed by timely estimates of the situation and bya summary of reports from lower units. The staffkeeps information up to date on the strength andlocation of units, enemy activities and capabilities,movements, positions and action of lower units, andthe status of supply or other administrative matters.On the basis of this information, the staff makes rec-ommendatiolls to the commander. When a decisionis made, the staff members assist in translating thedecision into orders and in supervising its execution.

b. The staff cultivates friendly relationships withthe commanders of lower or attached units. Com-manders of lower or attached units are consulted todetermine their capabilities, needs, and problems.Staff officers visit lower units to get first-hand knowl-.edge of the tactical situation and administrativeconditions. Commanders are contacted personallyas the first and last step of each such visit. Whenconditions are observed that are known to be con-trary to announced policies, they are called to theattention of the appropriate commander. Simplereports of facts are made to the battalion com-mander following such staff visits.

c. The staff officer organizes and trains his assist-ants to function in his absence. Staff duties are soarranged that one staff officer may function for an-other during short absences from the command post.Before leaving the command post, the staff officer ac-quaints himself with the general situation, announceshis destination and probable hour of return, anddetermines what assistance he may be to other staffofficers.

931358°-51--18 265

276. EXECUTIVE OFFICER

The executive officer is the principal assistant andadvisor to the battalion commander. He coordi-nates and supervises the details of operations andadministration, thereby enabling the commander todevote himself to the broader aspects of command.The main function of the executive offlicer is the di-rection and coordination of the battalion staff. Heis responsible that the staff is organized and workingas a team to provide maximium assistance to thecommander and the battalion as whole. He seesthat required reports are forwarded at the propertime, and that plans are being prepared for futurecontingencies. He insures that instructions issuedto the command reflect the policies and plans of thecommander. He supervises all liaison activities andliaison agents. The executive officer keeps familiarwith the situation. During his commander's tem-porary absence, he represents him and directs actionsso that they reflect the commander's policies. He isprepared to assume command at any time (fig. 45).

277. ADJUTANT IS-1)

a. The adjutant is responsible for the training andwork of the S-1 section. The section is divided intothe adjutant's group and the personnel officer'sgroup. The adjutant's group consists of the adju-tant, the battalion sergeant major, and clerks of thebattalion headquarters platoon of headquarters,headquarters and service company. The personnelofficer's group is headed by a warrant officer.

266

~~z

0kg i 2

- : I 2

1, 1<

4/~

h~~~

C, ~ ~ ~ ~ 6

b. Generally, the adjutant has duties similar tothose outlined in FM 101-5 for the adjutant generaland for the G-1 of division and higher units. Theadjutant is responsible for the staff supervision ofthe administrative and personnel section. Duringcombat, the personnel officer and his group normallyare with the division trains as a part of the rear eche-lon; they may be with the unit field trains. Theadjutant's group operates at the battalion commandpost.

c. In his administrative functions, the adjutant-(1) Authenticates orders and instructions ex-

cept those pertaining to combat.(2) Processes official correspondence.(3) Insures that administrative and personnel

records are maintained according to estab-lished policies and procedures.

d. As S-1, the adjutant-(1) Prepares strength records and reports.(2) Prepares data for the unit report.(3) Secures replacements and arranges for their

reception and processing (coordinating withthe S 3 and the S-4).

(4) Maintains absence without leave statistics,returns stragglers to their units, and super-vises the processing of court-martial cases.

(5) Supervises the collection and evacuation ofprisoners of war and maintains prisoner ofwar reports (coordinating with the S-2 andthe S-4).

(6) Supervises graves registration functions(coordinating with the S-4, the surgeon,and the chaplain).

268

(7) Maintains morale activities in the battalion,such as recreation, decorations, citations,awards, honors, leaves, and passes. TheS-1 coordinates with the chaplain and thesurgeon on religious, welfare, and healthmatters. He supervises mail clerks and ar-raLnges for mail distribution and collection.

(8) Supervises the control of civilians, dis-placed persons, and refugees (coordinatingwith the 8-2, the S-3, and the S-4). Whena civil affairs or military government de-tachmlent is with the battalion, it normallyfunctions under the supervision of the S-1.

(9) Makes administrative recommendationsabout transfers, assignments, reassignments,promotions, demotions, classification, andreelassification of personnel.

(10) Supervises movement of the commandpost, and arranges the interior of the com-mand post. This includes allotting spaceto the commander and staff sections.

(11) Secures and administers local labor. Heprovides quarters and other facilities neces-sary for Department of the Army civiliansserving with, or attached to the battalion(coordinating with the S-2, the S-4 and, ifavailable, the civil affairs detachmentcommander) .

(12) Allots space and shelter in the headquar-ters area for the troops and for the head-quarters (coordinating with the S-3 and theS-4). He may supervise the quarteringparties and quartering arrangements incamp or bivouac.

269

(13) Prepares estimates and plans covering per-sonnel activities for current and futureoperations.

(14) Prepares the personnel portion of para-graph four (administrative paragraph) ofthe battalion operation order.

(15) Accomplishes all functions not specificallythe responsibility of another staff officer, oras directed by the battalion commander.

278. INTELLIGENCE OFFICER (S-2)

a. The main responsibility of the intelligence offi-cer (S-2) is to keep his commander, and all othersconcerned, fully informed of the enemy situation.capabilities. and courses of action, and of the terrainand weather. He recommends counterintelligencemeasures to deceive and deny information to theenemy.

b. Among his specific duties, the S-2-(1) Supervises and trains battalion intelligence

personnel.(2) Plans and supervises intelligence and coun-

terintelligence training for all personnel ofthe battalion (coordinating with the S-3).

(3) Prepares collection plans, orders and re-quests to collection agencies (coordinatingwith the S-3).

(4) Records and files information, using a sit-nation map and S -2 work sheet.

(5) Evaluates and interprets information anddisseminates intelligence to the commanderand staff and to higher, lower, and adja-cent units.

270

(6) Examines captured enemy personnel, docu-ments. and material, and civilians-hostileor friendly-for information of immediatevalue to the battalion.

(7) Procures and distributes maps, aerial pho-tographs, and photonmaps for the battalion.

(8) Establishes and supervises the operationof battalion observation posts.

(9) Coordinates battalion collecting agencies.Maintains intelligence liaison and exchangeof information with higher and adjacentheadquarters.

(10) Receives and issues photo interpretationreports and defense overprints from higherheadquarters.

(11) Records and disseminates intelligence onthe types, characteristics, and methods ofenemy chemical, radiological, and biologi-cal warfare, and on the location and extentof contaminated areas.

279. OPERATIONS AND TRAINING OFFICER (S-3)

a. The operations and training officer (S-3) ischarged with staff responsibility for matters of or-ganization, training, and combat operations of thebattalion.

b. Among his specific organization duties, theS-3-

(1) Makes a continuous study of the organiza-tion of units; prepares recommendedchanges to tables of organization and equip-ment.

271

(2) Recommends assignllent and attachment ofunits (coordinating with the S-1 and theS-4) based upon organization that helps toachieve the mission (includes organizationfor movement, training, and combat).

(3) Studies personnel and equipment require-ments; coordinating with the S-1 and theS-4.

c. Among his specific training duties, the S-3--(1) Prepares training directions, programs. or-

ders, field exercises, and maneuvers, based onplans approved by the battalion com-mander.

(2) Selects training areas and ranges and al-locates training aids and other trainingequipment.

(3) Organizes and conducts schools within thebattalion. Based upon the commander'sdirectives, he prepares the program of in-struction, selects and trains instructors, andassists in selection of units or personnel toattend the school.

(4) Makes training inspections and preparesiand supervises training tests.

(5) Prepares training records and reports.(6) Coordinates information and educational

activities.(7) Trains and supervises the S-3 section.

d. Among his specific combat operations duties,the S-3-

272

(1) Informs his commander and other staff sec-tions of the tactical situation and is pre-pared to make recommendations.

(2) Studies the situation as affected by theenemy situation; orders from the combatcommand commander; actions of adjacentand supporting units; location and capabili-ties of his own troops; casualties and re-placements; terrain and weather; and thestatus of supply and equipment.

(3) Maintains up-to-date information to keepthe commander informed and to aid in thepreparation of reports. He supervises theposting of information on the situationmap.

(4) Recommends the general location of biv-ouacs, assembly areas, and attack positions.

(5) Coordinates reconnaissance measures withinthe battalion, to include intelligence mis-sions whell combat troops of the battalionare involved (coordinating with the S-2).He also plans security measures to be usedby the battalion on marches and at halts, inassembly areas, at administrative and com-mand installations, and when engaged withthe enemy.

(6) Plans troop movements to include units in-volved, formation, and type of transporta-tion required (coordinating use of transpor-tation with the S4). He prepares themarch order after the plan of movement isapproved.

273

(7) Recommends the tactical employment ofunits. Recommendations are made after astudy of the capabilities of units, the enemysituation, the terrain and weather, and afterconference with other staff officers and unitcommanders.

(8) Recommends measures to attain secrecy andeffect surprise (coordinating with the S-2)(fig. 46).

(9) Coordinates with the communication officerin the preparation of the signal communica-tion plan in order to maintain communica-tion between the battalion commander, bat-talion headquarters, and units of the bat-talion. The S-3 keeps the communicationofficer informed of operation plans.

(10) Recommends the general location of coin-mand posts according to the operation plan.

(11) Prepares the battalion operation order forthe commander's approval. Some materialfor inclusion in the order is obtained fromother staff officers (S-l, S-2, S-4, and coin-munication officer). After approval, theS-3 publishes, authenticates, and distributesthe order, and assists in supervising itsexecution.

(12) Transmits the commander's orders and in-structions to units of the battalion; helpsunit commanders by interpreting orders andinstructions if necessary.

(13) Prepares plans for future operations,guided by information obtained from thecommander and by knowledge of the pres-ent situation of the battalion.

274

e~ ~ ~ ~~ 00'

-

~~lz~

0<0

0 2~~~~ oa

2~~~7

2~~~ a4 4o 00

0-ti =

z

- 0

aa ~

Zj~~Li ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Y

4~~~~~

275

(14) Prepares after-action reports and recoml-mends training to correct combat de-ficiencies.

(15) Maintains the unit journal.

280. BATTALION SUPPLY OFFICER (S-4)

a. The S-4 has the staff responsibility for logis-tical support, keeping the battalion commander in-formed of the status of supply, maintenance, andevacuation. He exercises control and coordinationof transportation. He keeps himself informed onthe location of division and army supply installa-tions upon which he depends to meet the battalion'srequirements.

b. The S-4 and his assistants maintain personalcontact with the supply officers of the higher unitsand the various supply installations serving thebattalion. When at the battalion headquarters, theS-4 uses communication facilities of the administra-tive carrier which has a radio in the combat com-mand administrative net and anothelr in the bat-talion command net.

c. The battalion S-4 bases his logistics plan onthe-

(1) Battalion commander's decision.(2) Tactical situation to include the mission.(3) Administrative situation, including a de-

tailed knowledge of the status of supply,evacuation, maintenance, transportation,available personnel, and administrative or-ders or instructions.

276

(4) Terrain over which the battalion will move,including roads and trails in the area.

(5) Supply plan of higher units.d. Among his principal duties, the S-4

(1) Keeps the battalion commander informedof the logistical situation and advises himon logistical matters.

(2) Plans, coordinates, and supervises supply,maintenance, and evacuation for the bat-talion (coordinating with the battalion sur-geon, motor officer, and communicationofficer).

(3) Procures, stores, and distributes all sup-plies required by the battalion. However,medical, vehicular, and signal items areusually procured by the battalion surgeon,motor officer, and communication officer, re-spectively. The S-4 supervises and insuresthe procurement of these items.

(4) Determines future supply requirements,particularly for seasonal changes.

(5) Coordinates logistical matters with the corn-bat command S-4, the division G:4, and thedivision technical staff officers.

(6) Controls the organization, composition,modvement, and protection of the battalioncombat trains.

(7) Assists company commanders in supplymatters.

(8) Recommends requirements, allocations, andmovement of battalion service elements tosupport the tactical plans.

277

(9) Allocates regulated items of supply (coor-dinating with the battalion S-3).

(10) Establishes and disseminates supply poli-cies and procedures and logistical instruc-tions and orders.

(11) Supervises all administrative transporta-tion within the battalion and coordinateswith the battalion S-3 in the planning andcontrol of movements and traffic.

(12) Supervises property accounting and prop-erty records and maintains records to reflectthe current logistical situation.

(13) Submits logistical reports as directed bythe commander and higher headquarters.

(14) Supervises organizational maintenanceand repair of equipment, supplies, andutilities.

(15) Provides transportation for the evacuationof prisoners of war and the dead (coordi-nating with the battalion S-1).

(16) Supervises food service activities in thebattalion.

(17) Arranges for laundry and bathing facili-ties for the battalion.

(18) Prepares paragraph 4 of the operationorder.

(19) Procures real estate and handles purchas-ing and contracting matters, when required,for the battalion.

281. BATTALION SURGEON

'The battalion surgeon is a member of the battalioncommanllder's staff and commands the battalion

278

medical detachment. He supervises the technicaltraining of the battalion in personal hygiene, fieldsanitation, and first aid. He coordinates with thebattalion S4 on evacuation and sanitation. Amonghis specific duties, the battalion surgeon-

a. Prepares a battalion medical plan based on thecombat comlmand plan, the tactical situation, and theplans of the commander.

b. Recommends a site for the battalion aid station,supervises its operation, and assists in the care andtreatment of casualties.

c. Plans for and supervises the evacuation of cas-ualities to the battalion aid station.

d. Keeps the battalion commander. the combatcommand surgeon, and other staff sections informedof the medical situation within the battalion area.

e. Makes timely requests to the division surgeonfor additional medical supplies and replacements.

i. Supervises the training of the medical detach-ment.

282. BATTALION MOTOR OFFICER

The battalion motor officer supervises and coordi-nates the vehicular maintenance in the battalion;keeps the S4 informed about vehicular maintenanceand evacuation; works closely with the companymotor officers and is responsible for the use of allbattalion maintenance facilities. His main duty isto keep all vehicles in efficient operating condition.He is responsible for liaison and coordination withhigber maintenance echelons. In battle, he super-vises the recovery and evacuation of vehicles fromthe battlefield and maintains close contact with sup-

279

porting ordnance elements. He supervises the train-ing of the men in the battalion maintenance platoonand recommends traiing programs for all mainte-nance personnel in the battalion.

283. COMMUNICATION OFFICER

The duties of the communication officer are gen-erally the same as those of the division signal officer.His actions are based upon the policies of his com-mander and the division standing operating proced-ure. He keeps himself fully informed of presentand contemplated activities of his unit. Among hisprincipal duties, the communication officer-

a. Advises the commander and staff on communi-cation matters and makes plans and recomnlenda-tions for establishing the communication system.

b. Supervises the installation. operation, and main-tenance of the communication system.

c. Coordinates communication with higher, ad-jacent, supporting, and attached units.

d. Prepares plans for displacement or extension ofthe existing communication system.

e. Submits recommendations for the procurementand replacement of communication personnel.

/. Supervises the maintenance of communicationsecurity, including the use of codes, ciphers, and au-thentication systems.

y. Supervises the care, maintenance, and repairof communication equipment.

h. Submits recommendations for paragraph 5 ofthe operation order, including initial and subsequentcommand post locations.

280

i. Assists in the preparation of training directiveson communication and supervises technical trainingof all communication personnel and any others des-ignated by the commander.

j. Determines the requirements for communica-tion equipment and supplies and collaborates withthe supply officer in their procurement, storage, anddistribution.

k. Secures from higher headquarters signal opera-tion instructions (SOI) and standing signal instruc-tions (SSI) and prepares extracts for use in his unit.

1. Prepares (for approval) orders, codes, and astanding operating procedure (SOP) on communi-cation.

m. Assists in selecting the exact location for thecommand post and selects locations for communica-tion agencies in the command post.

284. GAS OFFICER

a. The battalion commander will designate anofficer to function as battalion gas officer in addi-tion to his other assigned duties. He advises the bat-talion commander and staff on all matters pertainingto chemical, radiological, and biological defense. Hemaintains close liaison with the division chemicalofficer. Normally, his operational activities are co-ordinated with the battalion surgeon and supervisedby the battalion S-3 (FAI 2140).

b. In the event any weapons or equipment are at-tached to the battalion for the offensive use of chem-ical, radiological, or biological agents, the com-mander of the attached unit will advise the battalioncommander on their use. In that case the battalion

931358--51 19 281

gas officer maintains close liaison with the attachedunit and continues to advise the battalion commanderon defense against our own or enemy contamination.

e. Among his duties, the gas officer-(1) Supervises training in chemical, radiologi-

cal, and biological defense (coordinatingwith the S-3).

(2) Makes recommendations about supply ofprotective equipment.

(3) Supervises the installation and maintenanceof defensive equipment.

(4) Supervises decontaminating activities.(5) Supervises the reconnaissance for contam-

ination of routes and areas before their useby troops.

(6) Makes recommlendations for the tactical andcollective protection of the battalion.

(7) MWorks with the S-2 in securing informa-tion on types, characteristics, and methodsof enemy chemical, radiological, and bi-ological warfare.

285. ARTILLERY LIAISON OFFICER

The direct-support armored artillery battalionsends a liaison officer to the supported unit. Thisofficer gives artillery information and recommendsfire support to the armored infantry battalion com-mander and staff. The liaison officer stays with thearmored infantry battalion commander, keeps hisparent unit constantly informed of the plans of thereinforced armored infantry battalion, and givesgeneral supervision to the artillery forward ob-servers attached to.it.

282

286. COMMANDER HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICECOMPANY

The headquarters and service company com-mander, in addition to his other duties, serves asheadquarters commandant for the forward echelon(CP). He often assists the battalion supply of-ficer and mnay command the battalion field trains. Iflie moves with the forward echelon (CP), he is re-sponsible for the organization and security of thecommand post and its movement.

287. HEADQUARTERS ECHELONS

The battalion headquarters normally is dividedinto two echelons-the forward echelon, or commandpost, and the rear echelon. A command group oftenoperates out of the forward echelon.

a. The purpose of the commnand group is to helpthe battalion commander control combat operations.By establishing a comnmand group, he can closelysupervise operations; promptly make decisions andchanges in plans; and keep higher headquarters in-formed of the situation, usually, through the forwardechelon. The command group usually consists ofthe battalion commander, the battalion S-3, neces-sary liaison and communication personnel, and ve-tlibles equipped with command radio facilities. Itremains highly mobile and well forward duringoperations. During the battle the commander isusually accomplanied by the supporting artillerycomllmander or his liaison officer, and by the tacticalair control party if one is working with the battalion.Thlbe command group can quickly and directly influ-ence the course of battle and can insure the immedi-

283

ate exploitation of all successes. It operates out ofthe forward echelon, returning as the situation per-mits.

b. The purpose of the forward echelon (OP) is toprovide personnel and facilities for the control ofbattalion operations. The forwvard echelon main-tains communication with higher, adjacent, support-ing, and lower units. It makes reports to the com-mand group on new developments in the situation;continuously makes plans for current and futureoperations; provides for liaison with adjacent andhigher units; and supervises liaison with suplportingand lower units. The forward echelon usually con-sists of the executive officer, S-1, S-2 (if he is not incommand group), S4, and communication officer,with their respective enlisted personnel and vehicles.The combat trains are normally located near the for-ward echelon. The forward echelon follows closely,by bounds, the combat elements of the battalion(fig. 47).

c. The rear echelon consists of that portion of thebattalion headquarters whose immediate assistanceis not required by the battalion commander. Thereason for grouping this portion of the staff into aseparate echelon is to increase the mobility and se-curity of the forward echelon. The mission of thisrear echelon is to supervise the administrative andlogistical functions of the battalion.

Section III. HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANY

288. GENERAL

a. Organization. Theheadquarters, headquartersand service company of the armored infantry bat-284

¶ I eJ

t,/t~i* ·-, · l~j

it~~~~~~~g~i(0~' .'

, \ J

a'

,e .'- \=9$~~~~~~%

('7 ~'~&' "N~"Isi~"~'azi~' J3;~.9:i:2~5

talion consists of a battalion headquarters and a bat-talion headquarters and service company. The bat-talion headquarters contains the battalion com-mander and his commissioned and warrant officerstaff. The headquarters and service company has acompany headquarters, the battalion headquartersplatoon, the battalion reconnaissance platoon, thebattalion mortar platoon, the counterfire squad, thebattalion administrative and personlel section, thebattalion supply platoon, and the battalion mainte-nance platoon. The detailed list of personnel andequipment can be found in T/O & E 7-26N.

b.'Nission. The mission of the headquarters,headquarters and service company is to provide com-mand, reconnaissance, mortar support, counterfireanalysis, administration, maintenance, and supplyfor the battalion.

289. BATTALION HEADQUARTERS AND HEADQUAR-TERS PLATOON

a. The battalion headquarters contains the bat-talion commander, battalion executive officer, adju-tant, S-2, S-3, S-4, the communication officer, threeliaison officers, a warrant officer for supply, and awarrant officer for personnel.

b. The battalion headquarters platoon contains theenlisted members of the battalion staff sections andthe battalion communication personnel. Included inthe battalion headquarters platoon are the battalionsergeant major, the operations sergeant, the intelli-gence sergeant, the communication sergeant, the mes-sage center chief, and radio operators, clerks, and

286

drivers. The headquarters platoon also has enoughequipment, vehicles, and communication facilitiesfor the efficient operation of the battalion headquar-ters. For details of personnel and equipment, seeT/O &t E 7-26N.

290. COMPANY HEADQUARTERS

The company headquarters consists of a headquar-ters section, a maintenance section, and an adminis-trative, mess, and supply section.

a. The headquarters section includes the companycommander, the company communication sergeant,the bugler, a radio operator, a messenger, a machinegunner, and a driver. The company headquartersis mounted in an armored personnel carrier. Thecompany commander's duties are covered in para-graph 203.

b. The administrative, mess, and supply sectionclothes, equips, feeds, and maintains the records ofall personnel assigned to the headquarters, head-quarters and service company. It includes the ad-ministrative warrant officer, the first sergeant, thecompany administrative clerk, the supply sergeant,the mess steward, the cooks, filler personnel, and thedrivers for the vehicles. For details of personneland equipment, see T/O & E 7-2i;N.

(1) The first sergeant normally rides in thecompany headquarters vehicle. He assistsin setting up the company command post,establishing local security, and coordinatingresupply and maintenance within thecompany.

287

(2) Before combat the company supply sergeantand administrative clerk, the fillers, and thesupply truck report to the battalion supplyplatoon. There they are joined by the samepersonnel and equipment from the riflecompanies. The company supply sergeantmay serve as an acting chief for that sectionof the supply platoon which services head-quarters and service company. Fillershandle supplies until needed to replacecasualties.

(3) The kitchen truck seldom goes with the com-pany into combat. It normally reverts tothe battalion field trains. The kitchen maybe sent forward to feed a meal, or it mayprepare hot meals in the field trains areaand have these meals delivered to the menby /4-ton truck or on maintenance or supplyvehicles.

c. The company maintenance section consists of thecompany motor officer, the motor sergeant, armorers,automotive mechanics, tank mechanics, and a radiorepairman. This section has the function of keep-ing all headquarters, headquarters and service com-pany vehicles operating at maximum efficiency.Normally, it performs only organizational mainte-nance. Vehicles needing more extensive repairs areturned over to the battalion maintenance platoon.

(1) The motor officer is responsible to the com-pany commander for all maintenance workwithin the unit and for the functioning ofthe maintenance section. He conducts fre-quent spot checks and inspections of the

288

vehicles in the command and instructs per-sonnel in correct maintenance procedures.He also works closely with the battalionmotor officer, from whom he secures tech-nical advice and assistance.

(2) The motor sergeant supervises the organi-zational maintenance of the company. Heis in charge of the company reserve of spareparts and keeps scheduled maintenancerecords.

291. RECONNAISSANCE PLATOON

a. The reconnaissance platoon of the armored in-fantry battalion is a tactically self-contained com-bat unit, which usually operates under battalion con-trol. It provides reconnaissance and security forthe battalion and it executes independent missions.The platoon is organized to operate as a team andto maintain its command and tactical unity, it shouldbe assigned only one mission at a time. Suitablemissions are-

(l) Close-in, advance, and flank security, andreconnaissance patrols.

(2) Route, site, and bivouac reconnaissance.(3) Selection and organization of assembly

areas.(4) Guiding the battalion in day and night

movements.(5) Escorting and guiding battalion supply

vehicles.(6) Liaison and contact between units.

b. For details of employment, see FM 17-22.

289

292. MORTAR PLATOON

a. The 81-mm mortar platoon gives close and con-tinuous fire support to the companies of the battalionand is usually employed under battalion control.The platoon is mounted in armored personnel car-riers, and the mortars may be fired either from thecarriers or from ground mounts.

b. Among its specific missions, the platoon-

(1) Supports advancing friendly forces by neu-tralizing enemy positions.

(2) Fires countermortar fires, smoke missions,interdiction fires, harassing fires, defensivefires, and protects units during reorganiza-tion and consolidation on an objective.

(3) Repels enemy counterattacks.(4) Supports outposts.

c. Maximum effective range: HE light ammunitionabout 3.300 yards (effective bursting radius 17yards), HE heavy alnillnition about 2,600 yards,and WP about 2,400 yards.

d. Suitable targets for the 81-mm mortar platooninclude-

(1) Grouped personnel.(2) Reverse slopes and defilade areas.(3) Crew-served weapons.(4) Light fortifications.

e. A forward observer, usually a squad leader, goesforward with each reinforced company. He con-trols the fire of the platoon as needed by the rein-forced company. The forward observer does notnecessarily stay with the company commander at alltimes; however, the company commander keeps in

290

comilnluniceation with tile forward observer. Havinga forward observer with each company permits firerequests to go to the mortar platoon by the mostdirect chmnnel. (fig. 48).

/. The communllication facilities available to the81-mm mortar platoon are radio, wire, messenger,and visual signals. One radio is operated in thebattalion command net. The rest of the radios oper-ate in a platoon fire control net, one with each for-ward observer and one at the platoon fire directioncenter.

g. Fire requests from the reinforced companynormally are sent by or through the forward observerof the mortar platoon. Fire requests may be sentthrough command channels if the forward observercannot be contacted readily. For procedure see par-agraph 35.

293. COUNTERFIRE SQUAD

a. In the anrmored infantry battalion, counterfireoperations are coordinated by the S-3 section. Thebattalion counterfire noncommissioned officer oper-ates a counterfire information center under the super-vision of the S-2 and also assists the S-3 in counter-fire and countermortar matters. The conltefiresquad has a sound-locating set consisting of twomicrophone arrays with three microphones each,connected by an electric cable to a recorder, and thenecessa ry computers, aiming circles, plotting boards,and communication equiplment.

b. Normally, the counterfire squad operates in closeassociation with the battalion mortar platoon. Thenit stays within a few hundred yards from the mortar

291

4IIvct B~k

II

292

firing positions and keeps in contact with the mortarplatoo1n by radio or telephone. WThen operating illclose association, the locations of the counterfiresquad and the mortar platoon should be surveyed.If they are not surveyed, the mortar platoon leadercall convert information from the counterfire squadinto firing data by using the normal observed fireprocedures. MWhen speed is important, and if themortar platoon and the counterfire squad displacetoo often to allow them to survey their positions,they move closer together and operate in imlmediateassociation. In this method, the base weapon ofthe mortar platoon is not more than 15 yards fromthle No. 3 microphone of the control team. Informa-tion front the counterfire squad is not convertedbut is used as firing data by the mortar platoon.When operating in immediate association, range anidazillnnth from the team to the target are about thesame as from the mortar to the target., The mortarplatoon uses the range and azilmth provided by thecounterfire squad to destroy or neutralize the target.For details on employment of the counterfire squad,see F'Is 6-20, 6-130, 7 25. 30-10. and TmI 11-2552(figs. 49 and 50).

294. BATTALION SUPPLY PLATOON

The supply platoon is organized and equippedwith the menC and trucks necessary to transport alltypes of supplies from division supply vpoints to thecompanies of the battalion. During operations thebulk of the supply platoon narches as part of thebattalion field trainls generally with the combat

293

RIGHT

MORTAR FIREL T . .'D IRECTION CENTER

,4 .....

Figure .9. Counteleufi-e sqlu(d inl close association with bat-

thlion lmortar platoon.

294

COUNTCRFIRE

TARGET SHLL

TARGET DISTANCE AT/, MICROPHONE NO 3

IS USED AS RANGE/M 4j/*SE -, ^5~AT BASE WEAPON

NO1 I / OUNTERiRE WEAPONOBASE AIMING STAKE \ \

MICROPHONE NO 2 \\

NASE COUNTERFRE WEAPON

Figure 50. Couterflre squad in im ediate association woithA oS taA I pltGooI(E .

commnlnd field trains. Trucks loaded with fuel, lu-bricants, and ammnnition march with the combattrains of the battalion to expedite resupply. Afterresapplying the companies, empty trucks are conIsolidlated and moved promptly to the division ocarmy supply points to replenish their loads. Foremployment of the platoon, see paragraphs 119-123.

295

295. BATTALION MAINTENANCE PLATOON

The maintenance platoon is organized andequipped to supervise and perform organizationalmaintenance, recovery, evacuation, and resupply ofparts for weapons and vehicles of the battalion.The maintenance platoon accompanies the battalionin operations to perform battlefield recovery andmaintenance. For employlnent of the platoon, seeparagraphs 119-123.

296. BATTALION ADMINISTRATIVE AND PERSONNELSECTION

a. The administrative and personnel section con-sists of the personnel sergeant and designated spe-cialists. It relieves the company commanders of thebattalion of the burden of administrative details,provides uniformity of personnel administrative ac-counting, and permits commanders to give their fulltime to matters of training, supply, and discipline.The section works under the supervision of the bat-talion adjutant (S-1).

b. The administrative and personnel section func-tions include classification, reclassification, assign-ment, reassignment, transfer, promotion, separation,and retirement of personnel; preparation of battlecasualty records and reports (other than daily cas-ualty reports); preparation of payrolls, allotments,and other forms involving pay; and maintenance ofcompany and battalion records, reports, rosters, re-turns, files, and correspondence (AR 345-5). Thissection will normally be located with the divisionadministrative center during combat.

296

Section IV. MEDICAL DETACHMENT

297. GENERAL

a. The medical detachment, an integral part ofthe armored infantry battalion, supervises and ad-vises on health and sanitation measures within thebattalion. This detachment operates the battalionaid station to give immediate care to battle casualtiesand to sick and injured. Company aid men with1/4-ton trucks are provided by the medical detach-ment. They are attached to combat companies togive emergency treatment and to evacuate casualtiesfrom the battlefield to the battalion aid station.Evacuation from the battalion aid station is nor-mally done by ambulances from the supporting ar-mored medical company or detachment (FM 17-50).

b. The battalion surgeon is a staff officer and alsocommands the detachment. He has a medical as-sistant and specially trained surgical and medicaltechnicians to help in medical, health, and sanitationwork.

c. The surgeon is responsible to the battalion com-mander for training the medical detachment. It istrained with the rest of the battalion in all tacticalexercises to familiarize the men with the tacticalemployment of the battalion. The technicallytrained enlisted men of the detachment assist inteaching battalion classes in personal hygiene, firstaid, and sanitation.

931358--51-20 297

CHAPTER 11

THE ARMORED INFANTRY BATTALION INOFFENSIVE COMBAT

Section I. GENERAL

298. GENERAL

The armored infantry battalion ordinarily attacksas a reinforced battalion of a combat or reserve com-mand. The bigher headquarters assigns the missionor missions, designates the zone or frontage, desig-nates supporting and attached units, and fixes thetime of attack.

299. TYPES OF ATTACK

a. Meeting Engagemnents. A meeting engagementis a collision between two opposing forces, neitherof which is fully prepared for battle. In this typeof action, time is vital. A great advantage accruesto the force that first attacks in a decisive direction.Meeting engagements occur often during exploita-tion.

b. Attack Against Outposts and Delaying Posi-tions. Hostile security elements may occupy out-posts or other delaying positions whose exact area,strength, and flanks are not easy to determine. Thistype of resistance is usually encountered in exploita-tion by the leading reinforced battalion. The lead-

298

ing battalion seeks to overrun these hostile elements.Should these efforts fail, the battalion maneuversto outflank the hostile resistance, or to bypass it andcontinue the advance with the approval of his im-mediate commander.

c. Attack Against an Orgainized Position. Coordi-nation and the development of great fire power arerequired in the first stages of an attack when theenemy has prepared and organized his position. Thetime needed for preparing and coordinating the at-tack of such a position varies with the extent to whichthe enemy has organized his defense.

300. MAIN AND SECONDARY ATTACKS

a. Attacks are classified according to their missionas main or secondary. An attacking force normallydistributes its men and material for a main attackand one or more secondary attacks. All attacks arepushed to the limit of their power.

b. Main attacks are made against decisive objec-tives in the direction that offers the best possibilityfor success. A main attack is characterized by anarrow zone of action, a strong assault echelon, andheavy fire support.

c. Secondary attacks are made against objectiveswhose capture, or threat of capture, assists the mainattack and induces the enemy to dissipate his sup-porting fires and reserves outside the decisive area.Secondary attacks are characterized by broad frontsand maximum available fire power in the assaultechelon.

ad. The distinction between main and secondaryattacks is a very flexible part of the commander's

299

plaln of attack and is not indicated in his attack orderor imparted to lower unit commanders. Unexpecteddevelopments often cause a commander to change asecondary attack to the main attack. This is doneby inodifying the plan of maneuver, by shifting theweight of the supporting fires, and by relocating thereserve.

e. A reinforced armored infantry battalion com-mnlader sends the bull of his force in the directionthat offers the greatest possibility of success with themost decisive results and the minimum losses.Enough information of the enemy and terrain to en-able the battalion coumnanlder to decide where tomake his main and secondary attacks may not beinitially available. In such case he may launch hisattack in equal strength throughout his zone or hemay attack in only one portion of his zone, maintain-ing flexibility by disposing his forces in depth. Asthe action progresses and weaknesses in enemy dis-positions or terrain are discovered, he develops bismain attack. Whenever tihe mission aii(l infornlationof the enemy and terrain permit, tile battalion conl-mander plans both the main and the secondaryattack.

/. Attacks may be classified on battalion level asmain or secondary, according to the relative im-portance of the objectives. The reinforced comnpanyor companies that are to make the main attack aregiven most of the available fire support and thebulk of the attached tanks. When a battalion at-tacks as an interior unllit, maneuver is usually re-stricted, and companyl objectives are often closelyadjacent to or parts of the same terrain feature. In

300

such cases, main and secondary attacks may differlittle in strength or fire support; the main attack isidentified only by the success of its advance and themeasures taken to exploit it.

g. Diversions, demonstrations, and attacks by firealone are not classed as secondary attacks. Suchoperations assist in neutralizing and deceiving theenemy, but such forces are not strengthened at theexpense of the assault echelon.

301. FORMS OF ATTACK MANEUVER

There are two forms of offensive maneuver-en-velopment and penetration (FM 100-5).

302. ENVELOPMENT

a. In an envelopment, the main attack is madeagainst the flank or rear of the initial disposition ofthe enemy's main forces and toward an objectivebehind his front lines. Envelopment is used whena weak or exposed flnak is discovered and there istime to permit its envelopment. It has the advan-tages of capitalizing on surprise, exploiting enemyweakness, fighting on ground not chosen by theenemy, forcing the enemy to fight in more than onedirection, minimizing the attacker's casualties, andaccomplishing decisive results. Whenever possiblethe battalion commander seeks to envelop enemyresistance.

b. The principal causes of failure in an envelop-meilt are an incomplete or complicated plan, a weaksecondary attack, loss of surprise, inadequate infor-matioi of the terrain or the enemy, and an insufficient

301

enveloping force. Frequently the enveloping forcemakes the main attack while other troops make thesecondary frontal attack to hold the enemy in posi-tion. The enveloping force normally operateswithin supporting range and reinforcing distance ofthe parent unit. Envelopments may be divided intothree classifications based on the location of the ob-jective and the manner in which it is approached(fig. 51).

303. FORMS OF ENVELOPMENT

a. In a single envelopment the enveloping forcemoves around one flank of the enemy while a second-ary attack is made against the enemy position. Inthis type of operation, a reinforced armored infantrybattalion may make the main or secondary attack orboth, or it may operate in either attack as part ofa larger force. The enveloping force should movewide enough aronld the hostile flank to avoid be-coming engaged with enemy forward dispositions.It normally moves as fast as possible to capitalize onthe open enemy flank before the enemy can react.

b. A double envelopment is executed by three prin-cipal tactical groups-two ellveloping attack forcesand a secondary attack force. A battalion may takepart in a double envelopment but rarely will onebattalion make the multiple main and secondaryattacks necessary in this operation.

c. In a turning movement the enveloping forcepasses around the enemy's main force and strikes toseize a vital objective deep in the hostile rear. Aturning movement differs from other envelopmentsin that the enveloping force, which often advances

302

SINGLE ENVELOPMENT

TURNING MOVEMENT

DOUBLE ENVELOPMENT

Figure 51. Forms of envelopment.

303

beyond supporting range and reinforcing distanceof its parent unit, is temporarily an independentforce. An armored infantry battalion participates

-in a turning movement as part of a larger force.

304. PENETRATION

In a penetration the main attack passes throughsome portion of the area occupied by the enemy'smain forces and is directed against an objective inhis rear. The penetration is used when no hostileflanks exist in the zone of the attacking unit, or whentime is not available to locate gaps or flanks in thehostile defenses. The secondary attack exerts pres-sure on the enemy defenses while the main attack ismade against the most advantageous portion of theenemy position. A corridor or wooded ridge linerunning to the objective is desirable for the mainattack because it provides concealment for the pene-trating force. The main attack consists of three im-pulses (fig. 52)-

a. Breaking through the hostile defenses.b. Widenilg the gap to the desired width.c. Seizing the objective.

305. EXPLOITATION PHASE

The object of the initial assault on the enemy'sposition, in either a penetration or an envelopment,is to create an opportunity for a force to exploit thesuccess. The exploitation phase of an operationusually follows a successful penetration or envelop-ment. It is characterized by rapid advances againstlessening resistance. As a rule the exploiting force is

304

EaJ~~

F

ES WAft 9 f

=ilV2~% 0

305

given an objective, deep in the enemy rear, to bereached in the minimum time. Exploiting forcesoperating in enemy rear areas use, where possible, en-veloping attacks against resistance that 'may beencountered and must be reduced. Turning move-ments behind flanks created by a successful pene-tration cut off enemy forces attempting to withdrawto the rear, or prevent reinforcements and suppliesfrom reaching front-line enemy elements.

306. DISTRIBUTION OF FORCES IN THE OFFENSIVE

The attacking force is usually divided into threegroups: the maneuvering force, the supporting force(base of fire), and the reserve (fig. 53).

307. MANEUVERING FORCE

a. The manenvering force, also called assault force,makes the main effort of the battalion, closing rap-idly with the enemy and usilg heavy fires. It isusually committed on a narrow front and in depth.Whenever the opportunity arises, the maneuveringforce is used against an exposed flank. or flanks, ofthe enemy position, and attempts to envelop ratherthan to penetrate the position. It may have nochoice (particularly when a narrow zone preventsa flanking movement) but to make a frontal attacksupported by a base of fire located generally to itsrear. Normally the reinforced armored infantrybattalion uses only one maneuvering force.

b. When necessary, armored infantry attacks dis-mounted from the line of departure, reinforcing orreinforced by tanks. The vehicular weapons of the

306

personnel carriers, either dismounted or mounted,may be used to support the attack from appropriatepositions.

c. Whenever possible, however, the armored infan-try rides in carriers,'which advance behind the tanks,and dismounts if necessary to make the final assault.The weapons of the personnel carriers then give closedirect support.' As the enemy position is reachedand overrun, assault fires of all weapons of themaneuvering force are intensified to compensate forthe lifting or shifting of support fires.

308. SUPPORTING FORCE (BASE OF FIRE)

In a reinforced armored infantry battalion, thesupporting fires usually are provided by the direct-support artillery and the battalion mortar platoon.The base of fire may be reinforced with tanks andarmored infantry, wlhich support the attack by.directfire and may have the added mission of protectingthe flanks of the maneuvering force. Tanks areplaced in the base of fire only if the terrain will notpermit their use with the maneuvering force, or ifthe supporting fires provided by other sources areinadequate. Tanks and armored infantry in the baseof fire may be part of the battalion reserve.

309. RESERVE

When a reinforced armored infantry battalionmakes the main effort as the maneuvering force inan attack by a combat command, it normally is or-ganlized to include only a maneuvering force and abase of fire. The establishment of a battalion reserveforce is unnecessary, because a tank-armored infan-

307

try force can speedily move to, and concentrate alarge volume of fire upon, any part of the immedi-ate battlefield. However, part of the battalion mayinitially remain uncommitted, so as to be availableat any time to exploit success. This uncommittedforce may be either in the assaulting formation ifthat formation has sufficient depth, dr with the baseof fire element. When the situation is fluid- or ob-scure enough to warrant establishing a reserve, itshould be a balanced tank-armored infantry team.This reserve force may be part of the base of fireuntil it is needed for some other action.

310. FRONTAGES IN THE ATTACK

a. The frontage of a reinforced arlnored infantrybattalion in the attack depends on the hostile disposi-tions, the composition and mission of the reinforcedbattalion, the terrain, and the volume of supportingfires. The combat or reserve command commlnandermay assign the battalion a zone, or an axis, of attack.

b. A unit with a covering mission can be assigneda wide frontage: However, the sustained powerneeded for a penletration dictates a narrow frontageand great depth.

c. In wooded terrain, a narrow frontage is neces-sary for control. In open terrain, wider frontagesare practical and desirable.

d. When the enemy has few antitank gulls and hisother antitank defenses are weak, a wide frontagemay be assigned to the reinforced armored infantryor tank unit. If antitank defenses are concentratedat one point, a wide frontage may be required forenvelopment. If the enemy antitank defenses are

308

strong on a broad front or cannot be avoided, a nar-row frontage and a formation in depth are desirable.

e. When adequate support is provided by artilleryand tactical air, the frontage may be greater thanwhen such support is lacking and the battalion fur-nishes the bulk of its own fire support.

311. ZONES OF ATTACK

a. Zones are assigned when maximum control ofthe battalion's action is desired, when it is necessarythat the area be cleared, or when zones are neededwithin a higher command to coordinate supportingfires of the artillery. The higher commander mayalso assign zones when the area for maneuver is re-stricted, as in the case of an interior battalion. Inall cases, however, it is desirable that the zone bewide enough for at least a two-company front overterrain that is suitable for tank-armored infantryteams. When assigned a zone, the battalion cannotmaneuver into another zone, or call for fires inanother zone, without clearance through higher head-quarters.

b. Within the battalion, zones of action are as-signed to each team if the battalion is attacking withteams abreast. Boundaries are seldom designatedbetween companies. Normally, only zones of actionor axes of advance are designated. Often assign-ment of objectives to the assaulting teams is sufficientto designate their zones.

312. AXIS OF ATTACK

The reinforced armored infantry battalion com-mander, when assigned an axis, selects the frontage

309

along which he will attack. The axis indicates thedirection of attack but allows the commander todeviate to either side in order to accomplish hismission. Aerial observation and direct-support ar-tillery groulps within a higher command that hastwo or more direct-support artillery battalions,greatly reduce the need for boundaries. An attackalong an axis allows greater freedom of maneuver;therefore, this method of controlling the attack ispreferred. Even in cases where the enemy's frontis continuous. he usually establishes strong pointson terrain features; therefore, his flanks almost al-ways are exposed, in some degree, to the attacker. Tfassigned an axis, the battalion commander can bettertake advantage of such situations. Even though anaxis of attack is assigned, the formation adoptedshould not overextend the battalion.

Section II. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK

313. GENERAL

The commander of the reinforced armored infan-try battalion receives his mission from a higher com-mander, who also specifies the composition of thebattalion. The battalion commander then briefs theattached units, coordinates them with the organicunits, and plans his attack. Wlhenever possible, hemakes a thorough personal reconnaissance and anestimate of the situation. See paragraphs 37-30.In completing his plan of attack. he covers support-ing fires by both the artillery and the battalion sup-port weapons and the use of smoke. He then issuesthe order to the key personnel of the battalion. He

310

often takes two or more of these steps concurrently,and uses members of his staff to work out many ofthe details.

314. ELEMENTS OF THE PLAN OF ATTACK, GENERAL

Upon receipt of the planl of attack, or attack order,from higher headquarters, the battalion commanderbegins to formulate his plan of attack. The plan ofattack includes the plan of maneuver and plan of sup-porting fire. Provision is made for adequate re-serves consistent with the tactical situation (fig. 53).

315. ELEMENTS IN THE PLAN OF MANEUVER(FIG. 54)

The plan of maneuver includes-a. Task Organization. Reinforced companies are

formed based Upon troops available, the mission, theenemy situation, the terrain, and the general planof attack.

b. Objectives.c. Formation.d. Choice of Element to Lead the Attack.e. Direction of Attack. The assigned battalion ob-

jectives determine the direction of attack. In areascovered by heavy undergrowth, or wide, flat plainswithout suitable landmarks, all azimuth of attackmay be given. If a change of direction becomesnecessary, it is based on a prominent terrain feature(fig. 55).

/. Zones.g. Line of Departure.

311

HBO,'~~~CA~~~~~~~~~

312

K E~> 4~~~~~~~~L

I; f*- .j C

I - L~ ~ ~ ~~-

312a s

OBJECTIVEASSIGNED BY HIGHER

HEADQUARTERS

BATALIONINTERMEDIATE

BATTALION OBeCTIVEINTERMEDIATEOBJECTIVE

AXIS OF ADVANCE(MAY ALSO BE AXIS

Fig2:1 e 54 . OF EVACUATION)

FRIENDLY FRONT LNES

LINE OF DEPARTURE's ~~~AT (MAY BE FRIENDLY

P SI FRONT LINEIS)

Figure 54. Planning the attac.

031358'--51-21 313

j

Figure 55. Plan of attack. A challge of direction is based ona well-defiled terra in feature.

314

h. Time of Attack. The time of attack is usuallyprescribed by the combat command commander. Itmay be announced as a definite hour, or be on a pre-scribed signal, or be immediately after a specifiedtactical action. It is the responsibility of the com-mander to recognize the amount of time necessary forlower echelons to prepare for the coordinated attack.

i. Reserve.j. Assembly Area.k. Attack Position.

316. COORDINATION IN THE ASSEMBLY AREA

To obtain complete coordination of action betweenthe organic and attached or supporting elements ofthe reinforced armored infantry battalion, early anddetailed plans must be prepared for the attack.Commanders and staffs must understand the tasksof all units and the integrated operation of the bat-talion as a whole: conferences for the commandersand staffs should be held to insure this understand-ing. So far as possible, troops must be instructedin the parts they will play in the operation.

a. liaison. Immediately upon attachment to abattalion, a unit must establish liaison with the bat-talion headquarters. Depending on the size of theunit, this liaison may be performed by an officer,ita oncommissioned officer, or a, messenger.

b. Gommvunication. Immediately upon attach-ment of units, the battalion communication officermust see that they have the correct channels set ontheir radios and that they receive the current SOI;he must be ready to give them any communicationassistance they may need.

315

c. Status of Personnel and Vehicles in AttachedUnits. The battalion conlniander and staff must beas familiar with the status of vehicles and personnelin attached units as in organic units of the battalion.Only when he knows the effective strength of per-sonnel and the amount and condition of equipmentin all units can the comlander assign appropliatemissions. For example, an attached tank companyat half strength cannot be expected to accomplisha mission in the same amount of time, or as effectively,as a full-strength tank company

d. Orientation of Newly Attached Units. Troopsnewly attached to the battalion are not likely to befamiliar with its immediate situation and mission.The battalion commllander and his staff must orientthese troops, giving them all available information.This is especially important when the newly attachedtroops come to the battalion from a reserve status.

e. Reconnaissance and Final Preparations. Finalpreparations and reconnaissance for the attack aremade while the battalion is in the assembly area. Assoon as the area is occupied, the battalion com-mander and his staff establish liaison with friendlyunits in the vicinity to learn from them the enemydispositions and type of resistance being encountered.Recomnaissance to select the attack position is startedand arranllgements are made for the movement to theattack position. Routes for both day and nightmloves are selected; those chosen for day movementneed concellment from enemy observation; thosechosen for night movement must be easy to follow.

316

317. RECONNAISSANCE BEFORE THE ATTACK

a. Personal Reconnaissance. Before the attack.great effort is made to gather information about theenemy and terrain. Personal ground reconnaissanceby the commander is the most effective way to gatherthis information. If a liaison airplane is available,the commander or a member of his staff may makean aerial reconnaissance of the area. Reports fromdismounted patrols and from the battalion reconnais-sance platoon supplement the information obtainedby personal reconnaissance. Additional informa-tion may be obtained from combat or army aviationpilots and through liaison with adjacent or holdingunits (fig. 5(;).

b. Map Reconnaissance. Even though the com-mander makes a ground reconnaissance, he alwaysmakes a detailed studv of the available maps andphotos. This is particularly important if theground reconnaissance has been hurried or limited..A thorough map study will reveal strong and weakpoints of the terrain and possible enemy dispositions,and will suggest how the attacking force must beorganized to accomplish its mission.

c. Routes, Assembly Areas, anrl Attack Positions.Reconnaissance of routes, assembly areas, and at-tick positions is a must at all times. This reconmais-sance is as thorough as possible, but the time allottedto it will vary greatly. This activity is not limitedto the reconnaissance platoon alone, but is engagedin by senior staff officers w\ho either accompany theplatoon or make the reconnaissance themselves.

317

N ··r~y I&,z~

1 I!J-~4 . ' $ ,i-

r' ~ ~ ~ N

· !~ ~~~~~~~~.... ..~

',:',. .. -,,.318 · _~---,'~'?','~:z:,,"'~" ~/U , . "- .

318. COMPLETION OF THE PLAN OF ATTACK

After the battalion commander has made his re-connaissance, completed his estimate, and arrivedat a decision, he completes his plan of attack. Thisplan is simply a detailed translation of the fifth stepof the estimate-the commander's decision. The de-tails are worked out by members of the commander'sstaff. Lower unit commanders are kept informed oftheir parts in the plan, so that they have time to coin-plete their reconnaissance and to plan the details oftheir actions.

319. PREPARATION FOR SUPPORTING FIRES IN THEATTACK

A well-coordinated fire plan includes the fires ofartillery, tactical air when available, battalion sup-porting weapons, weapons of attached chemical units,and tanks when needed. Details of the plan areagreed upon in preliminary conferences. Support-ing fires move with the advance, lifting or shiftingat the last possible moment to allow the assault ele-ments to close with the enemy, but moving soonenough to avoid hitting the assault elements. Anyschedule of supporting fire is made flexible to allowshifting or stopping of fires on signals. The fireplan includes preparatory fires, supporting fires dur-ing the attack, and supporting fires.after the objec-tive has been taken. All possible enemy positionslocated before the attack are engaged by prearrangedfires, and are destroyed or neutralized.

319

320. ARTILLERY SUPPORT DURING THE ATTACK

a. The main supporting fire of the reinforcedarmored infantry battalion comes from supportingartillery. Artillery fire-support plans are normallycoordinated with the attack plan as a whole by con-ferences between the reinforced armored infantrybattalion commander and the artillery commander,or between staff officers of the two units. The planof attack is considered and a fire plan is drawn upto support the attack. The artillery battalion com-mander provides liaison between the reinforced arm-ored infantry battalion and the supporting artillery,and can obtain additional support from division orcorps artillery. The artillery liaison officer remainswith the reinforced armored infantry battalion. Inthe absence of the artillery battalion colmmander,he obtains additional supporting fires. The artil-lery battalion liaison officer normally has his ownfacilities for communication with his battalion. Hesupervises the assignment and operation of forwardobservers, one usually being assigned to work witheach reinforced company. Besides these artilleryforward observers, all officers of tank and armoredinfantry battalions are trained in adjusting artilleryfire.

b. The following types of support may be expectedfrom the artillery:

(1) Support during movement to the assemblyarea. 'Counterbattery fire against hostileartillery is the main support given duringthis period.

(2) Support during movement to the attackposition. Although counterbattery fire is

320

still of main importance, neutralization fireson forward antitank weapons and supportfires for mine removal parties are provided.

(3) Support during attack. All available artil-lery fire is used in heavy concentrations toprotect the assault echelon. During the at-tack, fire is adjusted on enemy observationposts, artillery, targets of opportunity, and,in general, areas of resistance. The artil-lery hits at any hostile troops or weaponsholding back the attack.

(4) Support dritng reorganjization. Artilleryhelps protect reorganizing forces by mass-ing fires on threatening hostile elements, bycounterbattery fire, and by interdiction.

(5) Sulpport against counterattack. Observedfire is massed in sufficient volume to breakup counterattack from any direction, es-pecially enemy thrusts from the flanks.Prearranged interdictory fires may beplaced on routes of approach (fig. 57).

o. Artillery fires should not cover critical pointsand targets alone, but also those areas that support-ing weapons cannot reach or cover adequately.

321. TANK SUPPORT DURING THE ATTACK

If all the tanks attached to the battalion are notused in the maneuvering force, some tanks may givedirect-fire support from hull-defilade positions.Under exceptional conditions, tanks may use indirectfire to suplport the attack; however, this is abnormalbecause of the flat trajectory, high muzzle velocity,and small bursting radius of tank projectiles. and

321

;11J:~ ~ -ye" 1

'~~~ ,it~~~~~~f I1-~~V2., ~~~e; ~ ~=,

'Vwri .I.I

-~~~- ~ i

322~~~%ii

the excessive wear on the tube. When such a mis-sion is assigned to tanks, special provisions are madefor maintaining the basic ammunition load.

322. AIR SUPPORT DURING THE ATTACK

Tactical air suport may be available to the di-vision orthe coibat com]aald; if so, it is controlledthrough t 'tactical air control party (TACP).The forward r' controller remains with the com-mand group untla target is designated; he thenmoves to a point wE he can pr6perly observe anddirect the air attack ontielesignated target. Closeliaison is kept between therwrd air controller andartillery liaison officers to qslureprompt exchangeof information gained from both gr'und and air ob-servation and to assist in rapid engagement of tar-gets of opportmuity. Fighter planes normally sup-port the attack by bombs, rockets,'and incefidiarymissiles, ad by strafing. Suitable targets for sup-portinaZfighters are enemy armor, enemy cbltmns,targe9t; beyond range of medium artillery, enemystroig points, and enemy communication center's\

g. 58 and FM 31-35). //// , : ]

323. USE OF BATTALION MORTAR PLATOON DURINGA': TACK /I /

@ 9 Tle mortar platoon supports the attack by firednthosb targets that cannot be engaged by flat trajec-

tory weapons, and by the use of screening smoke.Mortars deliver close supporting fires throughout theattack to-

(1) Assist the advance of the assault echelon(maneuvering force).

323

4 jt

Wig%

324~~~~~~~~~~

(2) Assist in holding the ground gained.(3) Prevent the enemy from shifting or disen-

gaging his forces.b. Mortar fires in the attack are coordinated with

the other supporting fires. This is done during thepreparation of the fire plan for the attack (fig. 59).

324. USE OF SMOKE IN ATTACK

a. Missions. Artillery, mortars, tanks, and at-tached chemical mortars fire smoke missions. Smokeis used to-

(1) Blind enemy tanks and antitank guns.(2) Disorganize enemv counterattacks.(3) Indicate targets and mark front lines for

supporting aircraft.(4) Blind hostile observation (fig. 60).(5) Screen mine-sweeping operations.(6) Screen movements of tanks and infantry.(7T) Screen a withdrawal from action.(8) Screen reorganization.(9) Screen friendly disabled tanks so the crews

can escape.(10) Isolate enemy areas from their supporting

fires.(11) Separate counterattacking enemy elements

from their supporting fires.b. Application. Smoke, skillfully used, assists at-

tacking tanks and armored infantry; indiscriminateand ill-planned use of smoke hinders the attack. Theprobable effect of smoke is carefully estimated.Smoke used to hamper the enemy may interfere withthe operations of the battalion and adjacent units.The plan of maneuver, the direction and velocity of

325

326

Pt Ii

C '1

iv~~ I

I .4,

X;'Skk~

Al~~~~ld~~~ofS~~~~~~~ i'

327

the wind, atmospheric conditions, and the types andamount of smoke-producing agents available are fac-tors to be considered.

325. OBJECTIVES

a. Objectives assigned to the reinforced armoredinfantry battalion may be classified generally as closeor distant. These objectives may be terrain featuresor hostile tactical dispositions. A cZose objective isnorimilly assigned when the terrain or disposition ofhostile forces indicates long, hard fighting. The at-tack on such an objective can normally be supportedwithout displacing any direct-fire weapons. The as-sault unit capturing such an objective normally needstime to reorganize before it can continue the advance.The impetus of the attack can be kept lip, however,if another unit continues the attack while the onethat has just captured the close objective reorganizes.

b. Distant objectives are assignned when the situa-tion fa vors ru piid ad vaince. Battalion or combat com-mand usually assigns intermediate objectives shortof the final distant objective. Intermediate objec-tives assist control, protect routes of advance, orprovide advanced firing positions for supportingweapons and elements attacking by fire. Their oc-cupation may make flanking action possible or makenearby portions of the enemy position untenable.The seizure of an intermediate objective does not slowthe impetus of the attack but results in increasedpressure on the enemy. Reorganization on inter-mediate objectives is executed rapidly, and the attackis continued without delay.

328

c. Favorable and unfavorable characteristics areconsidered in the selection of an objective. A de-sirable objective should-

(1) Be easily recognized on the ground.(2) Aid in the accomplishment of the battalion

mission and probable future action.(3) Provide good observation and suitable ter-

rain for fire support of a further advance.(4) Be within effective range of supporting

weaplons located on or behind the line of de-plarture or the preceding objective.

(5) Be visible from the line of departure orprevious objective.

(6) Produce a convergence of effort.(7) Be capable of capture within time and space

limits inlposed by the mission.(8) Be consistent with the capabilities of the

units to which the objective is assigned.

326. FORMATIONS FOR ATTACK, GENERAL

The formatioll for the battalion is based on thetroops available, the terrain, the enelmy situation, andthe mission. The choice of an attack formation de-peuds on the size needed in the assaulting force andthe depth needed to naintain the momentum ofattack.

a. Troop.s Available. The battalion commanderconsiders the organization of his reinforced battalionand the availability of supporting fires. If the sup-porting weapons provide a large enough base of fire,lihe may commit his entire battalion in the assault.If not, he normally assigns part of his tanks and

931358--51--22 329

armored infantry the mission of thickening the baseof fire.

b. Terrain. Woods, imlpassable ground, or instf-ficient maneuver room make it necessary to narrowthe formation, while open ground with room tomaneuver makes an extended formation necessary.The terrain may also determine whether tanks orinfantry should lead:

c. Enemy Situation. A deep formation is neces-sary for a continuous attack against a strong enemy.Against a vague enemy situation, a similar forma-tion may be desirable. Against an enemy known tohave strong antitank defenses, however, an extendedformation may be used with the tanks seeking toenvelop such defenses.* d. Mission. A battalion with a mission to cover

or make a reconnaissance in force generally assumesa wide formation. When attacking a limited ob-jective, strongly held, a wide formation is indicated.The battalion acting as the maneuvering force forthe combat command probably advances in depth.If assigned an objective deep in the enemy's rear, itattacks in a deep formation.

327. ATTACK FORMATIONS

a. Types.(1) U6olumwn. This formation gives maximum

control and driving power, for from it thebattalion may deploy quickly to eitherflank. This formation is useful in passingthrough woods and defiles, it may be usedin a penetration when a deep attack is neces-

330

sary, land it may be the initial formationfor a battalion with an enveloping mission.

(2) Echelon. The battalion may be echelonedto the right or left. The echelon offers ex-cellent fire power to the front and to theecheloned flank, and fair fire power to theother flank. It allows sustained effort, butis difficult to control without good visualcontact. It is used to cover an exposedflank.

(3) Line. The battalion in line may have twoor more companies abreast. Depending onhow many companies are in line, this for-mation gives little depth and, as a result,low sustaining power. The line formationis used to develop maximum frontal firewhen malcuver and depth are not of para-mount importance. Because of the vari-able composition of a reinforced battalion,the number of companies in line and in re-serve in this formation varies; however,every effort is made to insure continuity ofthe attack.

b. Ap/p7ication.(1) Penetration. When a mission to penetrate

a hostile organized position is assigned, thebattalion commander adopts a formationthat delivers the greatest concentration ofeffort at the desired point of break-through.The battalion is ordinarily assigned a nar-row zone for a penetration and it is ar-ranged in depth to maintain the momentumof the attack. The formation may be a

331

Figure 61. Forna tion for armored infantry battalion in pene-tration on a narrow front.

332

column of reinforced colnpanies or two re-inforced companies abreast (fig. 61).

(2) Attack through obstacles or mine fields. Areinforced armored infantry battalion oftenattacks to breach antitank obstacles andmine fields and so allow reinforced tankbattalions of the combat commnand to pass.When given such a mission, the battalionc o mm a n d e r adopts a formation thatprovides-

(a) Armored infantry rifle elements in theassault to gain a bridgehead over the ob-stacle or mine field.

(b) Armored engineers located to gap or spanthe obstacle or mine field in the wake ofthe assaulting rifle elements.

(c) Tanks in position to support the assault-ing rifle elements by fire during thebridgehead operation.

(d) A powerful tank-armored infantry teamin reserve, ready to pass through any gapsopened and to assault the objective(fig. 62).

328. OTHER FACTORS AFFECTING FORMATIONS

a. Plan of Attack. If the battalion is the maneu-vering force for the combat command, it normlallyattacks on a narrow front. If the enemy is notpinned down or if the combat command's base of firecannot adequately support the assault, the battalionformation includes a base of fire. In any case, thebattalion uses mortars and similar supporting weap-

333

7~~ t

1~~~ S

a~~~a

C~~~~~~~

m34

334

ons to establish the base of fire. If the higher com-mander has a reserve available, the battalion neednot provide a reserve.

b. Enemy Sitration. Against a strong enemy, aformation in depth is necessary to maintain a con-tinuous attack. In some cases, the enemy situationalso determines whether tanks or armored infantrylead.

c. Control. The degree of control that the bat-talion commander can retain is usually proportionalto the depth of the formation. Conversely, theamount of control that must be decentralized tocompany commanders is proportional to the widthof the formation.

d. Sectrity. Depth in the formation gives addedsecurity, because it enables the uncommitted unitsto maneuver. A deep fornmation also enables thecommander to counter an enemy threat from eitherflank. Security on a threatened flank may also beobtained by a formation echeloned to that flank.Troops in the base of fire provide security for theassault force (fig. 63).

329. ATTACK ORDERS

A commander's attack order is a concise statementof his plan of attack. He issues it in time for lowerunits to reconnoiter and to prepare plans and orders.The battalion comninander's order is usually oral, andwarning and fragmentlary orders are used freely,particularly during the reorganization and contin-nation of the attack (app. VI).

335

&~~~"i~~~~~~~~~

%*: ICS t i Sj

336 ~ ~ ~ b

330. MOVEMENT TO ATTACK POSITION

The movement from the assembly area to the at-tack position is made as a tactical march, normallyduring darkness. Tank-armored infantry teams andsupporting elements are arranged in the coblmni sothey reach their attack positions without having tocounter-march or move through an area occupied byanother element. Markers are posted along the routeand at the entrance or entrances to the attack posi-tion.

Section III. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK

331. GENERAL

During an attack the battalion commander goeswhere lie can best observe and influence the action,usually in rear of the assault companies. By per-sonal orders, or through his staff, he directs the com-panies. As the attack develops lie goes well forwardto observe its progrest and to shift supporting fires.Only by being where he can see what is taking placecan he make rapid decisions and take advantage ofenemy errors.

332. CONTROL

Control is essential to coordinated and effectiveaction. The armored infantry battalion commandercontrols his battalion in the attack through commu-nication and liaison, by designating successive objec-tives anid phase lines, and by his personal position onthe battlefield. During the attack he depends pri-marily on radio communication to control the move-

337

ment of the companies. Ill a rapid advance, phaselines are used for coordination. Elements do nothalt on phase lines unless so ordered, but reporttheir positions and continue to advance, for any re-strictions on movement may give the enemy time toreact and may result in loss of the initiative. Staffofficers in the command group physically assist incontrolling the assault elements (fig. 64).

333. RECONNAISSANCE

a. Battle reconnaissance is made by all elementsof the command. All commanlders are alert for in-formation about-

(1) Location of antitank weapons, mines, andobstacles.

(2) Changes in location of friendly troops.(3) Progress of the attack.(4) Avenues of approach to the objective.(5) Changes in enemy dispositions.(6) Arrival of enemy reinforcemenllts.(7) Enemy air and tank attacks.(8) Probable direction of enemy counterattacks.

b. Light aircraft help the battalion commandersecure battle information. The air observer can re-port the progress of the attack, hostile reactions tothe attack, location of obstacles and antitank weap-ons. and indications of hostile tank counterattacks.He is particularly alert for hostile counterattacksduring reorganization. By monitoring the liaisonairplane radio channel the commander immediatelygets all available information.

338

,I.

339

334. CONDUCT OF THE BASE OF FIRE

a. When using tank and armnored infantry units tosupplement the base of fire, the battalion commandermakes sure that they are ready to displace forward assoon as the maneuvering force masks their fires.Tanks and armored infantry in the base of fireusually provide direct tank-cannon and machine-gun fire support. The tank-arnmored infantry tealllforming the base of fire watches the flanks of themaneuverling force carefully and intercepts, by fire ormaneuver or both, any threats that may developthere. It may also be used by the battalion com-mander to meet unforeseen contingencies or to ex-ploit success.

b. The mortars are used in the base of fire. Theyare prepared to displace forward immediately tonew positions as soon as their fires are masked by theassault echelon. Displacement is coordinated to pro-vide continuous fire support.

c. Extra amimulnition for tanks and mortars in thebase of fire is provided to conserve the basic loadcarried in the vehicles.

335. CONDUCT OF THE MANEUVERING FORCE

The maneuvering force closes with the enemy inthe shortest possible time. From the moment the as-sault elements cross the line of departure until theyclose on the objective, movement is continuous andfast to decrease losses from enemy fire. Tank andcarrier mnachine-gnl fire is massed on the enemy assoon as the teams arrive within effective range. The

340

action of the assault forces is characterized by speedand shock action (fig. 65).

336. USE OF BATTALION RESERVE

The reserve is an offensive weapon. It is one ofthe means of keeping the initiative, mainly throughusing it to exploit successes. In a reinforced ar-mored infantry battalion, any unlcommitted part ofthe command, including tanks and armored infan-try used in the base of fire, is a reserve. The reservemay be used to reinforce the base of fire, or may fol-low the assaulting echelons of the maneuvering force.As soon as the assaullllt forces reach the objective, thereserve or uncommitted part of the battalion, closeson the position to assist in organizing it and in re-pelling counterattacks.

337. PASSAGE OF LINES

A passage of lines requires the closest cooperationand coordination, and success can be achieved onlyby proper liaison between the unit in position andthe unit passing through. This liaison should becommand liaison; that is, liaison between command-ers at all levels. In such an attack the reinforcedarmored infantry battalion commander establishesand maintains liaison with the commanders of theunits through which he will attack. If time and thesituation permit, the reinforced armored infantrycompany commanders also establish liaison with thecorresponding company commanders of the otherunits. Through command liaison the armored in-fantry commanders determine-

341

Iii;~~~~

<Nh 'i/ft Q4~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

7. t '4> o

-¼~~~~~

342~~~~~~

a. Selection o t/he Attack Position. The attackposition must be as far forward as possible. Co-ordination between all commanders insures the se-lection of the best position.

b. Route Priority. The commander of the unit inposition is told which routes the reinforced armoredinfantry battalion will use and the apprloximnate timeit will be using them. This is inclreasingly impor-tant when the roads are narrow and two-way trafficof heavy vehicles is difficult or impossible.

c. Enemy Injormation. The front-line unit canprovide detailed, first-hand. and up-to-date infor-mation of the enemy. Information of particularimllportance to the reinforced armored infantry bat-talion commander is that concerning the type ofenemy resistance and the number of enemy troops,obstacles, and antitank weal)pons.

d. Friendly Infornlation. From the front-lineunit, the reinforced armored infantry battalioncommander can obtain first-hand information offriendly dispositions. He confirms this information,whenever possible, by a reconnaissance made eitherby himself, his staff, or elements of his reconnaissanceplatoon.

e. Passage of Lines. Each reinforced tank andarmored infantry rifle company commander contactsthe troops in his part of the zone and arranges forthese troops to indicate their positions so that theywill not be endangered by the tanks and carriers.Guides are posted as necessary. Special signals maybe needed to indicate when the last armored elementhas passed. Care must be taken to prevent damnageto telephone lines.

343

f. Removal of Obstacles. The time of attack ofthe armored infantry unit may depend on the re-moval or breaching of such obstacles as antitankditches or mine fields. When this is so, the armoredcommander keeps contact with the commander inposition and keeps informed on the progress of thework. This is very important because the armormust be ready to cross the obstacle as soon as it hasbeen breached; at the same time, the armor must notprematurely disclose its intentions to the enemy.

g. Additional Artillery Support. When armor isattacking through friendly infantry divisions, addi-tional artillery support will often be made availableby the infantry division artillery. This support isnormally arranged for by the armored division artil-lery commander and his staff. To obtain additionalsupport from the infantry division artillery, thereinforced armored infantry battalion commandersubmits requests only to his direct-support artillerybattalion commander or liaison officer.

338. ASSAULT

The assault is the actual closing with the enemy bya leading element of an attacking force. All avail-able supporting fires normally cover the advance ofthe assaulting tank-armored infantry teams from theline of departure until these fires must be lifted topermit the maneuvering force to close onto the ob-jective. To get maximum shock effect from the sup-porting files, either the battalion commander or theassaulting tank-armlored infantry team commandercalls for them to be lifted or shifted at the latest pos-sible time without causing the assaulting (maneuver-

344

ing) force to halt or slow its advance. Fires maybe lifted or shifted by radio, message, or by prear-ranged signal. In all cases the assault continues tothe far edge of the assigned objective.

339. ACTION ON THE OBJECTIVE

a. Security. Following the seizure of the objec-tive, the first action of the battalion is to secure theobjective against counterattack. This security mustbe planned in detail before the attack, but if the ac-tion is to progress to a succeeding objective, only localsecurity may be necessary. The reinforced armoredinfantry battalion commander prepares to meet animmediate reaction by the enemy, especially whenpenetration or an envelopment appears likely. Be-cause it is hard to reorganize in darkness, securityis established quickly if the objective is seized latein the day. An incompletely reorganized force isin no position to repel a night counterattack. Thefirst company to reach the objective covers the likelyenemy avenues of approach, and other units reinforcethis security as they arrive. The battalion com-mander, or a member of his staff, coordinates thesemeasures. The mortar platoon is displaced forwardto cover the reorganization and support the continu-ation of the attack. The reconnaissance platoon maybe used to secure part of the area, or it may be usedfor liaison and patrolling. The battalion may findit necessary to place considerable security on itsflanks and in the rear; the amount of this securitydepends on the relative location of other friendlytroops.

931358°-51-28 345

b. Preparation To Continue the Attack. Advancedplanning covers preparation to continue the attackafter reaching the objective. After the battalionoccupies the objective, the battalion commanderchooses formations that assist in the reorganizationand in the continuation of the attack. The com-mander makes a continuing estimate of the situationduring the attack; this enables him to issue the neces-sary instructions for prompt reorganization and im-mediate continuation of the attack.

c. Reorganization. Reorganization is started im-mediately after seizure of the objective and con-currently with the establishment of security. Dur-ing this period the battalion command post and thebattalion aid station are displaced forward, and re-supply and maintenance elements are moved up.Meiware redistributed to fill key vacancies. Casual-ties are given medical attention and are evacuated ifnecessary. As much vehicular maintenance is doneas possible and those vehicles not repairable areevacuated.

d. Reports. As soon as possible after the objectiveis seized, each commander reports the condition ofhis unit to his higher commander. If prior ordersdo not cover the further employment of the battalion,additional orders are requested.

e. Recon/aissance. While his command is reor-ganizing, the battalion commander starts reconnais-sance for information needed in planning his fur-ther action.

f. Comnmand Post. As the attack progresses, thecommand post moves forward by bounds. As soon

346

as the objective is occupied, the command post movesto a new centrally located position.

Section IV. RESERVE BATTALION IN ATTACK340. GENERAL

a. During an attack, the combat command com-mander may have one or more reinforced battalionsin reserve. He prescribes the initial and subsequentassembly areas for the reserve and moves it to whereit can best accomplish its mission. The commanderof the reserve battalion is responsible for the occu-pation of the prescribed area, for the establishmentof security, and for the activities within the area.The commander of a reserve battalion recommendsmoving the battalion when he believes it can nolonger accomplish its mission from the assignedlocation.

b. A battalion in reserve may be assigned missionsto-

(1) Exploit a success of the assault echelon.(2) Envelop or outflank resistance that is hold-

ing up the assault echelon.(3) Meet hostile counterattacks.(4) Protect the flanks of the combat command.(5) Assist the assault battalions by the fire of

its heavy weapons.(6) Maintain contact with adjacent units.(7) Protect the rear of the combat command.(8) Continue the action of the assault echelon

when it becomes disorganized, depleted, orexhausted. This may require a passage oflines but is best done by movement to aflank of the unit relieved.

347

341. MOVEMENT TO ASSEMBLY AREA

On receiving the combat command's order, thebattalion commander moves his battalion to the as-sembly area where, except in emergency, it remainsuntil moved by the combat command commander.The battalion commander makes timely recom-mendations to the combat command commander formovement to a new assembly area.

342. ACTIONS WHILE IN RESERVE

The commander of a battalion in reserve may bedirected to send out patrols and connecting groupsto protect the flanks and rear of the combat commandand to maintain contact with adjacent units. Heusually assigns this mission to the reconnaissanceplatoon or to elements from one company of thebattalion, preferably the company he plans to leavein reserve if the battalion is committed to action.The commander reconnoiters and prepares plans forprobable battalion missions. To keep abreast of thesituation and combat command plans, he or a memberof his staff remains with the command post of thecombat command.

Section V. EXPLOITATION AND PURSUIT

343. PURSUIT

a. Pursuit has as its main purpose the capture ordestruction of enemy personnel. The pursuing forceis therefore compelled to base its movements, to acertain extent, on the actions of the enemy; to close

348

with the enemy, the pursuing force must advance inthe direction of the enemy withdrawal.

6. Pursuit is accomplished by tile use of-(1) A direct-pressure force that exerts constant,

heavy pressure on the enemy. This forcedrives in or envelops the enemy's coveringforces and rear guards, making his mainbody halt and deploy to defend itself. Thedirect-pressure force then engages theenemy main body to prevent its withdrawalor interference with the operations of theencircling force.

(2) One or more encircling forces that mayplace themselves across the hostile line ofretreat. If possible, these forces advance onroads parallel to the enemy's withdrawal,and block it at defiles and other criticalpoints. If unable to outdistance his lead-ing elements, they strike the enemy fromthe flank, pinning him against the directpressure force. The greatest destructioncan be achieved when encircling forcesstrike simultaneously against each flank ofthe enemy column. These forces guardtheir own flanks against enemy counterat-tacks.

344. EXPLOITATION

a. General. An exploiting force operates througha gap or around a flank; it is usually assigned a de-cisive physical objective deep in the enemy rear suchas an enemy capital, a high enemy headquarters,an industrial area, an important bridge, a communi-

349

cation center, or an airfield. The exploiting forcedoes not concern itself with any actions of the enemyexcept those that could interfere with accomplishingits mission. Enemy forces are normally bypassedand left for the pursuing forces to capture and de-stroy.

b. Enemy Situation. When the exploitation stagebegins, the local enemy situation is almost certain tobe confused and disorganized. Rapid exploitation,before the enemy can bring reserves to bear on theexploiting force or to reestablish his disrupted posi-tions. will cause the enemy to disintegrate further.Enemy resistance consists mainly of delaying actionsby small units, defense of scattered strong points, andreliance on obstacles, both defended and undefended.As the attack penetrates deeper into the enemy's posi-tions, his disorganization increases proportionately.

c. Objectives. Objectives in exploitation in-clude-

(1) Hostile reserves and artillery.(2) Command, communication, and supply in-

stallations.(3) The rear or flank of stubborn positions.(4) Vital terrain features or critical points such

as defiles, road junctions. railroad centers,and bridges.

(5) Link-up with friendly airborne forces.d. Freedom of Action. After entering the ex-

ploitation phase, the reinforced armored infantrybattalion commander normally has greater freedomof action than he does in operations against limitedobjectives and organized positions. Because the needfor speed requires instant decisions, the battalion

350

comnlallder is given wide latitude of action. As aresult, lie often assumes complete responsibility foractions of major importance, which he bases onhis own independent decisions and plans. However,when he must deviate greatly from the original plan,it is extremely important that he immediately notifythe appropriate commander (fig. 66).

345. COMPOSITION OF EXPLOITING FORCE

For exploitation, the reinforced armored infantrybattalion must be able to mount any type of groundoperation on short notice. The battalion must beso organized that the commander can control all ele-ments needed to accomplish his mission. Duringexploitation it is essential that all elements--tanks,armored infantry, armored engineers, and armoredartillery-maintain the same rate of advance.Proper exploitation demands that all troops, equip-ment, and supplies be transported by vehicles. Allelements of the exploiting force must be self-sustain-ing for short periods (4 to 6 days); to make this pos-sible, they need their own carriers and logisticalsupport.

346. SPEED IN THE EXPLOITATION

a. Speed is essential to successful exploitation.Only through speed and aggressiveness can surprisebe gained. When the exploiting force moves rapidlyfrom objective to objective, the enemy can seldommaneuver his troops to interfere seriously with theexploitation. Thorough planning and trainingusually result in eliminating unnecessary delays andin attaining the speed required.

351

EXPLOITING FORCEATTACKS REAR AREAINSTALLATIONS SEIZESPASS, AND CAPTURES )UNDERMANNED FORTI-FICATIONS BY ATTACKFROM REAR

ENCIRCLINGFORCEATTACKING

FLANK

ENCIRCLING FORCE SEIZ-INC DEFILE TO CUT OFFENEMY S RETREAT ANDSTRIKING HEAD OF MAINBODY

DIRECT PRESSURE FORCE ENELOPING ENEMY REAR GUARD ANDATTACKINGREAR OF MAIN BODY

Figure 66. Pursuit and exploitation.

352

b. Factors which affect the speed of the esploita-tion include:

(1) Roads. The reinforced armored infantrybattalion advances in column on roads.Normally the best available roads are used;however, secondary roads may be used togain surprise and to bypass enemy resistancewhich often concentrates on the best roads.Cross-country formations are used onlywhen roads are denied by enemy action.Roads are needed for the movement of sup-plies and for evacuation. Every effort ismade to secure bridges intact to avoid lossof time in bridging operations (fig. 67).

(2) Bypassing. Isolated defensive areas arenormally bypassed for more profitable ob-jectives. However, an enemy force is notbypassed, if it can interfere with accom-plishing the mission. The next higher com-mander decides normally whether the bat-talion will bypass a strong point.

(3) Changes in direction of attack. Frequentchanges in direction of the attack increasesurprise and thereby add speed to the ad-vance. However, once a battalion com-mander has been assigned a route to follow,he should not deviate from this route with-out permission of his next higher com-mander, except to bypass a physical ob-stacle. To change routes merely for thesake of change, and not because of enemyaction or a physical obstacle, may causedelay (fig. 68).

353

#6

i~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~d

354E

Ys~~~~. .

I~

354~~~~~~~~~~~~~

OEJ I OeJ 2 OBJ 3

DEFENDEDTOWN

BRIDGE BLOWN ONAPPROACH OFBATTALION

Figure 68. Conduct of exploitation. If an obstacle is en-countered, the advance is continued on an alternate routeif possible. Areas of resistance may be bypassed by firstobtaining the approval of the higher commander.

355

(4) Composition and task organization of thebattalion. The armored infantry battalion,adequately reinforced with tanks, armoredengineers, and supporting artillery, is or-ganized to permit rapid deployment into at-tack formations from march column. Ele-ments in the column are grouped so thatteams are ready for the type of employmentexpected.

(5) Attack of strong points. The battalionquickly destroys enemy strong points thatthe leading elements surprise, or that arelightly held. The leading elements of thebattalion quickly deploy and close on thestrong point. Reconnaissance is limitedand may often consist of a brief glance atthe enemy position. Orders are quickly sentby voice radio. If surprise is not gained,the whole battalion may have to deploy, al-though extensive preparations are unnec-essary unless the enemy is strong. As soonas preparations are completed, the battalionlaunches an all-out attack.

(6) Command. In successful exploitation,command is characterized by aggressive-ness, initiative, boldness, an understandingof tactics, constant alertness, and force.Thorough knowledge of the higher com-mander's plan assists the battalion com-mander in carrying out his assigned mis-sion.

(7) Control. The column is kept under con-trol at all times so that it can react quickly

356

and best apply its force. Strict marchdiscipline is a basic requirement. Thehigher commander may require the battal-ion to report when it passes phase lines.The battalion normally does not halt atphase lines, but merely reports crossing.

(8) Halts. If the battalion is ordered to haltfor the night or must halt for resupply, allpreparations are made to continue the mis-sion at the earliest starting time. In theexploitation, maximum use is made of day-light.

347. SECURITY IN THE EXPLOITATION

a. General. Each commander is responsible forhis own security. The reinforced armored infan-try battalion on exploitation is, because of its posi-tion deep in enemy territory, particularly vulner-able to enemy attack and harassment.

b. Types of Security Forces. While on the move,the reinforced armored infantry battalion columnprotects itself by using security forces; by air andground reconnaissance to the front, flanks, and rear;by liaison with adjacent units; and by the arrange-ment of the column. Administrative and service ele-ments in the column are protected by placing combatelements close to them. Column security is providedby advance, flank, and rear guards, by coveringforces, and by liaison plane reconnaissance.

(1) Covering force (par. 55).(2) Advance guard. The duty of the advance

guard, normally a reinforced tank company,

s357

is to prevent any unnecessary delay of themain body and to'protect it against surpriseand ground observation. Reconnaissanceto the front and flanks is continuous. Theadvance guard operates as fast as possible.Its action is aggressive and bold; it is al-ways prepared to take advantage of anysurprise achieved. It pushes back or de-stroys small enemy groups before they canhinder the main body. When it encounterslarge enemy forces or heavily defendedstrong points, the advance guard immedi-ately deploys and probes to determine theflanks, strength, and exact positions of theenemy. The advance guard normallyserves as the base of fire for the attack ofthe battalion. The main body follows theadvance guard without interval.

(3) Flank guards. The reconnaissance platoonand reconnaissance elements from highercommand usually provide the necessaryflank guard for the reinforced armored in-fantry battalion on exploitation. Tank andarmored infantry units are not normallyemployed as flank guards. (FM's 17-22and 17-35.)

(4) Rear guards (par. 55).(5) Security at the halt. ]When the head of the

column is halted, the rest of the columncontinues to move forward, coiling up inavailable space on each side of the road andnear the head of the column. Elements gointo prearranged team formations, ready

358

for instant action in any direction. Localsecurity detachments are posted.

348. ORGANIZATION OF THE EXPLOITING FORCE

The reinforced armored infantry battalion's taskorganization and order of march correspond to theorder of expected employment (fig. 69).

a. The reinforced companies of tanks and armoredinfantry are distributed in depth throughout thecolumn. They lead the attack, maneuver to eitherflank, and secure the column by their positions. Atank-strong team normally is the leading element inthe march column.

b. The battalion commander marches well forwardin the column to get early first-hand information ofthe situation. Personal observation speeds up hisdecisions, plans, and orders. Although the com-mander is free to travel wherever he desires in thecolumn, the command group normally travels be-hind the leading reinforced company.

c. The tactical air control party, when attached, isnormally with the command group. From this posi-tion, it can quickly move to an observation point incase a target is discovered that should be engagedby tactical air.

d. The mortar platoon normally remains underbattalion control. It is placed in the column so thatit can give immediate fire support to the leading ele-ments. Usually it follows the command group.

e. The direct-support field artillery battalionnormally remains in column until resistance is met.To support the leading elements of the reinforced

359

RECON (OR LARGER)FLANK GUARD

C OMMAND GROUP

\ Y (-) + BRIDGE PLATOON

UNDER COMMAND OF ARMFA BN COMMANDER

ARMORED INFANTRY BATTALUON(LESS ONE RIFLE COMPANY)

REINFORCED WITH: FORWARD ECHELO2 MEDIUM TANK COMPANIESI ARMORED ENGINEER PLATOON

PLUS BRIDGE PLATOONI ARMORED FIELD ARTILLERY

BATTALION IN DIRECTSUPPORT

/0COMBATTRAINS

uo (O (OR LARGER)

REARGUARD

Figure 6D. Y'ask organization and order of march of rein-forced armored infantry battalion on exploitation.

360

armored infantry battalion, the artillery must be wellforward. The general rule is to place the guns sothat they can, if necessary, support the head of thecolumn from a position on or near the road. Eitherone battery or the entire battalion may be forwardto give this support, but in all cases tanks and ar-mored infantry precede. In the exploitation, as inother offensive operations, forward observers are as-signed on the basis of one per company.

f. Armored engineer elements attached to the re-inforced armored infantry battalion normally oper-ate under battalion control. Since many obstaclesare likely to be encountered during exploitation, theengineers are usually well forward in the column,behind the mortar platoon. Villages, wooded areas,streams, and defiles on the route make it particularlyimportant for the engineers to be up front. If a mapstudy shows that bridge equipment may be needed,bridge trucks are located with the engineers.

g. The forward echelon, or command post, is lo-cated where it can best control operations. For ra-dio communication under unfavorable circumstancesor conditions it may be necessary to place radio relayelements near the tail of the column.

h. The reconnaissance platoon is normally assignedmissions of security, liaison, or column control. Ifenemy contact has not been gained or has been lost,the reconnaissance platoon, with liaison planes, maybe used to gain contact by moving in front or onthe flanks of the column. However, when enemycontacts have been frequent but intermittent, andcombat against tanks or antitank guns can be ex-pected momentarily, it is not advisable to use the

931358--51-24 361

reconnaissance platoon with its light-armored ve-hicles in the advance guard.

i. The combat trains bring up the rear of the rein-forced armored infantry battalion column. Theyare usually protected by a rear guard, under bat-talion control.

349. ATTACK FROM MARCH COLUMN, GENERAL

a. In the exploitation, the reinforced armored in-fantry battalion often attacks from march columnwithout first going into an assembly area. The ad-vance guard company usually covers the deployment(fig. 70).

b. Attacks from march columns are characterizedby-

(1) Immediate orders and rapid action.(2) Issuance of fragmentary orders in a se-

quence based on the order of their executionand on the time required to execute them.

(3) Use of staff officers to expedite the issuanceof orders.

(4) Decentralized control, because of the lackof time for full coordination..

(5) Deployment under the cover of the advanceguard company.

(6) Extreme boldness in planning and execution.c. The following are typical steps in the attack by

a reinforced armored infantry battalion from marchcolumn:

(1) The advance guard uncovers an enemystrong point that it cannot overwhelm.

362

Figure 70. Attack from march column.

363

/-' - ~'~ ' - t~~ ~ ~- ~SI ~-J

~~t ~ ~ ~' -

(2) The battalion commander reconnoiters anddecides to attack.

(3) As soon as he decides to attack, the bat-talion commander requests the artillery tocover the deployment and the attack.

(4) The commander orders the main body ofthe battalion to coil up as far forward aspossible. During this move, the companycommanders may go forward to meet thebattalion commander and receive orders, orbattalion staff officers may be sent to thecompanies to issue the battalion order.

(5) The company commanders issue theirorders to their platoon leaders and key non-commissioned officers.

(6) The attack is launched, usually on orderof battalion commander.

d. Speed in launching the attack is enhancedby-

(1) Having company commanders and support-ing-fire unit commanders of the main bodyride in their own vehicles immediately be-hind the battalion commander when contactis imminent. When the attack takes placeon favorable ground, the battalion com-mander can point out the company objec-tives at once. Company commanders canthen lead or direct their companies withoutdelay on the mission assigned over the desig-nated routes. Nothing is lost by this pro-cedure if the attack occurs on less favorableground.

364

(2) Against weak delaying forces the battalioncommander may wish to launch his mainbody without delay, under support fire fromhis advance guard. He may do this by giv-ing each company commander an objectiveas the entire column moves forward. Asthe leading company assumes its attackformation, the battalion commander awaits,or goes to, the next commander in the col-umn, and so launches units successively inthe attack. The battalion commander maylead the last element himself. Elementsmay be committed in column, echelon, orwedge formations.

350. ATTACK OF SUCCESSIVE OBJECTIVES

a. In fluid situations, characteristic of both the ex-ploitation and the final stages of the penetration, aneffective form of offense is the attack against suc-cessive objectives. Such attacks are characterized bythe use of elements of the battalion against severalobjectives-either in rapid succession or at the sametime. This method of attack saves time when theentire strength of the battalion is not needed to takeeach individual objective (fig. 71).

b. Regardless of its task organization, the rein-forced armored battalion is always organized intoreinforced companies for this type of attack. Thestrength of companies varies with the estimatedenemy strength on the objectives. These companiesare assigned objectives and the operation begins with

365

TO NEXT OBJECTIVE

0/I

/0

\ I

v0 \< =

A

Figure 71. Attack of successive objectives on exploitation.

366

an attack on the first objective. As soon as it hasbeen seized, or as soon as the battalion commanderis certain that the attacking company is strongenough to clear it of enemy troops, he orders thesecond company to attack the second objective whilethe mopping-up process on the first is being com-pleted. Similarly, a third company may attackthrough or around the company on the second objec-tive, to seize a third objective. The attack of eachcompany is supported by the fire of another com-pany. A reinforced armored infuntry battalion canoften clear a series of villages in a relatively shorttime by this method of attack.

351. NIGHT DEFENSE DURING EXPLOITATION

As the reinforced armored infantry battalion issubject to attack from any direction when halted atnight, a perimeter defense is needed. If the bat-talion is beyond supporting distance of the highercommand, it uses tanks and armored infantry to forman all-around defense. If the battalion is close toother elements of the command, it normally is as-signed a sector of the over-all defense; its relativeposition then dictates the strength and sector of re-sponsibility of its security forces. These measuresare taken to meet a surprise attack by the enemy.

a. Outposts of tanks and armored infantry areestablished on all likely avenues of approach.

b. Supporting weapons and lightly armored ve-hicles are placed in the center of the perimeter.

c. All supporting weapons are emplaced and regis-tered, and defensive fires are planned.

367

d. Tank guns and armored infantry machine gunscoordinate their fires and cover avenues of approach.

e. Listening posts are established by all elements,with radio and telephone being used for communica-tion.

f. Connecting patrols visit adjacent units and iso-lated outposts.

g. Service elements carry on their normal missionsand are not burdened by security demands.

352. CONTINUATION OF EXPLOITATION DURING THENIGHT

In order to exploit success to the maximum, theadvance is often continued throughout the night. Anight advance is conducted similar to a daylight ad-vance. However, security detachments are strength-ened, the distance between vehicles is shortened, andthe leading tank elements are more heavily rein-forced with armored infantry. The rate of advanceis usually slower at night, and supporting fires areless effective, but the element of surprise is muchenhanced. This type of operation varies greatlyfrom the planned night attack.

353. COOPERATING AIR FORCES

Exploiting forces coordinate closely with friendlyaviation. Without adequate recognition measures,the confusion and lack of cohesive fronts inherentin an exploitation could result in clashes betweenfriendly air and ground forces. The air forces as-sist the exploiting column by-

a. Providing column cover.

368

b. Bombing and strafing enemy forces on the axisof advance.

c. Observing enemy activity in the zone of actionand reporting this information through TACP'sto the column commander.

d. Aerial resupply to isolated units or units hav-ing extremely long supply lines.

354. AIRBORNE OPERATIONS AND RELIEF COLUMNS

a. Armored divisions are used to drive throughoverland to link up with airheads established by air-borne and air transported units. In such situationsexploitation tactics and techniques apply since longadvance must be made in short periods of time. Ex-ploiting force tactics also may be used by reinforcedarmored infantry battalions as part of columns at-tempting to relieve friendly forces from enemyencirclement.

b. Airborne forces may also assist exploiting forces.They may arrive by parachute or glider to seize keybridges, defiles, and installations vital to continuedexploitation by advancing armor. When airborneforces are used in this manner, it is desirable forradio contact to be established as soon as possiblebetween the airborne and armored units. This pre-vents mistaken identity and clashes between theseelements when contact is established. This radiocontact may be facilitated by having liaison person-nel and radio equipment from the armored units ac-company the airborne forces; and airborne liaisonpersonnel, with radios, accompany the armored unit.The commander of the reinforced armored infantrybattalion assures that all of his troops are familiar

369

with the recognition means to be used and the areasin which friendly airborne forces can be expected.

355. EXPLOITATION UNDER ADVERSE TERRAIN ANDWEATHER CONDITIONS

It may be necessary for an armored division tobe used on breakthrough and exploitation missionsin areas unsuitable for armored operations. Virginforests, widespread swamps, erosion, poor roads orno roads, and bridges not strong enough to bear theweight of heavy equipment restrict the use of armor.Some areas, having a few poor roads or none at all,are favorable for tank employment in dry weather,but become impassable in the rainy season. An ar-mored infantry battalion commander on exploitationin such an area considers-

a. Supply and Evacuation Transport. Full-trackvehicles have much better cross-country mobilitythan wheeled and half-track vehicles, especiallyunder adverse conditions. To assure that combattrains and medical vehicles can keep up with thefighting elements, these units are reequipped withfull-track cargo and evacuation vehicles. This mayrequire special training.

b. Self-sufficient Combat Units. The armored in-fantry battalion carries enough fuel, lubricants, am-munition, rations, and water to enable it to reachits objective. If this is not possible, the higher head-quarters carries these supplies and makes them avail-able to the battalion. This often must be supple-mented by air-transported supply, either dropped inparachute containers or landed at forward air stripsestablished by the armored division.

370

c. Ewploitation at Night. Surprise may be gainedby boldly moving at night deep into the enemy reararea and then completely camouflaging the units be-fore daylight. A series of these bold moves, if un-detected by the enemy, puts the exploiting force deepin the enemy's rear before active daylight operationsare undertaken. Such actions are feasible in situa-tions where the opposing forces hold extremely widefronts, especially in wooded and undeveloped areas.

d. Lack of Accurate Maps and Topographical In-formation. Areas for which accurate maps do notexist, or for which topographical information is notavailable, offer problems to the movement of armoredunits. Greater emphasis is placed on ground andaerial reconnaissance. In these areas only recentaerial photomaps and photographs, accurately inter-preted, can be used. It is the responsibility of thehigher commander to provide accurate maps or mapsubstitutes to the battalion commander. In situa-tions of this kind, maps or map substitutes may be inlimited supply and sketches or other improvisationsmay have to be made by the armored infantry bat-talion commander and his staff.

e. Infantry Follow-up. The armored infantrybattalion is prepared to defend its gains for consid-erable periods while awaiting the follow-up troops.In some situations follow-up troops may be air-liftedto landing fields and air strips seized by the ex-ploiting force, to help defend a critical objectiveuntil the less mobile ground follow-up arrives.

f. Field Expedients. Success in exploitation de-pends to a great extent on the initiative of small unitleaders in improvising means of advancing their ve-

371

hides through the bog, sand, and broken terrain.Training in improvising field expedients, as well asdetailed training in accepted methods, is important.

g. Aggressive Leadership and Initiative. Com-manders with aggressiveness and a high degree ofinitiative are successful in exploitation. Com-manders who can operate only under detailed in-structions and strict adherence to pretested methodsjeopardize success. Important attributes of a suc-cessful commander for exploitation in difficult ter-rain are resourcefulness, initiative, energy, deter-mination, and enthusiasm. The ability to do the un-expected is also a definite advantage in fighting anenemy that adheres to rigid rules and only acts onauthority of higher commanders.

h. Training. An armored infantry battalion thatis to be committed to an exploitation mission underadverse terrain and weather conditions needs inten-sive field maneuvers in areas similar to the area of thecontemplated operation. Small unit standing oper-ating procedures are developed, training in field ex-pedients is stressed, and driving under the expectedoperational conditions is emphasized. Field prob-lems under the most adverse conditions possible inthe training area help units develop procedures.

i. Desert Operations, Operations in Extreme Cold,Combat in Jungles, and Combat in Woods. Whenexploitation is contemplated in these areas, the ar-mored infantry battalion commander also considersthe factors discussed in paragraphs 513-520 and540446 for those operations.

372

CHAPTER 12

THE ARMORED INFANTRY BATTALION INDEFENSE

Section I. GENERAL

356. GENERAL

The purpose of defensive combat is to gain timeuntil conditions are more favorable for undertakingthe offensive, or to economize forces on one frontwhile concentrating superior forces for a decisionelsewhere. An armored infantry unit may occupy asector of a main battle position or, when acting in-dependently, assume the defense on its own. It goeson defense independently when it is exploiting orpursuing and is attacked by a superior force, or whenit has reached an objective that it must defend untilthe arrival of other troops or supplies.

357. MOBILE DEFENSE

Mobile defense is a defense, with combat weapons,of an area or position, using maneuver together withorganization of fires and terrain to seize the initiativefrom the enemy. A mobile defense is especiallysuited to armored units. It takes advantage of thebattlefield mobility and offensive shock action ofarmored units.

373

358. SUSTAINED DEFENSE

Sustained defense is a defense that is aimed atstopping an enemy attack at the defense line. Thebulk of the available forces occupies and organizesthe battle position. Reserves are withheld to coun-terattack hostile penetration of the battle position.A sustained defense is normally used by infantrydivisions. It is used by armored divisions when oc-cupying defensive sectors of a width commensuratewith their organic infantry strength (FM 17-100).

359. DISPOSITION OF COMBAT COMMAND IN SUS-TAINED DEFENSE

In a sustained defense, an armored division mayuse either one or two combat commands, strong inarmored infantry, on the main line of resistance.When only one combat command is used, the othercombat command, heavy in tanks, is held in reserve.When two combat commands are used, each with-holds a sizeable tank-heavy reserve, or the reservecommand may be organized as the main divisionreserve with the combat commands holding out pro-portionately smaller reserves.

360. COMMUNICATION

An efficient communication system is necessary tocoordinate the units of the defending force, to carryout the fire plan, and to cooperate with adjacent units.Familiarity with the terrain, enough time for plan-ning and installation, and large quantities of signalsupplies make it possible to develop elaborate com-

374

munication systems. These include wire lines tosmall units and observers.

Section II. FRONT-LINE BATTALION IN SUSTAINEDDEFENSE

361. FRONTAGE AND DEPTH

a. The frontage assigned to a front-line armoredinfantry battalion, reinforced, in the sustained de-fense is influenced by the terrain and the numberof rifle companies used with the battalion. Anarmored infantry rifle company call organize a frontfrom 600 yards in close terrain to 1,500 yards inopen terrain. A battalion with two companies on theMLR can organize from 1,200 to 3,000 yards of front-age. Similarly, a battalion, with three companieson the MLLR can organize a frontage of 1,800 to4.500 yards.

b. The depth of a front-line battalion area varieswith the terrain. The area should have enoughdepth to permit the use of all battalion units andenough space for vehicle parks and assembly areas.This usually means a depth of 800 to 1,500 yards(fig. 72).

362. MOVEMENT TO BATTLE POSITION

After the combat command commander assignsthe battalion defense area, the battalion commanderstudies it on a map. He plans for the immediatemovement of the battalion and arranges for his com-pany commanders to precede their units so that theymay reconnoiter and plan the organization of their

375

XAo ®! I

Figure 72. Ano r-ed infantry battalion in sustained defense,schemnatic (heavy tank company attached).

areas. He tries to move units directly to their de-fensive areas. When this is impossible, he desig-nates an assembly area to which the battalion movesunder command of the executive officer. Duringmovement the battalion maintains its local security.

363. RECONNAISSANCE

After ordering movement of the battalion and in-structing his staff, the battalion commander makeshis personal reconnaissance. This reconnaissance isas detailed as time permits. The battalion com-mander usually takes with him the S>3, the com-munication officer, the mortar platoon leader, thecommanders of attached units, and the artillery liai-son officer, or artillery commander if present. He

376

may have them make separate, specialized, or con-current reconnaissances. Other personnel may bedirected to reconnoiter in detail and report on speci-fied areas, or to reconnoiter and recommend locationsfor installations, weapons, and mine fields. The bat-talion commander identifies the battalion defensearea on the ground and verifies approaches for mov-ing the battalion into the area. While on recon-naissance he determines--

a. The probable avenues of enemy approach forfoot troops and tanks.

b. Terrain in front of the position to be occupiedby security forces to prevent close hostile observa-tion.

c. Natural obstacles in the foreground or terrainfeatures that can be quickly converted into obstacles.

d. Demolitions to be accomplished.e. Key terrain within the battalion area./. The general trace of the MLR.g. Boundary and limiting point between com-

panies.A. General locations and direction of fire for

machine guns used in close support of the MLR.i. General locations for 81-mrm mortars and areas

to be covered by their fires.j. Details of defensive fires to be requested from

supporting artillery.k. General location for antipersonnel mines, booby

traps, and wire entanglements.1. General location for antitank weapons and

mines.n. Location of possible penetration areas.

Sla58-5--51-25 377

n. Areas to be organized by the battalion reserve;its assembly area.

o. Location of observation posts.p. Location of the aid station, ammunition supply

point, command post, and alternate command post.

364. PLANS

a. The defense plan includes distribution and mis-sions of rifle companies and weapons under battalioncontrol. It provides for security, coordination offires, use of the reserve, use of attached units, com-munication, and administration.

b. If the defense is undertaken while the battleposition is subject to enemy ground observation andfire, the battalion commander indicates rifle companydefense areas, makes attachmelunents directly to the riflecompanies, and designates the priority of supportingfires. As soon as lie can, he readjusts these initialdispositions into a coordinated defense.

c. Before deciding on the supply and evacuationdetails of his defense plan, the battalion commanderreceives his S4's report about the status of vehiclesand the proposed composition and location of thecombat trains and the field trains. He considers thebattalion surgeon's recommendations for establish-ing the battalion aid station.

365. CHARACTERISTICS OF MAIN LINE OF RESIST-ANCE

The main line of resistance is located to hold vitalterrain. It may be on a forward slope, a reverseslope, or a combination of the two. It is traced to

378

provide as many of the following advantages aspossible:

a. Observation to the front and flanks.b. Fields for grazing and flanking fire of auto-

matic weapons.c. Cover and concealment for troops, weapons, and

defensive works.d. Use of natural obstacles-particularly anti-

tank obstacles.e. Terrain that aids the novement of troops and

supplies within the battle position./. Denial of close hostile observation into the battle

position.

366. TRACE OF THE MLR

The trace of the MLR is irregular and containsminor curves to give better flanking fire. Largesalients into and out of the positions are avoided.The defense areas on the MLR are mutually sup-porting and capable of all around defense.

367. FORWARD SLOPE

A battle position with its MLR on a forward slopehas many advantages. From such a position thebattalion has long-range observation forward of theMLR. A forward slope position usually has themost effective fields of fire for flat-trajectory weap-ons. Good observation and firing positions helpcontrol the natural and artificial obstacles in frontof the position. By extending the rear limits of thecompany defense areas to the reverse slope, the bat-talion gains concealed and defiladed routes of com-

379

munication. These routes aid in the movement oftroops and supplies, and control.

368. REVERSE SLOPE

The MLR is located on the reverse slope when theenemy can place enough direct and observed fire onthe forward slope to make it untenable; when thereare better fields of fire for flat-trajectory weapons;when necessary to avoid dangerous salients and re-entrants; or when control of the forward slope islost or has not been gained. Observation is necessaryin a reverse slope defense. It may be obtained fromsecurity elements on, or forward of, the topographi-cal crest, and from observers on terrain features tothe flanks and rear.

369. BOUNDARIES AND LIMITING POINTS

The front-line company defense areas are assignedby designating boundaries between companies withlimiting points on the boundaries. These pointsindicate the general trace of the MLR and the locali-ties at which front-line company commanders coor-dinate their defenses. Boundaries are fixed to assignfrontages to the front-line companies in proportionto the defensive strength of the terrain and theamount of supporting fires allocated to the area.Boundaries are located to avoid dividing responsi-bility for the defense of key terrain and criticalavenues of approach.

370. RIFLE COMPANIES

a. The battalion commander uses his rifle com-panies to best accomplish the battalion's mission.

380

This generally results in placing two or three com-panies on the MLR-two if only three companies areavailable, three if four are available to the battalioncommander. In either case one company is used inreserve.

b. Front-line rifle companies occupy key terrainfeatures and tactical localities within the assigneddefense areas. They are located to be mutually sup-porting, and are capable of all-around defense andof giving close protection to all supporting weaponswithin their area.

e. The company selected for the reserve is givenmore tank strength than companies in the line. Thereserve is constituted as a tank-armored infantryteam and is located to provide depth to the battaliondefense area. It may occupy key terrain in the rearpart of the battalion area if organized to block ap-proaches into the rear area. It may counterattackto destroy a hostile penetration or occupy previouslyprepared positions to block and contain a penetrationwhile the reserve of a higher unit counterattacks.Additional missions of the reserve company mayinclude establishing the combat outpost and assist-ing in the organization of forward defense areas.

371. VEHICLES AND VEHICULAR WEAPONS

When the situation permits, maximum use is madeof vehicular weapons in the sustained defense. Car-riers of the front-line rifle companies normally areplaced in covered and concealed positions behind thebattalion reserve. The company commander's head-quarters section carrier may be left in the front linefor control purposes. Carriers of reserve elements

381

may remain with their units to transport the reserveto the assault position for counterattack or to trans-port armored infantry accompanying tank counter-attacks.

372. MORTAR PLATOON

The 81-mm mortars are emplaced by platoon forbetter fire control, supply, and administration.When the terrain or tactical situation prevents this,the mortars are divided into squads. They occupypositions in defilade within communicating distanceof the observation posts. When used as a platoon,the mortars are emplaced near the reserve company'sprimary position. When working as squads, themortars are put between the reserve company's pri-mary positions and the front-line defense areas.Here, minor penetrations will not force displace-ment. They are not located in the more likely areasof hostile penetration. Squads prepare supplemen-tary firing positions to the rear to permit continuousfire against deep penetrations within the battalionarea. The battalion order assigns concentrationsand barrages for the guns of each squad or for theplatoon.

373. SUPPORTING ARTILLERY, GENERAL

The division commander, through the divisionartillery officer, controls and coordinates the use ofall divisional artillery. Normally, one battalion oflight artillery is in direct support of each combatcommand. The combat command commander allo-cates the priorities of fires of the artillery battalion

382

to the front-line infantry battalions. Priorities de-pend on the defensive strength of the terrain. Theinfantry battalion commander designates areas onthe ground to be covered by the allotted artilleryfires.

374. TYPES OF ARTILLERY FIRE

Types of artillery fire are concentrations andbarrages.

a. Concentrations are planned fires to engage theenemy forward of the MLR and within the battleposition if he makes a penetration. Concentrationsare 150 yards in diameter for one 105-mm battery;250 yards for one 105-mam battalion.

b. Barrages are planned fires located immediatelyin front of the battle position as a part of the finalprotective fires. Each 105-mm battery can fire onebarrage 100 yards deep and 150 to 300 yards wide.

c. Artillery units not firing barrages may rein-force fires in a threatened area.

375. ARTILLERY LIAISON OFFICERS

One artillery liaison officer operates with eachinfantry battalion. He assists the battalion com-mander in planling, coordinating, and requestingand obtaining artillery fires.

376. ARTILLERY FORWARD OBSERVERS

Artillery observers work with the infantry unitsto adjust and control close-supporting artillery fires.Normally, one forward observ i the area of eachreinforced company;. ' / l e area /

3/U; &

377. TANKS, GENERAL

The number of tanks attached to a front-line arm-ored infantry battalion in sustained defense isdetermined by the terrain, the frontage, theenemy situation, and the number and type of tanksavailable to the combat command. Tanks attachedto a frontline armored infantry battalion are usedto provide antitank defense in depth, reinforce thebattalion fires, and, supported by armored infantryelements, make counterattacks.

378. TANK EMPLOYMENT

Part of the attached tanks occupy firing positionsin the front-line company areas and engage hostilearmor as soon as it comes within effective range.The fires of some tanks may be withheld initially togain surprise. Initially, part of the tanks attachedto the front-line companies may be used with the com-bat outpost. Tanks so used usually revert to thereserve upon withdrawal of the combat outpost.Most of the tanks with the front-line armored infan-try battalion are used with the battalion reserve.Firing positions are prepared from which the tankswith the reserve unit can support front-line unitsby fire, block, and contain a hostile penetration.When the battalion reserve counterattacks, all tanksnot engaged or that can be disengaged take part inthe counterattack.

379. CONTROL OF TANKS

For maximum coordination, flexibility, and con-trol in sustained defense, all or part of the attached

384

tanks may be kept under battalion control. How-ever, tanks in counterattack roles are used as mem-bers of a tank-armored infantry team.

380. COORDINATED FIRE PLAN, GENERAL

a. The success of a sustained defense depends oznthe degree of coordination of the fires available tothe defending force. Every unit is responsible forpreparing plans that coordinate its available fires.The coordinated fire plan consists of those plansmade by commanders in advance of the battle to in-sure that maximum effective fire is brought on theattacking force throughout the defense. It includesfires of individual and supporting weapons on tar-gets of opportunity and the prearranged fires ofsuch supporting weapons as can be used under anyconditions of visibility. It also includes the selectionof positions for all weapons, the establishment of aneffective fire control system, the planning of fires onprobable targets, and the prearrangement, to includesurvey and registration, of as many of these fires astime permits.

b. The coordinated fire plan seeks to bring theenemy under fire as soon as air or ground observerscan see him, to hold him under an increasingly heavyvolume of fire as he approaches the battle position,and to eject him from the battle position by a com-bination of fires and counterattack. Planned fireson a target area become prearranged fires upon com-pletion of fire data for that target area. Foreffectiveness, as many of the planned fires are pre-arranged as time permits. Planned fires for the de-fense fall into four phases: long-range fires, close

385

defensive fires, final protective fires, and fires withinthe position.

381. LONG-RANGE FIRES

Long-range fires are planned to engage the enemy,as early as possible, to inflict casualties, to delay hisadvance, and to disrupt his organization. They con-sist of fires of supporting weapons that are locatedwithin the battle position and can fire at long rangeswithout disclosing the forward units of the battleposition. They include fires of the combat outpost.When the enemy comes close enough, long-rangeweapons fire on located or suspected enemy targets.As the enemy continues his advance and comeswithin range of additional weapons, he is broughtunder an increasingly heavy volume of fire.

382. CLOSE DEFENSIVE FIRES

Close defensive fires are planned to disorganize theattacking force before it can assault by inflicting thegreatest possible number of casualties, by disruptingcommand control and communication, by denyingobservation, and by neutralizing supporting fires.They consist of the fires of all weapons that can fireon the enemy until he launches an assault.

383. FINAL PROTECTIVE FIRES

Final protective fires are planned to break up theenemy assault on the battle position by placing aband of concentrated fires across the battle positionjust in front of the MLR. They consist of prear-

386

ranged fires that can be delivered under any condi-tions of visibility. They include machine gun finalprotective lines, mortar barrages, and artillery bar-rages. Final protective fires are delivered on thecall of a unit on the MLR when the enemy assaultsits position. Only those supporting weapons whosefinal protective fires are in front of the threatenedunit fire their assigned final protective lines or bar-rages. All other available weapons supplement orreinforce those final protective fires and add to theintensity of the fires in the threatened portion of thedefensive position. Flat-trajectory weapons engagetargets of opportunity. High-angle weapons rein-force the barrages or engage more remunerativetargets.

384. FIRES WITHIN POSITION

Fires within the position are planned to limit pos-sible penetrations of the battle position, and to sup-port counter attacks. They consist of the fires ofavailable supporting weapons and the fires of indi-vidual weapons that can fire into the penetrated area.If the enemy penetrates the battle position, all avail-able fires are used to limit the penetration, to preventenemy reinforcemenlts from entering the penetratedarea, and to destroy the enemy within the penetratedarea. If the penetration jeopardizes the battle posi-tion, a counterattack is made to eject the enemy assoon as the penetration is contained. Plans for prob-able counterattacks are made during the organizationof the defense. Prearranged supporting fires arecoordinated by the counterattacking force corn-mander.

387

385. DEVELOPMENT OF BATTALION COORDINATEDFIRE PLAN

a. General. The first steps in the preparation ofthe battalion coordinated fire plan are personallysup)ervised by the battalion commander and are in-cluded in the battalion defense order. These stepsconsist of the plans for supporting fires that can bedelivered on predetermined target areas under anyconditions of visibility and that are under the directcontrol of the battalion commander. They may alsoinclude the fires of all or part of the rifle companymachine guns. As the lower-unit commanders or-ganize their defense areas, they plan their fires tosupplement and reinforce these planned fires of thebattalion commander. The battalion commandergives general supervision to the plans of lower unitsand directs changes for maximum effectiveness.These plans, coordinated and approved by the bat-talion commander, become the battalion coordinatedfire plan.

b. Observation. The delivery of timely and accu-rate supporting fires throughout the defense requiresdetailed coordination of observation. Agencies co-ordinated include the unit observation posts as wellas artillery and mortar forward observer parties.Observers are located in width and depth to provideoverlapping observation of all portions of the de-fense area and maximum observation of the mostprobable avenues of approach. The battalion com-mander coordinates observation within his defensearea. Several observation posts are not located inone locality. Provision also is made for any observer

388

to call for and control the fires of any supportingweapons.

c. long-Range Fires. The combat commandcommander ordinarily plans long-range fires be-yond the observation of the combat outpost, sincesuch fires are coordinated with the location and with-drawal of the general outpost. Long-range artilleryand mortar fires to be observed from the combat out-post are included in the battalion plan. Observersfor these fires are located with the combat outpostthat they support.

d. Close Defensive Fires. In planning the closedefensive fires, the battalion commander and his as-sistants reconnoiter in detail. They determine areasfrom which the attacker can observe the battle posi-tion, probable hostile attack positions, and avenuesof approach. They plan for detailed coverage ofthe foreground by fire. They give priority of firesfrom high-angle fire weapons to defiladed areas.They consider open areas over which the attackermay attempt a rapid attack during periods of poorvisibility or under cover of his own smoke. Firedata is computed to permit massing unobserved fireson such areas and approaches. Prearranged con-centrations are numbered so that any observer canquickly call for fires of all weapons capable of en-gaging the desired target area. Smoke concentra-tions are planned to screen hostile observation. Di-rect-fire weapons are assigned principal directions offire or overlapping sectors of fire.

e. Final Protective Fires.(1) Final protective fires include the machine

gun final protective lines in support of the

389

MLR, artillery barrages, and 81-mm and60-mm mortar barrages. These fires areplanned to provide a continuous band offire across the entire front or in front of anythreatened part of the position. The bat-talion commander coordinates these fireswithin the battalion and with the fires ofadjacent units so that there are no gaps.Points requiring coordination by adjacentbattalion commanders include the exchange

.of machine gun final protective lines, plan-ning adjacent barrages atthe boundary lines,or a combination of these two measures.Before occupying the position, the battalioncommander determines the final protectivelines of selected rifle company machineguns. Machine gun final protective linesin front of adjacent defense areas areplanned at least 50 yards in front of friend-ly troops to stop the enemy before hereaches hand grenade range and before hereaches an area from which he can rushthe position in one bound. The battalioncommander determines the areas in whichartillery and 81-mm mortar fire will be used.To insure safety to friendly troops, mortarand artillery barrages are planned 100 to200 yards forward of the MLR.

(2) The battalion commander authorizes cer-tain personnel to call for these final protec-tive fires. He sees that every approach tothe area is covered by at least one individual

390

who is authorized to call for these fires.Normally front-line company commandersand front-line platoon leaders are author-ized to call for final protective fires to blockapproaches to their defensive areas. Finalprotective fires which support adjacentbattalions may be opened on call from eitherbattalion. The battalion order provides forcalling for these fires by alternate meansof communication. It designates thoseweapons which will open fire on any givensignal, the rates of fire under conditions ofreduced visibility, and the duration of fires.Final protective fires are continued until thelocality asking for them requests firing tocease, or until the duration prescribed in thebattalion order has elapsed. This durationseldom exceeds 10 minutes; if additional fireis needed, the call is repeated. Visual sig-nals and time lengths of fire are varied toprevent enemy duplication of signals andknowledge of fire routine.

f. Fires of Rifle Company Weapons. The bar-rages of the 60-mm mortars of the front-line com-panies and the final protective lines of the lightmachine guns of the front-line rifle platoons are in-cluded in the final protective fires of the battalionplan. The fires of these weapons are used to closegaps in the fires of the weapons whose missions areassigned by the battalion commander. Normally,the barrages of the 60-mm mortars are assigned bythe rifle company commander and the final protec-

391

tive lines of the light machine guns of the front-lineplatoons are assigned by the platoon leader. Thebattalion commander checks them and sees that theyare coordinated with the battalion fire plan. Formaximum coordination, final protective missions forselected light machine guns of the front-line rifleplatoons are designated in the battalion order.

g. Rates of Fire. Rates of fire usually prescribedare-

(1) For heavy machine guns-250 rounds perminute for 2 minutes and 125 rounds perminute thereafter.

(2) For light machine guns-125 rounds perminute for 2 minutes and 75 rounds perminute thereafter.

(3) For 81-mm mortars-30 rounds per minutefor 2 minutes and 18 rounds per minutethereafter.

(4) For the supporting artillery-usually pre-scribed by higher headquarters.

h. Fires Within the Position. To give additionaldepth to the defense, the battalion commander plansconcentrations and the use of direct fire weaponswithin the battle position. He gives priority of pre-arranged fires to the most likely area of penetration.To prevent the enemy from exploiting his initialsuccesses, additional concentrations are prearrangedto cover critical areas next to the expected penetra-tions. If the situation warrants, these fires are rein-forced by all fires available within the combat com-mand and division.

392

386. ANTITANK DEFENSE PLAN

a. Concurrently with other defensive measures,the battalion commander develops a coordinatedantitank defense plan consisting of obstacles, bothnatural and artificial, and the fires of suitableweapons.

,. Tanks placed with the front-line units have aprimary mission of antitank defense and are sitedto support the MLR. However, these tanks must beable to move rapidly iii the counterattack or to areasthat are more threatened. The taniks made availableto the armored infantry battalion commander areused to cover the more dangerous tank approaches.Tanks normally open fire at their maximull effectiverange. The combat comnmand commander normallyattaches one or more compunies of tanks to eachfront-line armored infantry battalion. If one bat-talion has a particularly dangerous approach forhostile armor, or if additional tanks are made avail-able, two comlpanies may be attached to one front-line armored infntlllly balttallion. Besides reinforcingthe fires of the MLR. tanks so attached are used toextend the depth of the antitank defense of the bat-talion area, and to lead or support a counterattackby the reserve elements of the battalion. Tankslocated in the battalion rear areas assist the reserveelements in blocking penetrations of the battle posi-tion by reinforcing their fires, and engage hostiletankls which threaten the flanks and rear of thebattalion area.

c. The rocket launchers are used to protect instal-hltions such as command posts and crew-servedweapons positions.

931358'-51-26 393

387. ARTIFICIAL ANTITANK OBSTACLES

a. Artificial obstacles include antitank mine fieldsand other constructions to impede the movement oftanks.

b. (1) The use of antitank mine fields is co-ordinated with the use of other obstaclesand antitank weapons. Antitank minesare laid forward of the MLR to con-nect and extend other obstacles, andto canalize hostile armor into areas whereantitank fires are most effective. Anti-tank mines may also be laid in depththroughout the battle position to preventthe free movement of tanks that penetrateinto the battle position. To guard againstremoval or breaching by the enemy, minefields are covered by small-arms fire; theyare also covered by antitank fires to destroydisabled tanks. When mine fields and bar-rages of mortars and artillery are plannedin the same general area, the mine fieldsare located at the near edge of the barrageareas.

(2) Under normal conditions, mine fields areprepared according to plans established bycombat command or division. The combatcommand commander may delegate the re-sponsibility for laying the mines and mayallot mines to the front-line battalions. Allcombat soldiers are trained in the construe-tion of obstacles and in the technique of

394

placing, recording, and marking mine fields.Engineers may furnish some technical as-sistance. When dummy mines are used,they are marked similiarly to live fields. Toprotect friendly troops against accidentaldetonation, the battalion keeps guards overmine fields in the battalion area.

388. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND

a. As soon as a p osition is occupied, the battalionstrengthens the defense by clearing fields of fire andconstructing individual shelters, emplacements forAweapofis and tanks, and obstacles. Concealment andcamouflage tasks are carried out concurrently withconstruction tasks.

b. The battalion commander's plan for organiza-tion of the ground prepares the battalion for combatin the shortest time. Tools and materials are al-lotted according to the amount and urgency of thework to be done by the various units.

c. The battalion commander and his staff super-vise the work to insure that the terrain is used tothe best advantage, that concealment and camouflagemeasures are carried out, and that the work in theposition progresses without loss of time or effort.

d. If the defense area to be occupied is underhostile artillery fire or air attack. the battalion mayfirst occupy concealed positions nearby. Organiza-tion of exposed positions is either postponed untildark or accomplished piecemeal by the infiltration ofsmall groups.

395

e. The normal pilioi'ity of work is indicated be-low, although most tasks are done concurrently:

(1) Clearing fields of fire.(2) Laying antitank mine fields and antiper-

sonnel miles.(3) Providing signal commlllnication and obser-

vation systems.(4) Preparing weapon emplacements and indi-

vidual shelters.(5) Preparing obstacles other than mine fields.(6) Preparing routes for movement of reserves

and attached tanks, and for supply andevacuation.

f. When possible, front-line companies are as-signed no other tasks while organizing their defenseareas. Clearing fields of fire, emplacing crew-servedweapons, and digging individual shelters receivefirst priority.

g. Elements of the reserve company not being usedon security missions may be ordered to help the front-line companies organize the ground. This includeslaying mine fields, preparing obstacles, and clearingfields of fire. First priority of work within thereserve company area is the preparation of primaryplatoon positions. When the reserve company is toprepare positions to protect the flanks and rear ofthe battalion area, the priority of such work is statedin orders. Work on these positions may be post-poned until the organizations of the forward areas iswell under way.

396

389. MISSIONS FOR ENGINEERS

Engineers usually are assigned special missions byhigher headquarters. When available to the battal-ion they construct obstacles, prepare demolitions, laymine fields, and do other work requiring specialequipment and training.

390. CONCEALMENT

All works are sited to take advantage of naturalconcealment. Where they cannot be concealed theyare camouflaged. Emphasis is given to concealmentfrom air observation and photography.

391. PERSONNEL OBSTACLES

a. Tactical obstacles are located to stop or divertthe hostile approach. Barbed wire entanglementsantipersonnel mines (when authorized), and otherobstacles are located to break up the enemy's attackformation and hold him in areas which are coveredby the defensive fires of automatic weapons. Tac-tical obstacles are placed to be illconspicuous fromground or air observation, and so that direct fire canprevent their removal or neutralization by the enemy.

b. Protective obstacles consist of barbed wire, tripflares, and antipersonnel mines (when authorized).They are located to prevent the enemy from deliver-ing a surprise assault from positions close to defenseareas. Such obstacles are near enough to defenseIreas to be watched day and night. They are far

enough away to prevent the enemy from lying beyondthe obstacles and using hand grenades. When

397

needed, additional obstacles are installed close todefense areas.

392. DUMMY WORKS

Dumnmy works may be used to mislead the enemyand disperse his fire. To be effective they mustclosely resemble genluine works. Dummy worksshould be at least 150 yards from any true positionso that fire directed at them will not include occupiedlocalities. For further deception, dummy worksmay be mannued with small groups during prelimi-nary phases when the enemy tries to locate defensiveworks by air reconnaissance and ground patroling.

393. SECURITY, GENERAL

Security elements to protect the battle positionconsist of aviation, a covering force, a general out-post, a combat outpost, and local security. As manyof these security elements are used as possible. Thesecurity elements in front of the combat outpost areestablished by higher headquarters.

394. COMBAT OUTPOST

a. The combat command defense order normallyincludes instructions as to the general trace of thecombat outpost, its strength, and the battalion re-sponsible for its organization. The combat com-mand commander normally controls and coordinatesthe actions of the combat outpost. When the respon-sibility of establishing the combat outpost is dele-gated to a front-line battalion, control may be main-

398

tained by the battalion commander. Elements ofthe reserve company normally man a combat outpostthat is established by a front-line battalion. If theoutpost is less than 800 yards from the battle posi-tion, the battalion commander may order front-linecompanies to outpost their respective fronts. Thecombat outpost for each battalion may vary in sizefrom a rifle platoon to a reinforced rifle company.The combat outpost provides observation over theterrain to the front, denies the enemy ground obser-vation of the battle position, and prevents enemy-observed fire against the battle position. To meetthese requirements. the combat outpost normally is800 to 2,000 yards from the MLR.

b. The mission of the combat outpost is to delay,disorganize, and deceive the enemy. It aids in secur-ing the battle position, gains timely information ofthe enemy, and inflicts maximum casualties on theenemy without engaging in close combat. The com-bat outpost coordinates closely with security echelonsto its front. When there are no friendly troops to thefront, the combat outpost patrols to keep contact withthe enemy. It tries to bring the enemy under long-range artillery and mortar fires. Liaison planeshelp the combat outpost locate the enemy and adjustfires. As the enemy approaches, outpost weaponsopen fire at long ranges. As he advances, the enemymeets contilnous and increasing resistance by fires.Before dark the combat outpost may be strengthenedto increase patrols during darkness and so keep closecontact with the enemy.

o. When established by a front-line battalion, thecombat outpost withdraws on orders of its battalion

399

commander. If out of communication with the bat-talion commander, the combat outpost commanderwithdraws his troops when necessary to prevent theircapture or destruction by the enemy. When the com-bat outpost is close to the battle position, withdrawalis made directly to a designated area within the battleposition. If the mission requires further delay, thewithdrawal may be made by using successive delay-ing positions. The outpost uses previously recon-noitered routes of withdrawal that give maximumcover and concealment, and permit fire by flat-trajec-tory weapons from within the battle position.Routes are selected to deceive the enemly as to the truelocation of the battle position. Several plans forwithdrawal are prepared in case of contingencies.Normally, the least engaged units are withdrawnfirst. The first units withdrawn may, by establish-ing a delaying position, assist other units in breakingcontact. Less engaged units may be used to increasethe fire in front of the most engaged unit preparatoryto its breaking contact. Units within the battleposition and adjacent battalions are notified im-mediately of the start of the withdrawal. Front-line units are notified when all elements of thecombat outpost have cleared the MLR.

395. LOCAL SECURITY

All units establish local security for their ownclose-in protection. It consists of sentinels, observa-tion posts, and listening posts within the unit defenseareas and( covering the immediate approaches tothese areas.

400

396. FLANK SECURITY

Information of the situation in adjacent sectors isobtained through liaison personnel and observerswho keep the flanks under constant observation.Lateral wire communication is established betweenbattalions. Exposed flanks may be secured bypatrols and by detached posts that block the prin-cipal approaches. Demolitions and obstacles areused.

397. COUNTERATTACK, GENERAL

a. The purpose of the counterattack is to reestab-lish the MLR, by destroying or driving out all enemyforces that have penetrated it. A counterattack nor-mally is made by a combination of foot elements,tanks, and supporting fires. Conditions favorablefor the combined action of the infantry-tank teamfrequently are present in the counterattack. Theteam's mobility, armor-protected fire power, andshock action is particularly effective in a counterat-tack. The counterattack usually is made against theflank of the enemy penetration. When hostile armordoninates a penetration or is capable of exploitingthe penctration, the commander must use all meansavailable to overcome that armor if the counterattackis to succeed. The battalion commander notifies thecombat command commander immediately when hedecides to commit the reserve company.

b. Except on combat command order, tile battalionreserve does not counterattack against an objectiveoutside the battalion defense area. The route to theline of departure for the counterattack may crossinto an adjacent battalion area, however, if such a

401

maneuver has been coordinated with the commanderof that area. The counterattacking force shouldavoid passing through occupied defense areas.When the enemy is ejected from the battalion de-fense area, he is not pursued beyond the AfLR. butis engaged thereafter by fire alone. The counter-attack is supported by all available weapons.

c. The number of attached tanks that may supportthe counterattack depends upon conditions imposedby the terrain and the enemy. Some of the attachedtanks may be held in firing positions to protect otherportions of the battalion area; some may be em-ployed to fire into the area of penetration. The re-serve company commander and the attached tankunit commander coordinate in detail on all phasesof the counterattack plans.

d. When time permits, counterIattack plans. arerehearsed with troops and tanks. The commandersof weapons which support the counterattack arepresent at these rehearsals.

398. COUNTERATTACK PLANS

a. The battalion order lists the areas of likelypenetration for which counterattacks are to beplanned. It states the priority in which the plansare to be prepared. The reserve commander pre-pares these plans and submits them to the battalioncommander for approval.

b. For each counterattack, the reserve companycommander's plans include-

(1) Line of departure and routes to it.(2) Formation,

402

(3) Direction of counterattack.(4) Objective.(5) Fire support.(6) Employment of attached and supporting

units.(7) Actions after reaching objective.(8) Communication.(9) Rehearsals or briefing of unit commanders.(10) Coordination with commanders through

whose areas the counterattack passes.

399. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE, GENERAL

a. The defense of a battalion area combines se-crecy, surprise, deception, aggression, mobility, andflexibility of fires. As the attacker comes underthe observation of patrols, air observers, or combatoutposts, he is subjected to long-range artillery andmnortar fires, and to fires from combat outposts. Theintensity of these fires increases as he advances andcomes within range of other weapons.

7,. Before having to engage in close. combat, how-ever, the combat outpost is withdrawn to preparedlocations within the battle positions. Prearrangedartillery and mortar fires support the withdrawal ofthe combat outpost. When the combat outpost haswithdrawn, fires against targets of opportunityusually are opened on the initiative of weapon com-manders or observers.

c. Liaison personnel from supporting weaponsunits usually stay with the battalion commander atthe battalion observation post. Through them, thebattalion commander concentrates fires on desired

403

target areas. The attacker is held under an accurateand heavy volume of fire as he approaches the battleposition. Except for tanks, weapons in the front-line platoon defense area do not open fire until theattacker is within effective range of small-arm fire.This restriction avoids premature disclosure of thedefense area and increases the fire effect.

d. As the enemy draws closer to the battle positionand delivers heavy fires in preparation for his assault,front-line troops being subjected to these fires takecover in their fox holes or emplacemllents.

e. Most of the small arms along the MLR are notfired until the hostile attack is definitely committedand the mass of enemy supporting fires is lifted toareas behind the ML.LR Where the foreground ofthe position is divided into cross compartments, withintervening aieas of dead space giving defilade tothe attacker, small-arms fires from the MILR arewithheld until the hostile attack has arrived at thenearest ridgre. When the attacker reaches an areafrom which he can launch an assault, final protectivefires are laid.down in front of the MLR. If theattacker succeeds in reaching the battle position,resistance is conltillued by increased fires and by closecombat.

/. The success of sustained defense depends uponeach unit holding its assigned area. Each unit en-trusted with the defense of a tactical locality defendsit at all cost, unless otherwise ordered by higherauthority. Local commanders hold their positionsand close gaps by fires or by use of their supports orreserves. Troops are made to realize that hostilegroups will work to their rear; that they must there-

404

fore be prepared to fight in any direction; and thatby successfully holding their positions they form thebasis for successful counterattacks by units to theirrear.

g. If the enemy penetrates the battalion defensearea, the battalion commander first seeks to destroyor eject him by fire alone. If this fails, then pre-arranged fires are used to neutralize and contain himwithin the penetration area. The battalion com-mander decides whether to counterattack, to block,or to do both. His decision to use the reserve iscarried out before the reserve is overrun or otherwiseimmobilized by the penetration. The known disposi-tion of friendly troops in both higher and lowerechelons, the terrain, the characteristics of theenemy, and the intensity of the enemy buildup affectthe decision to use the reserve.

400. COUNTERATTACK

a. If the enemy penetrates the battle position, im-mediate efforts are made to limit the penetration.All available weapons of units on the flanks of thepenetration, company supports, and, when necessary,the battalion reserve fire into the penetration. If thepenetration is limited by troops and fires from otherthan the reserve, the battalion commander may directthe reserve to counterattack and restore the battleposition. While the battalion reserve is moving toits line of departure, prearranged fires are deliveredinto the penetration. The reserve moves to the attackposition and line of departure along previously se-lected routes. The tanks do not pass through the

405

organized defense areas of the defending infantry,but through the gaps between them. The attackposition of the tanks and the line of departure of thereserve company are close together. Tanks and footelements form the assault wave of the counterattack.There is close coordination and commulllnication be-tween them. The tanks remain in the vicinity of therestored MLR mltil the infantry reoccupies the pene-trated area. Then the tallks withdraw to their assem-'bly area and move back to their primary positions.

b. The counterattack has priority of fires. Allweapons that can engage the enemy in the penetratedarea are used to assist the counterattack. The firesare divided into two parts-first, those placed toneutralize the enemy within the battle position; andsecond, those forming a band of fire across the neckof the penetrated area to prevent the enemy fromreinforcing the penetration. The fires within thepenetrated area are lifted on signal from the counter-attack commander. Thev are then shifted to rein-force the fires across the neck of the penetration.These fires continue until the MLR is reestablished.Detailed arrangements are made for lifting and shift-ing fires. Smoke may be used to deny enemy obser-vation during the counterattack.

401. ACTION AFTER COUNTERATTACK

After the counterattack has restored the MLR,the battalion commander sees that crew-servedweapons are replaced. He designates units to remainand defend the MLR and units to reconstitute thereserve. The new reserve is usually organized either

406

from the front-line units which were relieved by thecounterattack, or from the counterattacking force.If the counterattack fails to eject the penetratingforce, the counterattacking troops dig in and hold,and the combat command commander is informed.

402. PENETRATIONS IN ADJACENT AREAS

a. Penetrations in adjacent areas are opposed bycommitting all or part of the reserve to flank posi-tions in order to prevent the widening of the pene-tration and the enveloplment of the battalion flank.

b. A penetration astride a battalion boundary isopposed at first by fire from both battalions. Anycounterattack necessary to eject the enemy from thearea of penetration is coordinated by the combatcommand commander.

403. DEFENSE AGAINST INFILTRATIONS

Observation and listening posts keep the groundbetween defense areas under coustallt watcb. Areaswhich cannot be observed are searched by combatpatrols or blocked by small security detachments.

404. RELIEF, GENERAL

Units in a prolonged defense or units subjected torepeated and costly attacks are relieved to restoretheir fighting efficiency. The battalion may be in-volved in the following types of relief:

a. The combat command reserve battalion reliev-ing a front-line battalion.

b. The battalion being relieved by another unit ofdifferent size and organization.

407

c. The relief within the battalion of a front-linccompany by the company in battalion reserve.

405. RELIEF PRINCIPLES

The purpose of the relief is to interchange unitswithout weakening the existing defense. Changes inthe organizaton of the defense that may he desired bythe incoming unit commander are made only afterthe relief is completed. Throughout the planiingand execution of the relief, strict secrecy is main-tained. If the situation permits. the relief is doneduring darkness. Supportillg g fires, patrols, radioand wire traffic, vehicular traffic, and outposts con-tinue as normal. A relief is executed only upon or-ders of next higher commander, and periodic prog-ress reports are made. A relief during darknessbegins early enough so that the relieved unit can becovered and concealed in a rear assembly area by day-light. Permanllent withdrawal of a battalion startsearly enough for that unit to be in covered positionsor routes before daylight.

406. PLANNING A RELIEF

Because units involved in a relief are highly vul-nerable, the relief is done rapidly with minimum con-fusion. Detailed and complete plans are given tohigher and lower commanders. The principal stepsin plaunning the relief are-* a. Detailed Daylight lReononaiLanlce by the Bat-talion CUommander anTd His Staff. This reconnais-sance includes routes to and from the position to berelieved; selection of forward assembly areas; in-

408

formation of the enemy situation and his probableapproaches into the defensive sector; and inspectionof the existing defense plan by the incoming com-mander to include the coordinated fire plan, dispo-sition of troops. coordination with adjacent and sup-portinlg units, and counterattack plans.

b. Cuides. Guides are carefully selected men whoare familiar with the terrain. The unit to be re-lieved furnishes guides for the relieving unit fromits forward assembly area to its positions.

407. ORDERS AND REPORTS FOR A RELIEF

The combat command and battalion commandersissue relief orders prescribing the time for beginningand completing the relief, routes to be followed, loca-tions of battalions and company assembly areas,marIch formations, designation of guides, instruc-tions for exchange of supplies, and security measures.'IThe relief order is issued in time to permit incomingcommanders (including platoon leaders) to visittheir defensive positions and to permit reconnaissancewith outgoing commanders. A system of reports isestablished to keep commanders abreast of the prog-ress of the relief.

408. CONDUCT OF A RELIEF

a. Every effort is made to prevent the enemy fromdetecting the relief. If an attack occurs before theincoming commander assumes responsibility for thedefense, lie assists the outgoing commander with allmeanls. His further conduct of the defense dependson the type of relief he makes.

931358 ° 51-27 409

b. When the relief order arrives from the combatcommand, the incoming battalion commander makeshis plans as previously discussed. If the combatcommand order does not specify a battalion assemblyarea, the battalion commander selects his own. Healso selects assembly areas for the rifle companies.At designated hours the battalion is led to the as-sembly area by guides selected from its own person-nel. On arrival at its assembly area, each rifle com-pany, with attached weapons personnel, is met by aguide from the front-line units. The companiesthen are led either directly to positions or to furthercompany assembly areas where platoons are guidedto final positions. The battalion commander goes tothe command post of the outgoing battalion. He as-sumes responsibility for the defense when the majorpart of his command is in position and he has es-tablished control, or when ordered to do so by thecombat command commander.

c. The outgoing battalion commander issues hisbattalion relief order after his plans are coordinatedwith the incoming commander. His guides checktheir routes. When relieved, each outgoing com-pany is guided to the battalion assembly area.

d. For a battalion either relieving or being re-lieved by a unit of different size or organization, theprincipal steps outlined above are followed where ap-plicable and changed only to meet special conditions.

e. In the relief of a front-line unit by anotherunit within the battalion, the battalion commanderplans the relief and issues the order. He-not thecompany commanders-designates guides and marchformations.

410

Section III. RESERVE BATTALION IN SUSTAINEDDEFENSE

409. GENERAL

The armored infantry battalion, or elements of thebattalion, may be used as a part of the combat com-mand reserve. The combat command reserve con-sists of both tank and armored infantry elements,with tank elements forming most of the strength ofreserve. The mission of the combat command re-serve is to block enemy penetrations of the battle po-sition, destroy any penetrations by counterattack, ora combination of both.

410. EMPLOYMENT

Key terrain is organized and plans made for theoccupation of positions to block penetrations fromthe front, flanks, or rear. The positions to be pre-pared and their priority of preparation are usuallydesignated by the combat command commander.The combat command commander announces areasof possible penetration for which counterattackplans will be prepared. The reserve commander pre-pares the plans, coordinates with supporting units,and submits the plans to the combat commander forapproval.

Section IV. MOBILE DEFENSE

411. GENERAL

a. AMobile defense is based on an outpost system,placed on dominating and critical terrain featuresthat cover likely avenues of approach, and a strong,

411

mobile reserve held back of it to be used as a counter-attacking force. The outpost strong points discoverthe enemy's approach and repulse his attack, or, ifforced to withdraw, seek to so canalize and engagehim as to provide for the most effective use of thereserve. The reserve is constituted in the greateststrength consistent with the size and composition ofthe defending force.

b. Positions occupied in the mobile defense willoften be a considerable distance from the area to bedefended. This gives the defending force ampleroom for maneuver and provides ground that can begiven up to the enemy if an advantage can be gainedfrom such an action.

c. Because of extended frontages to be covered,the need for a powerful, mobile counterattackingforce, and the principle of giving up ground ratherthan holding a line, a mobile defense requires aforce of great mobility and heavy fire-power. AIo-bile defense takes maxinumn advantage of the char-acteristics and capabilities of narmored units. Thereinforced armored infantry battalion rarely as-sumes the mobile defense independently. However,if it must, it organizes in the same malner as thecombat command or division of which it is a part.From a combat command or division viewpoint, apowerful, mobile reserve must be available in themobile defense to counterattack decisively. This re-quires a force consisting mainly of tanks supportedby armored infantry. Since the reserve is predom-inately tank, the outposts normally are predom-inately armored infantry supported by tanks. Thereinforced armored infantry battalion in the mobile

412

defense generally has the mission of establishing theoutpost system for the combat command while thereinforced tank battalion or battalions are in reserve.

d. The reserve is the most important element ofthe mobile defense. To accomplish its mission of de-feating the enemy attacking force, it must be rela-tively large and should consist of combined armsteams heavy in tanks. It must be employed ag-gressively, using its inherent mobility and fireplower, together with all available fire support, tooverwhelm the enemy attacking force at the timeand place the commander has selected. Wheneverpossible, the reserve is committed as a unit.

e. Mine fields and barriers are used in accordancewith time available, terrain, and orders from higherheadquartewas. However, no enmplacements or ob-stacles are made that will hinder the maneuver ofthe forces occupying the strong points or of thereserve.

412. FUNDAMENTALS OF MOBILE DEFENSE

a. Fwndlamentals. The mobile defense is based onthe following fuldamentals:

(1) Organization of terrain.(2) Coordination of fire support.(3) Counterattack by mobile reserves8(4) Defense in depth.(5) Securitvy.(6) Flexibility.

6. Organization, of Terrain. The terrain is or-ganized so that critical terrain features are held orcovered by fire to deny them to the enemy.

413

c. Coordination of Fire Support. The firepowerof the reinforced armored infantry battalion is co-ordinated by the battalion commander to take ad-vantage of all weapons.

d. Counterattack by Mobile Reserves. In the mo-bile defense the counterattack by the mobile reserveis the key to success. This reserve is normally com-initted in its entirety. It has the mission of destroy-ing the enemy, preferably in front of the outpostsystem. The counterattack requires maximum useof maneuver and fire power. The counterattack-ing force selects the point of contact with the enemyto do him the greatest damage. In mobile defense,the counterattack is not merely an effort to restorea line or eject the enemy from an area. It is an all-out effort to destroy the enemy forces against whichit is launched.

e. Defense in Depth. The mobile defense requiresthe combat command reserve to be the force to gainthe decision. Therefore, the defensive organizationmust be deep enough to give the reserve enough roomto maneuver.

f. Security. All elements of the battalion are re-sponsible for their own local security. The outpostsystem provides security for the battalion by usingobservation posts to constantly observe the front byday and listening posts to detect the approach of anenemy by night.

g. Flexibility. Themobile defense is flexible. Thedefense is planned in great detail, but the battalionand company commanders who carry it out are pre-pared to meet the varied conditions of a fluid battle.Plans are made to counter possible enemy actions

414

but they are modified to fit actual situations as theyarise. An armored infantry battalion prepares itselffor unusual situations through training that empha-sizes flexibility of procedures and initiative of com-manders. Even in abnormally wide battalion sectors,the defense remains elastic and planning is continu-ous to permit temporary withdrawals or shifting offorces to prevent their capture or destruction bylarger enemy forces, until such time as the positioncan be reinforced or a counterattack launched by thereserve.

413. REINFORCED ARMORED INFANTRY BATTALIONIN THE MOBILE DEFENSE

a. In the mobile defense, the reinforced armoredinfantry battalion may be used-

(1) To outpost part of the sector assigned to alarger force.

(2) As the reserve (counterattack force) for alarger force (normally a combat command).

b. The reinforced armored infantry battalion iscapable of using the mobile defense by itself whenoperating independently; but a need for this wouldseldom arise.

Section V. BATTALION PROVIDING THE OUTPOSTSYSTEM FOR A LARGER FORCE

414. RECONNAISSANCE OF THE BATTALION SECTOR

As soon as he is given his mission and assigned hissector, the commander of the reinforced armoredinfantry battalion immediately reconnoiters thesector as completely and thoroughly as time and the

415

situation permit (par. 355). He makes a map recon-naissance and, if possible, a ground and aerial recon-naissance. He determines the critical terrain fea-tures and the avenues of approach available to theeielny. He makes plans to place strong points, conm-posed of tanks and armored infantry, on these ter-rain features and avenues of approach.

415. TASK ORGANIZATION

a. After completing his reconnllaissance and formu-lating his plan of defense, the battalion commanderorganizes the battalion into reinforced companies.He designates the comllpany or companies to man theoutpost system and the battalion reserve, if any, toreinforce the strong points. In planninfg the compo-sition of each reinforced company in the outpostsystem, the battalion colnmn der considers-

(1) The width of the sector assigned to the rein-forced battalion. If the sector is extensiveand if the higher commander has held out asizable reserve, the battalion commandermay assign a sector to each of his reinforcedcomlpanies, keeping no reserve. If the sectoris not so extensive that it takes all his rein-forced companies to organize the outpostsystem, the battalion commander may holdout a small battalion reserve. He uses thisreserve to strengthen threatened strongpoints, but not as a counterattack force. InIthis situation, the next higher comlllanderwould still keep a sizable reserve as thecounterattack force. However, if the higher

416

commander purposefully assigns the rein-forced battalion a narrow sector that iseasier to defend than other unit sectors, hemay require the reinforced battalion com-mander to furnish his own counterattackforce. Then a sizable reserve would bekept by the reinforced battalion commiander.

(2) The routes of tank approach into the sector.(3) The nature of the terrain in the company

sector, to include vegetation, wooded areas,erosion ditches, gullies, ridges, hills, trails,swamps, marshes, streams, and any otherfeatures that increase or decrease the de-fensive qualities of the terrain.

(4) The amount of supporting fires that can beallotted to the company.

(5) The presence of key installations or trans-portation centers, like road nets, commandposts, and supply installations in the sectorto be assigned.

b. In forming his plan of defense the battalioncommander decides whether to dispose all of hiscompanies in strong points or to keep a reserve withwhich to reinforce the outpost system. By the timelyreinforcement of a strong point, an enemy attack maybe repulsed or a strong base of fire may be estab-lished for the counterattack by the combat commandor division reserve.

416. ORGANIZATION OF OUTPOST SYSTEM

a. Because of the normally wide frontage to bedefended, strong points are organized along key ter-

417

rain features like ridges, roads, streams, defiles,bridges, and towns. The size and strength of thestrong points depend on the importance of the ter-rain and the approaches that they dominate. Theymay vary from a tank section and a rifle squad to areinforced company. Strong points should be or-ganized to stop the enemy at the outpost positions.However, the selection and preparation of alternateand supplementary positions will permit the bat-talion commander to withdraw or shift outpost forcesto other positions to prevent their capture or destruc-tion, or to draw the enemy into areas favorable forcounterattack. Some areas within the outpost sys-tem may be covered only by observation. Strongpoints may or may not be mutually supporting byfire, depending on the frontage to be defended andthe type of terrain. However, complete coverage ofthe front is maintained by observation (listeningposts).

b. Some areas in the outpost system nmay havecomparatively few enemy avenues of approachllthese can be more lightly held than other areas.Should an enemy avenue of approach pass througha defile, the strong point covering it should bestrengthened with mine fields, road blocks, and otherartificial barriers. The obstacles will delay theenemy force, and may possibly force him to use adifferent avenue of approach where he will be morevulnerable to a counterattack by the reserve (fig. 73).

417. FIRE PLAN

As soon as the battalion commander has selectedthe general area of his outpost system, a fire-support

418

OUTPOST HELD BSY ARMOREDINFANTRY RlFE COMPANYWIITH TAN PLATOON AlTACHED

BAALION MOR.

re 73. Or zaton of the opos sy

~Figure 93. Organization of thte outpost ylet. 419

419

plan is prepared to include the fires of artillery,mortars, and all other supporting weapons. Firesupport of the mobile defense will include long-range fires usually controlled by the combat com-mand or armored division, close defensive fires forthe outpost system, and fires to support the counter-attack. The battalion commander in the mobile de-fense, working with the supporting artillerycommanders or liaison officers, will request the sup-porting fires he needs to accomplish his mission.These requests are coordinated into the fire planl.This plan covers prearranged fires on the avenues ofapproach most likely to be used by the enemy in anattack and on possible assembly areas and attack po-sitions. Each of the preplhlllLed concentrations isnumbered, lettered, or otherwise designated, so thatit calln be called for easily by any member of thecommand. These numbered or lettered concentra-tions also may be used as reference points in desig-nating locations, or for adjusting other fires duringthe defense.

418. SECURITY IN MOBILE DEFENSE

a. Security in the mobile defense is largely gainedby observing and otherwise detecting the enemy.The combat command or higher headquarters mayprovide additional security by establishing a cover-ing force in front of the outpost system. This cov-ering force may be provided by the reconnaissancebattalion.

b. Within the battalion, each of the strong pointsestablishes one or more observation posts during day-

420

light7 hours. These posts shoulll be well out in frontof the strong points, and should be on terrain fea-tures that give excellent observation. They mustbe able to warn the strong point of enemy activityand of a possible enemy attack. It may be necessaryalso to safeguard, with daylight patrols, areas notcovered by strong points or by observation. Contactis established with adjacent units, and close liaisonis maintained with them to keep the battalion fullyinformed of developments in adjacent areas. Atnight, listening posts replace observation posts. Thelistening posts will often occupy different positionsthan the observation posts. It is often necessary tohave patrols operating between strong points duringdarkness.

c. The battalion should gain and maintain contactwith enemy forces in the area, to insure early infor-mation of their movenlent toward the defended area.Army aircraft and the reconnaissance platoon mlaybe used for patroling, to maintain contact with ad-jacent units, or to establish observation and listeningposts.

419. CONDUCT OF MOBILE DEFENSE BY THE BAT-TALION

a. Tactical air force reconnaissance units and or-ganic liaison planes may give the first indication ofan enemy daylight attack. This information shouldreach the outpost system as soon as possible. Whenthe enemy comes within range he should be immediately brought nilder fire and kept under fire. 5Whenthe enemy attack is launched, the strong point orpoints under attack make every possible effort to

421

delay, disorganize, and defeat the attacker. If theenemy has attacked in such strength that it appearslikely he will penetrate the outpost system, the bat-talion commander notifies the higher commander,who will alert his reserve for a counterattack. Ifthe battalion commander has a reserve, he will com-mit that reserve to assist the strong points under at-tack. If the battalion has no reserve, or if the bat-talion reserve is not strong enough to stop the attack,elements of the battalion not in contact with theenemy may be moved to contain the enemy force untilit is counterattacked by the reserve of the highercommand. Deliberate shifting of strong points outof contact and withdrawal of strong points in con-tact to other prearranged positions channel theenemy's advance into areas favorable for counter-attack. If the reinforced armored infantry bat-talion commander is holding a comparatively nar-row sector and has been ordered by the higher com-mander to keep a strong reserve, he should not useup his reserve in piecemeal strengthening of thestrong points, but should keep it intact and commitit at the proper time as a counterattack force (pars.421 427).

b. Should the enemy force be so strong that tocontinue to fight would invite destruction, or shouldan enemy force penetrate the defenses of some othersector, it might be necessary for the battalion or partsof the battalion to give up ground and to withdrawto a previously reconnoitered and selected series ofterrain features to the rear. Here the defensive sys-tem can be reorganized. It must be emphasized thatgiving up ground is not done haphazardly by in-

422

dividual strong points or by companies, but as partof an over-all plan and only on authority of higherheadquarters.

420. LOCATION OF BATTALION RESERVE

If the battalion commander forms a reserve, theposition selected for it should provide-

a. Accesibility. It should have good routes forrapid movement to the anticipated sectors of em-ployment.

b. Conceamehnt. The position should not be un-der enemy ground observation, and should offer thebest possible concealment from air observation.

c. Dispersion. The position nmust permit enoughdispersion of vehicles to prevent any one bomb orheavy-caliber shell from damaging more than onevehicle.

d. Firm Standing. The position must offer stand-ing that permits free movement of all vehicles inthe reserve force.

Section VI. REINFORCED ARMORED INFANTRY BAT-TALION USING MOBILE DEFENSE WHEN OPERAT-ING INDEPENDENTLY

421. GENERAL

Occasionally a reinforced armored infantry battal-ion may operate as an independent force. For ex-ample, the reinforced battalion may be used alone toseize an objective, after which the battalion may haveto hold it until other forces can close up and con-solidate the gains that have been made. In such a

423

situation, the battalion will often use a mobiledefense around the objective.

422. ORGANIZATION OF MOBILE DEFENSE BY ANINDEPENDENT BATTALION

a. In organizing the armored infantry battalionfor mobile defense the battalion commander care-fully studies the terrain; on the basis of that study,he organizes his companies and assigns sectors tothem, and forms a strong reserve.

b. The companies assigned defensive sectors or-ganize dominating and critical terrain. They estab-lish their strong points far enough from the centerof the defensive area to leave enough room for thebattalion reserve to maneuver and for the strongpoints to make any necessary withdrawals to sup-plementary positions.

c. Companies assigned defensive sectors normallyhave extended frontages. To cover their sectors,they organize outpost systems. Normally, they donot hold out supports.

d. Of his available troops, the battalion comman-der maintains a strong reserve so located that it canmove quickly to any part of the defensive system.Detailed plans covering all possible enemy attacksare drawn up to cover the counterattack by the bat-talion reserve. These plans include the plan of sup-porting fire, the plan of maneuver, and thenecessary details of coordination. The reserve com-mander gives the plans to his subordinates as earlyas possible so they have time for study, preparations,and further dissemination. Complete plans permit

424

the launching of the counterattack with the leastdelay. The steps considered in the planning of eachcounterattack are the same as in the attack. Theplan of supporting fires for the counterattack is sim-ilar to the plan of fire in the attack. The counter-attack by the battalion reserve does not advancebeyond the effective ralige of the supporting artil-lery. However, if the concentration of enemy forcesis strong, the artillery plans to displace forward tosupport a counterattack that might progress beyondartillery range.

423. CONDUCT OF MOBILE DEFENSE BY AN INDE-PENDENT BATTALION

a. The conduct of the defense is similar to thatdescribed in paragraph 419. The strong points doall in their power to stop an enemy attack. If theoutpost system is penetrated or about to be pene-trated, the battalion reserve counterattacks. In thecounterattack, every effort is made to strike theenemy flanks or rear. Hostile tanks are separatedfrom their accompanying infantry by placing timefire on the advancing enemy formations. Hostilearmored infantry is forced to dismount from its per-sonnel carriers when the carriers come under tankgun fire. Once the hostile armored infantry dis-mounts, time fire is placed over them to separate themfrom the remaining enenly tanks. The counter-attacking force secures its own flanks and rear duringthe advance. Speed in conducting the counterattack,crushing the opposition, and withdl'awing to pri-mary or alternate reserve positions gives the enemylittle opportunity to concentrate against the counter-

931358°-51--28 425

attacking force (fig. 74). The counterattack is con-trolled in the same manner as any other attack. Ifthe counterattack is successful and the enemy threatis wiped out, the defensive positions are kept asoriginally established. If the counterattack is notsuccessful, it may be necessary for the battalion com-mander to order a limited withdrawal to previouslyprepared positions nearer the center of the defensivearea to regain freedom of fire and maneuver for boththe forces in the strong points and the reserve.

Figure 7?. Coulterattack in mobile defense.

426

b. If the enemy force is so strong that it continuesto attack successfully, the battalion may have tomake ait finall stand near the center of the defensivearea. Here the battalion defense can be tighter andstronger, because the frontages will have narrowedgreatly.

Section VII. REINFORCED ARMORED INFANTRY BAT-TALION AS COMBAT COMMAND RESERVE INMOBILE DEFENSE

424. GENERAL

The combat command reserve is kept as large aspossible, consistent with the frontage assigned andthe troops available. The ratio of tanks to armoredinfantry is as large as possible. This reserve is theweapon of decision available to the combat commandcommander. The conduct of a successful mobile de-fense depends on the success attained in the counter-attack by the reserve.

425. LOCATION

The factors affecting the location of the combatcommand reserve are the same as those affecting thebattalion reserve (par. 420).

426. COUNTERATTACK PLANS

When the battalion is acting as a-reserve for a com-bat command, plans for the counterattack should bemade by the combat commander and staff.

427

a. The reserve battalion commander prepares de-tailed, counterattack plans to counter all foreseeableenemy advances. These plans are approved by thecombat command commander. Approved plans aregiven to all elements of the combat command to speedthe execution of the counterattack. The commanderof the reserve battalion gives the counterattack plansto his subordinate commanders as early as possibleso they have time for study and preparing their ac-tions. Plans are carefully coordinated with the sup-porting artillery commander and the commander ofany units through whose area the counterattackingforce must move.

b. It is not normal for the combat command re-serve to counterattack beyond the range of effectiveartillery support. However, the counterattack goesthe distance necessary to attain desirable objectives,and the artillery displaces forward to give uninter-rupted fire support. The combat command com-manders may designate a restraining line beyondwhich no counterattacking force will advance with-out his approval.

427. CONDUCT OF THE COUNTERATTACK

Once launched, the counterattack is conductedas any other attack, in accordance with previouslyapproved plans. Troop-leading procedure is fol-lowed as soon as plans are received, thereby reducingthe time needed to launch the counterattack whenexecution is ordered. See paragraphs 207 229 fordetails on planning and conducting the attack.

428

CHAPTER 13

RETROGRADE OPERATIONS

Section I. GENERAL

428. DEFINITION AND PURPOSE

a. A retrograde operation is a tactical movementto the rear or away from the enemy and the actiontaken to cover that movement. It may be forced bythe enemy or may be made volultarily. Types ofretrograde operations are-

(1) WTithdraia7-the action by which a forcedisengages from the enemy.

(2) Retiremeozt-a retrograde movelmeint bywhich a force seeks to refuse decisive com-bat under the existing situation by iarchingaway from the enemy.

(3) Delaying action-a retrograde movementby which a force seeks to delay the advanceof a superior enemly.

b. A retrograde lmovelment is made to-(1) Disengage from battle.(2) Avoid battle in a disladva-ntageous situation.(3) Draw the enemy into a situation unfavor-

able to him.(4) Gain time without fighting a decisive en-

ga gemllent.(5) Conform to the movement of other troops.

429

(6) Permit the employment of part of the com-mand elsewhere.

c. For a retrograde order see, section IV, appendixVI.

Section II. DAYLIGHT WITHDRAWAL

429. GENERAL

a. The combat command may be required to breakcontact with the enemy and withdraw, protected bya general covering force detailed by the higher com-mander (besides its own covering force), or it maybe required to withdraw protected only by its ownelements.

b. A front-line armored infantry battalion with-draws from action in daylight by withdrawing eachechelon under the protection of the next unit to itsrear. Each front-line company withdraws its for-ward platoons under cover of its support platoon.The front-line platoons withdraw by thinning outtheir platoon positions. They protect themselveswith the fire of automatic weapons which are left tobe withdrawu with the last elements.

c. Front-line platoons assemble behind the battal-ion covering force, which is usually the battalionreserve in prepared positions. The support platoonsof front-line companies withdraw under the protec-tion of the battalion reserve. They withdraw sili-larly to the front-line platoons, and rejoin theircompanies. If a combat command covering force isestablished to the rear, the battalion reserve with-draws under its protection. If there is no combatcommand covering force, elements of the front-line

430

companies may be placed temporarily in positionbehind the battalion covering force to cover its with-drawal; otherwise, front-line companies move to abattalion assembly area as soon as assembled. Thesituation and the terrain govern the withdrawalsequence of the battalion covering force. The bat-talion thus shoulders its way to the rear until itbreaks contact and can re-form.

d. The combat command commander may assignzones of withdrawal and phase lines to control thewithdrawal of the forward battalions. When phaselines are designated, the battalion commander locateshis assembly area in the vicinity of the first phaseline. If phase lines are not used, he designates anassembly area in the first suitable area behind thecombat command covering force. Movement fromthis area to the rear is made as the combat commandcommander directs.

430. PLANS AND ORDERS OF A FRONT-LINE BAT-TALION

a. Reoonnaissance. A withdrawal by its verynature usually prevents extensive reconnaissance. Abattalion staff officer reconnoiters and posts guides todirect the withdrawing elements to the battalionassembly area or the first delaying position. Unitsreconnoiter routes as well as tilme permits.

b. Orders. The withdrawal orders of the battalioncommlander are brief, fragmentary, and oral. Theyare usually transmitted by staff officers to avoid as-sembling commanders whose units are engaged withthe enemy. The battalion order includes-

431

(1) Composition and location of the battalioncovering force.

(2) Attachments to front-line companies.(3) Time of withdrawal of each echelon.(4) Zones or routes of withdrawal for each

company.(5) Location of battalion assembly area (or

initial phase line).(6) Route of withdrawal for the battalion com-

mand post and its successive locations.e. Sequence of Withdrawal. In daylight the bat-

talion usually withdraws in this sequence: aid-sta-tion group, headquarters and' service company.front-line companies, and reserve company. Thefront-line rifle companies usually are withdrawnsimultaneously, but they may be echeloned in theirwithdrawal, beginning with the company leastengaged.

d. Battalion Supporting Weapons. Supportingweapons located in the areas of forward rifle com-panies are attached to those companies for the firstphase of the withdrawal. The 81-mm mortars coverthe withdrawal of the forward elements and maybe attached to the covering force.

e. Tanks. Tanks attached to the front-line bat-talions give maximum fire support to cover the with-drawal of front-line companies. Tanks locatedwithin front-line company areas are attached tothose companies until the companies have with-drawn behind the battalion covering force. Thesethen may be attached to the battalion covering forceor otherwise used to support the withdrawal of thebattalion. When the battalion covering force has

432

withdrawn behind the combat-command coveringforce, tanks attached to front-line battalions maycontinue to cover the withdrawal of the battallion.However, they can be regrouped to execute a separatemission or to be attached to the combat-comlllmandcovering force. Comllbat command or division coIn-mnalders may aid a daylight withdrawal by usingtanks offensively against enemy personnel. Suchreinforced tank battalion attacks relieve pressure onthe delaying force, thus helping it to break contact.

f. Vehicles. The plan of withdrawal includes themovementll of the carriers and other vehicles to therear. Whenever possible they are used to aid in themovement of troops to the rear. The withdrawalof vehicles is covered by using smoke to screen enemyobservation, or by using heavy concentrations ofartillery fire to immobilize the enemy and to helpcover the sound of the withdrawing vehicles.

g. Supporting Artillery. Supporting artillerywitllhdraws by echelon, the first units withdrawingafter the covering force has broken contact. Cen-tralized control is kept as long as comlllunicationremains. The withdrawing battalions request ar-tillery fire through the normal channels.

431. CONDUCT OF THE WITHDRAWAL

Once begun, the withdrawal of a front-line battal-ion proceeds with all practicable speed to prevent the

ellenly front taking advantage of the situation. Ar-tillery fires and battalion supporting weapons inter-dict hostile movement into gaps in the line. Theyalso cover the withdrawal of those elements still in

433

close contact: Smoke may be fired to assist 'thewithdrawal.

432. COMMUNICATION

The battalion command post, operated by a skel-eton crew, remains open in the old location until theforward rifle companies are behind the battalion cov-ering force. All other command post personnel, withcommunication equipment, move to the battalionassembly area with the first withdrawing echelon ofthe battalion. There they open the new commandpost.

433. BATTALION AS A COVERING FORCE

a. An armored infantry battalion acting as thecovering force for a combat command stops, delays,or diverts the advance of the enemy. This permitsthe elements of the combat command that are in con-tact to disengage, assemble, and move to the rear.The battalion's first position and the length of timeit remains there are prescribed by the combat com-mand commander. The battalion may make a. limi-ted objective counterattack, which takes advantageof the offensive power of the reinforced armored in-fantry battalion and is effective in delaying theenemy and disrupting his advance.

b. Tank units are attached to the armored infantrybattalion acting as a covering force. The size ofthe attached tank unit is determined by the presenceand strength of hostile armor, the terrain, weather,-and the tank strength available to the combat com-

434

mand commander. A platoon or compalny of ar-mored engineers may be attached to make demoli-tions and lay mines behind the covering force as itwithdiraws.

c. The battalion organizes and defends the cover-ing position as in delaying action.

d. The battalion commander coordinates the long-range fires with those of ally other covering force.W1hen its mission is accomplished, the covering forcewithdraws under cover of the fires of its own weaponsand supporting artillery. The covering force thenforms the rear guard for the withdrawing forces.When forced by aggressive hostile pursuit it occupiessuccessive delayed positions.

Section III. NIGHT WITHDRAWAL

434. GENERAL

a. A front-linie battalion withdraws at night bywithdrawiing all elements of the battalion simultane-ously, less troops left in place as a covering force.The success of the withdrawal depends on carefulcoordination and secrecy. Troops and weapons arewithdrawn and then assembled as quietly as possible.Troops of the covering force, by their fires andpatrolilg, simulate the normal activities of thebattalion.

b. Preparatory to a night withdrawal, special tac-tical measures may be taken to confuse and deceivethe enemy. These measures include limited objec-tive attacks, raids, and planned fires.

435

435. COVERING FORCE

a. The combat command commander may pre-scribe the strength and composition of the battalioncovering force. It usually consists of not more thanone-third of the rifle strength of the battalion, andsuch supporting weapons with skeleton crews as arerequired.

b. Normally the forward rifle companies leave onesquad ill place in the defense area of each rifle pla-toon (fig. 75). As soon as the platoons have beenwithdrawn, the squad left in place spreads out tocover the most likely enemy approaches and to giveclose protection to supporting weapons. The squadleft in the support platoon area of each front-linecompany patrols locally and ejects hostile patrolsentering the position. One rifle platoon usuallyremains in place in the battalion reserve area. Itpatrols, protects the covering force command post,and blocks the more likely avenues of hostile ap-proach into the battalion rear area.

e. Usually one-half or less of the 81-mm mortarsor the 60-mm nortars of front-line companies are leftin position to fire normal night missions.

d. Hand carried antitank weapons normally de-fend those avenues of approach that can be used byhostile armored vehicles at night. Under favorableconditions and when the enemy capabilities areknown, tank elements remain with the covering force.These tanks usually are kept in the rear portion ofthe area to add depth to the defense of critical tankapproaches.

e. The covering force commander, usually the bat-talion executive officer, takes over the battalion corn-436

- I -

I 'N

BATTALION ASSEMBLY AREA

Figure 75. A Jront-ill¢e battalionl in night zwithdrulcdl(schlemtic). Eltczlciits shoow by solid symbols constitutethe battaliot cover ing force.

437

mand post location. He has a skeleton operatingcrew, messengers, and the necessary wire and radiocommunication facilities. The battalion order des-ignates the medical personnel to remain with thecovering force. Each battalion leaves part of itsaid station group in place.

436. RECONNAISSANCE

If practicable, all units reconnoiter routes to theirassembly areas during daylight. The reconnaissanceplatoon may be used to make this reconnaissance andguide the units. If the battalion is to organize andoccupy a rear position after the withdrawal, thereconnaissance includes the rear position. Eachcompany posts guides. To preserve secrecy, recon-naissance groups are limited in number and size.

437. ORDERS

As soon as the decision to withdraw is known,warning orders are issued to company commanders.Commanders whose units are in contact with theenemy are not assembled to receive orders. Suchorders, as well as the details of the orders to be issuedlater, are given through messengers, staff officers, orby the battalion commander in person. Orders arenot sent by wire if there is any possibility of hostilewire tapping. Withdrawal orders are not sent byradio except in case of extreme emergency.

438. CONDUCT OF THE WITHDRAWAL

a. Platoons withdraw to the rear where they as-semble and move to their company assembly areas.

438

The arrival of platoons is timed and coordinated toprevent waiting. Upon assembly, each companymoves directly to the battalion assembly area or di-rectly to the initial point for continued movementto the rear.

b. The withdrawal of the tanks and carriers isscreened by increased artillery and mortar fire. Ve-hicle assembly areas are located as close to companypositions as tile tactical situation permits. The with-drawal is made dismounted to the vehicle assemblyarea where personnel mount. Further withdrawal ismade as a tactical march to the rear. A rear guardof tanks and armored infantry protect the withdraw-ing units.

439. SECURITY

The covering force provides the main security forthe battalion's withdrawal. The battalion com-nmander orders any additional close-in security forthe battalion as it moves to its rear position or as-sembly area. Elements using separate routes ofwithdrawal provide their own close-in security.After the battalion has reached its position or re-joined the combat command, the combat commandcomumander directs security measures.

440. COMMUNICATION

a. The battalion command post remains open inits old location until the battalion (less the coveringforce) leaves the assembly area. The battalion ordergives the time of displacement, route of movement,and new location of the command post. For pur-

439

poses of deception, the covering force maintains nor-'meal radio traffic and other activity. Upon its with-drawal it cuts wire circuit and removes some of thewire to prevent use by the enemy.

b. During the movement of the battalion from itsassembly area to the rear, the battalion commandpost is with the march column. During the with-drawal, radio communication is silenced in the newposition and normal traffic is maintained in the oldposition for purposes of deception.

441. WITHDRAWAL OF COVERING FORCE

The combat command order specifies the time androute of withdrawal and the assembly areas of thecovering force. If a rear position is to be occupied,the covering force is usually withdrawn in time tobe under protection of the outpost covering the rearposition by daylight. Elements of the battalion cov-ering force usually withdraw simultaneously. Thebattalion covering force commander protects themovement to the rear by detailing security groups.He is responsible for the protection of his assemblyarea.

Section IV. DELAYING ACTION

442. GENERAL

A delaying action gains time while avoiding de-cisive action. An advancing enemy may be delayedby offensive action, by defensive action in one posi-tion, by delaying action in successive positions, or bya combination of these methods. The assigned mis-sions, relative strengths, and the terrain dictate the

440

methods used. The dispositions and conduct of thedelaying force vary with the methods of delaying ac-tion contemplated. A delaying force consists ofsecurity elements, a series of supports, and a reserve.The characteristics of the reinforced armored in-fantry battalion especially qualify it for delayingactions.

443. DELAYING ACTION IN SUCCESSIVE POSITIONSAS PART OF A LARGER FORCE IN OPENTERRAIN

a. General. When operating as a part of a largerforce, the battalion is assigned a sector on the firstdelaying position and a zone or routes of withdrawal.When practicable, the line of resistance formed bythe supports is near a topographical crest to allowlong-range observation and fields of fire and provideimmediate defilade for withdrawal to the next de-laying position.

b. Frontages. Units may conduct delaying actionon wide frontages.

c. Security. A delaying force establishes andmaintains its own security. Security elements for-ward of the supports normally consist of outguards,sentinels, and patrols.

d. Supports. The battalion occupies the extendedfrontages by placing more platoons on the line ofoutposts and by leaving greater intervals betweenplatoons than in a sustained defense on similar ter-rain. If their flanks are secure, rifle companiesassigned to the line of outposts may occupy theirdefense areas with three platoons abreast. Intervalsbetween individuals and squads are not increased.

931348' 51-29 441

e. Reserve. Besides accomplishing the missionsof the reserve within a battle position, the reserve ofa delaying force forms the covering force in a day-light withdrawal. The mission of the delaying forcedetermines the strength of the reserve. If the bat-talion is to hold the position for a given period oftime, the reserve may be as large as a rifle companyreinforced. Then the reserve is held mobile to rein-force any threatened area. If the mission is to delaythe enemy advance but withdraw before acceptingclose combat, the reserve may be small.

f. Distribution of Weapons. Initially all weaponsare placed well forward; 81-mm mortars may be lo-cated in the first defiladed area behind the line ofresistance. If practicable, tanks are located neartopographical crests. Tanks may move laterally tothreatened areas. Weapons that are to be with-drawn with rifle uits are attached to those units. Toaid in the withdrawal, company vehicles are keptas close as practicable to their squads. Ammunitionis kept on vehicles; only that needed for immediatemissions is placed at the gun positions.

g. Conduct of Delaying Action.(1) A battalion conmmander uses obstacles and

long-range fires to force the enemy off roadsand slow down his advance, to stop theadvance of leading enemy elements, and toforce the enemy into time-consuming prepa-rations for attack. Mines and demolitionsare used extensively to block roads anddefiles. Supporting weapons (machineguns, mortars, and artillery) fire at maxi-

442

nmum effective range; riflemen and auto-matic riflemen open fire at long range.

(2) Tanks aid the infantry in delaying actionby direct fire from hull defilade. by quickdirect thrusts into the advancing enemy, orby surprise flank attacks across the enemy'sroutes of advance. Tank attacks are sup-ported by all available fires. They may beassigned a mission of attacking a hostileforce before it can endanger the withdraw-ing elements of the delaying force. Whennot on an offensive mission, tanks are placedin, or behind firing positions from whichthey can engage the enemy with long-rangefires. Orders designate tank objectives andcontain necessary details for coordinationand cooperation between the armored in-fantrv and tanks. The armored infantryweapons and the artillery neutralize hos-tile antitank weapons during the tankattacks (fig. 76).

h. Withdrawal.(1) The withdrawal of the delaying force is con-

ducted as discussed for daylight or nightwithdrawals. The withdrawal of its mainelements may begin on order of the com-mander of the delaying force or on pre-arranged schedule. The delaying forcecommander coordinates the withdrawal ofthe various elements of his force. If themission permits, the delaying force com-mander orders the withdrawal before theenemy can build up enough strength on a

443

INFANTRY BATTALIONLESS ONE COMPANY W ITHDRAWING TO NEXT DELAYINGPOSITION. -

\\ ENGINEERS PREPARINGINFANTRY COMPANY WITH PLATOON 'r/NEXT DELAYINGOF TANKS ATTACHED HOLDING xy POSITION.FIRST DELAYING POSITION

c/ el "5 . TANK SATTALION,FF(c..!IN COUNTER-

\// gi m ATTACK.

X,... /

ENEMY ATTACK DOWN ROAD /HALTED BY DEMOLITIONS

AND INFANTRY.

JD

\\ \/ ~/ A.. J ENEMY TANK ATTACKFORCES FORD, AFTER

·s ENGINEERS LIFT MINES.

Figure 76. Coniduct of deluainlg action,

444

position to launch a decisive attack. For-ward units withdraw along designated andpreviously reconnoitered routes to companyassembly areas. The withdrawal to thenext delaying position may be either bybattalion or by companies. Companiesmay be moved by separate routes if the roadnet is adequate.

(2) The covering force protects the first with-drawal of the main elements to the nextdelaying position. The covering force isthe rear guard for the main elements as longas the enemy maintains direct pressure, oruntil it withdraws through the security ele-ments for the next established delayingposition. Normally, the covering force or-ganizes intermediate positions coveringdefiles, road blocks, demolitions, or terrainpermitting delay by small units. Addi-tional units may be attached to the coveringforce for this purpose.

i. Action on Rear Delaying Positions. The bat-talion commlnder initiates early reconnaissance of

successive delaying positions and routes of with-drawal. The occupation of successive positions andthe action on these positions are similar to the oc-cnpatioll of and action on the first delaying position.

7. Supply anl Evacuation.(1) Ammunition, except that needed for im-

mediate use, is kept on vehicles of units inthe delaying force. Limited additionalstocks may be placed along withdrawal

445

routes or on future delaying positions, butexcess amounts are not placed, to avoid anyneed for destruction.

(2) Prompt evacuation of casualties is essential.They are evacuated as they occur. Aidstations are evacuated before withdrawal.Combat vehicles and soldiers may be as-signed to aid in evacuation.

k. C'omnmunication. T h e battalion commandpost's first location is like that of a front-line bat-talion in defense. The command post stays openuntil the forward units have begun their withdrawal.It then marches with the battalion or, if companiesare ordered to withdraw by separate routes, withone of the companies.

444. INDEPENDENT DELAYING ACTION IN SUCCES-SIVE POSITIONS IN OPEN TERRAIN

When a battalion executes an independent delay-ing action, its disposition and conduct conform gen-erally to the principles in paragraph 443. When theenemy has freedom of action, the battalion protectsits flanks from attack or encirclement by using activeflank security, organization in depth, keeping a mo-bile reserve, and detailed reconnaissance of the ter-rain. Attached reconnaissance elements, tanks, andair observation are used. Reinforced companies andsupporting weapons are distributed, a covering forceis constituted, and the battalion withdraws as in awithdrawal. If the enemy makes a coordinated at-tack in superior strengtlh, the battalion ordinarilywithdraws without accepting close combat. The

446

withdrawal to the next delaying position begins be-fore enemy small-arms fire becomes effective, usuallyabout 500 yards. When the mission and situationpermit, defense of the first position, or of any laterposition, is prolonged to take advantage of darknessin the withdrawal.

445. DELAYING ACTION IN SUCCESSIVE POSITIONSIN CLOSE TERRAIN

a. In close terrain, when operating as part of alarger force, the battalion usually is given the mis-sion of delaying on one or more avenues of hostileadvance. To assure coordination and periodic re-sumption of his control, the combat command com-mander prescribes successive rear positions to bereached at stated times. In other respects, the actionof the battalion is independent.

b. In close terrain, lack of observation makes co-ordination and control more difficult, but surpriseis easier. In densely wooden areas, the action occursmainly on or near trails. Delay is caused by surpriseiare from concealed riflemen and automatic weapons.These are placed to sweep trails and roads or to deliver flanking fire upon them. They are best locatedin areas where it is difficult for the enemy to leavethe roads or trails, and where he must make timeconsuming detours to outflank the defenders. Localattacks against the hostile flanks are also used whereconditions are favorable.

c. The mission of the delaying force is to retardthe advance of the enemy without accepting decisivecombat. However, time and space factors may make

447

it necessary for the delaying force to accept closecombat in order to accomplish their mlission.

446. ARTILLERY SUPPORT

The artillery is placed immediately behind the firstdelaying position to permit long-range fires. If adaylight withdrawal is expected, these weapons aredisposed in depth with some behind the next position.Each delaying position is located to provide groundobservation. Whenl close support by artillery undercombat command control is impracticable, one ormore batteries of artillery may be attached to thebattalion. Whether attached or in support, theheavy mortars and artillery help delay the enemy bylong-range fires, and provide close support duringthe withdrawal of all elements of the battalion.

447. DELAY IN ONE POSITION

The mission and terrain may require that theenemy be delayed from one position. It may benecessary to accept close combat from this one posi-tion. If so, it is organized more thoroughly thanthose in a series of delaying positions: it has greaterdepth and more reserves. A line of outposts isselected and the position organized. From it theaction is conducted to disorganize the enemy anddelay his advance. If the battalion withdraws withthe enemy in close contact, it follows the principlesfor withdrawal of a front-line battalion. The bat-talion delays from a single position only when suc-cessive positions cannot be used.

448

Section V. RETIREMENT

448. GENERAL

A retirement may follow a withdrawal from ac-tion. It begins when contact with the enemy is-completely broken. The movement then becomes atactical march to the rear. The mission and employ-ment of an armored infantry battalion are generallythe same as in other marches.

449

PART FOUR

OTHER OPERATIONS

CHAPTER 14

NIGHT OPERATIONS

449. GENERAL

a. For general principles governing night opera-tions see FM 100-5. For employment of tanks atnight see FM 17-32.

b. This chapter deals with the coordinated attackof a strongly defended position during reduced visi-bility. The techniques described may be used forother night operations with such modifications as are

indicated by the mission, type of resistance, timeavailable, and other variables. Other night opera-tions with some of the characteristics of a coordi-nated night attack are patrols, raids, infiltrations,and advances at night against discontinuous resis-tance (see exploitation).

450. PURPOSE OF NIGHT ATTACKS

A battalion may make a night attack for one ormore of the following purposes:

a. To avoid heavy losses that would result fromattacks in daylight.

b. To combine with day attacks to complete orexploit a success, gain important terrain for further

451

operations, and prevent the enemy fromn improvinghis defenses.

c. To deceive the enemy and capitalize on the sur-prise inherent in night combat.

451. CHARACTERISTICS

a. Night combat is generally characterized by adecrease in the effectiveness of aimned fire; by a cor-responding increase in the importance of close com-bat; by the fire of fixed weapons laid on definitetargets or areas by day; and by difficulty in move-mellt, in troop leading, and in maintaining control,direction, and contact.

b. Simplicity, secrecy, and surprise are particu-larly important. Night attacks against organizedresistance require detailed and careful planning, andprecision and coordination in execution. Secrecyand surprise are essential to conduct a night attackwith minimuml casualties. Simplicity of plan aids insurprise. If surprise is lost, the plan should providefor the fire, maneuver, and shock action necessary toseize the objective. The objective should be easilyidentifiable at night and small enough to be capturedin a single assault. Because of the difliculties ofreorganization at night, to capture illore than oneobjective by a unit usually is not feasible.

452. ILLUMINATION, GENERAL

Night attacks may be classified as illuminated andnon-illuminated. The terrain, the tactical situation,the experience of the troops, and the availability ofequipment determine whether illumination is used.

452

When illlumination other than indirect lighting bysearchlights is used during a night attack, the at-tacker may sacrifice much of the secrecy of move-ment ordinarily gained at night, and lihe may disclosehis intention of making the attack. However, askillful use of battlefield illumination devices over aperiod of time may assist in the cover plan for de-ceiving the enemy as to the exact location of the realattack. The cover plan may include the extensionof the illilminated area to a considerable distance onboth flanks, so as not to disclose the exact area ofthe attack.

453. NON-ILLUMINATED NIGHT ATTACK

A non-illuminated night attack is one made underconcealment of darkness. Such a night attack can-not go deeply into the hostile position because of thedifficulty of maintaining control and direction indarkness. The objective assigned should be a speci-fic area or terrain feature close to the hostile front,and of such width and depth that it can be capturedin a single assault by the force making the night at-tack. It should be well defined and easily recog-nizable at night. Daylight observation of theobjective and of the terrain leading to it is essential.Direction in the attack is maintained by followingexisting features like roads, fences, hedges, polelines; improvised directional aids like engineer tape,telephone wire; or electronic devices. Non-illu-mi niated night attacks, usually unsupported, aremade when considerations of secrecy are paramount.

453

454. ILLUMINATED NIGHT ATTACK

An illuminated night attack is one made with arti-ficial illumination. The battlefield may be illu-minuted by searchlights, by flares, or by a combina-tion of the two. When an illuminated night attackis made with a visibility approximating daylight,the principles of daylight operation apply and theattack may be made deeper into the enemy positionthan in a non-illluminated attack. In other situa-tions, it may be desirable to maintain maximunnsecrecy in the assault of the initial objective, by usinga non-illuminated attack. The continuatioll of theattack to following objectives may be made by usingillumination.

455. AREA ILLUMINATED BY SEARCHLIGHT

An area illumination by searchlight is of twotypes: direct light and indirect light.

a. When used for direct lighting, searchlights areplaced where the light beamus can shine directly onthe target area. The intensity obtained on the targetarea varies according to the range, the number ofsearchlights, the atmospheric conditions, and thepresence of smoke and dust. Under good conditionsthe visibility approximates daylight. This methodis normally used for target designation, adjustmentof fire, observation of an area, blinding effect on theenemy, and deception. Direct lighting by search-lights is not practicable in all situations or for pro-longed periods because the enemy reaction is imme-diate, requiring early displacement of the search-lights.

454

b. When used for indirect lighting, searchlightsare placed in defiladed[ positions, and the light is ob-tained either by reflection from the clouds or by dif-fusion of the beams. The factors governing the in-tensity of direct light also affect the intensity ofindirect light. Under good conditions, indirectlight intensity will be approximately that of a halfmoon. Indirect lighting is normally used to aidmovement to assembly areas and attack positions,nlovement forward for the line of departure,. observa-tion and control of the attack, and movement of re-serves and supplies. If the searchlights are placedin defiladed positions, this method of lighting can beused for relatively long periods of time. This formof illumination is often referred to as artificial moon-light.

456. AREA ILLUMINATED BY FLARES

When the area is illuminated by fiares, the flaresmay be fired by ground projectors, rifle grelladelaunchers, mortars, artillery and naval guns, or theymay be dropped from aircraft. The intensity oflight depends on the type, size, and number of flaresused. When parachute type flares are used, par-ticular attention must be given to wind velocity anddirection to prevent the flares drifting above or be-hind the attacker, thereby giving the defender a dis-tinct advantage. Parachute flares aire usually placedover or behind the hostile position to outline theposition to the assault troops. Many flares are nec-essary to provide continuous illumination.

455

457. SUPPORTED NIGHT ATTACK

A supported night attack is one that uses support-ing fires before, during, and after the attack. Sucha night attack, either non-illuminated or illuminated,may be made by the battalion against a well organ-ized position when the possibility of surprise is re-mote. Supporting weapons of battalion and the ar-tillery are generally used for preparation fires beforethe attack, supporting fires during the attack, andprotective fires during and after the attack. Pre-paratory and supporting fires are used as in any otherattack. The protective fires isolate the objective andprevent or limit hostile counterattack. All thesefires are normally coordinated with other plannedfires throughout the area. Secrecy as to the exactlocation, direction, and time of the attack ismaintained.

458. UNSUPPORTED NIGHT ATTACK

a. An unsupported night attack is one where theassault unit advances within assaulting distance ofthe objective without the aid of supporting fires.Such a night attack, either illuminated or non-illu-minated, may be used by the battalion when there isa probability of gaining complete surprise. Unsup-ported night attacks are ordinarily used againsthastily prepared positions, when there is a stronglikelihood that the outer defenses of the position canbe quietly bypassed or eliminated. In this type ofnight attack, preparation fires are not used at all.

b. Supporting and protective fires are plannedsimilar to a supported night attack, but these fires are

456

withheld until the attack is discovered by the enemy.In some situations, all supporting fires may be elinm-inated. Once the assault on the objective begins, theplanned protective fires are used as in a supportednight attack to isolate the objective and to preventor to limit hostile counterattack. Secrecy in move-ments forward of the line of departure is essential inthis attack. Unless the attack has already been dis-covered, small groups encountered are disposed of bysilent weapons.

459. RECONNAISSANCE AND OTHER PREPARATORYACTIONS

a. The preparations made by the battalion com-mander for a night attack against an organizedposition include:

(1) Determination of the tank and rifle strengthof the assault echbelon and the time of attack.

(2) Selection of the assembly area and arrangements for its occupation.

(3) Prompt issuance of warning orders statingthe nature of the operation, the amount andtype of reconnaissance to be made by staffofficers and commanders, the time for thesubmission of recommendations from thesecommanders. and the time and place toreport for orders.

(4) Determination of the limits of the objectiveand the most suitable approaches to it.

(5) The formatioll of the assault echelon; andthe location of the attack positions, the lineof departure, the probable line of deploy-ment, the company release point, the exact

931 358S'-51-30 457

lateral limits of each company's objective,and the limit of advance.

(6) Reconnaissance and marking of the routesbetween the assembly area and the attackposition.

(7) Coordination with friendly troops near the'attack position and line of departure. In-structions for creating gaps in the frontlines for passage of troops.

(8) Requests for illumination and supportingfires if the attack is to be illuminated andsupported.

(9) Reconnaissance and planning to insure theprompt completion of these details.

6. Daylight reconnaissance by all leaders is highlydesirable in any night operations, and is essential ina. night attack against a well-organized defensiveposition. It is supplemented by reconnaissance pa-trols during darkness, and by the study of maps andaerial photographs. Aerial photographs of the areashould be distributed to each company. All recon-naissance is made with due regard for secrecy. Dur-ing daylight, reconnaissance of terrain not held byfriendly troops is usually limited to observation fromthe air and from friendly front lines. Often the onlymeans of securing detailed information of the ter-rain in the zone of action, as well as of the locationand strength of hostile outguards and listening posts,is by night patrolling. The members of these patrolsmay later be used in frontal and flank security de-tachments. Detachments may be used to mark routesforward of the line of departure, to mark the prob-able line of deployment, and to provide guides for

458

lower units for their movement from the line of de-parture of the probable line of deployment. Maxi-mum effort is made to locate enemy mine fields andplans are made to breach these and other obstaclesbefore the attack. Supporting or attached engineers,or the pioneer and ammunition platoon may be usedfor this purpose. The battalion commander definesto company commanders the area each company is topatrol and the information required; he may alsoprescribe the number of patrols, their size, and otherdetails.

460. PLAN OF ATTACK

The plan for a night attack against an organizedenemy position goes into greater detail than one fora daylight attack. Besides the normal plans ofmaneuver and supporting fires, detailed measures areprescribed to insure coordination and control be-tween assault and supporting elements, and to main-tain security, secrecy, and communication. Provi-sions are made for every eventuality that can be fore-seen. For details normally contained in a battalionnight attack order, see section V, appendix VI.

a. The battalion is moved to an assembly area thatprovides secrecy and eases reconnaissance and otherpreparatory measures. Here plans are coordinatedand final orders issued; troops rest, eat, and arebriefed; and extra ammunition and special equip-ment are distributed.

b. Control during movement in darkness is aidedby column formations with minimum distances, andby connecting files. Roads, fences, stream lines, andsimiliar terrain features are designated as directional

459

guides and as boundaries. Artificial aids to keepingdirection are telephone wires, tapes, flares, tracersand other fires, and electronic devices. Magnetic azi-muths are designated. Each commander moves atthe head of his column, and an officer or noncommis-sioned officer moves at the rear.

c. Security is maintained by security detachmentsto the front and flank. Patrols gather informationuntil shortly before the time for the attack. Thensecurity detachments move to their previously se-lected and reconnoitered positions to protect theadvance of the assault companies. These detach-ments destroy enemy outposts and patrols. Addi-tional security forces precede the assault echelon atsuch distances as to be visible to the lead assault unitcommanders. If practicable, security detachmentsinclude men who speak the enemy language. Thesize, number, and disposition of security detachmentsdepend on the enemy, the terrain, and the visibility.

d. In a night attack, surprise is obtained chieflythrough secrecy. Measures to get secrecy include:

(1) Restricting the size and activities of partiesengaged in reconnaissance and otherpreparations.

(2) Periodically firing concentrations in otherareas.

(3) Illuminating other areas to mislead theenemy.

(4) Attacking at an unexpected hour from anunexpected direction.

(5) Keeping rifles loaded and locked during themovement, and allowing firing only onorder of designated leaders.

460

(6) Prohibiting smoking, use of lights, talking(except whispered passing of orders or in-structions), and the use of shiny or noisyequipment.

(7) Using silent weapons during the advanceand attack.

(8) Darkening faces and hands.(9) Using a slow rate of advance from the line

of departure, so that the entire unit canmove in silence and keep contact betweenmen.

(10) Using patrols to destroy enemy listeningposts and outguards just before the assaultforces reach their location.

e. lMeans of identification for all personlel duringdarkness are prescribed. These are included in thebattalion commander's instructions so that any manmoving to the objective before daylight can be iden-tified. Standard items of issue such as luminousbuttons, wands, and tape may be used. The meansprescribed must be readily available to all men, in-conspicuous but easily recognized within a few yards.A white cloth arm band around each upper arm issuitable. Words or noises. such as a challenge andpassword, given in a low tone without hissing, arevaluable. Distinctive markings for officers and non-commissioned officers may be prescribed and aredesirable.

i. The decision whether to use tanks in the assaultechelon at night is made with due consideration oftheir noise and restricted visibility. Their use inthe assault echelon is most frequent when attacks areexecuted under natural or artificial illumination. If

461

tanks do not accompany the assault rifle units, theirfires are used in the planned fire support and then thetanks join- the riflemen on the objective after it hasbeen secured-or just before daylight. Night at-tacks offer tanks one important advantage-the pro-tection of darkness against long-range antitankweapons. At the same time, however, night attackmakes tanks more vulnerable to enemy close-in anti-tank measures. Accompanying armored infantry isespecially alert at night to anticipate short-rangeantitank measures and to protect the tanks fromthem.

g. If illumination, is used during the night attack,the plan of attack conforms to the degree of visibil-ity. When an illuminated attack is made, the batta]-ion commander insures that the illumination is con-trolled. The illumination plan is coordinated withthe battalion plan of attack. When the illuminationis by mortar and artillery flares, liaison agents andforward observers of such units provide control. Ifflares are dropped by aircraft, control measures arearranged with the air unit making the flight. Whenthe illumination is by searchlight, the searchlightunits provided by the engineer searchlight battalionare placed under operational control of either thearmored division artillery or the combat command.

h. Command and communication facilities are co-ordinated during the planning phase.

(1) The battalion command post usually re-mains behind the line of departure until theobjective is taken. The battalion com-mander, designated staff officers, and mes-sengers may follow the base unit of the

462

assault echelon. A communication party,with wire, radio, and pyrotechnic signals,moves with the commander's echelon.

(2) Wire is usually laid between the assaultcompanies and the battalion command postby wire parties closely following the adl-vance. To preserve secrecy, wire communi-cation is preferable during the movementfrom the line of departure to the line ofdeployment. Alternate means, such asradio and pyrotechnic signals, are plannedand are used if necessary. Whether to usesuch alternate means before the assault, orupon the discovery of the attack, is the com-mander's decision. All commanders shouldbe familiar with the signals being used forthe attack. This includes signals callingfor and lifting supporting and protectivefires, and for reporting the seizure of theobjective. Electronic devices may be usedfor guiding troops to the objective or forassembling units that have lost control.

461. PLAN OF MANEUVER

a. Extent of Maneuver. The amount of maneuverpossible during the attack depends on the objectiveand the visibility. In non-illuminated night attacks,or in attacks with only limited illumination, the con-

trol difficulties of trying to change direction andthe possibility of mistaken identity, restrict maneu-ver. Such attacks are made in one direction and ina relatively close formation.

463

b. Movement After Crossing Line of Departure.The attack may or may not be frontal against theenemy defenses. If possible, the assault echelonmoves to a secured attack position that will aid inthe attack of enemy weakness. However, after cross-ing the line of departure, all movement in darknessis made directly toward the objective without anychanges in direction (fig. 77).

c. Objective and Strength of Assault Echelon. Al-though the battalion objective is assigned by com-bat command, the battalion commander determinesits exact width on the ground. The width in turndetermines the strength assigned to the assault eche-lon. When the objective requires that the assault bemade by more than one company, the battalion com-mander assigns specific portions of the objective toeach assault company.

d. Time of Attack.(1) When a general attack is to be continued at

daylight, a night attack may be made aftermidnight to deny the enemy time to organizean effective counterattack. The attackshould begin early enough to complete thecapture of the objective and to allow for re-organization before daylight. In deter-mining the time of attack, the possibility ofunforseen delays is considered.

(2) When the mission is to capture, organize, anddefend an objective, the battalion usually at-tacks as soon after dark as information ofhostile night dispositions is obtained andthe battalion is ready. An attack may belaunched soon after dark to strike the enemy

464

RW;:'·-'.·; 4..

i ~ ih t l

-tooHe isl.4

when be is attempting to organize or rein-force his position, or when enemy operations,either attack or withdrawal, are expected.

(3) No set rule for determining the time of at-tack can be followed. To obtain surprise, atime unpredictable to the enemy should bedesignated.

e. Formation.(1) Thle battalion commander prescribes the

formation of the assault companies. Underordinary conditions, the formation for themovement to the company release point isa column of companies. Assault companiesusually cross the line of departure abreastin columns of platoons. If visibility is suchthat control can be readily maintained, andthe objective is close to the line of departure,or if early contact with the enemy is ex-pected, it may be desirable to advance fromthe line of departure in a line of platooncolumns. Intervals between company col-umns are such that units may be furtherdeployed when necessary. The assaultechelon changes its formations at successiverelease points or when deployment is forcedby enemy action.

(2) The battalion commander maintains a re-serve, usually at least one company, to sup-port the position against hostile counter-attacks. The reserve rifle company may beused to replace either assault company inposition until the attack is launched.Thereafter, the reserve company is used

466

against the objective only if visibility andinformation of the assault echelon and theenemy permit. Where the distance from theline of departure to the objective is notgreat, or where visibility does not permiteffective maneuver, the reserve is usuallyheld behind the line of departure until afterthe objective has been captured. By day-light the reserve must be within reinforcingdistances of the troops on the captured ob-jective. Elements of the reserve may beused to mop up enemy groups left behindthe assault echelon.

f. Line of Departure. The line of departure mustbe under control of friendly troops, easily identifi-able at night, and approximately perpendicular tothe direction of advance. If no terrain feature canbe found that fulfills these requirements, the linemay be indicated by tape or other improvised means.Thle ideal situation is to make the line of departurethe forward edge of the attack position.

g. Attack Position. If practicable, an attack po-sition is selected that call contain the assault echelonin the exact formation to be used in crossing the lineof departure. It should be easily recognized ormarked unmistakably. Fr om this area control meas-ures and directions are verified and security detach-ments are moved into position. The selected areashould have a minimum of obstacles and should beon the axis of advance immediately behind the lileof departure. Defilade from flat trajectory fire isdesirable but not essential, as darkness provides con-cealment and the assault troops are there for a min-

467

imum of time. Open terrain is preferable to terraincovered with vegetation, unless there is a high de-gree of visibility. Positive control measures are usedduring the movement to the attack position in orderto minimize confusion, loss of direction, and loss ofsecrecy. Such measures may include the use ofguides, the use of clearly defined routes, and the useof marking devices. Ordinarily the movement fromthe assembly area to the attack position is made un-der battalion control. However, when the formationfor the attack or the choice of separate company at-tack positions requires it, control may be decentral-ized to company commanders.

h. Method and Rate of Advance.(1) The battalion commander times the rate of

advance of the assault echelon to give asimultaneous assault on the objective by theleading companies. Night attacks madeover difficult terrain may require the com-panies to cross the line of departure on astaggered time schedule to insure theirreaching the objective together. Carriersare not used forward of the line of depar-ture in a supported night attack and are notused forward of the assembly area whenstealth is required. When tanks are usedin the assault echelon, the armloed infantrymay ride tanks to the line of deployment.During the advance, leaders and com-manders are constantly alert to insure closecontrol over the movement. The battalioncommander may prescribe that halts bemade at phase lines-usually at well defined

468

terrain features-or on a time schedule.At halts, leaders verify direction and con-tact and alinement with the base unit. Thebattalion commander may prescribe thatthe advance be resumed only on his order.If this is done, the order is transmittedfrom the base unit by messengers or passedthrough from cohlmn to column.

(2) In aln unsupported. non-illuminated nightattack, the rate of advance is normally slowbecause of the need for stealth. The rateof advance depends on the visibility and theterrain. Control and maintenance of direc-tion is more difficult in this type of nightattack.

(3) In a supported night attack, either illumli-nated or non-illuminated, surprise is gainedby the time and direction of attack: stealthis normally subordinated to speed in theadvance. The assault on the final objectiveis made as quickly as possible.

i. Probable Line of Deployment. The probableline of deployment is a line on which the commanderdesires to complete deployment for the assault of theobjective. It is the assault position in a night attack.It must be a terrain feature definitely recognizableat night and within assaulting distance of the objec-tive. This distance varies according to the type ofposition being assaulted. the type and intensity of thesupporting fires pleceding the assault, the expectedhostile reaection, and the terrain. When no suitablenatural line of deployment is available, a line may bemarked by guides using improvised means, or equip-

469

ment such as luminous buttons or infrared equip-ment. The use of release points and a probable lineof deployment assist the assault echelon in coveringthe objective uniformly.

j. Limit of Advance. To retain control and toprevent the assault echelon from being endangeredby friendly protective fires, the battalion commanderestablishes a limit of advance both in depth andto the flanks of the objective beyond which troops donot advance. This limit should follow terrain fea-tures that are recognizable at night. Protective firesplanned just beyond this limit isolate the objective.

462. PLAN OF SUPPORTING FIRES

a. Supporting fires may be delivered on a timeschedule, on a prearranged signal, or on call. Allprearranged fires of direct fire weapons are coordi-nated with the fires of the mortars and artillery. Po-sitions for supporting weapons are reconnoitered andmarked and firing data prepared during daylight.Weapons that must be moved are emplaced undercover of darkness.

b. The fires of the mortar platoon of the assaultbattalion, of attached tanks, and of other supportingweapons must be availabe shortly after the capture ofthe objective. Direct-fire weapons that can be hand-carried may follow the assault echelon by bounds, butshould not be so close that thev become involved inthe assault. The decision to move them this waydepends on the visibility, the terrain, and the ex-pected enemy action. When the distance to the ob-jective is short or when conditions are unfavorablefor movement directly behind the assault echelon, the

470

supporting elements are left behind the line of depar-ture to be brought forward by guides after the ob-jective has been captured. In such cases, if thesupporting weapons are used to provide protectivefire for the assaulting force, they should normallybe placed in suitable positions to deliver protectivefires on the flanks.

c. The movement forward after the capture of theobjective is rapid and may be made mounted or dis-mounted. The control of such a movement is diffi-cult and must be planned in detail.

d. Battalion mortars and other indirect fireweapons are normally displaced when the advanceinto the enemy position is so deep that their fireswould become.ineffective. When elements of thebattalion making the night attack are to continue theattack at dawn, these indirect fire weapons may bedisplaced to positions to support the daylight attack.When such displacement is necessary, the weaponsare moved by echelon to avoid interruption in theirprearranged protective fires. In illuminated nightattacks with light approximating daylight, support-ing weapons are used as in daylight operations.

463. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK

a. Advancement to Line of Deployment.(1) General. Except in highly illuminated

attacks or when tanks are used in the as-sault, the advance beyond the line of depar-ture is made in compact columns until closeto the enemy, unless deployment is forced byenemy action. A silent, stealthy attack isessential to secrecy. When the assault units

471

reach the successive release points behindtheir assigned portion of the line of deploy-ment, they leave the column formation and

LIMIT OF ADVANCE

{ o%..' \ '

COVERING FORCES , POINTS

ASSEMBLYAREA

Figure 78. Battalion in a night attack (schematic).

472

fan out to form skirllisll lines on the line ofdeployment. They prepare to assault atthe prearranged time or on a given signal.

(2) Control. The commander of each columnImoves at its head. An officer or noncom-missioned officer moves at the rear of eachplatoon to assist in control. Column corm-manders constantly check on direction andcontact, and control their units to preventpremature assault.

(3) Security. Each colllun is preceded by se-curity elements at the limit of visibility.Lateral contact is kept by.connecting filesoperating within visual distance. If anenemy outguard is encountered, the leadingelements of the column assist the securityelements in disposing of this outguard byclosing in with silent weapons, while therest of the unit takes cover.

(4) Action on premature deployment. Actionof enemy patrols or outguards may force allor part of the assault echelon to deploy asskirmishers before the time planned. Ifpossible, elements forced to deploy re-formin column after the resistance has been re-duced. The renmaining elements of theassault echelon are halted during such pe-riods or continue movement to the nextplanned halt and await orders. Units thatlose contact with adjacent units regain con-tact while continuing to move forward to-ward their own objectives.

031358°--51--31 473

b. Assault. Deployment may be forced by enemyaction, or it may be done upon arrival at the lineof deployment. The deployment on the line of de-ployment is completed rapidly and silently; anyprolonged halt at this stage of the attack increasesthe chance of detection. Precautions are taken toprevent a premature assault caused by desultoryenemy firing. Upon deployment, the advance is con-tinued at a walk until hostile resistance is met, atwhich time the final assault begins. At this stage allassaulting troops press on as quickly as possible,regardless of enemy action. Flares may be fired toallow the assaulting troops to take aimed shots andto move at a more rapid rate. Noise and tracer firemay be used to demoralize the enemy. Every effortis made to maintain the skirmish line and prevent itfrom breaking up into isolated groups. Aggressiveleadership is essential.

c. Action After Capture of Objective. Consolida-tion and reorganization begins as soon as the objec-tive is captured. Leaders organize the men in theirimmediate vicinity into groups and dispose them toresist hostile counterattacks. Rifle company mortarsare moved promptly to cover likely avenues of enemyapproach. Artillery forward observers adjust de-fensive fires as soon as they arrive on the objective.Adjustment by sound may be necessary. Tanks, ifnot in the assault echelon, are moved forward byguides to previously designated positions. Securityelements are sent out far enough to prevent theenemy from forming for counterattack within as-saulting distance of the captured position. If theymust go beyond the established limit of advance,

474

their locations are carefully coordinated with theprotective fires of artillery and mortars. By day-light all elements should be in position, with thebattalion reserve in supporting distance of the ob-jective. At dawn, final adjustments are made in po-sitions of machine guns, tanks, and other weapons.

475

CHAPTER 15

SPECIAL OPERATIONS

Section 1. ATTACK IN WOODS

464. GENERAL

a,. For general principles governing combat inwoods, see FM 100-5.

b. Aln attacking force usually seeks to avoid iso-lated wooded areas that are included in the enemy's

defensive position. They are by-passed on either orboth flanks while neutralizing the edges with fire andsmoke. During dry weather, incendiary bombs orshells are effective and may be used if possession ofthe woods is not essential to future plans of the at-tacker. If avoiding the woods is impracticable andtheir possession is necessary, the attacker seeks tocapture them by enveloping action. When envelop-ing action is not expedient or whein the woods extendacross the entire zone of action, the woods are pene-trated. A frontal attack in woods is divided intothree steps-

(1) Attack and occupation of the near edge.(2) Advance through the woods.(3) Exit frmon the woods.

465. ATTACK OF THE NEAR EDGE OF WOODS

a. Aecurate information is secured about the den-sity of woods and about roads, trails, streams, nat-476

ural landmarks, and obstacles within the woods.Mllch of this information can be obtained from pho-tographs. In addition, intensive ground patrollingdetermines the location of hostile units defendingthe near edge of the woods. The attack of a de-fended' near edge of the woods is similar to the at-tack of any organized area. The near edge of thewoods, or a terrain feature in which the near edgeis included, is designated as the objective. Whenthe attack is made over ground entirely exposed tothe observation and fire of the enemy, it may be madeunder the concealment of smoke or darkness. Themethods of attack used are the same as in the at-tack of an organized position.

b. When a foothold has been established in thewoods, the assault echelon reorganizes by reducingdistances and intervals between smaller units andsupporting weapons so that contact can be maintainedduring the advance through the woods. Since theedge of the woods is a good target for hostile artilleryand aviation, the reorganization is rapid. The com-mander plans the reorganization and advancethrough the woods at the same time he plans the at-tack against the near edge.

466. ADVANCE THROUGH WOODS, GENERAL

The nature of the wooded area may require devia-tioIf from standard tactical procedures. General fac-tors to consider in attacks in woods are-

a. Concealment.b. Limited observation.c. Limited fields of fire for direct-fire weapons.

477

d. The presence of tree masks that limit the effec-tiveness of close support by indirect fire weaponsand tactical aviation.

e. Restricted operation of all vehicles.f. Difficulties in maintaining direction, control,

and contact, which require decentralization of con-trol.

467. PLANNING THE ATTACK IN WOODS

An attack in woods against determined resistanceis carefully planned and coordinated. Much of theactual fighting is done at close ranges. The attack isfurther influenced by the following factors:

a. Roads and Trails. Key points along roads andtrails are usually heavily defended by the enemy.The battalion plan of attack includes provisions toclear the enemy from these roads and trails to allowthe use of vehicles for supply and evacuation and ar-mored support. Continued advance without secur-ing roads and trails may result in overextension oflines of communication and supply.

b. Defensive Autovnatic Fires. Defensive auto-matic weapons fire along existing or prepared firelanes. Such weapons will not ordinarily have verylarge or effective fields of fire, and they can be readilyflanked by maneuver or by infiltration of smallgroups. Establishing final protective lines forthese weapons is exceptional.

c. Effects of High-explosive Fire. The area cov-ered by artillery and mortar fires is increased becauseof the effect of tree bursts. If time permnits, thedefending force builds overhead cover for positionsto minimize the effect of such fires. On the other

478

hand, an attacking force is normally denied suchcover. Areas under artillery or mortar fire thatmust be entered are crossed rapidly.

d. Antipersonnel Mines and Booby Traps. Adefender who has'had time to prepare the positionusually places antipersonnel mines and booby trapsthroughout the area. The problems of detectingand removing them vary according to the density ofthe woods and the underbrush. When tanks or car-riers cannot be used to breach such areas, baingaloretorpedoes, primacord, and grappling hooks may beused.

e. Snipers and Raiding Parties. Concealment andmovement are easy for enemy snipers and raidingparties in woods. Special precautions are necessaryto protect command posts and communication, sup-ply, and other administrative groups. The attack-ing force takes full advantage of its ability to concealmovements.

468. ORDER FOR ADVANCE THROUGH WOODS

The order for the advance through woods is usuallyissued as part of the order for the attack of the nearedge. It includes-

a. Patrolling. During reorganization after cap-ture of the near edge, aggressive patrolling main-tains contact with the enemy. Detailed provision ismade for patrols to'protect flanks and maintain con-tact with adjacent units.

b. Formation. The disposition of the battalionduring an attack through woods depends mainly onvisibility. In sparse woods, leading elements may befully deployed and in normal formations. In dense

479

woods, a more compact formation offers the greatestdegree of all-around security. One reinforced com-pany forward, one echeloned to the left rear, and oneto the right rear is a typical formation.

c. Employment of Mortars. The 81-mm mortarplatoon is kept in general support and is used when-ever openings in the woods permit observed fire. Thecounterfire squad can often adjust mortar fire bysound. Because of limitations on close supportby artillery, other supporting fires have addedimportance.

d. Employment of l'anks. The use of tanks de-pends on the density of the woods and the presenceof roads and trails. Wlhen tanks can accompanythe armored infantry during fighting in woods, theassault echelon is composed of tank-armnored infantryteams. Tanks are closely protected by armored in-fantry during the advance.

e. Employment of Carriers. The use of carriersalso depends on the density of the woods and thepresence of roads and trails. The advance throughlithe woods is made dismounted by the assault ele-ments. Carriers are used for fire support, flank pro-tection, and to move support and reserve elements.Carriers go forward by bounds behind the assaultechelon and are kept readily available to their units.They may be used to protect personnel from treebursts.

f. Frontages. The frontage assigned each assaultcompany depends mainly on the density of the woods.In sparse woods, frontage may approximate thatassigned in open terrain. In dense woods, frontage

480

must not be so wide as to take a large percentage ofstrength for connecting groups.

g. Maintaining Direction, Contact, and Control.To maintain direction, each assault rifle company isnormally assigned a magnetic azimuth. The rate ofunopposed advance depends on the visibility in thewoods and contact with adjacent units. This con-tact is maintained by connecting groups. When thewoods are dense and the frontage assigned to thebattalion is wide, flank contact may be maintained bythe assault companies themselves or by elements ofthe reserve. As control of the attack is decentralizedto a large degree, periodic halts to insure or to re-store control are made at specified times or on se-lected lines as directed by the battalion commander.

h. Instructions to the Reserve. In dense woods,the reserve is kept close to the assault echelon. Thedifficulty of maintaining contact between units of thebattalion or with adjacent units may require thatpart of the reserve be used for this purpose.

i. Security. Security necessary for the advancedepends on the density of the woods and the enemyaction. The more dense the woods, the more op-portunity the enemy has of making surprise attacksby patrols or by elements that have been by-passed bythe assault echelon. All-around protection is essen-tial. in some situations enough protection may beprovided by the formation; in others, it may benecessary to increase security with patrols or de-tachments from the reserve. During combat inwoods it is often necessary to provide supplementaryprotection for command and administrative groups.

481

j. Supply and Evacuation. If roads and trailsare not cleared of the enemy and the woods are denseenough to prevent the use of vehicles, supply andevacuation is done by hand-carry. In such situa-tions, every effort is made to secure the roads andtrails or to build new ones.

le. Communication. Woods reduce the range ofradio, but radio is used to the greatest extent pos-sible. Elevated antennae increase the range ofradios. Often wire is the most dependable meansof communication in woods. However, when thewoods are dense and enemy infiltration is possible,wire lines are policed often and thoroughly. Mes-senger communication is used. The difficulties ofcommunication require commanders to stay closeto the assault echelon. Command posts, therefore,are also kept close to the assault echelon.

469. REORGANIZATION IN WOODS

During reorganization in the near edge of thewoods, the battalion commander confirms or modi-fies the previous instructions for the advance throughthe woods. He starts the advance as soon as reor-ganization is complete. If the advance is unopposed,short halts are made to check direction and contact.Such halts are preferably made at well defined linesor areas like trails, streams, or near the edge ofclearings. If satisfactory areas or lines are notfound in the woods, halts may be made on a timeschedule or after advancing a slecified distance.

482

470. SUPPORT IN WOODS

When resistance is encountered, the assault echelonuses frontal and flanking action to overcome it.Tanks are used when possible. Artillery ordinarilyfires against relatively rearward targets or areas.Most of the indirect fire support comes from 81-mmmortars. When the woods are dense, elements of thereserve may be used to mop up areas that have beenpassed through by the assault echelon.

471. EXIT FROM WOODS

a. The continuation of the attack from the faredge of the woods is conducted like any other attack.Plans for the reorganization of the assault echelonare usually made before the far edge is reached.When the battalion has been meeting strong resist-ance and expects it to continue after the woods arecompletely cleared, the assault echelon is reorgan-ized short of the far edge of the woods. Units andsupporting weapons are redisposed, and frontages,zones of action, and the formation of the battalionare rearranged as necessary. New objectives areassigned; if possible, they are ones whose capturewill mask the far edge of the woods from hostileground observation and direct fire. The method ofattack is selected to fit the situation. When prac-ticable, supporting weapons are given general sup-port missions. Artillery and mortar fires and smokeare planned to assist the exit.

b. When the battalion has been meeting little re-sistance, speed of movement is often more importantthan complete reorganization. In such cases, the

483

battalion reconnaissance platoon is sent forward tomaintain contact. Carriers are brought up, troopsare mounted, and the advance is continued as inexploitation.

Section II. ATTACK OF A RIVER LINE

472. GENERAL

a. For principles governing operations at riverlines, see FAI 100-5.

b. Unfordable rivers have a decisive influence onmilitary operations because of the restrictions theyimpose on movement. Even when possible crossingsexist, rivers are obstacles to an attack; they arenatural defense lines, they screen against hostileground reconnaissance. and they protect againsthostile armored attacks. Any river crossing oper-ation requires thorough reconnaissance, surprise, andspecial preparations along tactical and technicallines. The three types of river crossings are deliber-ate or assault, crossings of opportunity, and un-opposed.

c. When the enemy does not actively hold theriver line or when friendly forces have already seizedthe far bank, a leading battalion is not actively em-ployed until after reaching the far bank of theriver. Usually, this is also true for a reserve bat-talion in an opposed crossing. After crossing, theoperations of the battalion are like those for anyattack except that, initially, ammunition may haveto be brought across the river by boats or rafts andthen hand-carried to weapons positions. When the.far bank of the river is held by the enemy, a battalion

484

usually attacks the river line in conjunction withother forces. The mission of the battalion in bothcases is to make a crossing and seize a bridgeheadin-order to protect the later crossing of other troops.

d. The higher headquarters attack order usuallyincludes the following information and instructions:

(1) Information of the enemy and of the ter-rain within the area of crossing operations.

(2) Mission, hour of crossing, zone of action,and objectives of the battalion, to includeany diversionary efforts to be made to de-ceive the enemy.

(3) Information of the mission of other unitsto include diversionary efforts to deceivethe enemy.

(4) Plan for the tactical air support and theuse of attached tank units, artillery, andother supporting troops.

(5) Engineer material and personnel that willassist in the crossing, including where andwhen they will be available.

473. RECONNAISSANCE

Preparations for the crossing include the searchfor information of the enemy and of the terrainwhere the battalion is to operate. Whenever prac-ticable, ample time is allowed for daylight recon-naissance by all leaders, including those of theengineer units that provide equipment for the cross-ing. Small reconnaissance patrols may be sentunder concealment of darkness across the river.Personal reconnaissance by the battalion com-mander, supplemented by directed reconnaissance

485

and other sources of information, should develop thefollowing points:

a. Composition and distribution of enemy forces,including the location of weapons, mine fields, andother defensive works, and undefended or weaklydefended crossing sites.

b. Well defined terrain features suitable for com-pany objectives.

c. Locations for reserves and other units uponreaching the far side.

d. Road and trail net on the enemy side.e. Routes of advance through the enemy position.f. Terrain features on the near side of the river

for observation posts and for position areas for tanksand supporting weapons and carriers used for firesupport.

g. Location of crossing sites in the battalion zoneof action, largely determined by-

(1) Width, depth, and current of the river.(2) Existence of sand bars, reefs, islands, dams,

or other obstructions.(3) Steepness and height above water of both

river banks.(4) Approaches to both river banks.(5) Existence of fords, ferries, bridges, and old

bridge sites.(6) Exact locations of concealed attack posi-

tions on the near bank of the river. Theseshould be readily accessible to trucks andidentifiable at night.

(7) Concealed routes that lead directly fromthe attack positions to the crossing sites oAthe near bank.

486

(8) Assembly areas prescribed by the higherheadquarters.

(9) Routes from the assembly area to theattack position. For daylight movement,concealed routes are selected. For move-ment during darkness, well defined andeasily traveled routes are selected.

474. PLANS

Based on the combat command commander's orderand on the additional information secured throughreconnaissance, the battalion commander preparesa detailed plan. This includes-

a. Coordination with adjacent units.b. Determination of width of crossing front, when

not prescribed by the higher commander.c. Formation for the crossing; in particular, the

units to cross in the leading waves and the designa-tion and location of the reserve.

d. Zones or frontages and initial objectives ofassault companies and determination of unit crossingsites.

e. Allotment of craft to units and assignment ofother means of crossing.

/. The place and time of contact between lowerunit commanders and the engineer personnel incharge of the craft and other material means ofcrossing.

g. Missions, firing position areas, targets, sectorsof fire, and principal directions of fire for the mortarplatoon. Conditions under which fire will beopened.

487

h. Time and method of crossing of the mortarplatoon and its tentative employment after crossing.

i. Missions assigned to attached tanks, includingtheir use in the initial plan of direct fire, if possible.

j. Time of crossing of tank elements and theirtentative employment after crossing. This includescrossing means (on bridges, either existing or tobe built, by raft, or by fording after being water-proofed). Preparations are made by the supportingengineers according to combat command and divisionplanls.

7,. Coordination of artillery files into the plan ofsupporting fires, including provisions for early cross-ing of artillery liaison and reconuaissance details.

1. Designation of attack positions, with routes andplan for movement of units to them, including pro-visions for guides and time schedule.

,n. Establishment of local security on the far bankto protect the construction of foot bridges.

n. Formation for the advance to the initialobjective.

o. Antiaircraft and antitank security during andafter the crossing.

)p. Use of the vehicles, including timely requestsfor waterproofing if fording is feasible.

q. Supply phln, including special measures to betaken.

r. Evacuation plan, including establishment ofaid stations, early crossing of part of the medicaldetachment, and method of evacuating casualtiesfrom the far bank of the river.

s. Communication within the battalion and tocombat c6lnmand headquarters.

488

t. Axis of signal communication, location of com-mand post on the near bank, and tentative locationson the far bank.

u. The initial location of the battalion commander,his time of crossing, and his tentative location on thefar bank of the river.

475. ORDERS

To give all leaders the maximulm time for recon-naissance and planning, the battalion commanderissues warning orders as soon as practicable. Thefinal order for the crossing may be fragmentary,but preferably it is complete, specific, and detailed.It should include movement from the assembly areato the near bank, the crossing of the river, and thecapture of the initial objective. At the initial objec-tive the battalion commander ordinarily issues addi-tional orders for the continuation of the attack.

476. WIDTH OF CROSSING FRONT

The crossing front of the battalion is usually pre-scribed by boundaries, by frontages, or by designat-ing limiting points. T'he frontage on the far bankassigned units of the battalion approximates thatassigned in an attack not involving a river crossing.Besides the factors determining the width of zonesfor any other attack, the following must be con-sidered: both banks of the river, the width anddepth of the river, the speed and direction of flowof the current, and tihe amount and type of crossingmeans available. These factors mnay require thatgaps exist between units during the actual crossinlg.

931358°-51--32 489

When such gaps exist, tactical unity of the paitici-pating elements is preserved. F'or dispersion duringthe crossing and ease of the deployment after landing,lateral intervals between craft approximate the in-tervals between corresponding units on land.

477. FORMATION FOR CROSSING

The determination of the rifle strength to takepart in the assault crossing depends on the samefactors that affect the frontage and on the width ofthe zone of action. The battalion commanderusually keeps at least one rifle comnpany, or the bulkof it. in reserve. However, in this attack as in allothers, the battalion comllllndere l commits a~s muchlof his strength to the assault echllcon as is neededto accomplish his mission. Rifle companies in theassault echelon usually cross the river with threerifle platoons abreast (fig. 79).

478. ASSIGNMENT OF CROSSING MEANS

Enough assault or storm boats are normally pro-vided to carry the leading waves of the battalion.These boats are available for continued fcrryingoperations for personnel and suplplies. Other typesof crossing craft may be made available. One ormore foot bridges are usually provided for eachassault battalion. Tactical unity is maintained asfar ias possible in assigning personnel to boats, rafts,and other crossing means. One satisfactory methodof distributing the elements of an assault battalionis-

490

WILL BE ERRIEO ACROSS5

pROVIDE DIRECT FIRE SUPPORT

8 m '

Figutre 79. RIeinfor-ce¢d alraoe' irid ifintry battalionl in attackof a river line.

491

a. In Assault or Storm Boats. The first three as-sault waves use this means of crossing.

(1) Leading wave. Assault platoons of as-sault rifle companies, including attachments(if any) and observers from 60-mm and 81-mm mortar platoons. (If waterproofedarmored vehicles can ford the river and ifvisibility permits, they may move with orclosely follow this wave.)

(2) Second wave. Company command groups,weapons platoons (less detachments, ifany), and support platoons (if held out)of the assault rifle companies; artillery for-ward observers; and reconnaissance partiesfrom the battalion mortar platoon. (Water-proofed vehicles may move with or closelyfollow this wave, if fording is feasible andvisibility permits.)

(3) Third <wave. Mortar platoon (less detach-ments and transport, unless fording is pos-sible), the forward echelon of the battalioncommand post, artillery liaison personnel, adesignated part of battalion headquartersplatoon, and the forward echelon of the battalion aid station and battalion surgeon.

b. On Foot Bridge or Ferries. The battalion re-serve, battalion headquarters and service company(less detachments), and rear echelon of the battalionaid station cross this way.

c. By Raft, Bridge, or Fording. All vehicles thatare necessary for tactical operation cross by which-ever of these means is available. This crossing of

492

vehicles is done as fast as practicable, and much ofit can be done concurrently with the earlier waves.When fording is feasible, armored vehicles especiallyare waterproofed and cross as early in the assault aspracticable.

d. By Improviwed Meoas. The battalion is pre-pared to seize and exploit crossings before the enemycan establish a defense. This type of action oftenrequires crossing by wading, rafts, logs, barges,dams, destroyed bridges, or any available expedient.

479. OBJECTIVES

a. The battalion ivitial objective is a terrainfeature which, when captured, will effectively limithostile direct fire on the crossing sites. Assault riflecompanies are assigned parts of this objective as theirobjectives.

b. The second objective of the river crossing is aterrain feature which, whenl captured, will effectivelylimit hostile ground-observed indirect fire on theIbridge sites in the liver crossing area. This objectiveshould be within supporting distance of light artil-lery located on the attacker's side of the river.

c. The final objective of the river crossing is aterrain feature which, w-hen captured. will provideadequate maneuver space for further operations ofthe entire attacking force on the enemy side of theriver.

480. ASSEMBLY AREA AND ATTACK POSITION

a. Assembly Area. The characteristics of a bat-talion assembly area for a river crossing are like

493

those for any assembly area. It shoiud be withineasy night-marching distance of the river line. Theactivities in the assembly area are the usual ones;in addition, plans and orders for the crossing byall units are completed while in this area. Thetroops are organized into boat teams, or are specifi-cally assigned other means of crossing.

b. Attack Position. The desirable characteristicsof the battalion attack positions for a river crossingare-

(1) Ease of identification at night or dluringreduced visibility.

(2) Accessibility to vehicles or carrying partiesfor moving the equipment across the river.

(3) Nearness to easily identified, concealed, andcovered foot routes to the river.

(4) Nearness to the actual crossing sites.(5) Concealment for assembly of craft and

other means of crossing..(6) Terrain suitable for distribution of troops

parallel to the crossing front. This distri-bution allows troops to proceed directlyand without delay to embarkation pointsand permits them to leave the near banksimultaneously along the entire front.

481. MOVEMENT TO THE RIVER

a. Movemelnt fronm Assembly Area to Attack Posi-tion. After the attack position has been selected,each unit involved in the crossing sends guides tomake a daylight reconnaissance of its part of theattack position and of the routes to it from the as-sembly area. When practicable, the troops make

494

the movement under battalion control until theymove into their own parts of the attack position.To prevent confusion and loss of time in the attackposition, units march by boat teams or in tacticalgroups specifically assigned to other means ofcrossing.

b. Movement from Attack Position to River. Onarriving in the attack positions, units of the lead-ing waves are met by engineer guides and led totheir craft or other assigned means of crossing. Boatteams, accompanied by engineer crews for the craft,are guided along previously marked and securedroutes, carrying their assault or storm boats to theriver. The neal bank is the line of departure forthe move across the river. Every effort is made inthe attack position to coordinate movement so thatno pause for further coordination need be made atthe river's edge. The movement forward to theriver's edge is timed so that all the craft of the lead-ing wave are launched together. All suitable routesto the river from the attack positions are used inorder to avoid congestion.

482. CROSSING THE RIVER

Engineer crews are charged with the operationof the craft in the crossing. In the assault echelons,the senior armored infantryman aboard is respon-sible for directing each craft to its landing site. Noattempt is made to keep formation of any kind whileon the water, although intervals between craftshould be preserved. No effort is made to coulnteractnatural drift unless the current causes an appre-ciable drift downstream from the proposed landing

495

site. In such a case, the necessity for counteractingthis drift is anticipated by the battalion commander,and specific instructions about it are included in thebattalion order for the crossing. Firing from craftis rarely attempted in daylight; at night it is pro-hibited. On reaching the far bank, troops debarkrapidly, deploy, and attack. Engineer crews re-turn the craft immediately to the friendly bank.

483. SUPPORT OF CROSSING

a. Tactical air, artillery, and mortar support forthe crossing are arranged as for any other attack.The 81-mm mortar platoon is initially on the nearbank in general support for the assault crossing.Mortar observers move with the assault platoons.Plans are made for the crossing of the 81-mm mortarplatoon as soon as the initial objective is captured.After crossing, the mortar platoon is used as in anyother attack.

b. The method of crossing for tanks is determinedby the depth of the river, the nature of its banks andof the river bottom, and the means available for theircrossing. The presence of friendly tanks may beessential to the success of the assault, and every effortis made to cross them at the earliest practicable time.When fording the river is feasible, tanks are water-proofed and cross as soon after the leading wave aspossible. Ordinarily, other tank elements stay onthe near bank to protect the crossing and to deliverhigh explosive and long-range antitank fires for theleading waves. When fording is not feasible, tanksmay be crossed on rafts or bridges. Before move-ment, they normally support the crossing by fire.

496

After crossing, tank-armored infantry teamns func-tion in their normnal manner (fig. 80).

c. If the crossing is made in daylight, it is usuallymade under concealment of a smoke screen laid bythe mortar platoon, artillery, and chemical units.If such a daylight crossing is to be forced againsta strongly held river line, the leading waves usuallycross under cover of all available supporting fires,in addition to smoke.

484. ATTACK AFTER CROSSING

a. After crossing, troops in the leading wavepromptly clear the river bank. If the actual cross-ing of the water is opposed, no attempt is made atfirst to reorganize the boat teams into their normalplatoon groupings. In such cases, the individualboat teams continue the attack to the initial ob-jective. The platoon leader regains control of theboat teams and reorganizes his platoon whenever hecan or when the initial objective is capturted. IWhenthe crossing of the water is unopposed, individualboat teams go immediately to previously designatedlocations and are reorganized into their platoons.The rifle platoons then push forward to the initialobjective, where commanders reestablish control overtheir units. After securing the initial objective, thebattalion commander organizes the attack againstthe second objective. He coordinates the fires ofsupporting elements and conducts the attack in theusual manner.

b. When prolonged fighting is expected beforetanks and carriers join the dismounted armored

497

tt12'4~~~~

- It X \' Sili

:91'tU. a!I ..~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ I C

496

infantry on the bridgehead, certain actions are con-sidered in planning and are taken on the bridgehead.These include-

(1) Formation of rocket launcher teams.(2) Formation of gun crews for vehicular weap-

ons to be carried across the river.(3) Assignment of tanks on the near bank to

fire into the bridgehead area against hostilearmor that succeeds in penetrating theposition.

(4) Formation of carrying and ferrying partiesfor ammunition and supplies.

485. SECURITY

a. General. After a crossing, elements of the bat-talion promptly establish security as for any attack.Patrolling, especially to the flanks, is vigorous inorder to secure early information of enemy counter-attacks.

b. Antiaircraft Security. After the crossing isdiscovered, the neutralization of hostile air opera-tions over the crossing area is vital. Higher authorityusually provides aviation and antiaircraft securityfor the crossing area.

c. Antimechanized Defense. After crossing theriver, antimechanized defense is promptly estab-lished. Before the crossing of tanks, rocket launch-ers are disposed to meet any armored threat.

486. SUPPLY

a. General. In river-crossing operations, thesupply and evacuation of the battalion differ from

499

normal onlv between the time of landing of the lead-ing wave and the time of crossing of motor transport.

b. S'ulpply Activities. Soldiers usually carry oneor more reserve rations. Ammunition needed ini-tially on the hostile bank is carried individually andin assault craft. Some ammunition may be air-dropped on the far side of the river. Ordilalrilv,however, the replenishment of ammunition for allw\eapons is done by band-carry, using craft and footbridges. Amphibious vehicles may be used to goodadvantage. Carrying parties detailed for the pur-pose may have to move ammunition by boats, rafts,or foot bridges froml the ammunition trucks in thecombat trains to a temporary battalion ammunitionsupply point on the far bank. Ammunition is ac-cumulated there and band-carried to the using unitson call.

c. Evacuation. Casualties on the near bank areusually evacuated directly to the battalion aid sta-tion or to the aid stations of other units in the vicin-ity. The surgeon and a forward echelon of thebattalion aid station cross with the battalion conl-mand group. A dettachment of the battalion aidstation is set up on the far side of the river to carefor casualties on that side. The rest of the battalionmedical detachment usually crosses behind the bat-talion reserve. The evacuation of casualties fromthis aid station is by returning craft, until bridgesare available.

487. COMMUNICATION

a. The forward echelon of the battalion commandpost usually crosses in the third wave. The rest

500

of the command post personnel and equipment crossnot later than the capture of the initial objective;usually it displaces to the far bank behind the re-serve. Because of the difficulties of control, theprompt reporting of company command post loca-tions is essential.

b. Before crossing, radios may be kept silent forsecrecy. With the crossing of the leading waves,this silence is usually lifted. Radio then becomesthe chief means of communication between the bat-talion commander and the assault echelon. Com-munication to the front and rear is initially by radio,visual signals, and messengers. Light aircraft mayalso be used for communication to the rear. Wirelines are usually extended across the river on footor ponton bridges. They can also be strung over orin the river, unless it is very wide and flows swiftly.

Section II1. RAIDS

488. GENERAL

A raid is an attack to accomplish a specific pur-pose within the enemy position, with no intention ofholding the territory invaded. Raids may be ex-ecuted within or beyond supporting distance of theparent unit, either in daylight or in darkness. Whenthe area to be raided is beyond supporting distance.the raiding party is organized and operates as aseparate force.

a. Purpose. Raids may be made to capture pris-oners; to capture or destroy specific enemy mat6riel;to obtain detailed information of hostile units, dis-positions, locations. strength, works, intentions, or

5so

methods of defense; and to harass the enemy or dis-rupt his plans.

b. Characteristics. The raiding force always with-draws after it accomplishes its mission. Unless care-fully planned and executed. the withdrawal is themost difficult and costly part of the operation. Se-curity is vital, because normally the raiding forcepenetrates the enclly position and is vulnerable toattack from all directions. It is often beyond sup-porting distance of the parent unit. A night raidIehas the same characteristics as a night attack, andit is planned and conducted similarly. A daylightraid has the same characteristics as a daylight attack,and is planned and conducted sinilarly. They differprincipally in the speed of execution.

489. TYPES WITH RESPECT TO SUPPORT, GENERAL

Depending on the support obtained, raids may beclassified as supported or unsupported. The choiceof type depends on the terrain, the mission, the dis-tance to the area to be raided, the size of the raidingforce, the strength of the position to be raided, thevisibility, and the time the raiding force is to be onthe mission.

490. SUPPORTED RAID

A supported raid is one using available support-ing fires of organic and parent iunit weapons beforeand during the raid. The battalion supporting weap-ons and artillery fire preparation fires before theraid and supporting and protective fires during theraid. Preparation and supporting fires are used as

502

for any other attack. The protective fires isolatethe objective, prevent or limit hostile counterattacks,and aid in keeping open the routes of withdrawal.All these fires are normally conducted together withother planned fires throughout the area. Secrecy asto the exact: location, direction, and time of the raidis mnaintained. When nmalde at night, the raid may beilluminated or nonilluminated. Supported raidsmay be made under the following conditions:

a. In daylight or under other conditions of goodvisibility.

b. The enemy position is well outposted and or-galnized. In such situations surprise through stealthis improbable.

o. The raiding force is company size or larger.d. The mission requires the raiding force to re-

main in the hostile position for some time.

491. UNSUPPORTED RAID

An unsupported raid is one made without sup-portillg fires. This type of raid depends primarilyon surprise for success. Surprise may be gainedeither through stealth or through rapidity of attackand withdrawal. Supporting and protective firesare planned similar to a supported raid, but are notused unless called for by the raiding force. Un-supported raids may be made-

a. At night or under other conditions of reducedvisibility.

b. When the enemy position is hastily organized,or when the attainment of surprise through stealthor speed of attack is probable.

503

492. TYPES WITH RESPECT TO USE OF VEHICLES

a. A dismounted raid is one made by dismounted'personnel. It normally is made at night and doesnot advance beyond supporting distance of theparent unit. This type of raid is made when unitsare in close contact with the enemy and it is desiredto capture prisoners or destroy specific enemy in-stallations or mat6riel, or to secure information. Ithas a definite nuisance value and often delays enemyplaning. It may be either supported or un-supported.

b. A mounted raid is one made by tanks andmounted armored infantry. This type of raid gen-erally advances beyond supporting distance of theparent unit. The purpose of mounted raids is todestroy specific enemy installations or materiel, tocapture specific types of equipment, to free friendlypersonnel in enemy prisoner of war camps, and todisrupt the enemy's supply lines temporarily.

493. ROLE OF THE BATTALION

a. The armored infantry battalion may be themain element of the raiding force. For a force aslarge as a battalion, the mission normally assignedtakes it beyond saplporting distance of the parentunit, and it is organized and operates as a reinforcedbattalion. Such missions are normally ordered bycommanders higher than the combat command.

b. Unless 'the battalion is detached, raids ofsmaller size than battalion are usually ordered bythe combat command commander. Such raids areoften within supporting distance, and the combat

504

command commander issues instructions coveringthe purpose of the raid and the fire support to bemalde available. Often be may prescribe the areato be raided, the size of the force to be used, andthe time of the raid.

494. PREPARATIONS FOR A DISMOUNTED RAID,GENERAL

Planning and coordination of a raid are detailedafnd complete. A simple plan. thoroughly under-stood by all the participating troops, and thoroughreconnaissance are essential. If the raid is to bemade at night, night reconnaissance as well as day-light reconnaissance is desirable. Besides the nor-mal preparation for either a daylight or a nightattack, additional preparations needed are discussedin paragraphs 495-50(6.

495. SELECTION OF RAID OBJECTIVE

The raid objective may be prescribed by the com-bat command commander or it may be left to thediscretion of the battalion commander. Wherepossible, the area selected for the raid is one thatis lightly defended. For daylight raids, coveredroutes of approach and withdrawal are desirable.An objective close to friendly front lines permitsrapid execution of the raid, especially if the terrainleading to it has few serious obstacles or is easy totravel. This is especially desirable in an unsup-ported raid. In a supported raid, an objective closeto friendly forces aids in fire support and may allowthe area to be isolated by fires.

:313JS°--51-.-3. 505

496. SIZE OF RAIDING FORCE

Raiding forces are kept as small as possible con-sistent with the mission. Problems of surprise, con-trol, and speed of execution increase directly as thesize of the raiding force.

497. ORANIZATION OF RAIDING FORCE

The raiding force is usually organized into smallerforces, each organized and equipped to accomplish aspecific part of the over-all mission. Such forcesinclude assault parties to perform specified taskswithin the enemy position; detachments to providesecurity for the assault parties; parties to handleprisoners or to remove captured materiel; a reserve:and parties for security during forward movementand to protect the withdrawal.

498. PLAN OF SUPPORTING FIRES FOR A RAID

a. Because of the necessity of detailed planningfor supporting fires, early decision is made as towhether the raid will be supported or unsupported.When the raid is being made by an element of thebattalion, the battalion commander usually receivesthe recommendation of the raiding force commanderbefore making his decision. In any case, the battal-ion commander requests additional weapons, fires, orequipment as necessary for the mission. When theraid is within supporting distance of the combatcommand, a complete and detailed plan of fire sup-port is arranged, even though the fires may not beused.

506

b. Preparation and supporting fires are plannedand executed as for any other attack. Preparationfires usually sacrifice secrecy and surprise, but thestrength of the enemy position may require theiruse. Protective fires neutralize enemy positionswithin effective radius of the area to be raided andbox ill the area so as to isolate the defending troops,as well as to protect the raiding force. Such isola-tion is planned to include the routes of approachand withdrawal. All fires are precisely prearrangedas to targets and signals to be used. They may beginat a specified time or signal or on call of the raidcommander. During the raid, fires are lifted orshifted as necessary.

c. As the fires must be accurately placed underany condition of visibility, they are registered inadvance. To preserve secrecy, the registrationcovers a larger number of points than those actuallyneeded for the raid. If possible, the registrationis spread out over several days. If weapons are tofire on more than one target dilring the raid, regis-tration is completed for all such targets.

499. TIME OF RAID

In preparing for a raid, time is necessary for re-connaissance, planning, registration of supportingfires, and rehearsals. Usually at, least one nightshould intervene between the receipt of orders forthe raid and its execution. Raids are preferablycarried out at dawn, twilight, or in fog, mist, or otherconditions of low visibility, to limit enemy observa-tion and yet give enough light for close combat.

507

However, successful raids can be made in broaddaylight or in full darkness. Successful raids inbroad daylight usually depend on the proper use ofsupporting fires and on the ability to blind enemyobservation with smoke.

500. ROUTE OF ADVANCE AND WITHDRAWAL

a. Unless the raid is to be made during darkness,covered routes of approach are used and the raidis begun from the last covered position. Underconditions of reduced visibility, when surprisethrough stealth is possible, advance and flank secu-rity detachments precede the raiding force. Theyprevent premature discovery of the raid by clearingdefinitely located hostile outguards from the areawith silent weapons.

b. The withdrawal may be made over the sameroute used for the advance, or it may be made overanother route. In any case, the routes of withdrawalavoid the suspected location of all enemy defensivefires. Road intersections and other prominent land-marks are avoided. Security detachments and pro-tective fires are used to keep the routes of withdrawalopen.

501. RALLYING POINTS

Rallying points are designated at which unitsassemble when they have become separated duringthe raid or have completed their missions and areready to begin the withdrawal. A rallying point isprescribed near the objective, and a series of rallyingpoints may be prescribed along the routes of advance

so508

and withdrawal. A rallying point within friendlylines is also usually prescribed to collect materiel,prisoners, and information gathered in the raid.

502. PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES

A raid against a well-organized position mustgenerally pass through enemy barbed wire andother obstacles. Barbed wire is usually cut by lead-ing elements with wire cutters. Surprise may haveto be forfeited by using bangalore torpedoes todestroy sections of the wire. AIine fields are neu-tralized in advance, and the leading elements of theraiding party include men who are experienced indetecting and disarming mines and booby traps andwho attempt to breach the nilned areal .ithout for-feiting the secrecy of the attack. At the conclusionof the attack, they may be required to open otherlanes for withdrawal.

503. EQUIPMENT FOR A RAID

The battalion commander prescribes the equip-ment to be carried. Arranlgemlents are made toprovide any special equipment requested by indi-vidual raiders, such as carbines, sub-machine-guns,special knives, and blackjacks. For night raids,equipment and identification similar to that used folnight attacks a'le prescribed. WVVite cloth may beworn over the uiniform to match the snow; at othertimes, clothing and hands and faces may bedarkened. If the purpose of the raid includes thecaptlure of cumbersome materiel, some improvisedmeans of towing or carrying this equipment is

509

planned in advance. When tanks go on the raid,they may be used for this purpose.

504. REHEARSALS

Time is often available for rehearsals-particu-larly in a stabilized situation. For night raids atleast one daylight rehearsal and an additional nightrehearsal should be held. Preferably, these re-hearsals are held on ground similar to the area tobe raided, and the troops carry and use the equip-ment prescribed for the raid.

505. CONDUCT OF RAID

a. Dismounted Raid.(1) If the raid is made at night or under other

conditions of reduced visibility, it is donelike a night attack. If the raid is madein daylight, its conduct differs from anyother daylight attack mainly in the speedof the action. The raid commander takescalculated risks during the raid and profitsfrom the enemy confusion that ordinarilyresults. The action of the raiding partiesis decentralized, and each operates as re-quired by its own mission. As far aspracticable, the actions of these parties arecoordinated by the raid commander.

(2) The principal duties of the raid commanderduring the raid are to decide when to callfor, shift, or lift supporting and protectivefires; to be constantly on the alert for un-expected hostile reactions and to take

510

prompt measures to meet them; and todecide when to order the withdrawal.

b. Mournted R'aid. A mounted raid is plannedand conducted like an exploitation. However theobjective of the raid usually is the destruction ofmateriel or an installation, or the seizure of equip-ment or personnel. The raiding force normallyreturns to its parent unit after accomplishing themission.

c. Route. The route to the objective is selectedto gain surprise and provide the maxnmum speed.A different route is usually selected for return.Frequent changes in direction confuse the enemyabout the axis of advance.

d. Action at Night. If contact is broken with theenemy, a night march in the enemy's rear, althoughhazardous, often places the raiding force in an areawhere its presence is unsuspected. This gives theraiding force the advantage of surprise and the op-portunity to inflict maximum damage in the enemyrear areas. If contact with the enemy is broken, araiding force operating in a wooded and uninhabitedarea may camouflage itself in the woods at night,remain undetected for several days, and then emergeat night and continue the raid after the enemy be-lieves that the raiding force has departed.

e. Prisoners of War. Only a limited number ofprisoners of war can be captured by a raiding force.Too many prisoners slow down the force and impedeits progress.

f. Capture Im?invent. If capture is imminent, theraiding force commander destroys his materiel to

51!

prevent its being seized in operating condition bythe enemy.

g. Leadership. Aggressive leadership is essentialon mounted raids. The personnel fully realize thehazard of operating beyond supporting distance offriendly troops and completely surrounded by theenemy. Daring, aggressive, alert, and entllusiasticcommanders will get the best results.

506. DISMOUNTED RAIDS BY ELEMENTS OF THEBATTALION

When the raid is to be made by an element ofthe battalion, the battalion commander designatesthe company that is to make the raid or provide theraiding force. In some cases, he may designate theraid commander. His order will alwhvays cover themission and may cover some or all of the other de-tails discussed in this section. In any case, the bat-talion commander makes the detailed coordinationnecessary with other units of the battalion and withadjacent and supporting units.

Section IV. ATTACK IN TOWNS

507. GENERAL

Armored units avoid towns if practicable; how-ever, it is impossible to avoid all villages and townsand still clear an axis of supply. Large towns andcities normally are by-passed, but on occasionarmored units are used to seize them when theirpossession is desired by the higher commander. Fordetails of combat in towns, see FM 31 50.

512

508. COORDINATED ATTACK

Combat in built-up areas is characterized by closefighting, use of small units, and difficulty of control.Teams are used to penetrate the outer defenses ofthe town, to encircle it, and to mop up within it.The attack of a town is preceded by a detailed recon-naissance of the objective. Sources of informationare normal intelligence channels, local inhabitants,maps and aerial photos, reconnaissance patrols,prisoners, and standard travel publications. Sup-porting fires and details of coordination are plannedbefore the attack. Main roads likely to be mined andcovered by fire are avoided in penetrating the outerdefenses. The tanks concentrate heavy fire uponthat section of the town selected for initial entry.When close to the town, tanks shift their fire to theflanks, supporting fires are lifted, and the dismountedarmored infantry moves forward to gain a footholdin the town. The arlmored personnel carriers areused to transport armored infantry as fast as pos-sible to the point where the dismounted assaultbegins. Once a foothold has been established,armored infantry carriers are brought into the townand used to protect the flanks and rear of clearedareas. The town is cleared by dismounted armoredinfantrymen with tank, mechanized flame thrower,and armored engineer support (FM 31-50 and figs.81, 82, and 83).

509. SURPRISE ATTACK UPON A WEAKLY HELDTOWN

When the enemy defenses of a town are weak, aswhen he is just beginning to organize them, the

513

>!

(i:~'~'~~i~ I ' 'l~Ii"<¥~"

~j ,L

M~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

514

-i~~~~~~~~~~I

.· I

It -

i~~~lh

t-

A

i' in

Ir,

515

II f

i

516I516~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

advance guard (leading tank-armored infantryteam) immediately attacks from march column. Ifenemy defenses are weak. it is not essential that theattacking force be predominantly infantry; but itis important that the dismounted armored infantryaccompany the leading tanks as they enter the town.This. force drives directly toward the center of thetown, clearing only access streets during the advance.From the center of town the assault force attacksoutward toward the rear of the enemy defenses(fig. 84).

Section V. ATTACK OF FORTIFICATIONS

510. GENERAL

Tank units are not ordinarily used in the assaultagainst defended fortified positions. With the com-bat command, the reinforced armored infantry bat-talion is used to breach fortified positions.Reinforced tank battalions are normally held inreserve to exploit this break-through. FM 31-50covers the details of attack of fortifications.

511. ORGANIZATION

The armored infantry battalion, reinforced heavilywith tanks, mechanized flame throwers, and armoredengineers, is employed to attack fortifications.Within the battalion small assault teams of tanks,armored infantry, and armored engineers form thebasic fighting rhits. Because of the. static nature ofthe enemy defensive position, a considerable amountof information is usually available to the assault

517

Figure 8i. Reinforced arlmoored inlaantry battalion in attackof a lowl.

force. Based on this information, a detailed plan ofattack is made and rehearsed in rear areas.

512. TANKS

When the fortifications are strongly defended,tanlks give fire support to the armored infantry-engineer assault detachments. The tank elementsdisplace forward as needed to provide continuousdirect fire support.

Section VI. OPERATIONS IN EXTREME COLD

513. GENERAL

a. Troops require special clothing and heatedshelter. Equipment and supplies that would be518

damaged by freezing are protected against the cold.Weapons and vehicles are winterized with speciallubricants. Wheeled vehicles may be used on estab-lished roads in rear areas. Full-tracklaying vehicleswith low ground pressures are used for movementover snow-covered or muddy terrain. Mlovelment onicy slopes requires that tracks be fitted with specialgrousers.

b. Slow movement increases all time factors. re-duces supporting distance, and frequently limits thedepth of combat missions. Careful reconnaissanceby patrols on skis, snow-shoes, or light oversnowvehicles precedes movement of units. Reconnais-sance reports include infollrmation on snow depthsand ice thickness. Short-range weather forecastsalso are important in planning movement.

c. Armored units advancing cross country avoidheavy woods and deep drifts, taking advantage ofwind-swept ridges where snow cover is thinnest.Thickly frozen lakes and rivers, instead of beingobstacles, are good routes for imovement.

d. Short periods of daylight and the difficulty ofconcealing movement in snow-covered terrain causean increase in night movements, which are aided byclear atmosphere and bright moonlight. Deep snowprovides cover from hostile fire, but increases thedifficulty of orientation on the terrain. Long move-ments require the use of navigational aids.

Section VII. DESERT OPERATIONS

514. REFERENCE

For detailed discussion of desert operations, seeFM 31-25.

519

515. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF DESERT AREAS

Special training and conditioning and a high de-gree of self-discipline are essential for desert oper-ations. All deserts, regardless of latitude, havecertain characteristics in conimon-lack of water,absence of vegetation, large areas of sand, extremetemperature ranges, and brilliant sunlight. Theterrain in deserts is not necessarily flat and level.There are hills and valleys, mountains and sanddunes, rocks, shale, and salt nmarshes, as well as greatexpanses of sand. These may present obstacles tomovement; however, the types of terrain vary andpresent only local difficulties to movement.

516. CAMOUFLAGE

The lack of vegetation in the desert makes con-cealment of men and equipment difficult. Artificialmeans of camouiltage are extensively employed in-cluding protective painting for all vehicles. Unitscarry camouflage equipment and material on allmovements to compensate for the lack of naturalmeans of camouflage. Mlaxilllm use is made ofnatural shadows in broken ground, dried out streambeds (wadies), and sand dune areas.

517. MOBILITY

Great freedom of movement is possible in desertareas, as few obstacles exist. The force that hasthe greatest mobility is the most effective. Move-ments are normally made for long distances andspeed of execution is essential. Maintaining direc-tion during movements is difficult because of the

520

absence of roads, trails, and landmarks. Naviga-tional aids and dead-reckoning are used fordirection.

518. SURPRISE

Despite the lack of concealmlent and the vast, flat,featureless stretches of terrain, ground visibility isusually poor in the desert. Surprise is facilitatedby use of an aggressive counterreconnaissanlce screell,by speed of inoveent, and by deception. DI)lllnypositions, decoy movelments, and the operation offalse radio nets aid in deception. Surprise may begained if the movement of the force can be con-cealed. In open areas this is possible by moving toattack positions at night or during dust stormls,when visibility is greatly limited. If the attackermoves with the sun at his back hlie may also achievesurprise as the defender's visibility, when observingtoward the sun, is greatly limited by the glare.

519. SECURITY

As the enemy has equal freedom of maneuver,all-around protection is necessary at all times.Formations and dispositions of units must permitentry into combat from all directions. Before anenlgagement. reconnlaissance is made for such a dis-tance that timely warninhg is given of hostile imove-ments, strength, composition of troops, and thepresence or absence of prepared defensive installa-tions. Once battle is joined, rebonnaissance is in-tensified to prevent surprise envelopments and iscontinued until the enemy is destroyed. The lackof natural concealment increases the difficulty of

131:158 ° 5 :,1-34 521

security against enemy air action. Dispersion,camouflage, and warning devices are used as passivemeans of air security; active measures are used totheir fullest extent.

520. OPERATIONS

In desert combat, emphasis is placed on maneuverbecause flanks are more accessible. Desert terrainfavors envelopments and deep turning movements.Wide movements around an enemy flank are oftenpossible without detection. Quick and flexible useis made of mobile forces to exploit any weak-ness or mistake of the eneiny. Tanks, arrmoredinfantry, and motorized infantry with supportingarms form the fighting team best adapted to condi-tions of desert fighting.

Section VIII. AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS-

521. GENERAL

a. For employment of the battalion landing team,see FM \60 5. For employment of the combat colm-mand and the armored division, see FM[ 17-100.For employment of tank companies, see FAI 17-32.For armored division communications, see FM17-70.

b. The armored division may support an amphib-ious operation: especially in the early stages of theland operations after a hlanding. In these situations,port facilities are tlsually not available and it is nec-essary to land units of the division from landingcraft and landing ships. The tactical employmentof the armored division and its elelmenlts is the saime522

as for any land operation. The armored infantrybattalion is organized into combined arms teams andlanded similarly to the battalion landing team(BLT) of the infantry division.

522. ROLE DURING ASSAULT LANDING

The armored infantry battalion is used in theestablishment of a beachhead line only in an emer-gency. When so used, it operates and lands as abattalion landing team without carriers. Carriersare landed later on orders of higher headquarters.

523. EXPANDING A BEACHHEAD

When used to expand a beachhead, the battalionnormally is employed as a reinforced battalion of acombat command. Carriers accomplanvy the units sothey can keep their mobility and fire power.

524. ATTACKING INLAND

The battalion may be used to drive inland sepa-rately or, as part of a larger force, to seize a strategicinstallation or tactically important terrain feature.When used in this manner, the battalion is landedwith vehicles and employed as a reinforced battalion.Missions include the capture of definite objectiveslike air fields, communication centers, bridges, promi-nent terrain features, and towns or villages.

525. PLANNING

The planning of amphibious operations forarmored units considers the vulnerability of thebeachhead to enemy attack during the landing opera-

523

tions. Since reorganization after landinmg may beinterrupted by enemy attack, the armored infantrybattalion commander organizes his battalion andattached units into combined arms teams-a teamfor each landing ship assigned the battalion. Eachteam includes tanks, armored infantry, reconnais-sance or liaison elements. armored engineers, andmedical supply and maintenance units.

526. SIZE OF COMBINED ARMS TEAMS

a. The taink platoon is kept intact as it is thesmallest fighting unit of tanks. If necessary tobreak up a tank company for loadinlg, the tanks incompany headquarters are assigned to a ship carry-ing at least one platoon of tanks. All tank officersplan to conduct the initial stages of the landing fromtheir tanks if combat is anticipated.

b. The armored inata'try rifle platoon is normallykept intact, but units as small as the rifle squad maybe assigned to a combined arms team.

c. The enginaeer unit for a BLT should be nosmaller than a platoon. Maintenance crews are as-signed to ships carrying the greatest number ofvehicles with which the crews are familiar. Tankrecovery vehicles and maintenance wreckers are as-signed to ships carrying the vehicles they can bestserve.

527. TRAINING PRIOR TO EMBARKATION

Before embarkation, the armored infantry bat-talion conducts training similar to that given in-fantry units (FM 60-5) and tank units (FM\I 17-33).

524

Each combined arms team loaded aboard one shiptrains together as a unit, to include practice loadingsand landings.

528. WATERPROOFING OF VEHICLES

All vehicles to be landed front ship to beachare completely waterproofed before embarkation.Training in dewaterproofinlg vehicles is also donebefore embarkation. Waterproofing kits are pro-vided by the ordnance for each type of vehicle.Ordnance personnel generally are available for thesupervision of final phases of this work.

529. LOADING OF SHIPS

Ships are combat loaded to perllllit immediate andrapid debarkation in the order desired to supportthe scheme of maneuver. Within the convoy, whenthe battalion is embarked on more than one ship,vital supplies and equipment are dispersed through-out and complete units are loaded so that the loss ofa ship or ships will not materially affect the tacticalintegrity of the battalion.

530. VOYAGE

a. O ientation. During the voyage to the objec-tive area, officers of embarked troops are informedof their destination, mission, and the plans for theuse of their units, if this information has not alreadybeen given them. Troop officers disseminate this,and information about hydrographic and beach con-ditions, terrain inland, and the enemy, to theirrespective organizations.

525

b. Abandoning Ship. Troops are thoroughly in-structed and drilled in the procedure for abandoningship. Assembly areas and routes to them are pre-scribed for all troops, and boats, rafts and debark-ation nets are designated for each lower troop unit.

c. Training. Debarkation training on the waywill include moving to debarkation stations if em-barked on transports or to assigned vehicles if em-barked on landing ships, with full equipment duringdarkened ship. Other training is given in aircraftrecognition, familiarization with maps and aerialphotographs to be used in the objective area, andsuch other subjects as unit commnanders considerappropriate. Conditions aboard ship restrict normalphysical exercise and movement. To keep troopsphysically fit for entry into combat, a supervisedphysical training program is conducted.

d. AMaintenance. lWeapons and personal equip-ment aboard ship are checked carefully and kept inthe best possible condition. Vehicles are checkedand maintenance is continuous. 'Mechanical equip-ment that deteriorates from lack of use is operated,and batteries are charged as necessary. Finalchecks of waterproofing are made and maintenancecrews and equipment are utilized to the utmost.

531. DEBARKING OF VEHICLES

Tanks should be brought ashore as early as prac-ticable. They form the striking power to engageany ground resistance met and to repel hostilearmored counterattacks. The LST is an attractivetarget for enemy air attack; another reason tanks

526

are unloaded as soon as possible is to avoid loss ordestruction while still aboard. Armored infantryand engineers debark dismounted if they are neededearly. Supply and service vehicles have the lowestpriority.

532. REORGANIZATION

a. At the destination, ships are unloaded accord-ing to plan. Troops and vehicles are moved todesignated assembly areas. A battalion assemblyareal is designatted where vehicles are dewaterproofedunder the supervision of the battalion maintenance(motor) officer. After this dewaterproofing, thevehicles are dispatched as complete tactical units totheir respective organizations under control of com-pany maintenalcle officers. Guides lend vehicles totheir units.

b. Personnel are moved dismounted to assemblyareas where tactical units are reorganized and unitsare prepared for combat. Vehicles are dispatchedto their units as soon as dei'ateproofillg is com-pleted as outlined above.

Section IX. DEFENSE OF A RIVER LINE

533. GENERAL

Higher headquarters normally decides the typeof defense to be conducted on a river line. Thetypes of defense may be classified according to mis-sion as mobile, position, normal frontage, or widefrontage.

527

534. MOBILE DEFENSE

In this method of defense small strong points areplaced across the entire sector and along the riverline. A large part of the strength is held well be-hind the river as a counterattacking force. Thisforce strikes the enemy when he is astride the riveror soon after he crosses. This type of defense usesthe river to divide the enemy force, with the view ofdefeating hiln while so divided.

535. POSITION DEFENSE

A large part of the strength is placed on or nearthe river to stop the enemy advance at the river line.This type defense takes full advantage of the riverto strengthel the defensive organization and stopthe enemy.

536. NORMAL FRONTAGE

a. Where the river is an effective barrier and theterrain is suitable for close defensive fires, the \ILRmay be placed on the near bank of the river and thedefense organized as in any other comparableterrain.

b. If the terrain at the river bank is unsuited forclose defensive fires, the MLR may be removed fromthe river to get improved fields of fire. The defenseareas are close enough to the river so that the nearbank can be covered by rifle and machine gun fire.If the banks are steep and dead space exists, theymay be covered by mortar fire and detachmentsposted at the top of the bank.

528

c. The terrain may be such that part of the AMLRis placed on the river and the rest located behindthe river bank.

537. WIDE FRONTAGE

Where extremely wide frontages are assigned, thedefense of a river line corresponds to any defenseof a wide front. The near bank of the river may beheld lightly. The battalion, less units on or nearthe river, is then held mobile, ready to occulpy anyof the positions previously prepared to block the mostlikely hostile crossing points. The battalion reserveis prepared to counterattack to deny the enemy afoothold on the near bank.

538. SECURITY FORCES

If the MIIR is on the near bank, the combat outliostis located across the river. If the ILR is withdrawnfrom the near bank. the combat outpost may be lo-cated on the near bank and patrols sent across theriver.

539. FIRE PLAN

a. When the MILR is on the near bank, concentra-tions and barrages are planned to cover the mostlikely avenues of approach to the far bank and thepro)bable crossing sites. Machine guns and otherdirect-fire weapons have large sectors of fire cover-ing the avenues of approach and areas not coveredby high-angle fire. W'hen possible, machine gunsare sited to fire final protective lines grazing the riveror the far bank.

529

b. When the MLE is behind the river bank, con-centrations are planned to engage the attacker as heapproaches the far bank. Final protective fires onthe near bank destroy the enemy as he attempts togain a foothold.

c. When part of the defenses are located on theriver bank and part behind the river bank, final pro-tective fires provide the most effective protection forthe battle position. All high-angle fires may beplaced on the far bank or arranged so that the fiallprotective fires follow the general trace of the MLR.

d. All means of crossing the river are removedor destroyed. Bridges are completely demolishedso that a crossing' canlot be mnlde on the w reck-age. Fords are destroyed or made impassable withobstacles and mines. The withdrawal of coveringforces is carefully coordinated with the work ofdemolition crews.

e. Successful defensive combat on a river line re-quires rapid disseminat ion of information and orders.No one means of comnmunication is relied upon tothe exclusion of others. Combat outposts and patrolsare provided with voice radios.

Section X. DEFENSE IN WOODS

540. GENERAL

a. Defense in woods is characterized by short fieldsof fire and lack of observation. Fires of riflemenand antomatic riflemen are closely coordinated, anti-personnel mines are used, constant patrolling is done,local security groups are used extensively, and routesare prepared for the rapid shifting of reserves.

530

b. Distances and intervals between individuals andunits are reduced. Reserve units are more likely tobe held mobile for counterattack or to deal withinfiltrating groups than they are in a defense ofopen terrain.

c. Those nmachine guns not in close support of theMLR are sited well forward to limit penetrations andprotect the flauklis of the forward elements of thebattalion. Their crews prepare supplementary posi-tions. Fire lanes are cut: through whichl bands ofmaclline-gunll fire are laid down along the front andflanks of organized areas. Terrain restrictions some-times require the use of machine guins singly ratherthan in pairs. The 81-mui mortars are emplacedinl openings in the woods o or pellilgs ale cut tomake firing possible. Where possible, fires are regis-tered before contact. The supporting artillery andmortars cover avenues of approach with defensiveconcentrations that can be fired without observation.

d. Constant patrolling is done to the front, flanks,and within the position. Local security groups areequippled with rapid means of communication, in-cludillg radios, to give ilmmediate TwVarning of hostileadvance. Successful defense depends upon vigilance,constant surveillance of hostile movements, close de-fensive fires, close combat, rapidl counterattack, andthe mopping up of groups that infiltrate the position.

Section XI. COMBAT IN JUNGLES

541. GENERAL

Jungle combat involves operations in a tropicalarea that is largely overgrown with dense vegeta-tion. Offensive operations in such an area require

531

a high degree of leadership and individual initiativeto meet the problems imposed by difficult terrain andhot, humid weather. These difficulties may be over-come by proper acclimatization, thorough training,and careful planning. For details of operation injungles see FiM 72-20.

542. EFFECT OF JUNGLE

a. The jungle affects offensive operations by re-stricting observation, limiting movement, restrict-ing conlmunlication, and providing concealmentfrom air and ground observation. Because of thesefactors, the situation is generally obscure. Themaintenance of contact and control becomes para-mount. Limited observation requires narrowerfrontages in the assault and reduced intervals anddistance between units and individuals. It re-stricts the use of supporting fires. Limited obser-vation may be partially overcome by an increaseduse of patrols, liaison parties, communications, andobservation posts.

b. Jungle areas are characterized by a lack ofgood roads, the road net usually consisting of a fewcoastal roads and narrow, winding inland trails.The movement of armored units is generally limitedto existing roads, beaches, and grass or bush-coveredfields. The cross-country movement of tanks indense jungle is almost impossible unless routes havebeen previously prepared. Sometimes they mayoperate in an area of tree-covered hills when the soilis trafficable.

c. Jungle terrain also restricts the use of com-nullications. Radio range is greatly reduced be-

532

cause of the screening effect of dense vegetation andsteep slopes. The effectiveness of radio dependsupon its location and atmospheric conditions. Ina slow-moving attack the telephone is the mostsatisfactory means of communication. Wire teamsmove with the assault echelon to provide promptcommunication to the rear. Increased relialce is

placed on dismounted messengers.d. The jungle gives ideal concealllent for offen-

sive operations. This permits dismounted armoredinfantry to advance to assault positions close to theenemy. However, concealing foliage also gives op-portunities for ambush and infiltration attacks, andrequires increased security measures.

543. OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

a. IThe principles for offensive combat apply tojungle combat. However, the factors of enervatingclimate, restricted observation, limited mobility, re-stricted communications, and concealment compli-cate maneuver and require a specialized applicationof these principles. Resourceful leadership, propertraillinig, and suitable equipment will convert naturaldifficulties into relative advantages.

b7. Jungle combat is essentially a fight by smalldismounted armored infantry units which operateextremely close to the enemy. Often a tank platoonmay be attached to an assault rifle company for thereduction of cnelmy automnatic weapons by close-rangefires. In close terrain, foot troops and tanks movetogether at the same rate of speed. When advanc-ing together along a trail, foot troops generallyprecede the tanks at about 25 to 50 yards depending

533

on the terrain. As the advance progresses, the rela-tive positions of riflemen and tanks are adjusted asnecessitated by enemy resistance. At times the ter-rain may restrict deployment to the close vicinity ofthe trail and may limit operations to a one-tankfront. In such a case, the tanks must be closelyprotected by patrols that reconnoiter for routes ofadvance, antitank guns, tank traps, or other anti-tank obstacles. Riflemen are designated to protectthe flanks and rear of each tank. When the tanksare engaged and receiving heavy fire, riflemen deploybehind them to cover them from protected positions.Riflemen should not remain too close to the tanksbecause casualties may result from enemy fire con-centrated on the tanks. Close terrain at times makesit necessary for a tank commander to expose himselffrom the turret in order to locate targets and main-tain contact with nearby tanks. Tank crews do notbutton-up so tightly that they lose all communicationor contact with the infantry.

c. The role of tanks is sometimes limited to firesupport when the terrain makes it impossible forarmored vehicles to take part in the assault. Fromstationary hull-defilade firing positions on or nearthe line of departure, tanks support the assault byoverhead and flanking fire throughout its advancefrom the line of departure to the objective. A tankforward observer may go Aith the assault companyto call for supporting fires.

544. COORDINATION

Close coordination between tank and armored in-fantry leaders is essential. In some cases, special

534

radio equipment helps this coordination. Directcommunication is often maintained by telephonebetween the infantry leader advancing immediatelybehind a tank and the tank commander inside thetank. Infornlationl as to objectives, routes, and anti-tank resistance are reported by the armored infantryleader. This method permits tanks to be broughtwell forward and avoids the difficulties imposed bylimited observation. In some instances it may benecessary for tank commanders to move forward onfqot to have targets pointed out by the infantry.

545. DEFENSE

a. In light jungles, the principles of defense inwoods generally apply. Consideration is given toadjoining areas that may contain dense jungle, andto hidden obstacles lhat Illay influence the capabili-ties of the enemy and contemplated operations.Thorough and continuous ground reconnaissance isindispensable because of the limited effectiveness ofsecurity elements and the high degree of conceal-nmelt from air observation provided the enemy byeven light jungle. Dense jungle imposes severelimitations on the defensive use of weapons becauseobservation is often limited to a few yards. Thesefactors. along with the restriction of maneuver andcontrol, place the hirlest premium on planning, co-ordination, and small-llnit leadership.

b. In a dense jungle, a front-line battalion oper-ating as part of a ilarger force may be assigned afrontage of less than 1,200 yards. Troops are dis-posed along the MLR with minimum intervalsbetween fox holes and no gaps between units. The

535

reserve company is held learer the _MLR than usual.Interior front-line rifle companies often use all rifleplatoons abreast. Security elements lorlmally areprovided by the front-line battalions. They consistof small groups, dug in for all-around defense, tocover trails and other approaches to the position,delay the enemy, and warn of his approach.

c. In the jungle, as in densely wooded areas andin mountains, battalions and smaller units oftenoperate independently. lWhen ope.rating alone, unitsare prepared to defend against an enemy attack frontany direction (FMl 72-20).

546. MAINTENANCE

AMaintelance of tanks, carriers, and other vehiclesin jungles is extremely difficult. 'Ihe d(l.i) hcerof tropical areas requires that special care be givento all weapons and other nonrustproof equipmentin daily or frequent use. The humidity and mudconmbine to ilake weapons maintenance particularlydifficult. Inl hot. hIimlid cliimates, all weapons requirelight or special preservative lubricating oil. In salt-water atmospheres, medium preservative lubricatingoil should be used. Electrical equipment and radiosystems also require special care.

Section XII. DEFENSE IN BUILT-UP AREAS

547. GENERAL

The use of a built-up area in the organization ofa defensive position depends on its size, its location,and the increased protection gained from it. In-flammable material gives little protection and may

536

becomne a hazard to the defender. Buildin-gs ofmasonry can be developed into well fortified defen-sive positions or islands of resistance. A built-uparea that can be avoided easily has little defensivevalue. To be useful it must be located to force theenemy to a direct attack or a time-consuming ma-neuver (FM 31-50).

548. DEFENSIVE POSITION

a. The defense of a built-up area is conllparableto the defense of any battle position. The organiza-tion of a built-up area is influenced by-

(1) Limited observation for the attacker andtihe defender.

(2) Reduced fields of fire and effectiveness ofindirect fire weapons.

(3) Restricted conimmnlication.(4) Inclreased cover and conceliment for troops

and weapons.(5) Many obstacles, which limit imaneuver of

troops aend tanks.b. When using a built-up area, the AILR is placed

well forward in the area. This prevents the enemyfrom entering the outskirts and massinlg his troopsand direct fire weaplolis under that protection. Tiwhselected MLR does not present a clearly defined edgeon which the attacker can lmass his supportiung fires.When the MLR is located back fronl the actual edge,all approaches to the built-lip area and the edge it-self are occupied by security elements. They pro-vide observation, give wvaniniig, and adjust support-inig fires.

931358~-t---1 3537

549. DISTRIBUTION OF TROOPS

a. Cities and T'owns (fig. 85). The frontage anddepth assigned to units defending a built-up areaare less than normal. A battalion on the MLR ina city or town usually has a frontage of four to eightcity blocks (average block being 200 yards). Theamount assigned depends on the defensive strengthof the locality. The depth of the defensive area isfrom three to six city blocks. The MLR is generallylocated along streets. Boundaries are placed alongstreets that are perpendicular to the MLR. Theyextend to streets parallel to the MLR. If all fourrifle companies of the battalion are present, threeriifle companies may be placed on the MLR and oneheld in reserve. If only three rifle companies :arepresent, two are usually placed on the MILR and oneis held in reserve. Each unit is assigned a clearlydefined area of responsibility and is organized as aself-sustained unit. These areas are mutually sup-porting and capable of all-around defense. To pro-vide fields of fire, open areas withbi the town aredefended from the near side. Reserves organizepositions across the rear part of the assigned area.These add depth to the position and give flankprotection.

b. Villages. The MILR may be outside the village,in which case a normal defensive position is or-ganized. It may be within the village to use itsnatural defensive capabilities. When the MLR iswithin the village, the defense resembles that of atown or city. Wlhen terrain features dominate thevillage, they also are secured (fig. 86).

538

EXPECTEDDIRECTIONOF ENEMYAPPROACH

od =L

J L ELl -- l

r?'~1 [7 , rFFigl'c 85. Dcfense in a city (schematic).

539

DIRECTIONOF ENEMYAPPROACH

Fig ''e 86. Defes il viae (schematic).

540

< t L C ~~~~~ ~ ~~~~i -.

//ti6Gn = </~~~~-

540

550. USE OF WEAPONS

a. Units prepare for speedy movement of sup-porting weapons to altelnate and supplementarypositions. Such prepalrations include cutting pas-sages through buildings. When fields of fire areshort within the built-up area, machine guns maybe used singly. These weapons are sited to placeflanking fire on streets and to secure interlockingbands of fire across the front and flanks of theposition. Machine guns assigned close defensivemissions are eml)laced on or near grlolnd level tocommand avenues of approach. Rear machine gunsmay provide long-range fires from upper stories ofwell-constructed buildings.

b. If the 81-nunm mortars cannot be fired bybattery? they may be divided into sections with onesquad in direct support of each front-line company.

c. Tanks cover street intersections, street barri-cades, open streets, parks, and other areas alongwhich enemy armor can approach. When enemyalrmor is not: a great threat, tanks may engage targetsof opportunity. The built-up area and the debrisfrom destroyed buildings limit tank maneuvera-bility. For that reason, tanks normally are locatedin or near direct firing positions.

551. FIRE PLAN

If the MLR is along a street, the fires of automaticweapons are coordinated on the street. Barricadesfor machine guns are constructed in entrances tobuildings or other places far enough from street in-

541

tersections to be out of the line of fire directed downthe approaches. Concentrations are planned to coverhostile assembly areas and approaches to the posi-tion, to limit penetrations, and to support counter-attacks. Barrages cover approaches like streets,open areas, and areas of light construction.

552. BATTALION RESERVES

Reserve elements, after preparing their positions,select and prepare concealed routes for counterat-tack. When necessary, passages are cut throughbuildings. After organizing its assigned area, thereserve unit may be assembled in an area from whichit can move to reinforce front-line companies, or itmay move to other prepared positions in the rear ofthe battalion area. Sumaill holding garrisois are leftin each defense area. Elements of the reserve maybe employed initially on security missions.

Section XIII. DEFENSE AGAINST AIRBORNE ATTACK

553. FRONT-LINE BATTALIONS

The front-line battalion in sustained defense dis-poses its units to cover by fire all or most of itsassigned area. Therefore, it is seldom practicablefor an attacker to lahind airborne troops in such anarea. If a landing is attempted there, all troops con-tinue to occupy their positions and destroy the at-tacker by fire. If this fails, the battalion reservecommmpalny counterattacks.

542

554. BATTALIONS IN REAR AREAS

Units in rear areas are used in whole or in partto defend against airborne operations.

a. During Hostile Reconnaissance. Concealmentand camouflage neutralize air reconnaissance. Ex-tensive dummy positions are constructed. Duringair bombardment, troops take cover, fire on low-fly-ing hostile planes only if ordered, and keep readyto meet an attack. Movement necessary during abombardment is made quickly in dispersed forma-tions and by covered or concealed routes.

b. lDufriag Hostile Landings.. The defender triesto destroy the attacker duing and immediately afterhis landing. All defending troops near the landingimmediately resist, regardless of their own numberor the size of the hostile attack. Units already onthe ground have a temporary superiority in combatpower over those just landed or attempting to land.The attacker's aircraft can give little close supportto landing groullps util they are well along in re-organization and assembly. Before this their exactdispositions are not known to their air units. Dur-ing the initial landings airborne troops are particu-larly vulnerable to coumiterattack by armoredvehicles. The defender uses all available armoredvehicles immediately, withount extensive reconnais-sance, to destroy landing groups and their equipmentas soon as the landing is made.

c. Counterattack. Should the attacker gain hisobjective and land reinforcements, the defender de-stroys or captures him and regains the lost area.The commander may launch an immediate counter-attack or le may occupy a defensive position to block

543

furthlle hostile advance and to form a base forcounter/httack by a larger force. In either case allavailable fire is used to prevent the attacker fromassembling and reorganizinlg.

555. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE AGAINST AIRBORNEATTACK

a. Because parachute troops can land almost any-where, defending troops cannot be disposed to bringcoordinated fire on all of them as they descend.Plans provide for an immediate counterattack, care-ful reconnaissance for firing positions and routes,provisions for a mobile reserve. establishllent of awarning system with observation and surveillance ofthe entire area, and preparation of concealed andcamouflaged defensive works. Plans of fire andmaneuver are prepared and rehearsed so that friendlyelements do not fire into one another. The size ofthe area defended, its road net. and the availabletransportation and conlltlllllication influence the balt-talion commander's plans. He may hold the bulkof his forces mobile after establishing a warning sys-tem; he may assign small fixed defensive groups tothe important areas, holding out one or more mobilereserves: or he may divide his entire battalion intodefendiiig groups, uand assign each group an1 impor-tant area.

b. Rapid comnnunication between the battalionobservation posts and higher echelons is essential.Wire comnmnication may be destroyed by enemy air-borne troops; therefore, radio, motor messengers, andpyrotecllnic and other visual signals are provided toall elements.

544

c. Alertness is required in all echelons. Observ-ers in each area are constantly on duty to warn ofair or ground attack from anly direction. There is nofront, and each unit must be prepared to strike inany direction.

Section XIV. PERIMETER DEFENSE

556. GENERAL

In a 1peilnieter defense, a unit is disposed so thatit is able to stop with equal efficiency an enemy attackfrom any direction. In close terrain it may benecessary to organize the perimeter similar to a sus-tained-defense. When the terrain permits, the per-imeter is organized flexibly and in depth. This typeof perimeter defense uses to a greater advantage themobility of alrmored units. Security is aggressiveand planned to gain early information of the enemyand direction of his attack. A perimeter defense isconducted generally the same as other defensivesituations.

Section XV. OPERATIONS AGAINST GUERILLAS ORIRREGULAR FORCES

557. GENERAL

a. Guerillas and irregular forces normally operateas independent or semi-independent groups. Theymay be political refugees, malcontents, specialists insubversive activity, or bands of former regulars,dispersed in regular conflict and evading capture.The extent of their activities depends on the qualityof leadership, supplies, communication, and the

545

geography of the area. The principal purposes oftheir actions are to prevent the movement of sup-plies, troops, and reinforcements; to disrupt anddestroy communications; and to cause a diversionof forces from the main battle area by persistentharassment and sabotage.

b. Their activity may be either small nuisanceraids or large scale attacks on key installations,supply dumps, or troop units. Their efforts areusually most effective when directed and coordinatedby the highest authority against targets of strategicimportance. Normally individual members of thegroup disperse before and immediately after anattack. Control of the group is maintained, how-ever, to insure proper direction of subsequent opera-tions. Every effort is made to achieve surprise bysuperiority in numbers at the time and place ofattack. Emphasis is placed on small-unit leader-ship, careful planning, and accurate and timely in-telligence. It is essential, from the guerilla's pointof view, that the attack be made under circumstanceswhich permit them to break off the engagement atwill and to avoid prolonged combat. Because oftheir lack of weapons, supplies, communication, andadministrative echelons, they do not enter sustainedcombat.

558. EFFECT OF GUERILLA ACTIVITY AGAINST AR-MORED INFANTRY

Thle operations of hostile guerillas can affectarmored infantry units by-

a. Forcing the use of armored infantry in anorganized campaign against the guerillas.

546

b. Causing armored infantry to be used in apassive defense and occasional direct attack againstguerillas who may operate behind friendly lines.

c. Forcing dissipation of armored infantry in adefense of its elements while operating with thearmored division on exploitation or pursuit missions.

559. OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

Armored infantry is normally committed againstguerilla forces as it is in any offensive action. How-ever, special emphasis must be placed on rapid move-ment to the area of contemplated attack and gain-ing all the surprise possible, and a nmaximun effortis made to surround the guerilla forces. Guerillaforces that are not surrlollled and either killed orcalltured, quickly withdraw, regioup, and attackelsewhere. Normally guerilla forces operate fromand attack in terrain that is wooded, mllountalinouls,swampy, or otherwise inaccessible. Armored car-riers and attached tanks in any numlber normallyare not used. Movement and fighting is on foot;communication is by dismounted mieans. Care mustbe taken however that arlllored carriers, tanks. andwheeled vehicles are adequately guarded. Duringmovemlent, security is obtained by advance. flank.and real guards, and by reconnaissance patrols andobservers. The size of the security force may varyfrom a few men to a large part of the whole coin-mand, depending on the degree of contact with thehostile force and knowledge of the enenlmy's locationand dispositions. When intelligence reports indi-cate contact is imminent, the security forces are in-creased. When contact is gained and the main body

547

engaged, security of the flanks and rear becomes im-perative. The reconnaissance platoon is suitablefor reconnaissance and security missions during allphases of operations where the road net is adequate.Foot troops are used in areas that are impassableto motorized or mechanized elements.

560. EMPLOYMENT

a. Speed and aggressiveness are imperative whenguerilla forces are contacted. The main objective isto encircle and close the escape routes available tothem. This is done before a coordinated reactionto the encirclement can be accomplished, especiallyif tactical surprise has been obtained. Less aggres-sive action, such as a detailed search, gives theguerillas time to react or escape. Commanders mustbe bold and determined in their decisions. Unlessencirclement is achieved by the main force, premnn-ture aggressive action by forces unable to finish de-struction before nightfall is unsound. In general,when contact is made with unalerted guerillas orirregular forces lite in the day, it is better to com-plete the encirclement during darkness than to beginaction that cannot be completed before dark. P're-mature combat is likely to put the enemy to flightbefore decisive action can be taken by adequate forces.Carefully calculated action, exact timing, and speedare essential. When circumstances require combatwith forces that cannot be destroyed or encircledbefore darkness, contact is maintained throughoutthe night. The enemy can be expected to attemptescape during the night or to thin out his forces dur-ing daylight and to break contact during darkness.548

b. Pursuit is vital to the maintenance of contactand is launclhed when guerillas or irregular forcesattempt to flee, day or night. Once the wain enemyforces have started moving, they are kept movinguntil they are finally brought to decisive action.During the action, the commander is wvell forwardwhere he can observe the action. He issues his at-tack order from such a point. Armored infantrydtoes not return fire from enelmy long-range weapons,but moves rapidly until within snmali arms range ofthe enemy positions.

c. Lower rfit colllllandes observe the advancingriflemlen closely. They influence the action byaggressively executing their superior's orders andby immediately using their own initiative.

561. OPERATIONS AGAINST ORGANIZED POSITIONS

Guerilla bases that are needed for their futureoperation are defended with tenacity and violence.They are well organized for a strong and protracteddefense, and unlike lightly arnled mobile strikingbands, make full use of available heavy equipmentlike artillery, heavy mortars, and flame throwers.Tlheir leadership in these defenses is bold and in-telligent. Operations against these positions areplanned and executed with the saume thoroughnessand coordination as any coordinated attack.

562. ACTION AGAINST GUERILLAS OPERATING BE-HIND FRIENDLY LINES

Conditions that favor large-scale guerilla activitybehind friendly lines are areas of rugged terrain,

549

roads that are narrow and winding, and centers ofpopulation that are hostile. Personnel of thearmored infantry unit mulst be psychologically pre-parled to meet sudden attacks. All- commandersdown to the squad leader must be impressed withthe need for secrecy, particularly about troop move-melnts; for alertness and readiness in case of suddenattacks; and the use of roads and trails that offerthe least conceallent for guerillas. All trucks orcarriers that move in guerilla territory should havetarpaulins or other covers in place to conceal troopsor cargo.

563. ACTION AGAINST GUERILLAS WHILE IN EX-PLOITATION OR PURSUIT

a. Pursuit and exploitation missions that extendwell within enemy rear areas make the long columnsof combat and supply vehicles especially vulnerableto attack. Combat echelons rely on speed and sur-prise in the captule of objectives.

6. Supply echelons are largely dependent on thecombat units for protection. Truck convoys mov-ilg to and from supply dumps may need combattroops. Individual velicular movement and smallconvoys are kept to the minimum. Reconnaissanceof areas already overrun must be continuous. Lightailcraft are useful for this purpose. While tileattack is moving ahead, supporting supply vehiclesremain as close as practicable to combat echelonsfor protection.

c. During the attack and until the entire area issubjugated, every member of armored infantry

550

units is prepared to meet sudden and concen-trated guerilla attack. Individual and crew-servedweapons must be in a state of constant readiness.Disabled vehicles are towed forward with the mainattacking force or are destroyed rather than left tofall into the hands of guerillas. Radio provides theonly reliable means of communication and is keptin a constant state of readiness and repair. Allmoves (administrative or tactical) use combat for-mations. Vigilance is never relaxed against in-filtrating guerillas or hostile civilian informers.Liaison with friendly combat aviation units mustbe close. both for support and for high speed airreconnaissance.

564. INTELLIGENCE AND COUNTERINTELLIGENCE

a. Current and accurate information is difficult toobtain because of the very nature of irregular forces.Their organization is loose and flexible and the com-piling of accurate orler-of-battle intelligence isdifficult. They usually lack standard unifolms andinsignia, making the identification of individualsand units a problem. Their high mobility, light andirregular equipment, hit-and-run tactics, and abilityto disperse as individuals or very small groups alsocomplicates identification. Agents an d informersare reluctanult to give information for fear of reprisalsby the irregular forces.

b. In spite of these difficulties, accurate and timelyintelligence can be produced. As in other opera-tions, the individual soldier is very valuable in col-lecting enemy infornation. Lower unit commanders

551

and their troops immediately report all observationsof the enemy and the terrain. Prisoners of war,deserters, repatriates, local inhabitants, and cap-tured documents are excellent sources of information.Secret agents are extremely valuable. They canpenetrate positions not accessible to uliformed troopsand are most useful if drawn from the areas wherethe irregular forces are located. Their selection,training, briefing, and handling are conducted ulnderimilediate supervision of the intelligence officer.Knowledge of their activities is restricted to thoseindividuals requiring it in line of duty.

c. Irregular forces invariably have a highly or-gallized espionage system. Routine counterintelli-gence measures are supplemented to prevent theenemy from gaining information of plans and activi-ties, and to destroy the effectiveness of his intelli-gence system.

Section XVI. OPERATIONS THROUGH MINE FIELDS

565. LOCATING MINE FIELDS

a. FMI 531 covers methods of detecting minn fields.b. AMine fields should be expected in the following

locations:(1) In areas of prepared enemy defenses.(2) On avenues of approach to enenly positions.(3) NTear enemy antitank guns.(4) On beaches and just off shore (figs. 87 and

88).

552

'n

*0-

K yI +- 5

00-. /.., x~~~~['H~.~ '%

8°--51 3I3 ~~~~*~~ 0

4rp. -

2ji iC,'-.r

E~ r(U~~ ~ ~~ P0P

i!~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~t

os~~sjs~--jl--so 55z

c.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~'

/ "' / I c r.

5 4

~~~~~~

a ii

554

a. Nuisalice mines may be expected in the follow-ing locations:

(1) On roads.(2) On the shoulders of roads, especially at

turnouts, turns, and defenses.(3) In parking areas.(4) At culverts.(5) At crossroads and road junctions.(6) In areas favorable for troop concentrations.

566. ACTION ON ENCOUNTERING A MINE FIELD

a. If a mine field is detected before the unit hasbeen committed-

(1) A reconnaissance is made for possible enemyantitank guns and machine guns that maybe covering the field.

(2) The tanks support and cover by fire theinfantry's advance and reconnaissance ofthe mine field.

(3) A coordinated attack to establish a bridge-head over the mine'field may be required ifit is defended.

(4) One of the methods described in paragraph567 is used to breach the field.

b. Mine fields discovered during an attack mayor may not be covered by enemy fire. For minefields covered by fire, the following action is taken:

(1) If a tank or armored personnel carrier isdisabled by an exploding mine, nearby tanksstop and fire smoke to screen the disabledtank and, if necessary, themselves. All

555

reconnoiter by fire and observe for antitankguns that may be covering the mine field.

(2) Behind this smoke, the crew of the disabledtank or carrier usually evacuates the ve-hicle. However, if the tank's weapons arestill usable and the surrounding terraingives some cover or concealment, the crewmay continue to fight from the tank. Evac-uating crew members take cover promptly,because the mine field is probably coveredby mortars and by machine guns, sighted soas to fire effectively through smoke. Crewmembers must also beware of antipersonnelmines.

(3) Maneuvering tanks and carriers back tocover, following exactly the same route thatthey used to move forward.

(4) Neutralizing fire is placed on any enemyantitank guns located. This fire may besupplied by tanks, by the battalion mortarplatoon, by supporting artillery, or by othertroops in the area.

(5) If the disabled vehicle is not under heavyenemy fire, it is withdrawn by a tank re-covery vehicle, using a tow bar, or by an-other tank or carrier if no recovery vehicleis available. Crew members reconnoiter theterrain for mines before the recovery ve-hicle advances.

(6) R&onnaissance is begun immediately todetermine the edge, the depth, and the widthof the mine field.

556

567. BREACHING OF MINE FIELDS

After a mine field has been discovered and hasbeen carefully reconnoitered for forward edge,width, depth, additional obstacles, antitank guns,and antipersonnel mines, it may be breached in anumber of ways.

a. Probinig. This method is used by armored in-fantry or engineers as follows:

(1) Protected by darkness, smoke, or heavy fire,disnounted armored infantry move throughthe mine field and establish a bridgehead.

(2) Mines are located and removed by probingparties, using the methods prescribed in FM5- 31.

(3) Some tanks are immediately movedthrough the gap to provide antitank pro-tection in the bridgehead.

(4) The bulk of the tanks and carriers movethrough the gap to an assembly area withinthe bridgehead.

(5) The attack is continued.b. The Snake. A mine field may be breached by

use of an explosive snake. FM 5-31 gives a fulldescription of the operation.

c. Other Means. Each platoon of the armoredengineer battalion has an engineer armored vehicleequipped with various devices for mine detectionand clearing. These vehicles will gap mine fieldsbut must be given protective fires from behind thefield and. when possible, by armored infantrybridgeheads.

557

APPENDIX I

REFERENCES

1. ENGINEER

FM 5-25, EXPLOSIVES AND DEMOLI-TIONS.

FM 5-31, LAND MINES AND BOOBYTRAPS.

TM 5-271, LIGHT STREAM-CROSSINGEQUIPAGE.

2. FIELD ARTILLERY

FM 6-20, TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE.FM 6-130, FIELD ARTILLERY INTELLI-

GENCE.

3. INFANTRY

FM 7-10, RIFLE COMPANY, INFANTRYREGIMENT.

FM 7-15, HEAVY WEAPONS COMPANY,INFANTRY REGIMENT.

FM 7-20, INFANTRY BATTALION.FM 7-25, HEADQUARTERS COMPANY,

INFANTRY REGIMENT.T/O&E 7-25N, ARMORED INFANTRY

BATTALION.

558

T/O&E 7-26N, HEADQUARTERS ANDHEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COM-PANY, ARMORED INFANTRY BAT-T'ALION.

T/O&E 7-27N, RIFLE COMPANY, AR-MORED INFANTRY BATTALION.

4. ARMORED

FM 17-22, RECONNAISSANCE PLATOONAND RECONNAISSANCE COMPANY.

FM 17-32, TANK PLATOON AND TANKCOMPANY.

FM 17-33. TANK BATTALION.FM 17-34, AMPHIBIOUS TANK AND

TRACTOR BATTALION.FM 17-35, RECONNAISSANCE BATTA.L-ION, ARMORED D)IVISION.FM 17-50, LOGISTICS ARMORED DIVI-

SION.FM 17-70, SIGNAL COMMUNICATIONS IN

THE ARMORED DIVISION.FM 17-100, ARMORED DIVISION AND

COMBAT COMMAND.

5. SIGNAL

TM 11-2552, SOUND LOCATING SET GR-6.

6. MISCELLANEOUS

DICTIONARY OF UNITED STATES MILI-TARY TERMS FOR JOINT USAGE.

AR 345-5, PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT-PERSONNEL RECORDS.

559

AR 380-5, SAFEGUARDING MILITARYI NFORMATION.

SR 110-1-1, INDEX OF ARMY MOTIONPICTURES AND FIL-M STRIPS.

SR 310-20-3, MILITARY PUBLICATIONS.SR 310-20-4, MILITARY PUBLICATIONS.SR 320-5-1, UNITED STATES ARMY

TERMS.ATP, INFANTRY REGIMENT, T/O&E

7-11N.ATP, ARMORED INFANTRY BATTALION,

T/O&E 7-25N.

7. INDIVIDUAL SOLDIER

FM 21-8, MILITARY TRAINING AIDS.FM 21-18, FOOT MARCHES.

8. MILITARY INTELLIGENCE

FM 30-5, MILITARY INTELLIGENCE-COMBAT INTELLIGENCE.

FM 30-10, MILITARY INTELLIGENCE-OBSERVATION.

FM 30-25, MILITARY INTELLIGENCE-COUNTE RINTELLIGENCE.

9. SPECIAL OPERATIONS

FM 31-25, DESERT OPERATIONS.FM 31-35, AIR GROUND OPERATIONS.FM 31-50, ATTACK ON A FORTIFIED

POSITION AND COMBAT IN TOWNS.

560

10. AMPHIBIOUS

FMI 60-5, AMI'HIBIOUS OPERATIONS,BATTALION IN ASSAULT LANDINGS.

11. JUNGLE

FM 72-20, JUNGLE WARFARE.

12. FIELD SERVICE REGULATIONS

FM 100-5, OP'ERATIONS.

13. STAFF OFFICERS

FM 101-5, STAFF AND COMBAT ORDERS.FM 101-10, ORGANIZATION, TECHNICAL

AND LOGISTICAL DATA.

561

APPENDIX II

SQUAD, PLATOON, AND COMPANY ORDERS

Section I. SQUAD AND PLATOON ORDERS

1. SQUAD ATTACK ORDER

Based on the platoon attack order, the squadleader issues his attack order to all the men of hissquad. Wlhen his men cannot see their route ofadvance before the start of the attack, the squadleader supplements his order with a sketch slhowingthe important terrain features. Orders can be fol-lowed only when they are clear and definite enoughso that all men in the squad understand the squadmission and the plan for accomplishillg that mission.The squad leader's order includes:

a. Information of the enemy and friendly forces,including the location and proposed action of adja-cent squads.

b. Mission of the squad and the plan for itsaccomplishment.

c. Duties of individual members of the squad, toinclude instructions for reorganization on the objec-tive.

d. Employment or disposition of the squad'sarmored personnel carrier.

e. Details of tank-armored infantry teamwork.f. Necessary administrative details.g. Prearranged signals.h. Location of the squad and platoon leaders.

562

2. PLATOON ATTACK ORDER (Check list)

a. Based on the company attack order the platoonleader issues his order at a previously selected ob-servation post. He orients his squad leaders bypointing out important terrain features. Theplatoon order includes:

(1) All pertinent enemy information; infor-mation of our own troops, including thecompany objective, the missions of adjacentunits, and the support expected from ele-ments of the battalion mortar platoon, andthe artillery.

(2) Platoon objective, line of departure, hourof attack, formation, and direction ofattack.

(3) Method of attack (details of tank-armoredinfantry coordination).

(4) Line or area of departure for each squad,the mission or targets of each squad, secu-rity measures, and instructions for re-organization on the objective.

(5) Employment or disposition of the platoon'scarriers to include the use of vehicularweapons.

(6) Location of the battalion aid station, andother necessary administrative details.

(7) Communications instructions, includingprearranged signals for tank-armored in-fantry communication; the platoon leader'slocation; and the location of the companycommand post.

563

b. The platoon leader makes certain that all squadleaders understand the order. On receiving theorder, the squad leaders prepare for the attack.

Section II. ARMORED RIFLE COMPANY ORDERS FORATTACK AND DEFENSE

3. ATTACK

1. GENERAL SITUATIONa. Information of the enemy to include:

(1) Composition.(2) Location.(3) Strength.(4) Identification.

b. Information of friendly troops to include:(1) Mission and location of next higher

unit.(2) Mission and location of adjacent units.(3) Mission and location of supporting

units.(4) Mission and location of covering

forces.2. MISSION

a. Statement of the task to be accomplished bythe company.

b. Details of coordination to include:(1) Objective.(2) Time of attack.(3) Frontage.(4) Direction of attack.(5) Line of departure.(6) Boundaries.(7) Formation.

564

(8) Method of attack.(9) Utilization or disposition of carriers

to include details of employment ofvehicular weapons.

3. TASKS FOR SUBORDINATE UNITS(TACTICAL INSTRUCTIONS)

a. These tasks are given under as many letteredsubparagraphs as may be necessary, assign-ing one paragraph to each platoon orreinforced platoon and attached unit in asequence that designates the forwardelements first. The instructions giveninclude:(1) Organization of reinforced platoons.(2) Mission (objective).(3) Frontage of attack.(4) Direction of attack.(5) Reorganization on the objective.

a. Tactical instructions or information (exceptsignal instructions) common to two or moreunits, or to the entire company, not coveredelsewhere in paragraph 3 of the order. Theinstructions include:(1) Security measures.(2) Special measures for control and

coordination.4. ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICAL

MATTERS. Instructions of immediate impor-tance to tactical units concerning personnel, supply,and evacuation that are required for the operation.These include:

a. Arrangements for feeding.b. Arrangements for resupply.

565

c. Amount of ammunitionl to be carried afterdismounting from carriers.

d. Location of battalion aid station.5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS

a. Orders for the use of signal communicationto include:(1) Radio.(2) Wire.(3) Pyrotechnics.(4) Details of tank armored infantry com-

munication.(5) Communication security.

b. Command posts and axis of signal comlmuni-cation to include:(1) Location of battalion CP.(2) Location of company CP or where

messages will be sent.(3) Tentative location of the company

commander during the attack on theobjective.

4. DEFENSE

1: GENERAL SITUATIONa. Infolmation of the enemy to include:

(1) Composition.(2) Location.(3) Movemcnts.(4) Strength.(5) Identification.(6) Direction from which enemy attack is

expected.(7) Time when enemy attack is expected.

566

b. Information of friendly troops to include:(1) Mission and location of next higher

unit.(2) Mission and location of adjacent units.(3) Mission and location of supporting

units.(4) Missions and location of security forces.

2. MISSION.a. Statement of the tasks to be accomplished by

the company.b. Details of coordination to include-

(1) Formation.(2) Boundaries.(3) General trace of MLR (area to be out-

posted in mobile defense).(4) Limiting points.

3. TASKS FOR SUBORDINATE UNITS(TACTICAL INSTRUCTIONS).

a. These tasks are given under as many letteredsubparagraphs as may be necessary,;assign-ing one paragraph to each platoon and at-tached unit in a sequence that designates theforward elements first. The instructionsinclude:(1) Areas and missions of each rifle platoon.(2) Fire control, to include details relative

to tank fires and the calling for finalprotective fires.

m. Tactical instructions (except signal instruc-tions) common to two or more units, or tothe entire company, not covered elsewhere

567

In paragraph 3 of the order. The instruc-tions given include:(1) Security measures.(2) Organization of ground to include type

of emplacements and priorities ofwork.

(3) Location of mine fields and obstacles.(4) Disposition of carriers to include vehicu-

lar weapons.4. ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICAL

MATTERS. Instructions to tactical units concern-ing personnel, supply, evacuation, and traffic detailswhich are required for the operation. These include:

a. Arrangements for feeding.b. Amount of ammunition to be placed on

position.c. Battalion combat trains and arrangements

for the distribution of ammunition.d. Location of battalion aid station and com-

pany aid men.e. Sanitation measures.

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS.Orders relative to employment of means of signalcommunication to include:

a. Radio.b. Wire.c. Pyrotechnics.d. Communication security.e. Command posts.f. Location of comlpanyl and platoon command

posts.g. Alternate locations.

568

APPENDIX III

COMBAT FORMATIONS

Section I. COMBAT FORMATIONS-MOUNTED

1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The primary purpose of mounted drill in armoredinfantry units is to facilitate control ill combat. Thedrills prescribed here are battle formations at de-creased intervals. They are adaptable to any typeof armored infantry unit.

2. BASE

a. In general, during drill, the commannder'svehicle is the base element, except as otherwise shownin the figures in this appendix. He leads the unitill the direction and at the speed desired.

b. In column and echelon formations, the base isthe leading element.

c. In line, wedge, and diamond formations, thebase is normally the center or right center vehicle.

d. To gain proficiency in drill, base vehicles maybe rotated. All vehicles regulate and guide on thebase.

3. INTERVALS AND DISTANCES

a. In close order mounted drill, intervals and dis-tances are normally 25 yards. However, this dis-

93135S -51 37 569

tance may be varied to conform to the tacticalsituation, terrain, and mission.

b. In extended order drill, intervals and distancesare variable, usually 50 to 100 yards.

c. For march formations see paragraph 49, chap-ter 2.

d. Increase or decrease of intervals or distancesmay be obtained at anvy time by the command orsignal EXTEND or CLOSE.

e. On halting, intervals or distances are main-tained unless preceded by the command or signalCLOSE. If in extended order formation, on com-mand CLOSE intervals and distances are decreasedto those prescribed for close order drill; if in closeorder formation. on command CLOSE they are de-creased to 5 yards. When closed to 5 yards, nofurther evolutions of drill are executed. Close orderintervals and distances are taken upon moving outunless otherwise prescribed.

4. SPEED

a. In close and extended order drill, the base%vehicle moves at a uniform rate of speed (par. 2).

b. Other vehicles, when necessary, vary theirspeed gradually during movements to conform withthe base or to complete movements.

5. CHANGES IN DIRECTION

a. In changing the direction of a unit, the leaderconducts the base element in the new direction onthe arc of a circle so that the pivot is able to turnon the minimum of radius.

570

b. If the unit is in a column formation, vehiclesbehind the base change direction successively in thesame manner and on the same ground as the base.

a. If the llnit is in any formation except column,other vehicles regulate on the base and maintain theirrelative positions.

6. PLATOON FORMATIONS

The following formations are readily adaptableto the armored infantry rifle platoon (fig. 89):

a. Platoon; column. Each vehicle placed one be-hind another.

b. Platoon line. All vehicles of the platoonabreast of each other.

a. Platoon wedge. Two vehicles forward on line,with remaining two vehicles displaced one each tothe right and left rear.

d. Platoon echelon left (right). Each vehicle dis-placed progressively to the left (right) rear of thebase in the platoon.

e. Platoon diawmond. Base vehicle forward, withsecond and third vehicles echeloned to the right andleft rear respectively; the fourth central rear of thefirst three.

7. METHODS OF ASSUMING FORMATIONS

a. Line and wedge formations are gained from anycolumn formation by a fan-shaped deployment to-ward either side of the base. The base vehicle con-tinues its movement. The second vehicle moves tothe right of the first and the third and fourth

571

PLATOON ii,DIAMOND

PLATOON [IECHELON

LEFT E '

PLATOON []ECHELON

RIGHT []

PLATOON W EWEDGE E

PLATOON E E ELINE 1

PLATOON i[COLUMN i

Figu,,e 89. Armored infantry rifle platoon in basic formnations.

572

vehicles move to the left of the first (or base) vehicle.These vehicles move at increased speed until in theirnew position. Diamond formation is gained in thesame manner except that the fourth vehicle takesposition behind the base (fig. 89). When a forma-tion is to be formed in any other direction than thedirection of march, the head of the column should beturned in the new direction before the deploymentis ordered.

b. Columnn formation is formed from any otherformation by movement of the vehicles to theirproper positions in rear of the base, each vehiclemoving by the most direct route.

a. Echelon, eight (left) is gained from anycolumn formation by the vehicles behind the baseplacing themselves progressively to the right (left)rear of the base. From other formations echelon isgained as above, with the vehicles moving to theirrespective positions' by the most direct route.

8. LIGHT MACHINE-GUN SQUAD

The light machine-gun squad may occasionally begiven a different numerical designation for drill pur-poses. Such variety in training accustoms thissquad to frequent changes of position in the variousplatoon formations that are normlnal in combat.

9. COMPANY DRILL

a. The platoon is the basic unit for drill in combatformations. When terrain permits, company drillis effective in perfecting coordination among the

573

platoons. Company formations may include any ofthe following:

(1) Column of platoons. Each platoon in lineand placed one behind another.

(2) {ine of platoons. All platoons in columnand abreast.

(3) Line of platoons in wedge or diamond. Allplatoons in wedge, or diamond formation,and abreast.

(4) Column of platoons in wedge or diamond.All platoons in wedge or diamond forma-tion, and placed one behind another.

6. The company may also adopt company wedge,diamond, or echelon formations, employing the threerifle platoons and the mortar platoon in the samemanner that the rifle platoon drills with three riflesquads and a light machine-gun squad.

e. When present at mounted drill, vehicles incompany headquarters take positions as prescribedby the company commander or are attached to pla-toons of the company for drill.

10. MORTAR PLATOON

The mortar platoon of the armored infantry riflecompany may take part in mounted drill using thesame formations employed by the rifle platoon.When this platoon conducts mounted drill, the 14_ton truck of the platoon headquarters is consideredNo. 1, and the three squads as No's. 2, 3, and 4vehicles.

574

11. SPECIAL MOVEMENTS AND COMMANDS

a. To assemble.(1) Being in disorder or dispersed, the leader

commands or signals ASSEMBLE, andhalts or moves slowly forward.

(2) In the platoon all vehicles assemble, incolumn. behind their leader in normal order.

(3) In the company, each platoon is assembledby its platoon leader in an orderly manner.It is then conducted in the most convenientmanner toward the company conmmander,forming line of platoons, unless the signalASSEMBLE is followed by the signalfor some other formation. The companycoiimmander indicates the base platoon andcauses it to follow him or designates itslocation: the plhttoons form in normal or-der, unless otherwise directed.

b. Movpement to flank or rear.(1) Simultaneous changes in direction of

vehicles to either flank or to the rear areexecuted on the command or signal:BY THE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK,MAIRCH, or TO THE REAR. MARCH.Vehicles execute TO THE REAR by turn-ing to the left about. Platoon and highercommanders proceed as rapidly as possibleto their positions at the head of their units.Vehicles within the platoon resume theirnormal positions upon the next change information.

575

(2) If it is desired to change the direction oflarger elements simultaneously, the signalsare those for changing direction precededby the signal for the element. For ex-ample, to have all platoons in a companymove to the right flank, the signal is:PLATOONS, CHANGE DIRECTIONTO THE RIGHT, MARCH.

c. Righlt (left) front into line. Line may beformed from column on either side of leader by thecommand: RIGHT (LEFT) FRONT INTO LINE,MARCH, or the signal for LINE followed by point-ing to the right (left) front. At this command allleaders and elements move out successively to theright (left) front from column in time to come upabreast on the line formed by the leader when hehalts. The interval between vehicles is 5 yards unlessotherwise prescribed.

d. To disperse.(1) At the command or signal DISPERSE,

vehicles in a platoon acting alone disperseirregularly so that they are not less than50 yards from any other vehicle and halt.If the platoon is part of a company forma-tion, platoons are led by the platoon leadersiapidly in different directions and vehiclesdisperse as in the platoon acting alone.The distance between platoons is not lessthan 50 yards.

(2) This movement is for use in any emergencywhen troops are in a close order or marchformation and it is desired to spread out thevehicles rapidly to minimize the effect of a

576

surprise attack by air or artillery fire. Ve-hicles are halted under cover and placed inpositions of readiness to meet allny suchattack.

e. To follow leader.(1) To change formation quickly or to bring

order out of confusion, the leader movesoff in the desired direction a'nd commandsor signals: FORMATION, FOLLOW ME.

(2) In the platoon, all vehicles move rapidlyand take up the designated formation.

(3) In the company, each platoon leader, ifthe platoon is not in the desired formation,commands or signals: FORMATION, FOL-LOW ME, and then conducts it toward thecompany commander. The platoon firstarriving near the company commander be-comes the base of the new formation.

f. To rally.(1) Being in disorder or dispersed, the leader

commands or signals RALLY, and movesslowly forward or halts.

(2) In the platoon, all vehicles move rapidlyand form wedges behind their leader in anyorder. Vehicles within the platoon resumetheir normal positions on the next changein formation or on the command AS-SEMBLE.

(3) In the company, each platoon is rallied byits platoon leader whllile moving and is con-ducted rapidly toward the company com-mander, forming line of platoons in wedges.The first platoon to reach the company com-

577

mander forms behind him and other pla-toons form on the nearest flank.

(4) Rally is used when a rapid reforming isrequired to renew the attack or to meet animmediate hostile threat.

Section II. COMBAT FORMATIONS-DISMOUNTED

12. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This section is a guide for the armored infantryrifle company commander, platoon leaders, andsquad leaders in the training of the squad and theplatoon in combat formations. It covers the varioustypes of squad and platoon formations and pre-scribes a uniform method of conducting drill inthese formations over open ground and variedterrain. The formations are designed specificallyfor the armored infantry rifle squad platoon.

13. TRAINING

Initial training in squad and platoon combatformations is conducted on open terrain, like a paradeground. As soon as individuals and units have be-come proficient in assuming the formations, the drillis conducted on varied terrain to obtain practicaltraining in the application of the formations to theterrain. On completing the training period, unitsprogress to tactical exercises involving an imaginaryor simulated enemy.

14. ARMORED INFANTRY RIFLE SQUAD

a. Organni'ation. The rifle squad is composed often men, numbered for drill purposes as follows:

578

1. Squad leader.2. Rifleman.3. Rifleman.4. Rifleman.5. Rifleman.6. Rifleman.7. Automatic rifleman.8. Ammunition bearer.9. Assistant squad leader.10. Driver.

The driver of the squad vehicle remains with hisvehicle and does not take part in dismounted drill.For organization of the light machine-gun squadrefer to paragraph 8, this appendix. No. 7 andNo. 8, the automatic rifleman and ammunition bearer,are referred to herein as the AR team.

b. Conduct of drill.(1) Combat drill training is conducted at ease.

It stresses precision and discipline.(2) Initial training is conducted at a walk. As

soon as individuals understand the forma-tions, the training tempo is progressively in-creased until the movements are executed ata run.

(3) For drill purposes, the normal interval be-tween men is approximately 5 paces; how-ever, this distance may be varied.

(4) In the initial stages of instruction, the squadleader gives oral commands accompaniedby the appropriate arm-and-hand signals.

(5) Duties within the squad should be rotatedoften to promote interest and to teach eachindividual the entire drill.

579

(6) When executing movements, the rifle andautomatic rifle are carried at port arms.When the squad is halted, rifles are broughtto order arms, the automatic rifle to slingarms, and all men remain at ease.

(7) The squad leader may leave his normalposition in the formation and place himselfwhere he can best control his unit.

(8) Members of the squad base their positionsand movements on the number 2 man unlessthey are directed otherwise by the squadleader.

c. Observation and control.(1) At all times the squad provides observation

to the front, flanks, and rear. When halted,men face and observe in the directions indi-cated in figures 91 and 92. While moving,men observe in the same direction.

(2) The squad leader exercises control over hisSquad by the use of oral commands or arm-and-hand signals. When halted or mov-ing, individuals of the squad frequently looktoward the squad leader for instructions.

d. March colunnn. To form march columnl. thesquad leader commands and signals: MARCHCOLUMN, MOVE. At the command MOVE. thesquad forms as shown in figure 90.

e. Squad column. To form squad conlumn, thesquad leader comlnlllnds and signals: SQUADCOLUMN, MOVE. At the command MOVE, No.2 moves forward 30 paces and other men take posi-tions as shown in figure 91. In both squad column

580

11

MARCH COLUMN

I'igtre !1. 9 qu rld ill a.IN rchl colulmn .

and squad diamoind formations, tile even numberedIlten move to the right and the odd ilumbered menmove to the left of the squad leader.

Figure 01. Squad cotumn.

/. Squad diamond. To form squad diamond, thesquad leader commands and siguals: SQUAD DIA-MOND, MOVE. At the command MOVE, No. 2

582

00 r

5fi2

moves forward 15 paces and the other members takepositions as shown in figure 92.

g. As skirmishers. To form skirmishers, the squadleader commands and signals: AS SKIRMISHERS,MOVE. At the command MOVE, the men assumethe positions shown in figure 93.

It. As skirmishers, AR team right (left). Toform as skirmishers, AR team right, the squad

164

o

FiDure 92. Sqwlitd diamond.

583

leader commands and signals: AS SKIRMISHERS,AR TEAM RIGHT, MOVE. At the commandMIOVE, men assume the positions shown in figure 94.To form as skirmishers with the AR team on theleft, the commands are: AS SKIRMISHERS, ARTEAM LEFT, MOVE. At the command MOVE,men assume the positions shown in figure 94.

ao *0

Figure 93. Squad as skirmishers.

i. Movementt. After the squad bas been trainedto assume formations promptly, training in move-ment is begun. The squad is trained to move in anydirection and, while moving, to change from one

584

formation to another upon comlmald ald signal ofthe squad leader. Training progresses until a dis-persed and disorganized squad is able to assume acombat formation promptly Upon a command orsignal indicating the direction it is to face and the

t®

AS SKIRMISHERS c( RAR TEAM RIGHT

AS SKIRM SHERSAR TEAM LEFT

Figure 94. Squad as sxirnOishcrs-AT? team right and left.

desired formation. The squad may move as a unit,by groups, or by individuals. Movement may bemade by rushes, by walking, or by crawling.

(1) Being in any formultion at a halt, to movethe squad forward, the squad leader coln-

9::35So--51--::S 585

nands and signals FORWARD. When thecommand has been given the squad movesforward, basing its rate and direction ofmovement upon that of the squad leader ora previously designated individual.

(2) To halt the squad, the squad leader com-mands and signals HALT. At the com-mand HALT, the squad stops in place.

(3) To assemble the deployed squad, the squadleader commands and signals ASSEMBLE.Men move at a run and assemble in tacticalcolumn formation facing the squad leader.

15. ARMORED INFANTRY LIGHT MACHINE-GUNSQUAD

a. The light machine-gull squad consists of twelvemen, listed and numbered for drill purposes below:

1. Squad leader 7. Ammunition handler2. Rifleman 8 Machine gunner3. Rifleman 9. Assistant gunner4. Rifleman 10. Ammunlition handler5. Machine gunner 11. Assistant squad6. Assistant guller leader

12. DriverThe driver relllains with his vehicle and normallydoes not take part in dismounted drill.

b. When the platoon moves dismounted the lightmachine-gun squad normally moves in march column(fig. 95). Other colmbat formations are not appli-cable to this squad, but members of the squad aretrained in their use as a general familiarizationmeasure.

586

H

w H~~~~.-

H5 F

n~E

Figure 95. Light machine-gun squad in march column.

587

16. RIFLE PLATOON

a. Orqali2zation.

(1) The rifle platoon is composed of a platoonheadquarters, three rifle squads, and anLMG squad. Squads within the rifle pla-toon are designated as the first squad, secondsquad, third squad, and LMG squad.

(2) Symbols for the platoon leader and the pla-toon sergeant are shown in figure 96.

PLATOON LEADER

PLATOON SERGEANTFigure 96. Slyimbols rtlpreslttingl pleltooi leader (id platoon

sergeant.

b. Conduct of drill.

(1) Training in combat formations for the rifleplatoon is designed to teach the relative po-sitions of the squads in the platoon forma-tions. Platoon drill is conducted in thesame general manner as for the squad (par.14, this app.). The platoon deploys withsufficient distance between squads to permitmovement. The arm-and-hand signal PLA-TOON need not precede armnn-and-handsignals for the platoon. It is assumed thatsignals given by the platoon leader are in-tended for the entire platoon unless they arepreceded by the arm-and-hand signal

588

SQUAD. Oral commands and arm-and-hand signals are used for this phase of in-struction as in squad drill. For drill pur-poses, the distances between squads are fixedfor each formation, although they may bealtered to conform to the size of the drillfield. The drill is conducted AT EASE.The squads move at a run when chllangingformation.

(2) When three squads are abreast, the centerrifle squad is the base squad. In all otherformations, the leading or right leadingrifle squad is the base squad.

(3) The squad forllations within the platoonformation may vary; however, the LMIGsquad ordinarily uses the march columnformation.

c. Obsercation andl control.(1) In platoon drill, each squad within the pla-

toon observes to its front, flanks, and rearas in squad drill.

(2) Squad leaders observe and control theirsq alds and maintain visual contact withthe platoon leader.

(3) The platoon leader places himself in a po-sition from which he can best control theplatoon.

(4) The platoon sergeant and assistant platoonsergeant assist the platoon leader in the con-trol of the platoon. Their positions are notfixed.

d. larch column. To form a march column, theplatoon leader commands and signals MARCH COL-

589

UMN, MOVE. At the command MOVE, the pla-toon forms as shown in figure 97.

e. Platoon column. To form platoon column, theplatoon leader commands and signals PLATOONCOLUMN, MIOVE. At the command MOVE, theplatoon forms as shown in figure 97.

f. Platoon live. To form platoon line, the pla-toon leader commands and signals PLATOONLINE, MOVE. At the command MOVE, the pla-toon forms as shown in figure 97.

g. Platoon vee. To form platoon vee, the platoonleader commands and signals PLATOON VEE,MOVE. At tile command IOVE, the platoon formsas shown in figure 98.

h. Platoon Sedge. To form platoon wedge, theplatoon leader commands and signals PLATOONWEDGE, MOVE. At the commlnd MOVE, theplatoon forms as shown in figure 99.

i. Platoon echelon right (left). To form platoon

echelon right (left), the platoon leader commandsand signals PLATOON ECHELON RIGHT(LEFT), MOVE. At the commlalnd MOVE, theplatoon forms as shown in figure 99.

j. Movement.(1) After the platoon has been trained to as-

sume the basic formations promptly on com-maud, it is trained to move, and whilemoving, to change from one formation toanother. The rules for moving and haltingare, in general, the same as for the squad.In changing from one formation to another,the base squad sometimes changes to con-form to the rules as explained in paragraph

590

m E3 R SUAD ' -

M5 n LMG SOUAD

LM O , SQUAD

TEAM m LMG SQUAD T2

TEA [] R SQUAD

m iR

[!]E!] )-YADS& YARDS

[] -r4i R SQUAD A

[]o[] .. ..--] 00

MARCH COLUMN - PLATOON LINE

Figure 97. I'latoon fornations-,ma'chk column, platoon col-ilUln, and platoon line.

591

2, this appendix. For instance, in changingfrom platoon vee to platoon line, the rightleading rifle squad remains the base squaduntil the line formation is completed; thenthe center rifle squad becomes the base squad.The base squad is redesignated when themovement is completed.

(2) A suggested sequence for drill in changingformations is indicated in figures 100-104.The sequence takes the platoon successivelyfrom platoon cohumnm through platoon eche-lon, wedge, vee, line, and back to column.

R SQouAD R SQUAD0 7

e 0 YARDS

40 YARDS

n LMG SQUAD

40 YARDS

0 R SQUAD

Figtur'e 98. Platoon jormlttiotns-platoon uee.

592

R SQUAD

40 YARDS

_ 40 YARDS 40 YARDS4

R SQUAD R SQUAD

LMG SQUAD

PLATOON WEDGE A

R SOUAD _ YARDS 1

A SQUAD - -

140 YARDS

R SQUAD

PLATOON ECHELONRIGHT (LEFT / /

Figure 99. Platoon formalionsl p7atoon wcedge and platoonechelon right (left).

593

BASE

A A

f/// o S UAD X

: L

Figure 100. Platoon mloven/lelt.--platoonl column to plaltoonechelon right.

594

t R SQUAD

\N 0

FiglelE 101. P'latoon lOlceil)lts--plefooi cch¢clioll to plItoon¢eedge.

595

r-

596

( ). SUAD I U ) SDUAD

FiCt I 0.2. Platoon inovrements-platoon wedge to platoonvee.

596

4

0WPN$ SCUAO

0

I I

II

Figure 103. Platoon mlovcmuents platoon vee to platoon ltite.

597

0

0

\*/

( / \ CO ga..> , \.A- / .-QAD

.G LMS QUAD

Figure 104. Platoon mnovcmlclts-platoon line to platooncolamln.

598

APPENDIX IV

UNIT JOURNAL'

Organization----From: (Date and hour)To: (Date and hour)2

Place: Location of unit CP

Time ISerial Tine Action

u O, no.4 dated lTncidents, messages, orders, etc.6 takenl

1700 - . 1 .I 1600 CCA 1st Armd Di--Co STFA Ist Armd Engr Bnreverts CCA controlvic Gettysburg 350750040600.

1730 2 1720 Co A 1st Armd Engr Bn- TSFCO report of CP IstArmd Inf Bn at 031900Sep. Alert unit formovement at 032230.

2200 3 2200 Ist Arcmd Inf Bn-Bn SCO. departed for CPCCA.

i. Normally olle journal is kept for the stalff by the S-1section. 'The S2 and S-3 sections may keel) an operatiolnaljournal ill addition.

2. Period Covered is usually 24 hlours.3. Time of receipt of an inolvening message or the time of

dispatch of ;n1 outgoing message..i. Consecutively numbered.5. Time information originated. Thus the entry shows

the time elapsed prior to receipt.

599

6. The first itemll nteled is the unilt to who1l the mels-sage is sent, or froln whonl the message (iame. This entryis followed by a synopsis of the message or document. Thejournal is suppllemenrted by a journal tile, which containscopies of all messages and docalnicils arranged in the se-quence of entry in the journal.

7. The following symbols may be used: MA-put on thesituation mlap; S-staff circulation in CP; T-informationsent to interested troops; F-copy filed in journal file.

600

APPENDIX V

UNIT REPORT

CLASSIFIC'ATION

Issuing headquartersPlace of issueDate and time

Unit Report No.Period covered: (date and time to date and time).Charts or maps:

(Omit subplaragraphs not applicable.)

1. ENE-MY.--(Indicate on map or overlay wherepossible.)

a. Units in contact.b. Enemy reserves that can affect our situation.c. Brief description of enemy activity during

period covered by report.d. Brief estimate of enemy strength, material

means, morale, and his probable knowledge ofour situation.

e. Conclusions covering courses of action open tothe enemy that can affect our mission (includ-ing the effect of time, space, terrain, presentknown dispositions, and other factors on eachsuch course of action) and the earliest esti-mated time at which the enemy can put eachinto effect.

9s13S'- 51--39 601

2. OWN SITUATION.a. Our front line or most advanced elements.b. Location of troops, command posts, boundaries.c. Location of adjacent units and supporting

troops.d Brief description of our operations during

period covered by report so that higher head-quarters may grasp and understand the pic-ture presented.

e. Concisely worded estimate of the combat efli-ciency of our command.

f. Results of operations during the period coveredby the report.

3. ADMIINISTRATION.-(Indicate on map oroverlay where possible.)

a. Personnel.(1) Strengths, records, and reports.(2) Replacements.(3) Discipline, law, and order.(4) Prisoners of war.(5) Burials and graves registration.(6) Morale and personnel services.(7) Civil affairs-military government.(8) Procedures.(9) Interior management.(10) Civilian employees.(11) Miscellaneous.

b. logistics.(1) Supply.(2) Evacuation and hospitalization.(3) Transportation.(4) Service.(5) Miscellaneous.

602 -

4. GENERBAL.--Pertinent comments not coveredelsewhere.

CommalnderAnnexesDistributionAnthentication

Note 1. Paragrlaph 1 is prepared by tile S -2.Note 2. Paragraph 2 is prepared by the S-3.Note S. Laragraph 3a is prepared by the S-1.Note 4. Paragiaph 31, is prepared by the S-1.Note 5. ParaIgr;plih 4 is fnr genelali commlents of the staff

illld the commlllallnder.Note 6. The Unit Report is consolidaited by one of the staff

members under tile supervision of the executive officer.Note 7. The UInit Report is submitted il form and detail

and at intervals prescribed by the healdquarters requiringthe report.

CLASSIFICATION

603

APPENDIX VI

ORDERSSection I. MARCH ORDER-ARMORED INFANTRY

BATTALION (CHECK LIST)

Note. Usually a battalion does not issue a complete opera-tion older for a movemellnt. A battalion uswlily disseminatesinformationl to its units )by means of oral orders, routeoverlays, march tables, or a combnlination of all three methods.When it is necessary for a battalion to issue a complete marchorder, the check list below can be used as a guide.

1. a. Information of the enemy.6. Information of friendly forces.

2. Method of movement.Formation.March objective or destination.Time of starting.Routes.Rate of march.Reference to march table if issued (Annex 1,

Mfarch Table) (fig. 105).3. Advance guard.

Flank guard.Rear guard.Reconnaissanle party.Billeting party.Any other details not covered in the standing

operating procedure.i. Plans for refueling during the march.

Disposition and composition of trains.Feeding arrangements.

604

STRIP MAP TO ACCOMPANY ANNEX I TO OPERATION OROER 2.

RJ 3 NOTE:THIS STRIP MAP CAN USUALLYBE PLACED ON THE REVERSESIDE OF THE MARCH TABLE IF

/ THE MARCH TABLE IS MIMEO-(SNOT TO SCALEI ,\ / ' GRAPHED OR PRINTED. INBE ADDED THIS CASE NO HEADING IS

REQUIRED.

I RP

X -/ JJ 463

Figtai 105. Strip inap to n(iromplil anl a(rchl table.

5. Plan of signal commnunication.Radio silence or restrictions on use of radio.I[essengers.

Location of CP before, during, and after themarch.

605

4 o

tOCI _

606

--~~~~~~~-.

-- ~~

00 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~0

Section II. BATTALION ATTACK ORDER (CHECK LIST)

CLASSIFICATION

BATTALION ATTACK ORDER (CHECKLIST)

MAPS: Identify maps referred to.TASK ORGANIZATION: List reinforced tank

and armored infantry rifle companies and unitstherein, units to be kept under battalion control, andcomposition of battalion combat and field trains.1. GENERAL SITUATION.

a. Enemy florces.b. Friendly forces.

(1) Situation and mission of combat commandand adjacent units.

(2) Supportinlg units: artillery, armored engi-neers, and other units,

(3) Coverinlg forces and other security elementsin the vicinity.

2. MISS1ON.a. A statement of the task to be accomplished by

the reinforced battalion. Include, so far as appro-priate, who, what, where, when, how, and why.

b'. Coordinatilg details applicable to the battalionas a whole like objectives, time of attack, formation,line of departure, direction of attack, time of attack,bomb line,. etc.

3. TASKS FOR SUBORDINATE UNITS.a. Use a subparagralph for instructions to each as-

saulting company or reinforced company.(1) Objectives.

608

(2) Zone of action.(3) Security or other special missions.

b. Use a subparagraph for instructions to the81-mm mortars, tanks in the supporting force, andvehicular machine guns.

(1) Plan of supporting fires.(2) Position areas.(3) Targets or sectors of fire.(4) Conditions for opening fire.(5) Displacement (particularly 81-mm mor-

tars).c. Use a subparagraph for instructions to each

other organic or attached unit.d. Use the last subparagraph before x for instruc-

tions to the reserve.(1) Location.(2) Contemplated employment.(3) Security or other special missions.

x. In subparagraph x give tactical instruction(other than signal) applicable to two or more units.These include:

(1) Alterations to standing operating pro-cedure.

(2) General security measures.(3) Provisions for secrecy.(4) Essential elements of information.

4. ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICALMATTERS. Instructions concerning the aid sta-tion, feeding and resupply, including the location ofthe combat trains, the route of advance, and altera-tions or additions to standing operating procedure.

609

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS.a. Use of comnmuimication.

(1) Index to signal operation instructions ineffect.

(2) Restrictions, if any, on use of radio.(3) Pyrotechlic signals.(4) Any special instructions concerning com-

municaltioln.b. Conmand p)osts.

(1) Locations.(2) Tentative subsequent locations.(3) Location of battalion coulmander.

CLASSIFICATION

Section 111. BATTALION DEFENSE ORDER (CHECKLIST)

CLASSIFICATION

BATTALION DEFENSE ORDER (CHECKLIST)

MAPS: Identify maps referred to.TASK ORGANIZATION: List reinforced tank

and armored infantry companies and units therein,units to be kept under battalion control, and com-position of battalion combat and field trains.1. GENERAL SITUATION.

a. Enemy forces.b. Friendly forces.

(1) Situation and missions of the combat com-mand and adjacent units.

(2) Supporting units: tanks, aviation, artillery,engineers, and others.

610

· (3) Covering forces and other security elementsin the vicinity.

2. MISSION.a. A statement of the task to be accomplished by

the reinforced battalion; include who, what. where.when, how, and why.

b. Details of coordination applicable to the battal-ion as a whole.

(1) Formation.(2) Boundaries.(3) General trace of the MLR (or area to be

outposted in mobile defense).(4) Limiting points.

3. TASKS FOR SUBORDINATE UNITS.a. In a separate subparagraph assign specific tasks

to each tactical element of the command (includilngthe combat outpost and any attached units). Theseinstructions may include:

(1) Missions for each unit.(2) Boundaries and limiting points.(3) Conditions and restrictions on opening fire.(4) Positions to be occupied.(5) Location and missions for crew-served

weapons.b. Use the last subparagraph before x for instruc-

tions to the reserve. This includes:(1) Composition.(2) Missions (including combat outposts, if

applicable).(3) Location.(4) Priority for planning counterattacks (re-

inforcement of outposts in mobile defense).

611

x. Instructions conlmon to two or molre units,including:

(1) Alterations to standing operating pro-cedure.

(2) Organization of the ground, to includepriorities.

(3) Location of mine fields and obstacles.(4) Essential elements of information.

4. AD-MINISTRATIVE ANI) LOGISTICALSMATT'ERS.

Instructions relative to any alterations of stand-ing operating procedure, location of the battalionaid station, feeding, gasoline and oil, and amilnmni-tion. A umnll ition information includes the loca-tion of combat trains, arrangements for distribution,and the amount of ammullnition to be placed onposition.

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL -MATTERS.a. Orders for the use of signal com,mutlication.

(1) Index to signal operation instructions.(2) Restriction, if any,. on the use of radio.(3) Special pyrotechnic signms.

b. Command posts.(1) Locations and time of opening.(2) Alternate locations.

Section IV. BATTALION RETROGRADE ORDER (CHECKLIST)

CLASSIFICATION

BATTALION RETROGRADE ORDER(CHECK LIST).

MAPS: Identify maps referred to.

612

TASK ORGANIZATION: List reinforced tankand armored infantry companies and units therein,units to be kept under battalion control, and compo-sition of battalion combat and field trains.

I. GENERAL SITUATION.a. Enemy forces.6. Friendly forces.

2. MISSION.a. A statement of the task to be accomplished by

the reinforced battalion; include who, what, where,when, how, and why.

b. Details of coordination applicable to the bat-talion as a whole, including:

(1) Routes or zones of withdrawal.(2) Phase lines.(3) Formation.(4) Location of battalion assembly area or ini-

tial point.

3. TASKS FOR SUBORDINATE UNITS.a. Covering force.

(1) Composition.(2) Comnllander an.d time he assumes command.

This is usually just before the time the frontline companies begin their withdrawal.

(3) Route and time of withdrawal of coveringforce.

b. In separate lettered subparagraphs assign spe-cific tasks to each unit of the command, giving:

(1) Any attachments.(2) Assembly area of each company.(3) Routes of withdrawals.(4) Times of withdrawals.

613

z. Instructions common to two or more units.(1) Alterations to standing operating proce-

dures.(2) Essential elements of information.

4. AD-MINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICALMATTERS

Instructions pertaining to evacuation of casualtiesand supplies for the covering force and the with-drawing force. Alterations to standing operatingprocedure.

5. COMMAND AND) SIGNAL MATTERS.

a. Orders for use of signal communication.(1) Index to signal operation instructions.(2) Restrictions, if any, on radio.(3) Special pyrotechnic signals.

b. Command posts.(1) Present or future locations and times of

opening.(2) Location of commander.

CLASSIFICATION

Section V. BATTALION NIGHT ATTACK ORDER(CHECK LIST)

CLASSIFICATION

BATTALION NIGHT ATTACK ORDER(CHECK LIST).

MIAPS: Identify maps referred to.TASK ORGANIZATION: List reinforced tank

and armored infantry companies and units therein,units to be kept under battalion control, and com-position of battalion combat and field trains.

614

1. GENERAL SITUATION.a. Enemly forces.b. Friendly forces.

(1) Situation and mission of combat commandand adjacent units.

(2) Supporting units: tanks, artillery, elementsof other infanltly units firing in support,and engineers.

(3) Security elements in the vicinity.2. MISSION.

a. A statement of the task to be accomplished bythe battalion (reinforced) as a whole; include who,what, where, when, how, and why.

b. Details of coordination applicable to the battal-ion as a whole.

(1) Objective.(2) Formation.(3) Direction of attack.(4) Battalion boundaries and, when applicable,

company boundaries.(5) Attack position.(6) Line of departure.(7) T'ime of attack.(8) Comlpany release point.(9) Probable line of deployment.(10) Limit of advance.

3. TASKS FOR SUBORDINATE UNITS.a. Use a subparagraph to give specific instructions

to each assaulting company.(1) Objective.(2) Formation.(3) Attack position.

615

(4) Route of advance.(5) Mission on capture of objective.(6) Organization of objective.(7) Special security measures applicable to one

comlpanty.(8) Use of carriers.

b. Use a subparagraph for specific instructions tothe supporting force.

(1) Plan of supporting files during attack, asapplicable:Designation of elements.Position areas.Targets.

(2) Movement or displacemenlt before captureof the objective.Time of movement.Formation.Method of advance (use of carriers).

(3) Displacement or movement to objectiveafter its capture.Designation of elements.Time.MIethods.Ž-ew position areas.Targets or sectors of fire.

(4) For elements not displacing, targets or sec-tors of fire after the objective is captured.

c. Use additional subparagraphs for specific in-structions to any other attachments.

d. Use the last subparagraph before w for instruc-tions to the reserve. This includes:

(1) Initial location.

616

(2) Missions and movement prior to capture ofthe objective.

(3) Missions and movement after capture of theobjective.

x. Instructions common to two or more units.(1) Means of identification.(2) Special measures to maintain secrecy, to in-

clude limitations on reconlaissance.(3) Special measures for control and coordina-

tion, to include use of engineer tape, tele-phone wire, and illuminating devices.-

(4) Action when hostile security measures areencountered.

(5) Specific orders for night patrolling beforethe attack and after the capture of theobjective.

(6) Rallying poiuts in case withdrawal is or-(lered.

(7) Reorganization on the objective and con-solidation of the position.

4. ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICALMATTERS.

a. Annllunitioll supply.(1) Location of the battalion combat trains.(2) Route of ammunition advance after day-

light.(3) Amount to be carried.(4) Alterations to standin.g operating procedure

for amulunition supply.b. Alrangemlents for feeding.c. instructions concerning tools, wire, antitank

mines, and other special equipment when the cap-tured position is to be organized for defense.

9135S '-51-40 617

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS.

a. Orders for the use of signal commlnUtication.(1) Index to signal operations instructions.(2) Restriction, if any, on use of radio.(3) Special pyrotechnics signals.(4) Any special instructions concerning signal

communications.b. Command post.

(1) Location before, during, and after captureof the objective.

(2) Location of the battalion commander.

CLASSIFICATION

618

0 t~~~~* U C

o 0

C O t~v O t <t

-~~~' D- -in -

CI o e-

to o i-C o

°i o E -oc Uv

c-t ~ ~ ~ 0-

< a ; W c 6

_I C ]

* -,Z~Cf cC "-,0~-CCKi 0 0

K= K K

_ ~~Ei Cd

-u *' C I

0. o ii Io-in -1 I ctn S '

o -NN~

( C C)- ·

Si

a' -- --8

;~ ~~ -; *te

E~~SC- C CC-

0) r Cei

I-'CCm rs*~~~4-

C;-

-~ ~ E ,~

vs vs -

cjO

I -o 0 . 0

_ s j ~ 5 5 _ vS M '-S > . I -

1D - oc I

~~~~~

- -c C.I'S 5

620

*

C~~~vs ~ v

,0 rI- .0~~~~~

0 -e v vss t g

8~~~~ Ex $g Fl ·'~~~~~~~~~~~~~>

e C"~~~~~~~~~

CCd cc

620· · ·

t t v -

g ~

r;;

, r <)+^_LIrS

"~~~~ o

D~~· a 05 t*& ~ ~ ·cr m s1o °S ~o; ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I b - - ° '

~~~X$~~~ h o . o°;Q <:

g ; > > 3o.d~~~~~~ ss v

_ P m

qa"""~62

.' 0-- -

C) zt C) 4.

WC .- C U o C, oo

I &

I Io. , , ,

U ~ ~~~~~~ 0 0.

O I e & 1^~ ~ I

oC~ '

o 8 o

6]r 'C 'C

H 'C 7'3

Z~ "~ | ~ GL- . 0 1, GOa

4 & o E

wa I I I dC

-2- | O'.

4 4

.t a

I~~~~~~ _ I

-t OF- 6

ti~~~ oB~~~~~~a 'a)

it~~ ~ ~~ I C

10

o~~~~~~~~~~d

40C s~ 'C 'CCII

C, ~ ~ ,~

-~~~~~~~~~~, 'C C

F- '-e -,- - .. F

o~~~~~~ I Cv gP:.O~ 0 -La

R~~~~~ CC F-

CClC~ N 40~~Cc~rL'Ct 02 v~~aj 00

°~ *.= D ~ , ,e, o .-

· c .: z, cr .-c~c° B .a =8 .0 o 8 ,e c oo ._o

° m1 ° °0

-~~~~· IC <~o

624"

Is -

'0~~~~~~ '0C '0B

00'~~~~~~~~~I _ X Eo~0~ gz~~

~ O* .° o

.~~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~~~~I ¢·

S~~~~ ~-

'0 -~' 5 Z-wz E~~ ZCa 2

.20 m C o C

o *-~~~~ *Z~~~,-io~6N

}To Ch

I :~I~~~~~~~~~~~7

©~~~~~~~~o

ri c

C m I

626

O 0: 0

_ ' E O ~~~0 5 I

O ~ ~~ 5I l X

t - ~ '; 'c

Ed B.- = - x

" 0* -

~~4F4

- 01

4 ·I

- 01

9 01 Cl Cl

o H

8pC O -~

o *Cld - 0 e

O .3 t .0~ C

t cv &~2P o 0I cv -bo s~ z3Z ·;

E o 35 0a0 0

627

r ".< = d d d

ci~ ~ 0i F

c'a

0 8 ·"

. s0x t °c

O °m 4 sC0,Nt -R V. <

O q

W o oo

E ; ;· < 3e e e

co _$o o , :

o 5 L - I

InC X4 N. m

_ I , .C "628 '

o w I I

9 a ~- 4 /J

I.£ ,O fr

d~~I tC1*

Hl ·ICtC ~I4 O O ' d-I-c

d ~~ C- C- C-

C2

C L~~ 3C N6 ~~~ 66 -

I. I

o I Io _

o0 0o 0~ l -

- 2.*, 0 * 8

-. I I l_

O N t

t 4 -_Q6-~~~~~~~ -

I~~~~$

010 ~ ~ ~ 2

i t:� 8 'mo�� · E-�E-

" �i· Oc;·'� ·'� 1

";a

"" C2 "�sj�cu08�r 4

emyO S

;tl f�"E, H '�"�·ra �ea�.L

;ic E C: d�P SP r N

& �s2, �"

E ""�P�" ti �s$8 �1 X�� =

"o "gm" ;·e

fE "

r ,FL �� �j t -�C ��c cp $ eF� hC g8

�· �O 'd�m � e �·� c;o C'a2,4a,'e�4 u o·I� N

630

'~~~D~ C : 1-

o o to.r.

~~~~~~~~.z ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~.

~~O *~ C)Q=CW)

-$

I~~~~ t He

o ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~c ° 1=<

04. .)

9

0- 6

I,~~~~~~~~~~~I

$ 0

.- 0JC .

o ~ ~ o~~~5C~~~- g I92'0"

-- C. e00 )< 0$ OC)~~~;Ir

CI=

CO CoO~ f a

631

r~ ~5

EC-~ . E

C2 as Q D m O

_ aa)

to ~o q

2 I CO X

t·~~~~~~~~~~o

_ I I 0

632

oll ,

LI <

i i

C.~ oI III

j I A- 0

o VI I Ot

B a a --·

7:.

I ICo -t ,_ I

ID - Al Al N _.' 0 1

- P.~~~~.

rn o/ v ' 7 gi 6 i

s; ^ ^F-A

U ~~E

9^ O X °, I ° Er~~~~~~~~~~~·a~~~~~~

· = o $; o o =ot ci So 5 ~ I

aW m a -r I %

.oO = N ̂ C _01cc t I

931358--51-41 633

E a ·% N a e

C I mw i tZ ,_o . oG 3

._ PY 8 F O t -'c

o ~ o . _ o ~

_" ~ -~ c

634

mN~~~ dO~~ . L .

6 ~~~ h~

" P~~~~~~0 0

I N NN -0

E~~. 0

o ·o .

o CO; CO r > r

Eget,~~~qc teo

C~~~ z n

-E-

d d d d d d

o o o s~~~~~~~~~~~~_. O

i ·o . . ',cd~~, a. d, > -

o O.." O. I ,

o) SC3 Es t% a > A0o ~ % ~ " _

d ^ - C m 5 Lq C Cj X C P: 6

Co C C eoo C- - CC

,ce o h ·;c t

F ^O 1 :O% :Oa °· -:· k

O~~~ ~ ,:C=aQa °^ ° ^:ornfE~~~~ _ Ea o

5K2O~ MO O ) v

.~~- _ _~ n 8

o I-

o 0o

C: "Fi"

.a' d~ a

A~ . 9)~t - 0

C 3a~ a~~~ ri i. m~~~~~~~~~~0

o - '- - a

£ I

I~ ~ ~~~~~~~~~~~ I~ S

C" *I Ct Ii C

"$~~~~~~~a a'l

o J a0-- tO

C~~ I

S..I

. ~ K o o o o1 o

.00

~~o~

.t~~~~~~~. ~~~~= ·

.5 5 , ,

s E - | N ro

6o o

D 5~ - C < X C n '; ' ' t

X D 2 .°<~~a

D C3 gs _ E 070:X0 : ,o

<·" z

_ I I I

I I~ ~ ~~3

I S I I ~

o I I

I NC Cfl CO

o ~~~ CO C~~~~ C63

Oo ~ CO,

AZ

'"

a AZ

0

-e

I

_ I I n

Z

., 2 o .~ 0 0 .

638 AOD

I , -

638 I I It

I I I I - C

C F~~~~~~~r

- -~" I

C ~0 .d

o O Va VC)~~ $

I- I%

I I I I ·0 ~ U C ~

"/m/l N d N -P N

;41~~ ~~~~ * 0638~~~~~~I 1

o6d * d d 66q a p q q

FI~~~~c

" ~ X zd xX

_, ,4 "

oU ce O U o

N 0

_0 01 0Co~ I

- " ~ ~ -

CO 'C I 1 tsC

CO N -C t- 01 ~N~~~~~' -t CO CD CO

,j, 01 ~ ~ 63

.,4 ~ ~ ~ 02

o .d o

Cat

Ug, ,

_ o o 'S:E D -

0e

o .a. I -

C) In

m~ ~~ 5> Ca ,o~~~~~~~~

4,rr ~c,·c

._ i - o04, _ _ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ _ _

640 _ ,

a 0

.C-~~ C~ -

4) -

U, a

U,- a

n=; s oQ _- _U

~~,= as% ~ _:O : >X 4% . . n_ oa

.~ ~~ _r. i

_ _ _

_. o. 5 CD_ °

-'' - ° B

_3 _: -t eO? ve

c ~ X 2 X va- t,

vm @-ea

04 ~

C '_ -a)-

,u, D ::- o --w D e_

_i - , - 1),

e s es o _ _ _642 --

0 ~~BL,~~E3-ar~~la)

0I c

'- ~~ - 0

-~~ 0)~ ·C,r~~~~~~

m-b Y .c

d~~~~)0 00~ *4-1 - -3

a, 5F d~~~~E ~~~~~a m~.

0" cc - 4$af)0-j 0 -- c

-in -,

642

,g "' m co~~ *0~ C ;rC>.°S

Y =g O;~ :, .Q..

2 - e: e

^p U vj c: X ;-s

maaii, .; , E s t .

. UP UQ . 5 id e?

* w'3 eC e Z cs io e F

c~~~~~ °- c. e ,:a, 643~~. : ,

X 3 P 5t ;5 '

5 5 - '~ 3 -, - c _ 3

©U~~~la c0

JY ii ig-~ )- tie ; ~~INqmivC~cC ''s

e~~~C fis~ ~ J

C'·i

~~~~~Y"~~~" D; 8~)'-- 0)i:

CC)

C) o ~ -$ c) 0Ei-~i~&.C·~8

C)m

4-)" ~~

g Ro_- 5 0 - 5-

_ oc) .- V ,_ 8rD _D--5 o C 5- VQ _ x

O;V C E5 C ^; 5 :';°5f - '

5 R

'o O C gC

_ CC 5 ¢ 5

Do .Žj~~_ C 5

0) 4

" e~r -it)~~;"0C,0'--U - 0C

mC,=~~

h aO

A

0. ~ ~ .

0- CC C

to ~r~~~~~~~~~~~0

-'1 0W

645

a D~ : O - LCZ

0 · i-~ 4- t

,4- ° 0 cF ,w? " ; wS

O V V ,;, s - a

cC 5

~~~o ~ s

- - a

0 E

V : V 5sv 3 j: 5 ._~ c

2~~ ~~ a~

- . .

a' > _ %Z, Oo O-~ D

a a , 2

C- tS -

V 5 "_

~~~~

646

"~~~~~~~ -

o*Ca~~~~ M;o -c o

Le < e -

a~~~~~~~~ o~ clp4 · ~~~ F·=~~~~~ ~o |

n "~~~~~~~F~~~~i4

e Uo i5" c °i E 5 SR:e Eat -°* n vU '-

_ nn fa -.,-Sh., 0,vs_~

E" ,,$ o9? ; , EE° s n) a > n .;

~~~."~U m Ug_0s

Z > &-> , : . m X 5

U ~ ui L . V. w-

,4 .E~ i ee h

rhO tn U n

_: -, _ o

<,,"" = _ 5

64aa·

as_ ; 5 d

C _ -o ?

b E -= :S ._

v_ -v -: C, 0 _v

4 i_ 5; E l

T= g , :: v

W g Y g _

; i a°; )

" ~~ E o 'g

04S52 ->l4

04 "-

* C)0 ~ c

'C) '

b~~x ·~~ 0:

~~" 0cC,

· '' " ·) tC

~~s ;-c~~

j" 4 · ~~~*t 4-2

oo *g S:goc

c358-t;1-. 0cC

qs 4 � �1 � i� ;�t:-a �e -$ ,

2 � ;m c� �g r: 3

ri�� ��Fo: C� i=r ·-

�,�no 4 �'.·�B 2

�.�""Z " i�13 �

· _· Vti uE

�i"" E Yd'-'·" "

5�; , E-

.a·�m�'"y�;

""� "s�.fi-:9 ���a:"" " E-�94�E"�·te� B �· a� .� E CI

�g�"�"'�"'� ��i�·; aLa c �·�._· �"

1�" 6 �iQ- m.s i � r5

-j�· Sd� ·"

: B j

S 8· g-· LG rd�m

tr����3S B

"� ·' 3 a

- �E�E,� �g 3�Ld � �D.� SI YC �����c, mSF�F�m ��jF;

·d

.e g650

5~~ ~ 5)- -Q -'; ° C _ c

_ .° :4 V t Q - -4 - - * C

b- C). VC¼ DDDUZ C

bt, o O > -=-

'~~ ~ _= G'= 1G5o V G d -DUl C) _ G CA

44o. G·t _. O c C5'"E~'

t D- -. Di >

C - C- Dh . a

0 D 5 ,0 o C:; ; D-

cia C- O - .D

aOV0. ' C~ "~~G~6

-4- ~ .- 4-4C· r ~ ' Tn CL0

4 -~ -

sj~~CC~L coUP45 ~ gci -"~~ ~~ COl~~-

ci ~ aC)~4 i C C)

El~~~~~~tE

- rnA 0 -;J

-~ a , ZciCLq 5

ciC)~E -"·

C) -

Mro~~g

o "cig e ~"~

o .C), c i a~N~ h *- C

631

" V~ i"

: n03 s~~~~~~a O,_" F

I~ . W t

t t t O D O

m ~ ~~~~~ ._

6 52s e

t 03 0

- b 'C C OW Re E

5 r C C; bXQ- U s

653d

i~~~~ ciC'

_ C 5 C=Xr Cr:" 'i~~~~~~~i

3 ~~~OW0a 00.; o 0

? c.J o _ - E -c = E o

zn ·O c

A- CC A

o - -'4_

Cr'0 , 0-

4~~~~~

'cie~ ,, - m o .CQ

2c, 0 fi) D,

a~= t ;°Cr' Co o

ci C 6

0~~~~~~~44 g C61 ~~~~~~in 9B~~~~-

Cr CI ) C

c d~~~~~~C

c~i'-

S~~~~~~~ 00

C~~~~5

:~: S -G~ s. 01__b ;C

B "" _~· _,x __ _c

U; ;I o t z-D , L > /GC:

S: _· vC i C Or J

m1 a - 9 s-"u~ ao 5 s: o

'. S~:~ ·: Cs . 8,

6S4~· ~c

5" Ci - ' i0 Z") ·C - 5

]~ - ~ C -5o' g Z b; Z

u _ °ss -vs.W8" ,Z: Z C t:~ ZZ ZF $Z W

~~f~~~ g %=' ;, J

~~~E:5~~~C ;,r' B

~~··"~~ 5 5 C -:t C5 Z' Z :'

E w._^ m

." M~~~~~~ ~55

._C:S v l c U : t

5a e 5_X¢ O a X E

P E a sE 5* E

656~y; =' %

~~~- ~ · ~"

~~~~ -3

Pj~~ S -5 -

Pi ~~~~ -�.�7u

e~~~~ o

i rrr j1_ X :

Z;··"~~~~~im Mbj~ 65

UIICI -j 3_ Yi �% Wg �·C�

c�a"S

1 �S 1B

"�m.:�.i,e� ,,�, e�·; 9�

'- ak�;j; �o,·,

4 � eo%'" E��L, i"� " &

- ""i: sM�

P �-�·'." iil-li '�iia Yn;,�,gg� �5

C e

� " " O " c� ·i: i hRij �a P V1

;E � C g.� E mY'C�-m ���;�J C�

gp:��ra�e�i 2 -; g Y;.+ � � � L� · � V�iO C� O 3 E

a:E"" Q��E�%��Bhi�c�·�Em a fsE�.a

a �;.5

F � x� a .·�� -s �·u� 'j,

F. g� Ij 3� ·a

·r L i� ·34 sgw, �",3 o� "��

�e·- E 'G�

��sE �tl m ·;::U,rlc2 ir oL

"�9gf Pd9'":a ·� a I .s mE "L; .e� ��""

g 'E C�IP�I�Pp� �gg63C 3" T r-·

;�O�jf 6 �=�,�;-'%� i: ·"�" �Es 2-�·�s��,a�au=P��

% ��gg""�l"B91 � 4,"5��Ot� ; E� Cf

d d r c ,��i E FI hl�C"�e,rj: m ec·�s: E! a�-

658

ir , , 3b

·,= ; 1_ _,

2 R _ 3 -_j s , o <, qe.

5 5g , 5 %

4~~~~~~~~~~~~~5

·" 2�� c�B5 ; a

4 Y: BI";;�,R�t� ·��Y .e ·�c��8-": "' � ramr a 05C 'cs -·i���ti6��z�Z� C:��":·' E Y ·� ra

$� T.� ae�a �az·g" ���q ,Ej�"� C� · m.�;g ii �E i i e� "B� ai- m"c�·,��""��s��g -$ C5: Li "4 Mm"��"g�a

·" � .cR Sm ��kD�"%��,,F·� a ��ti:��am ;E� c6'LI Ji. _ ? i:o "'

O 13 .-O

� �o g�5' c�8nsa �3 �· �""s�- ·j�% �m� �·� ;1·

�Y F � C5"� E ." �2· �= = e.t` �s �·"� �

·f� �Fs� $ 'C·" �Em

a�L �L o� o �� g � .3 c7 9t"CO�c;� �*"�6��5��N

660

- v t 04 ._ E, s: 5

~"g· ,-g -

_ c E Uo-4

O

a) E3 -5.

E- - ° a . O

66

a-Oa - ea-a0;)C -) -) - - aa)

a) C

-4ED I,

· r:~~~~~~a -Ba~

- C~~.~a-0~ c

a-Y a-CC- ? ~ c04~ C) A ¾~

a- a

a ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~aa- 0

-t aa) a-~ -z

a- a- ~ 2 ~ a- a-

-4-~ a)

a- ~ ~ ~ -C ioZ a~-', *C -

3~~~*U -2-4 a-

a- ;)-C)*~~~~~~~~66

:$:.C~~~ o _

r :3 D__4

"~~~~ 03 5%1 i )" ~ ~~~ C: ^5 t HX

662 i·~

c~? ,, ,9 ._, 5;- ° - "rfi , o9 C

ceA g : ,; s

:9 _ > e

z3 54 a ._ >

._ ,oa En e O <o ;

° ~ -j = cU55E 5 b= XS r° ; 5u 82 X

_ 613 5~ %

C S _ z -

z, ~~~~~~~~7Q~~6

es S o@Xc

~"E X 5; C EO u 53

-·". E@6 > Xc 3c5

"= c E °E

E~" · t; e cC E

g Do _Y V~ ° d D= ..o ~~~~~ ~ '- C Og D C 5

V~ ~ ~ z a 5UCXZ>';'-V'5Mv

*d ~~5; -H l ° _AS-¢ 5 U US V _ 5

664

-Y r� -%I :C� =1 � : � � -"B E� e�Fi a �; �." EB 3dn 'e��'� ��"o "�-"� "�E�e"� 8 ,�� � . aa c.?

"-� ·4`e -�e "ao· ·i-· :8":

�"�a BZ���C3� X ·� t:�C3i&i e' &"-01 Y

·- �29�r ii 5j� �g O3 : 5 C· ���"�CB� " f .,O

,�:s ��g� "38 Sl��i� c��elH·P:i· m $�51 -u ��."� y�,$� g ��mg�, m��� a-s�s �,0��9 s�,a�:eo&�,�� ""� ��;a,ap�l�v,5d�e�ie-je;: *�� � io�?:iE_a�� L : k�'"rr "i d,$� �o2· ·n��.r -t: � " 9�, ;: X e�a rl8: ·t� ��g�s%;·� "r" C �" -J·�8-; ~:��p=aa1"�o"�

s · 5 EV",5

V-J la.g gg����ig< " j6- c. - I i

-. I J ,w 02 a= di'b; Q ;I

nalaje--jlaj 665

d d L 5.3 '--h� ·L bD iII i·- c� ·; �' ��P�& �·E!�

'3 ~y *E�qge

"�c� 3 ilS:p'-F j C1

jl�-?S�a;jl;5"� � gg""_ :E

:3 " 3 a�cz;o���

�? "%��liz - i·��-�.e·Z:="t; V

"���?·�i:·�a��i asr: i ' ''"-� �;,.·j ·5

" 9 "n�C- 2m��"3�m Y �T�

?i

t� �C��b� � d�i.3�yg0� � Ef

.E rrr��E $z��?�-gBje?85

="" �"-: .9 s � �

�5 �2-

59��""""5:� " L� g�B Y �Cd�� E Y

��:7� 5�" '3

U5"B�b�� "

3c � �e�e��i:

ir;, ca � J�c����

a �d� �,,s�a ��,�n m��6 a�2��s;5" �x� �38� 3

"= � 3�E�Z� 5B j

�,as� ,g,�xe"" Idb�u-mm�

-S"� �"O C�U hT(?r�

e 6666

G ;B. , e r* . _ o

p G~5 G m7 w voD 55 _

.d a + °OG. O= 55 _el _ O

O 5'.C xG _3e

o~ G _ - O

5 ._ W C O m ;

sC 5 = C . G G # c

* G ~O I G Gsr o O

D _ 5 _ OG O X 5 a

_· C o W.55

D o G e o - 5 O ~ g o = _

~~~~~~~o b :~;°OWO6E > 5 G f G . G 5 G i

E o - G G G 5 .. _ ' 5 G O

et s 'GG o°C~~~ ' lxOX

" : t ~ _ ~ N A O

%< _~ G eEi~ ~ f 5fo

E~~~~~~~~~~~~~6

_ o_ .x °5 5rn° °

~~=L _ - :1 _O

~~·E:' 65 ' X : _ ;

~~~~~s; ,, · 9,: _ 00°C1t

'·- r a5 504,8^

·- , - ~ 5 gao C.

3 a t o 5C = m o ; -

;0 5 , C) - ^~.4 -;, Ht1O

< _.Qz

~~~z~ A 3 P . cs- g

~~b o B e :

X~~ r U o; Wn 3o^i ;: o ; UV 8~ s e o i :

~~~~ c -~' n ' -

~~~~°- - -: si 3 X= U= .

m~~~ r; f f s8 g*

-¢ e n co_ .

ot v e - - A2

- mYn~

v 2- A

·- g-· ~.- Q

e:~~~3 -= c

Wa o v'~ .A--

:v i "" o;R

t~~~a V~ S c cc 0 a

tS ~ ~ ':E V cVI

e- e e 3~4 .

670~~~

1- -

-"~ V ·- -

o~~ ~~~ B~ .o 2~W~4),

a"~3~ ~CC~~""y

.~a~ "~ ,Ea

~~~c 2 m~

aE"~~~~m ~~~=5 3.cc OW

670~

a , : c3 ¢~Z - ·e Z -t c

E5- _ 5 0 dcI

" - 0~i ~C

,~, EtS %, 5;es9 55<!

_ ;gt c . 5> ' e -e ~ ~~~ &

~~~~ e >e 4a-s° ** 2Q - -

C - C ") 0 C

E~~~aE~~~B~~n": a~~~~ 67

c ~~~~c~

.. v a Vu .... R _o 5

° - -3 - yC - n5

t~~~ - - -'- -7 'C :0 u

C _ __

rr~~~~ ,

o - ° ° ' -° 3,;,,a~- -Cgl zF

o s X _ - ~ j: R o ~ :

o ;._- -- ufn5a0O_Oe , ~ ""~ 3; °a Ot

A~~~ C)

h ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~C 44,vv-4c : < :.:672 gT1322 -

-~~ -- ·s·

r ' Ldt

4- C)

r -5=35ArJ2 tC~ bo,~

672

"�%����`2 .c;

.·�� �s:·���5

a�ag'� si _,gnBa · a-5�=i m5

· V� ir:-·- ·�i o" .55

:$:e: �E pBscr BE��c C,���"·"c��- ma�.

��m- g_�mS@i" "�.�aB i� c � � "" �: -� ;--p:, ch �"gi �j5

�·��Z"i·

,i·,�-· �-·��·,

�"· 'n �pIi8��r· 6�g���� �E ·."I;"z �ss��,Ss eP9 �B �5 ;E��'

""� -" �00~�j�a"e�=a" 8� �S�r�

??·cr-�r: " 5t�'",� Z

�Cyg -5�,C",a z·� �·-,

'�="��w C,� gBPj-":W P tiJ

c�� g "o " ·'FdS s�� FC

��F-�& 5�-? ·PR `" a ·, · ��g: u =�ea m: �

"�·.-r �

35�F;��d�.?�C.���- yj

2 ��.3�0,�es a-Ot%�%�" ' a,^

d b$�g����m�N��� a in=

c;- -Uf'� $C2 i E 'C?

673

xb t5iC) 4,;) z,^ j t

o 5 g o - 5 5, Y 5

u?~, CO 5 1 s4 j V iO*_ -4 8XoOXs

* m - .. -8 5 t5-

- 5~U55,t - 5,C ~-5ig{5>.Xe ~5 X^ - C > O

0 5 a e G o 5 t^-ec, "QXc5

e~~~~~~~ G ,, _ ,0e 5

O~~~J i _2-^

- CZC 5) 'ZC)CCg4e .5 C)C

s:: -, B5e o z G <5, 5

Co A^ - .- >°X A 0 ~t 5 D- $ a

> ~ ~~ 5) -) 5) C) 5--B450 ^ .-Y 5

C 5A 1. ,CC ) j . wtP5 E

674 CC 4 CC)~ a

*C)) . C

C) C ~ ~ "C) .~C

C'4S 'C)~·" CC

(t'C) -i

C) C). c~4 ~~~'C)~ ~ ~ 'CC)

C1

-'0 C)J~

674

o, X~~ < Uo_

~~~Bs~~ 5~~% 5 (CD) U o 55 g = ~ 5

~~bn,·~~ X _Q ] ] R a <

8,.~~~ mQr~ 5 ~ s -1

O~~~~ ~~ , < - vy bi 5 -t5; 'Q5

5 °Y5W so

8· D 29" 5 c OO;< P,;m

67

t~~ Bm E: ,, 2

i: 4~= - - 5 ~,~~ 3 o,~.

4,- E1 . 5

~~~~uu ua c · ~ t -

:~~~ : .rUu1~~ ~ ~ ~~~~~ _e d '

"~~~~~~~~ ·, , l"'·"~~~~~~~ 15o O

L~ ~~ o o v(DE -=-

4~~~~ _5 B> . 5: _ , U-C

;~~~~ t "1 "~~" ~ C m . -5 U G 'G

~~"i~~ :e~~~~~~td~67

_u�b�

��Pcp·Ya : ir"���r·"l%

8@am

aPY9eg ;� i":,:6�6 :-- ;ft�� t;=�a�""�� ';i-r I.3 f.� �E i .U5.�pJib*?Y �� C m QI?, m-� a�"Yf � a :6 �nI� m � M � 2 r;? ��*m� m " Y"' ." Li g� k: IIE��" '1 "

:�5 "."3� � Ila � 2 x�� �� g.54�,R�����"��185 k;��B��z31 � �"��Lg�jgaES:ge6 � �s��ag

'= - i PE1B""*:I9 e: -·-

a, �" m9�ei4 a,,4�c��": �5

·�� .r;nEc5 " 5.5 "

Y ·g $;i.·-lem -·�"

g B· j $-�i ast g � i�� 3G

""'j·�,Y,-- S9?a�%��g

- �Clh�,3����'�5'30�:dS$"� wDS�a���

= . 5 : i� �_5��U·; ·3U �·IV� c: =� �3 i�·

Y =678

~~ "Y

~~.3 .- .; = =? a;" = g ~ -

~~~~~~"~~~~ - " = c O

a~~~~* a :- E_ a'

P"~~E~~e .E .Ewsi~~~~ 'm ~ 67

j5� " -=E� �ib

�·�% j, .·

· � CU � 1�5�if ·: L)

t:-r�a�3� t 1'8 E :s�e -·J�

1 5 �-Z f7sh0 �r= :v: = � %��sg�t b'=g��Re :��"�� �4 �-·-���"t:�3 o;

�"??s .%a�:" jq id

a�;u: a; bif�I -" "�� ··m , �3

" Y��·; � ;i

�=r b�""fi .r�w,��3 B'" Ii:S : ��" �� �" `"� � ; E' Sr, r,

4 b�g�·$ ·; a `�, irN ;3`"; 5

"��p�i;680

m ~~= s 8 r =e Sg~ C Q=.~ o B ' o &, ~ ~ ; '8

Vo. Gl .= S ~ : p , ..=mZ

t >~~~~~~, ~; 3, W=sUtO

~~~.~ o ' ~ ~ . 7

B~~~ B c; g n=c

9, c $ e = A o o U

° o3,58 °B-o1 4 4 fl81

E: X w v; = °

=. g: V _ N n ,0

< S U m m

8 ° ;,=~9333-l4 681

SC��4� �B � " ��% �BOk c.�� " s�phr; �&· �"

: ,·"�E� �� c� XedaV���3 � an .CR·%-� s_ a ;r

�-� · En�d�% n n , �55 ��e� E i� ,'2 E � E � ·��=1 L: ���"*� ""�e ,,,,a� , � m�b.-Ep,�El E �[E ��%��" m�:��·��� o�·c� i:g aT � u;- 2 � 8 a " e i: "o .·�t;"s Eage���l� � �� X�,gm,�o B�g�6 ��P B ,8�j�·- :'"%�'�10� E��'�: ��� ·5 e M e "· sa,3� �j� a c jB 'O�i " t:��&,��nr �e��s�UEsaer B: e � � g T� C

E a �Sec 5 &� � �"�%��B n� .·

B% ,, m rcrj= " Etd" Essgd: 82r" b a ·sc,·;. nC" " ��.5 B � -A ?j B

a� Xp�""rp'E�i� �: a0 s�_ ,E'�BL?"; p � I�

"�ss��,�� a ··-, 'i �,.·"o 3�:m �_ �m , $� �="�&�a� �;·9 � F� � � ·5 r;i � � B = �.�S· gm% "2a��,,,9P"-4^

��t � i: �N: n 8 ·* In 2 � � " mmr Ub r�ame �· e4 E_682

1· b ~~ ~ S b'' i ~~1 ~ Tpt~~~~~~~~ a U X

9~~~~~~~~;~~~ =i ee ^;a

6~~~~~~ -,= >~ i t

-J~~~~~~~ U .ssa'~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ o o,<m

"-~~~~~~ F~~~~~~~ ~~~~aT

Do

1"~~~~~~~~~~ 18 S,a ~ ~~~~~~~~~~ ° X Cl

" ·i:~~~~~~~~~~~~ .eg,~~a

Bes~~~~~~~~~~8

C t -S 5 .E .o

._, . 9' z 2. w ,_n t; Cd D

Ct 5 S U t -

° s 3t;E- gZ

t E S . w "a w : t

4~"~, d 4, 0 4

- o L - C L : O W c :

~~~~~~E,~~~~~~~~4

s~~~~~~~~~C o. U W~"

e~~~~4 Co" 4,0 C Lt

S sH C) 4,

3t ow c

o =.~

yc _C

684

C) ) b

° R. a o _ ~ O3

,., In ' ' -~

sr8 7: "a' s° w U

~mE ; e: R 7w U'-

r ° ., 2 & 5°

c' ~ -5, E =,- :SUoo5

0S°:~a~R a

_ t - r S S a9ea ~& °8 ,O a &

;. ~ B _ .. .-

R H 5 _ W ; S 5 R

.~~~ 0 ._ ._5_RWRO

685

,)· C) 9.dJ ~ ~**aC) s'~g , .e~~ C) a - i ,

"~~~"r - 4~s C)~~~ ·,~s.~~ o g Ne

a :"c

ac·~~~~~~~~ 0~~~a,,~~AC)4)C))C"a '"~~

:oc c" C)

~~~ ·' -; zC °). 0

'8;~~~~~" % " ; X a~~~~~~~C

C)~ ))~O 0-

.t~ -. A -o~~ a a~~ ~0 .-

" ~ ~~~~~~~ 'a 'C)

PS~~' *C)0s& Oi2 -

- C) ., ~

C CO - C CI

-e %. _; ~ CC B e o

E 1? - C)

E~ lC EEd o~t~

*~ ~~~M' a e C C

* 9 OC c )!* i

685

R" U =.j E o : y

t m ,,, ° o = = m~

e ; ~ e~ E = 2O*

e ; 0 ' =5° ~t

ag·, g; ""O ·C18· � �s ��·"·� ,

a� o� �0�' 95 En-.cr ,I pq o

-O ""� ·,�s � .L

;� " �:t�,· ,�c� a:� a ,, n&Lb,�,i g m

*Et: g��s tLE

m 6� E EU·? � C; · c,����d� ma

�E E

3C bO �i- g$2��fd h9.r ·1$ as�,s S�q����� E�*tlP: %m� " Ci

�9 ne d���M� �e��eisg " 1r'a8��a �M� o9 o VI�R C· m a

B ·-O��: 'i m·� r ,d'kSb�.i� L�y 8� 6 � I � � eU ��a � oa� t:

cJowE

o*� � o, u2a5o .�"a·� �

"'� m� �� c-j ·clb� S.O � Fr" "E� �E ,r" �� ·� "i."s���

�,·B i` · �·, --St��s *a �" "�m

B� rCI

�$��X �� ·rrucc r,

�" c, ii: F�* vi.4

"� d �o.E am� hm��

�" 'S = "e& $ o

687

tsE XFQ ew; E eD

'- S5 - WWH¢E. Sd w

E t ._ 5 7 Se CG Or 5i E c,

_~~~~~~~" cS5D5 g. -'

i: 5 3=£

688C 3~~ar

7 ~ o E' c:

- l - o a U

5a Cs 5

O" O 55U

*t o. hf t c

5 3 .;E <E5~ g YCSr

De .° E

° bt i .C.l0

42 E~' D ':"· Y, 6 B~~~~~68

g t° &" i &3o

k ~·r C)) C)-

S~ & 8" * a- a -a§ 5

e ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~C C)C C 'CQ-C

c: a °4-ccg=

C)) ~T C) Ei

oo- U - UC&

4-- C) C

o.s Y - -

O- °. C)0 -X C) ' C ) <

t~8 . c g tff

.,0 o - r .° ° oo ~~~~~~~~~~- C)(,o.

o o g~~ - - C)S° U

o°a<S < P;

o° - U >t -a cq o; t&o*g~~~~ g g k

CC .C ) C ;

C: C) * gC . C690 1 4

C) '-

'C) CC C

33 ~ ~~~ C· 0

~~~~o ~ C 1444 $C ..

Co C) -" "

a~~~~'- 'C CC

r~~~~ "C CZ~

C) 14$,C) .)~aC

".~ Ct~ C)CqC) at

c~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C L) C

.· ~ ~ '4 C)l .)4o0 *-~4 r ~ '. C S

2 ~ ~ --- ·C~r--a.>j Se _1"

C) C) ~ c

690q ~

" "'C�$���c,9 .

c

-J a8 8 ·s,. ·- e

%N�O ?. as���� a�

" S"� s� � � , .9c s=

6"a, i�p:BPb 3iB� � IpM=� �s

,�9rga �oB��� �mM-gR��·C1 ��?�=edE� rj r

8.�" g %L�8 =�.r =,."Ci�

P,

B s: u;�� s"s

% 'Ee;ie% oa- i? m � 2u n n B

��%,t·��;�m 5�O ·O 9 i�

�·iz c·s� , B�f a� �;i � ��

m� ,VPC � � a.j�i�Q

"e"a;:� �$?��rs* .f O�

� bg-"�s ·:&5

·o, s�b �I

F3 ?

" �" �4 �ij 5

"S 1 'j 2 g

.E� �o ��'j�'3P"= g·��-e S�is ��="

��"s �9

�"'j-im�Cw,"MS

�n���g��8��oE 'Dg

d P 8� � ·C :? I� F;�

�X�' = a691

p= �� � � ; se�gsgd �� � P e �e�aJ�% g··a � "����CJPi� C�B1a a �,, Bn,�g,, r-a

�d �) LC V1s,� eq z. s=·� a"gm Ba cpa .- �a= ae "":d e�g��e'w�aeg"C-Pra � p oa"=··�a, E`

��S"��"i�' 'a �8? 1Cs·i�6; S �1 ��E$ ·c�S,_ "·�,10� C:"e �·r:·r, UU.B" � �5p� �KB�E � a� " �j c Cj,EaSr

�c; � "a � pa �i· ·f: �i·�-E�m F n � 3� 5 E � a f�

g 5 ;1 O� r, b�x.· o · Ig 'Fj x �b

M s�e �: _o �"; � 6 =r mc� I" "S- R %a b� g.5 � F���R� D35 �0", r. ·9 �"? '-"a ·���� =·E�, m�Fm 8j,·';l��w0 $"mr mS "�" �-"�%d�-E aac "C""aU�� a

w~S �·SE��r, .V� m*.��*" -S C.·� S,- s�l·j��".c,� B�Lo�;

cw��·�, ���·o�'tD m , Pt :�� ·"�

":�

692

;n S s 8 p % u;1i. 2x g

t 8 d Q-ed °8 X C

a , p, ' Vb Zfi mVD

rJ _O ;~ PR =C B d u a O rco t

*; e _O m ; ed V v v Ec X g C: 9 :

C: '- a z/m g: 3 ° t- V L to ,.O Y O C

_~r ._ ._ W- m

tX,~~~69

V - C; @ oa)1 C~ C55~~~ 5~ 5 o .r4C C=

t C~~~' asC50>g ,@

S~~ c a v . w>~~~"r & 05 5

5 5 < = ._

694P

E o tP ,= n Vo U t 't b

-h Rb b w. v = =Q,0_ W

a z ; 2~ b' p

*~ ra vrISU n,* tQ .s 1 E W U

o~~~~~4 w

Bg eB = >X v= m=

,~ O 033 > , , H 3 t

F i: m °~ O .@ .

" a; = ° o o p oa~

c; O A, Z p I w p

0 .

69w

5~~ 5 ;^ .:

* _ ) ° 'y cCCCC C )U

t~ ~ ",' u . X5.

d 5~ j ;==

^C) ' C) t u

d6 ̂ ,; g 5, T c

P 9e c~ 5 o o '

" > Bq, ij U ' .°

e> m m

= ~s S _ Vi 5

6 ) 9 6)

- ·'Hoj:

~" * "

C).C C) C)

:p: g 9 sie:9 a~~~~~~~~~~~~c

c~~~,C c ~ a

C) ,g~a~ C)C'C )EZ )5~ . )CV~ X -m~ H ~ e o~

C)C) -1 C)* u C

696~~~~~~C

O i _ ~ = g i

gh o f g 5 f 5 t O @

a u~~ 5 a=5>F1 $xt U _<oP ,

= 0=.

= = O Q U ._

D D s X a _

· S ° = X0 0 0

E0 C =Q D _ 5 /

.=a o o d, = f °X. 0v

~~~~B 6~~~~~~~9

W~~~~~~~~7 tlzngfl 5DE=;

Bs,, g : i2~~~~ g

8eR ., a - ~ t

5a _ ;t = =

°=a O =3=

E· E ' =<a

k = = Qa = =n u 5>0 j ;=

Ca,~~ U oa M; O; g; 7

Oao dg ·

W ,;0 .0 ~ U 5 5 1

698

,-,~~; 5 c<:

m~~~~ G" = , O

B ~ S"

· ;;~~~~~~~ s~ sO"

*~~~~~~~ < =·Q o ":

x , O , 8 l

O c: ._

a E~~~~";~~~~~T 69

U O c)3 a " ,3 tS o IZ

i b Xe _ s =

.;g X o g=S ? ooi e X i3~ v ° eX=

e bS E e bX

O v Qe CvM O

o · a L tm r 3 o D =;°

" 9 -tg

'-: C5 a VB Q <V

<|~~~~8; v e ,; .mR=5G/ E f

o c 3 R 0 2 Ec-% et j'

Y ue = ._ t s ^y~ d z >D= , - U = te .R

El~p 0 > ::- o SX sRR

R ~o X cat

_~~ o1 _ ___d -sD Y H g nU R.4~- <<R _£

INDEX

Action:Against: Paragraphs Page

Airborne troops - . ........... 553-555 542Antitank weapons .-........... 220 204Guerillas -.................. 557-564 545Obstacles and mine fields ... 565-567 552

Encountering obstacles .--------- 221, 502 205,510

In the assembly area ------ 74, 207, 316, 480 68,190,315,493

On objective - - --------- 339, 463 345,471

Tank versus tank .... ..... 219 201When advance is halted ------------- 226 216

Adjutant ..... _'-.....- - ....... 277 266Administrative and personnel section - . .296 296Administrative march ------------------- 43 41Advance guard ---- 55, 150, 222, 230-233, 345-347 50,

138,205,219,351

Advance party -...................... 67 61Aid station ------------- 126 117Airborne operations 354 369Air support in the attack --------------- 322, 353 323,

368Amphibious operations - -------- 521-532 522

Combined arms teams. 526 523Debarking 531 526General 521 522Loading plans ........ 529 525

703

Amphibious operations-Continued Paragraphs PageReorganization --- -- - ------------- 532 526Training -------------- 527 524Waterproofing of vehicles - . ...... 528 524

Antitank defense ..----------- 247, 386-387 238,393

Antitank guns; attack of weapons - . ... 220 204Armored infantry:

Characteristics -.-..-... 5-8 3Fundamentals of employment .---- 9-14, 560 7, 548Missions and capabilities .-.......... 3 2

Armored personnel carrier:Description - ... .. 6 6Factors affecting employment 15-16 9Firing positions .... . 34 24Vehicular weapons ..-... 33-34 23

Artificial illumination -................. 454-456 454Artillery (see also combined arms tcam) .. . .35, 25

320, 373-376, 385, 446 320,382,388,448

Artillery liaison officer ------------- 285, 373, 385 282,382,388

Assault .-... ...... 156, 157, 224, 338, 463 150,151,214,344,471

Echelon -............ .307 306Fire ----------------------------- 155, 224 150,

214Position -------------- 150 138Waves ------- - 478 490

Assembly area:Action .-... .. 74, 207, 316, 480 68,

190,315,493

704

Assembly area-Continued Paranrphu PageBattalion trains -.. --------- 87 75Characteristics --------------------- 75, 480 68, 403Communication .-................. 77 69Coordination --------- 316 315Dispositions - ---------- 76 69General ---------- 74 68Maintenance and evacuation --: . . ... 86 74Mortar platoon, 81-mm ...-.. .. 323, 324 323,

325Movement to and from ----------- 3M30, 481 337,

494Occupation ---------------------- 69-70, 76 62, 69River crossing .-............. 480, 481 493,

494Security - --....... ...-------------- 78 70Selection -- ----- 74 68Supply ..----------.-------------- 85 74Trains -------------------- 87 75

Attack (see also offensive action):Assault ------------- 156, 157, 224, 338, 478 150,

151,214,344,490

Assault fire ..--..........---- -- 155, 224 150,214

Axis ---------------- - 312 309Battalion commander ---------------- 331 337Battle reconnaissance ..- . .... 218, 333 201,

338Cities, towns. (See Combat in towns.)Communications .-. ........... 90, 487 78,

500Company commander .-............ 223 209Conduct -.............. .152-154, 142

223, 331-339, 505 506, 508-509 209,337,510,513

705

Attack-Continued PFrauraphs PaecControl ------------------------- 143, 181 129,

170Formations ..................---- 95-103, 84, 96

144-147, 214-215, 326-328, 461, 477 129,196,329,463,490

Element to lead .-............... 91 78Fortifications -.................. 332 337

Employment of tanks ------------ 512 518General ---------------------- 510-512 517Organization of force ..- . ........ 511 517

From march column .-.-. . .222, 349 205,362

Frontages .------------------- 310, 468, 476 308,479,489

Guerrillas, against ----------------- 559-564 547Jungles ------------.----------- 541-544 531Line of departure .------------ 212, 223, 461 195,

209,463

Main and secondary ---------.. - -- 300 299Maneuver, plan --------------------- 315 311Methods ------------------- - 92-104 80

Dismounted .-.. ..... 99-104 90Mounted --------------.-------- 94-97 84

Night. (See Night attack.)Objectives .-------------- 211, 325, 479, 495 192,

328,493,505

Action .-...... 339 345

706

Attack-Continued Parasraphe PageOrders ----------- 208, 190,

217, 329, 468, 475, app. II, VI200,335,479,489,562,604

Organization. (See Organization forcombat.)

Plan ---------------- 210, 314, 318, 467, 474 191,311,319,478,487

Position -------- 216, 317, 330, 461, 480, 481 199,317,337,463,493,494

Preparation --.... 148-151, 184, 207, 313-320 137,172,190,310

Rallying points ..-........--------- - 501 508Reconnaissance .--- ------- 317, 333, 465, 473 317,

338,476,485

Reorganization - .... - - 225, 469 214,482

Reserves --------- 227-229, 309, 336, 340-342 217,307,341,347

River line ----------------------- 472-487 484Conduct of crossing - . ...... 480-485 493

Security ------------------ 485 499

707

Attack-Continued Prsrgapha PageStrong-points .- .-.. .... .... 346 351Successive objective --..------------- 350 365Supporting fires .-.... ..... 223, 209

319-324, 468, 483, 490, 498 319,479,496,502,506

Support, use ---------------- 159, 223, 470 153,209,483

Task organization -.-------------- 315, 497 311,506

Time 248 239Towns, in. (See Combat in towns.)Types ---------------------------- 299, 492 298,

504Vehicles, disposition- -........ 225 214Weapons, vehicular -- ........... 34, 334 24, 340Woods (see also woods, attack in) -.-- 464-471 476Zones -........................ 213, 311 195,

309

Base of fire .-..................... 308, 334 307,340

Battle position _............... 362 375Battle reconnaissance ----- ......... 218, 333 201,

338Biological warfare, defense against --- ----. 284 281Bivouacs -............ 65-73 59

Advance party ------- ------------- 67 61Area, characteristics ---------------- 66 59Area, departure from .-............ 73 67Communication and liaison ..- . . .... 72 67General ---- --------------------- 65 59Maintenance and evacuation in ------- 86 74Occupation of area ------------------ 69-70 62Organization of area -.......... 68 61Outpost system -................ 71 65

708

Bivouacs-Continued Parasrapha PugeSecurity of area ------------------- 71 65Supply -.......................... 84 73Trains -........................ 87 75

Built-up areas, defense - ........... 547-552 536Burial and graves registration .--------- 129 120

Chemical agents, defense against .- . ... ... 284 281Cold weather operations -........ 513 518Combat:

Formations, mounted and dismounted- 95-97, 84app. III 569

Jungles -------------------------- 541-546 531Loading, amphibious operations - . .. 529 525Organization for. (See Organization for

combat.)Towns ---------------.... 507-509 512

Conduct -.................. 508-509 513Defended village, attack .-------- 508 513Large towns, cities, attack -_- 507-508 512Weakly-held town, attack - . .. .509 513

Combat outpost ---------------. 394, 538 398,529

Combat trains 108-110 102Combined arms teams (see also organization

for combat) -. ........ 17-19, 345, 348 11,351,359

Commandant, headquarters, duties - . .... 286 283Commander's responsibilities, battalion_-_ 269-273 261

Rifle company --------------------- 203 186Command group -................. 206, 287 188,

283Command post:

General -............. .287 283In defense -245 237On the objective -.............. 339 345

709

Communication: Peramnrphs PFoeAssembly area -.. .............. 77 69Attack ------------------- 90, 316. 460, 487 78,

315,'459,

500Tank-armored infantry ---------- 90 78

Battalion -.................... 20-28 17Bivouac ----------------- 72 67Daylight withdrawal-_ ----------- 432 434Defense __-........ 266, 360 257,

374March_ -58 55Means and methods -- ......... 20-32 17Night attack -460 459Night withdrawal ------------------- 440 459Officer, duties- -..... 283 280Personnel .-................ 21, 31-32 18, 23Rifle company- -............... 29-32 21Rifle platoon- -.................... 143 129River crossing -... 487 500

Company, rifle- -........ _ 3, 203-206 2, 186Orders_ -.............. App. II 562

Composition:Exploiting force - ----- 8------------ 345 351Headquarters echelons -------------- 287 283Reinforced tank units and armored in-

infantry units (see also organizationfor combat) ---------- - 17-19 11

Trains- -............... 107-109 101Concentration of effort .-................ 11 8Conduct:

Attack- 7--_ .... ........ 152, 142,153, 154, 223, 331-339, 505-506, 508-509 144,

145,229,337,510,513

Daylight withdrawal -------------- 430-431 431

710

Conduct-Continued Prarorapha PageDelaying action .....---------- --- -. 443 441Mobile defense .-. . .177, 267, 419, 423 168,

258,421,425

Night attack --------- 463 471Night withdrawal -................. 438 438Raid .-.... . 505-506 510River crossing -. ..... 401-416 406Sustained defense ---- 168, 200, 250, 399-403 163,

184,240,

Control: 403Attack ------------------------ 143, 181, 332 129,

170,337

March -.......... 57 54Mobile defense .-................. 266 257Night attack .-............... 460 459Sustained defense -.............. 360 274

Converging attacks -.... 97, 100 88, 91Coordination:

Attack -............. .316 315Attack through infantry - ......... 337 341Delaying action, during .- . ....... 442-447 440

Counterattack:Delaying action, during - . ...... 444, 445 446,

447Mobile defense, during __- _ 256, 412, 426, 427 249,

413,427,428

Sustained defense, during .. 256, 397, 398, 400 249,401,402,405

Counterfire squad -... - .. 293 291

711

Covering force: Paragraphs Page

Delaying action - -- -.------- ---- 443 441March_._- ...... .55 50Withdrawal --. :-.. 433, 435, 439, 441 434,

436,439,440

Crew training, amphibious operations ----- 445 447Defense, mobile. (See Mobile defense.)Defense, sustained. (See Sustained defense.)Defensive operations (see also security):

Airborne attack .- ............. 553-555 542Atomic, biological, and chemical ..-. .284 281Built-up areas - ............... 547-552 536Communication -. ..- - 360 374General -.... ........ .356 373Hasty -.... ........... 248 239Jungle .-......... 545-546 535Obstacles and roadblocks - . ....... 173 166Orders -..................... A-pp.'Il, VI 562,

604Perimeter type ------. . . ......... 556 545Principles -.... .......... .235 223Purpose - ------------------ 356 373River line .-............... 533-539 - 527Security .-. . ........ 169, 395, 396, 418 164,

400,401,420

Supply -.... .......... 110 103Terrain factors ------ 236 225Troop leading procedure .- . ..... 40 34Types -.... ............ 234 . 222Woods ..-....... 540 530

Delaying action:As part of larger force -.. ..... 443 441Composition of force ..- . ... .442 440Conduct -.... ........ 443 441Counterattack .-... .. 444, 445 556,

447

712

Delaying action Continued Paragraphs PageCovering force -............... 443 441Distribution of weapons - ........... 443 441Fire plan -................ 443 441General -........... 442 440

In one position -.............. 447 448In successive positions - . .... 444, 445 446,

447Purpose -.............---- 442, 445 440,

447Reserve ------- 443 441

Security during 443 441Support during - ...........- 443, 446 441,

448

.Types ..-. ........... 442-445, 447 440,448

Withdrawal during ------------- 443 441Departure from bivouac area - .. ..... 73 67

Desert operations -.........-- 514-520 519Direction of the attack .-......--- 210 191Dismounted formations ..- ...---- App. III 560

Dispositions in the assembly area . …. . .. 76 69

Distances, march -.........-- 52 48Distribution of forces in offense .- . ... 306 306Drill vehicle- -................. App. III 569

Duties, battalion staff. (See Specific officer.)Duties:

Company commander - . ......- 203 186Liaison officers .- ------ 36 29Noncommissioned officers -. .---- 206 188

Platoon headquarters personnel .---- 140, 179 127,169

Squad leader - - 141, 180 128,170

Unit administrator -...... 205 188Elements of the plan of attack - . ....... 314 311Employment:

Fundamentals -.............. 9-14 7Mobile defense -. .......- 424 427 427Mortar platoon -.------ 186 173

I1::31258--51-- 46 713

Employment-Continued Pararapha PageReconnaissance platoon -......... 291 289Reserve battalion:

Sustained defense - . ..... 409 410 411Vehicular weapons - ....... 334 340

Engineers (see also organization for combat)_ 398 402Envelopment ------------------------ 302, 303 301,

302Estimate of the situation -............ 37-38 31Evacuation:

Personnel casualties ---------- 125, 127, 128 117,118

Vehicles -.... ........ .123 114Evaluation of terrain -------------- - 223 209Executive, duties ..-............... 204, 276 187,

266Exploitation:

Action against guerillas ------------ 563-564 550Air support -8................. 353 368Armored infantry, transportation ----- 233 220Arrangement of force -------------- 346, 348 351,

359Characteristics -................... 344 349Company -232 220Conduct .-.... ............... 346 ' 351General .------------- 305, 343-344, 353-355 304,

348,368

Maintenance during - 123 114March column, attack from -------- 222, 349 -205,

362Night attack -.................... 352 368Night defense ----------------------- 351 367Objectives ----------------------- 344, 350 349,

365Pursuit -........... 343 348Reserve - - ..........-.-.-..- 230 219Security -................. 347 357Speed -.............. .346 351Strong points, attack --------------- 346 351

714

Exploitation-Continued Parbersphr PaseSupply during -.............-.- -- 110 103Under adverse conditions ----------- 355 370

Exploiting force:Arrangement-.... 346, 348 351,

359Composition .-.............. 345, 347 351,

357Organization --------- 348 359

Feeding during the march -.. ........... 80 72Field exercises -................ App. VII 619Field maintenance -................ 120 112Field trains -...................... 108, 111 102,

106Fire:

Maneuver and .-................. 12 8Organization:

Mobile defense .- . ....... 174, 264, 417 167,255,418

Sustained defense ----- 235, 380-385, 550 223,385,539

Utilization .-.--------------- 33-35 23Plan for:

Attack of river line --------. --- 474, 483 487,496

Attack of woods - . ....... 468, 470 479,483

Defense -.... ........... .164, 160,174, 264, 380-385, 417, 539, 550, 551 167,

255,385,418,529,539,541

Requests - ------ 35 25Fire power, utilization .-................ 33-36 23

715

Paraqraphs Page

Flag signals .....---------------------- App. II 562Flank guards ..... .......- 55 50Flexibility:

Characteristic_ .-.............. 8 6Trains -......................- 108, 109 102,

103Force, exploiting ____-...._....... 345-348 351Force, maneuvering -.............. 307, 335 306,

340Forces, distribution of, in offense -- . . .306 306Formations:

Attack -__-............ 95-103, 84144-147, 214-215, 326-328, 447, 461 129,

196,329,448,463

Combat .- . ........ 95-97, 144-145, 147 84,129,136

Integrated, tank-armored infantry_ _ 95 84March -..-.---------- ----- 49 45Tank-armored infantry team .-- ------ 146 134Vehicle drill -............... App. III 569

Forms of offensive action_ 94-104, 301-304, 343-344 84,301,348

Fortifications, attack of. (See Attack offortifications.)

Forward echelon (headquarters) ---------- 287 283Forward observer -............. 34, 376, 385 24,

383,388

Forward slope -. ................._ 367 379Fragmentary orders, attack -__ App. II, App. VI 562,

604

716

Paragraphs Page

Frontage and depth in defense - . ...... 162, 157,239, 261, 361, 411, 536, 537 229,

252,375,411,528

Frontages in offense ------------ 310, 468, 476 308,479,489

Gas officer -............ 284 281Graves registration -................. 129 120Ground, organization:

Mobile defense ----------------- 263 254Sustained defense ------------- 246, 388-396 237,

395

Guerrilla, action against -..- --------- 557-564 545

Halts on the march ..-----. 54 -49HIasty defensive position -.-------------. 248 239Headquarters:

Commandant, duties ----- -- 286 283Echelons - ------------------ -- 287 283Headquarters and service companyv 288-297 284

Illumination in night attacks --------- 452-456 452

Infantry (see also combined arms teams):Attack through friendly .............. 337 341

Infiltration l----- - ------------ ---- 44 42Defense against --------- - ------- 403 407March column -------------------- 42, 44 38,

42

Initial point ------------------------- 50 47Integrated formation --------------------- 95 84Intelligence officer --------------------- 278 270

Journal, unit -.------- App. IV 599

Jungle warfare .------------------ 541-546 531Chlaracteristics ---------------- 541-542 531Employment of tanks . .-- ------- 543-546 533

717

Parayraph Poa,Leadership ....---........---- 203, 269, 429 186,

261,430

Liaison:Artillery officer .--------- 285, 375, 385 282,

383,388

Assembly area --------------- ----- 77 69General -- -------- 36 29Officers-- - - -- 36, 285 29,

282Light machine-gun squad - . ........ .152, 166 142,

161Limiting points -.................. 369 380Line of departure -........... 212, 223, 561 195,

209,549

Loading plans, amphibious operations - . .529 525,Locating mine fields -............... 565 552,Location, battalion trains .------------- 109-111 103

Machine guns (see also attack, defense, fireplan, supporting fires) 152, 166 142,

161Main line of resistance (MLR) - ......... 237, 227

239, 365-369, 538, 547, 549 229,378,529,536,537

Maintenance:Categories - ... . 120 112Exploitation, during - 123 114General -119 112Jungle -. 546 536March -..---------------- 82 72Platoon -............ .295 296Radio -122 114Recovery and evacuation of vehicles --- 123 114

718

Maintenance-Continued Paragraphs Pe.Retrograde action, during . ....-. . 123 114Signal ------ 122 114Sustained defense during -- . ..... 123 114Weapon_ --------------- 121 113

Maneuvering force- -307, 335 306,340

Maneuver, plan -............... 315, 461 311,463

March:Administrative and supply vehicles- ... 62, 81 57, 72Advance guard .-- 55, 150, 222, 230-233, 347 50;

138,205,219,357

Column, attack from - . ........ 222, 349 205,362

Column, types ........--. .... 44 42Communication . ......--.. .58 55Company- - 61 57Company marching as part of a battalion 60 56Control and supervision ..--. 57 54Dismounted - --- -- 64 58Distances --.------- ------- 52 48Feeding --.--------- ------- 80 72Flank guard -. . ....... 55, 222, 347 50,

205,357

Formation --- ------ ------ 49 45General ---...-..- 41 38Halts ----- ------------ 54 49Initial point - ------.....-- ---- 50 47Maintenance . ... 82 72Medical service ............. 83 73Night__ ----------------- 59 55Orders -- . ......... 47, 56, 63, App. VI 44, 53,

58,604

Phase lines - -53 49

719

March-Continued Pararpapha P.aePlanning 45 43Position of trains ---------------- - 81 72Rate --- ---------------------- 42, 51 38, 47Reconnaissance ........--...... 48 44Routes_------------------------- 46 - 44Security ......-- 55 50Supply ----------------------- 79 71Table - ------------------------ App. VI 604Technique ....-- .. 41 38Terms, explanation ----------------- 42 38Types -.........----- 43 41Warning order -- -- 47 44

Means and methods of communication_ -_- 20-30 17Medical detachment- ------------------ 124, 297 116,

297Evacuation of casualties -.- 125, 127, 128, 355 117,

118,370

Methods of attack:Combination ------------------------ 104 96Dismounted -................... 98-104 90General ----------------------- 92, 104, 150 80,

96,138

Mounted ......-....------ - 94-97, 160 84,155

Without tank support .----- ---------- 157 151Methods of breaching mine fields .-.. .566-567 555Mine fields:

Action on encountering .----- -------- 566 555Breaching .-... ......... 566-567 555Locating ------------- 565 552Use in defense ------------ 8-------- 387 394

Missions:Administrative and personnel section _ 296 296Armored infantry ...- -- -. --- 3 2Company headquarters -_ -. ..-------- 290 287Counterfire squad-_ -.-..- -... _ 293 291

720

Missions-Continued Paragraphs PageHeadquarters and headquarters platoon_ 289 286Maintenance platoon -. ..... 295 296Mortar platoon -.......... 292 290Reconnaissance platoon - ..... 291 289Reserve:

Attack -................. 227 217Mobile defense .... .. 268, 411, 422, 424 259,

411,424,427

Planning, possible .- ........ 229 218Sustained defense - . .... 255, 370, 409 248,

380,411

Supply platoon -............. 294 293

Mobile defense:Battalion acting alone .- . .... 421 425 423

As outpost -.......... 414 420 415As reserve -.......... 425-427 427

Battalion -413 415Carriers, dispositiou .- . 175, 265 168,

257Comnlunication .-.......... 266 257Conduct - .............. 177, 267, 419, 423 168,

258,421,425

Control -266 257Counterattack - . ..... 256, 412, 426, 427 249,

413,427,428

Fire plan -............. .. 174, 264, 417 167,255,418

Fundamentals -412 413

721

Mobile defense-Continued Paragraphs PuaeGeneral__ 170, 234, 259, 357, 411, 421, 424, 534 165,

222,251,373,411,423,427,527

Ground, organization ....... 263 254Orders -............. App. 11, VI 562,

604Organization for - . ..... .261, 415-416, 422 252,

416,424

Organization of outposts ------ 171, 165172, 260, 262, 413, 415-416 251,

253,415,416

Outpost. (See Organization of out-posts.)

Principles .-.......... 235, 259, 412 223,251,413

Reconnaissance -......... .... 355, 414 370,415

Reserve - 268, 411, 413, 420, 422, 424-427 259,411,415,423,424,427

River line .-............. 534, 537 527,528

Security -418 420Strong points. (See Organization of

outposts.)Supply -.... .......... .110 103

722

Mobile defense-Continued arasgraphs PageSupporting fires .---------. 174, 264, 417 167,

255,418

Task organization l- . .261, 415-416, 422 252,416,424

Width of sector .-. .. 261, 411 252,411

Morale -............................. 296 296Mortars, 60-mm:

Attack, preparation for and conduct 184-193 172Conduct of fire -.......... 182 171Control -.... ........ 181 170Defense preparation and conduct- ... 194-201 178Observation -........... 183 172Organization and duties .- . ....... 179 169

Mortars, 81-mm ------------- 292, 323, 324, 372 290,323,325,382

Motor officer, duties .-............ 282 279Mounted formations -........ App. III 569Movement:

Assembly area, to and from - 330, 241 337,232

Attack position -............... 330 337Retrograde. (See Retrograde move-

ments.)

Nets, radio -.................... 20-30 17Night:

Attack:Assault -463 471Attack position -461 463

Characteristics -- . . 451 452Communication during ------ 460 459Conduct -.............. 463 471Control -460 459

723

Night-ContinuedAttack-Continued

Attack position-Continued Poragraphs Paoe

Exploitationl - . ..... 344, 349, 352 349,362,368

Formation .- - 461 463General ..-. ..... 449, 450 451Identification, means .-- ----- 460 459Illumination ----------- - 452-456 452Line of departure -----.---- 461 463Line of deployment - - 461 463Maneuver, plan --------. 461 463Orders -........ .... App. VI 604Planning ----------- - 459-462 457Purpose ---------.---- 450 451Reconnaissance -------.--- 459 457Release points -------- - 461 463Support fires - . ..... 457-458, 462 456,

470Security ---------.------ 460 459Surprise - -- -- - 451 452Unsupported ..-......--.-- - 451 452

Defense during exploitation ----- 351 367Dispositions in defense ------- - 249 240Marches - -..--- 59 55

Objectives:Action .-............ 339, 463 345,

471Attack of successive -......... 350 365Defensive operations (see also counter-

attack) .-.............. 356-358 373Offensive operations -- 211, 325, 339, 479, 495 192,

328,345,493,505

River crossing -................. 479 493Training . .----------- 511 517

724

Paragraphs PageObservation posts ---------------.----- 165, 244 160,

236Observer, artillery forward ...-.. ...... 34 24Obstacles:

Action on encountering .-.----- 221, 502 205,509

Attacking through ----------------- 221, 502 205,509

Mobile defense .-................... 356 373Removal -................. 221, 502 205,

509Sustained defense - . ..... 387, 391, 392 394,

Occupation: 397,398

Assembly area -............. 69-70, 76 62, 69Attack position ---------------------- 216 199Bivouac area -... ................ 70 63Defense position, hasty -------------- 248 239

Offensive action (see also attack):Action on the objective -.......... 339 345Against guerrillas ..-......... 559-564 547Attack of successive objectives - . .312 309Attack through infantry divisions . .. .337 341Attacking enemy artnor ....... 219 201Attacking through obstacles and anti-

tank mine fields -....... .221, 502 205,509

Base of fire .-............. 308 307Control -......... .143, 181 129,

170Coordination -.................... 88, 93 76, 80Distribution of forces -------------- 306, 307 306Employment of reserves - ......... 336 341Envelopment -........... 302, 303 301,

302Estimnate of the situation -.. ...... 38 32Exploitation and pursuit --------- 230-233, 219

343-355, 563-564 348,650

725

Offnsive action-Continued Paraugrphs PaveForms - . ........ 94-104, 301-304, 343-344 84

301,348

Frontages ------------- 310 308Jungles ..........-- ....... .541-544 531Maneuvering force - ............. 307, 335 306,

340Maneuver, plan ------------------ - 315 311Penetration ..........-- .... 304 304Plans and orders -------------- - 148 137Reconnaissance -- . .......... .209, 317, 333 191,

317,338

Reserve -.................... 309, 336 307,341

River line -................... 472-487 484Smoke .......---. 324 325Supply ----------- ------ - 108-110 102Supporting fires - 186, 191, 223 173,

176,209

Supporting force ------------.. 223, 308 209,307

Towns -------------.----- 507-509 512Troop leading .-.............. 547-552 536Types of attack --------------- - 299 298Woods -........... 464-471 476Zones -......................... 213, 311 195,

Operations: 309Against guerrillas, irregulars and parti-

sans -- - -557-564 545Airborne troops, against .--- --- - 553-555 542Amphibious. (See Amphibious opera-

tions.)Cold weather (see also cold weather

operations) - - 513 518Desert -................... 514-520 519Jungle (see also jungle operations) ... 541-546 531

726

Phase lines: Pararephs PageAttack -.................... 332 337March 53 49

Planning:March ............... 45 43Night attack -.......... 459-462 457

Plans:Attack ..- . .... 210, 314-322, 467, 474 191,

311,478,487

Defense (see also mobile defense andsustained defense) ---------- - ------ 363 376

Loading, amphibious operations ------- 529 525Night attack 460 459Training --.-. _. ...... 132, App. VII 122,

619Platoon:

Battalion maintenance - ....... 295 296Battalion supply--------------------- 294 293Carrier employment - ....... 154, 167 145,

163Combat formations:

Dismounted - . .. 145, App. II 133,562

Mounted -...... 144-167 129Conduct of attack - . .... 152-158 142Conduct of sustained defense - . .168-169 163Distribution in defense -------- 163, 240-242 158,

230Fire plan -................. 164 160Frontage and depth, sustained defense_ 162 157Headquarters ----------------- 139-140, 289 127,

286Machine-gun squad, employment -_ 152 142Maintenance -........... 295 296Mobile defense -... 170-178 165Mortar 60-mm m- -. 178-201 168

9031358°---1-- 47 729

Platoon-Continued Paragraphs PugeMortar 81-mm - . ........ 292, 323-324, 372 290,

323,382

Orders ------------------ ---- 151, 161 141,156

Organization of ground in defense - 166 161Outpost, mobile defense - . .... 171-173 165Preparation for attack - . .... 148-152 137Reconnaissance -.............. 291 289Rifle .-........... 139 127Security -.... 169 164Supporting fires - . ........... 150 138Support platoon .-........ 159 153Supply -.-.------------ 294 293Sustained defense -..------- 160-169 155

Position defense. (See Sustained defense.)Position of trains -........ ...... 110-111 103Positions, firing .-............. 34, 187 24, 174Pursuit and exploitation -.-. . .- 230-233, 219,

305, 343-355, 563-564 304,348,550

Pyrotechnics ----. ------ -------- - 30 21

Radiological agents, defense against ------ 284 281Radio nets .-...................... 20-30 17Raids -........................... 488-508 501Rainfall, effect on operation of armored vehi-

cles --... ........ .16 10Rallying points -501 508Rate of march -.-.- --......... 42, 51 38,47Rations. (See Class I supply.)Rear echelon (headquarters) (see also head-

quarters echelons) ----------. 55 50Reconnaissance:

Attack ------------- 317, 333, 459, 465, 473 317,338,457,476,485

730

Operations-Continued Paragraphs PuoeMine fields, through -- -----.-.. 565-567 552Night. (See Night attack.)Officer (see S-3) through mine fields_ 565-567 552

Orders:Attack .-. ........--- 149, 151, 185, 137,

189, 217, 329, 468, 475, App. II, VI 141,173,175,200,335,479,489,562,604

Defense .-.. . ... 161, 238, App. II, VI 156,228,604

March ..-............. 46, 47, 63, App. VI 44, 58604

Mortar platoon -........ ...... 185-189 173Night attack -................ App. VI 604Retrograde .- . ...... 430, 437, App. VI 431,

438,604

Unit -....................... App. II 562Organization:

Armored infantry battalion-4 2Combat for. (See Organization for com-

bat.)Combined arms teams .- . 17-19, 34, 261 11, 24,

252Company reinforced for combat .--- 89 77Exploiting force .-............. 345, 348 351,

359Ground --------- 166, 246, 260, 263, 388-396 161,

237,251,254,395

727

Organization-Continued Phragraphs PaoeHeadquarters, headquarters and service

company -............... 269-297 261Mobile defense -.- ---- 415 416, 422 416,

425Mortar platoon - -178 168Reconnaissance platoon - 291 289Supply platoon .-.. ........ 294 293Sustained defense - __ 246, 248-249, 388-396 237,

239,395

Organizational maintenance ............. 120 112Organization for combat (see also organiza-

tion, combined arms team) 17-19, 11,261,315, 345, 348, 497 252,

311,351,359,506

Outposts:Assembly area -................ 78 70Bivouac area -................. 71 65Combat -.................... 394, 538 398,

529Mobile defense .- . ... 171-172, 415-416 165,

416Passage of lines -337 341Penetration - . ..... 304 304

Defense against -........... 402 407Supply during -............ 110 103

Perimeter defense .-.......... 556 545

Personnel:Casualties, evacuation .------ --- - 127 118Communication -...... __.... 21, 31-32 18,22Officer. (See S-1.)Reports ----------------- - App. VII 619Section, administrative and .---- ---- 296 296

728

Reconnaissance-Continued Pe.ragphs PugeAttack of a river line -............ 473 485Battle .-........... 218, 333 201,

338March -............... 48 44Mobile defense .------------------ 355, 414 370,

415Night attack 459 457Platoon- _----------- - 291 289Sustained defense .... .........-. 363 376Withdrawal 436 438

Recovery of vehicles (see also vehicular evac-uation) -....................... App. I 558

References -...................... App. I 558Reinforced battalions. (See Combined arms.)Reinforced companies (see also organization

for combat) .- 17-19 11Relief .-.................. .251, 404-408 243,

407Removal of obstacles .-........... 337 341Reorganization on the objective. 158, 193, 225, 469 152,

177,214,482

Replacements (see also duties ef S-i) . ... .277 266Reports:

Objective -300 299Personnel. (See S-1.)Unit -.................... App. V 601Vehicle status -......... .. 280, 282 276,

229Reserve:

Battalion in attack -........ 340-342 347Delaying action -................... 443 441Initial position in attack - ... .227 217Mobile defense .-..... 268,362- 259,

365, 413, 420, 425-427 375,415,423,427

731

Reserve-Continued Paragraphs PageMovement to successive positions ---.-- 228 218Offense -...................... 309, 336 307,

329Pursuit and exploitation .- ..-- 230 219Sustained defense - .......... 255-258, 248,

370, 409-410, 552 380,411,542

Withdrawal ---------------- 443 441

Responsibilities, battalion commander --- 269-273 261Responsibility, supply ------------------- 106 100Resupply. (See Supply.)Retirement .-.----------------------- 448 449Retrograde operations:

Covering force, battalion or_4 3 3 , 435, 439, 441 434,436,439,440

Daylight withdrawal .-.. . .429-433 430Delaying action .-.- ---- - 442-447 440General .-.-------------- 428, 434, 442 429,

435,440

Maintenance .- __ : ...............123 114Night withdrawal .-...- 434-441 435Plans and orders ..... 430, 437, App. VI 431,

438,604

Purpose ---------------------------- 428 429Retirement ...-.- - -------- 448 449Security .-........... 430, 433, 439 431,

434,439

Supply ---------------- 110 103Types ----------------------------- 428 429

Reverse slope, defense .-.-------- 252-254, 368 244,380

732

Rifle company in the attack. (See Attack.)Defense. (See Mobile defense and sus-

tained defense.)Platoon. (See Platoon.) Paragraphs PageSquad (see also squad) - . 139, 141 127,

128River line, attack of (see also attack of river

line)- -........ .... 472-487 484River line defense- -............... 533-539 527Route reconnaissance- -................ 48 44Routes of march -............ 46 44

S-1 duties .... .............. 277 266S-2 duties .... ........ .278 270S-3 duties -............ 279 2718-4 duties --------------- 280 276Security:

Assembly area -.. ............ 78 70Attack -.... ............485 499Bivouac area ----- 71 65Combat trains ....... 110 103Delaying action- -.................. 443 441Exploitation- --------- 347 330General .. .... 14 9March ........... .55 50Mobile defense 418 420Night attack ..... .. 460 459Objective -..................... 300, 485 299,

499Retrograde -.... 430, 433, 439 431,

434,439

Sustained defense. 169, 346, 393, 395, 396, 538 164,351,398,400,401,

529

733

Selecting: Prauravhs PateAssembly area . ............ 74 68Initial point . . ............ 50 47Method of attack ...------ 91 78

Signal:Communication. (See Communication.)Supply ------------------ 283 280

Smoke in the attack ......------- - 324 325Snow operations. (See Cold weather oper-

ations.)Speed in exploitation ... ....--..- 346 351Squad:

Combat formation -------- - 147 136Counterfire ------------------ - 293 291Machine gun --------------------- 152 142Rifle ..............------- 147, 163 136,

158Support . ............. 152, 154 142,

145Staff duties, battalion .....--. ........ 274-285 263

Commander's relations. .....--- - 270 261Strength report (see also S-I) ------. 277 266Strong points, attack ------------------ . 346 351Strong points in mobile defense - - - 260 251Subject schedule, training -----. App. VII 619Successive bounds . .. ......--...... - 96 87Successive objectives, attack ------- - 350 365Supervision:

Attack---------------- ......223, 331 209,337

March e ...........-- . .......... 57 54Supply:

Assembly area ----------------- 85, 87, 110 74,75

103Bivouac ----- -- -- -- - -- --... 84, 87 73,

75Class I ----------------------- - 113 107Class II and IV ------------ - 115 108Class III_ ----------- ----- - 116 109

734

Supply-Continued PFrarapwhs PeoeClass V ........ 117 110Exploitation .................. 110 103March .... ...... 79 71Offensive action -... ............... 110 103Officer. (See S-4.)Penetration 110 103Personnel- ------------ 106 100Platoon .-...... 105, 294 100,

293Procedures- ----------- 112 106Responsibility -------- 105 100Retrograde operations - .. 110 103River crossing -............ 486 499Sustained defense -110 103Trains -................ .107-110 101Vehicular loads -- : 118 111Water- -............... 114 107

Supporting fires:Artillery -------- 35 25Attack -. ..... 223, 31'9-324, 468, 483, 490, 498 209,

319,479,496,502,506

Mobile defense -. . .......... 174, 264, 417 167,255,

418Night attack .-.- -- - 457, 462 457,

470Retrograde operations - . ..... 420, 438, 446 423,

438,448

Sustained defense .- ............ 373-376 382Weapons and artillery -.. .......... 35 25

Supporting force-_-.... 159, 223, 308, 470 153,209,307,483

735

Paragraph, Paoe

Surgeon's duties, battalion --------- 124, 281 116,278

Surprise --- 10 7Sustained defense:

Antitank plan in defense - . .247, 386 387 238,393

Barrages - ----. . ...........- 374, 385 383,388

Battle position -........... 362 375Battalion, front line ---- -. 361-409 375Battalion reserves - . ......... 409-410, 552 411,

542Boundaries and limiting points ------ 369 380Built-up areas ------------------- 547-552 536Combat command .- ............ 359 374Combat outpost -. 394, 538 398,

529Command post -245 237Concentration ......... 374, 385 383,

388Conduct - . ....... 168, 200, 250, 399-403 163,

184,240,403

Coordinated fire plan_- 380-385, 539, 550, 551 385,529,539,541

Counterattack - 250, 397, 39S, 400 249,401,402,405

Dispositions - . ..... 237, 240-243, 549 227,230,537

Dispositions, night ------------------ 249 240Dummy works ---------------------- 392 398Employment of rifle company --- 370 380

736

Sustained defense-Continued Pcrapephs PFaeEmployment of rifle platoon.---- 160, 240-242 155,

230Engineers ------------- 389 397Fires, defensive -.-- -- . - 385 388Forward slope ..----- - - 367 379Frontage and depth -239, 361, 536, 537 229,

375,528

Front-line platoon ..------..------ 241 232General -.................... 237, 358-359 227,

250Jungles -------------------------- 545-546 535Limiting points and boundaries .- ... 369 380Main line of resistance ------- - 237, 227

239, 328, 365-369, 538, 547, 549 229,333,378,529,536,537

Mortar platoon, 60-mm ..--.. ---- 194-201 178Mortar platoon, 81-mm --------.. ---- 37 31Observation ..------ -------------- 244, 385 236,

388Obstacles ...-..... . 385, 391, 392 388,

397,398

Orders .-...... . 238, App. II, VI 228,562,604

Organization for .--- 246, 248-249, 388-396 237,239,395

Organization of ground ---- -------- 246, 388 237,395

Plans --- -------- ------- 327, 363 330,376

Position defense, river line ----------- 535 527Position, occupation of hasty .-.. - 248 239

737

Sustained defense--Continued Pafrl.phs PageReconnaissance ------------- 363 276Relief l e--. - 251, 404-408 243,

407

Reserves ----- 255-258, 370, 409-410, 552 248,380,411,542

Reverse slope. (See Reverse slope.)Rifle company -.............. 370 380River line .. ... ......- 535 527Security - . ... 169, 346, 393, 395, 396 164,

351,398,400,401

Supply _.------ ------------ 110, 201 103,184

Supporting fires-: . ....... 373-376, 550, 551 382,539,541

Support platoon .-. . ............ 242 233Tanks - ----------------- 377-379 384Vehicles and weapons -........ 371 381Wide front .-........ .537 528Woods _--------------- 540 530

Tactical march -................... 43 41Tank-infantry coordination in the attack,

general -....................... 88-93 76Tanks - ---------- ------------- 321, 377 321,

384Tank units, reinforced, composition -.---- 17-19 11Task organization .-. .. 89, 261, 415 77,

252,416

Teams, combined arms -. ......_.... 17-19 11Teamwork, tank-armored infantry - . ... 13, 93 8, 80Terrain, factors in defense .- . . ........ 236 225

738

Time: ParaQraphs PageAttack ..... 314 311Night attack -----------.--- 461 463

Towns, combat in (see also combat in towns) 507-509 512Defense in- -.............. 547-553 536

Training:Amphibious operations _ _ ..--. .. 445 447Conduct - -133 123Field exercises -- ........... App. VII 619Individual- -............. 134-135 124Objective . ........--.--- 131 121Plans ...........-- . ... 132 122Schedules -............ App. VII 619Special ..........--....... 135 124Unit -.................... 136-138 124

Trains:Assembly area ......--.. 87 75Battalion --------------.--- 108 102Bivouac -------- 87 75Combat- -.................. 108-110 102Company - -107 101Field -......... 108, 111 102

106Troop leading procedure:

In the attack .........--.... 39 33In the defense ------------ - 40 34

Turning movement -----------.--- 303 302Types:

Defense -------------.--- 234 222Delaying action ------------ - 442 440

Unit administrator -. 205 188Unit journal- -............... App. IV 599Unit report -. App. V 601Use of smoke in attack - 324 325

Vehicles:Disposition of, in defense .-- _- 167, 265, 371 163,

257,381

739

Vehicles-Continued Pararaphs PageLoads, composition . _------_--------- 118 111Repair, recovery, evacuation . ..... 119, 123 112,

114Vehicular weapons -............... 33, 371 23, 381Villages, combat in (see also combat in

towns) -................ 507-509, 547-553 512,536

Visual signals -----------.------ - App. IV 599

Warning orders. (See Orders.)Waterproofing vehicles --------------- - 528 524Water supply -.................--- 114 107Weather .-......... .16 10Wide front defense -.. 537 528Wire used in communication ------------ 28 20Withdrawal:

Battalion as covering force ---------- 433 434Communication in daylight - . . .432 434Conduct in daylight -. . ......... 430-431 431Conduct in night .-........ 438 438Counterattack to cover ------------- 443 441Covering fire, night ------------- 435 436Covering force ------------ 433, 435, 439, 441 434,

436,439,440

Daylight -............... 429 433 430Delaying action -........ .....- 442-447 440

Conduct -4..----- ---- 443 441Fire plan -................ 430 431General .- .............. 429, 434, 442 430,

435,440

Night .-......... 434-441 435Order of movement - ............ 430 431Orders in night -............ 437 438Plans and orders in daylight --------- 430 431lReconnaissance in night -436 438Retirement- . .-............... 448 449Security in night .-........ 439 439

740

Withdrawal-Continued Paragraphs PaoeSequence -................. 430, 438 431,

438Supporting weapons - . ............ 430, 438 431,

438Terrain and reconnaissance ----- 430, 436, 443 431,

438,441

Woods, attack -..................... 464-471 477Advance through- -... .466 477Exit from .-.................. 471 483Frontages -468 479General -................ 464 476Near edge, attack _- 465 476Plans and orders ------------------ 467, 468 478,

479Reconnaissance - 465 476Reorganization .-------------------- 409 411Support --------------- 470 483Supporting fires -................ 468 479

Woods, defense in -.................. 540 530

Zones -........................... 213, 311 195,309

741